IBN QUTAYBAH'S CONTRIBUTION TO QUR'ANIC EXEGESIS

IBN QUTAYBAH'S CONTRIBUTION TO QUR’ĀNIC EXEGESIS

AN ANALYTICAL STUDY OF HIS WORK

TA’WĪL MUSHKIL AL-QUR’ĀN

BY

DR. MUHAMMAD AMIN A. SAMAD

ii

iii

ABSTRACT This book is an attempt to present Ibn Qutaybah’s contribution to Qur’ānic exegesis analyzing his work Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān (The Interpretation of the Difficult Passages of the Qur’ān). Ibn Qutaybah (d.

276/889) was one of the great Sunnī scholars of the third/ninth century.

He was a prolific writer and a scholar of many branches of learning, such as: kalām (scholastic theology), tafsīr (Qur’ānic exegesis), H.adīth (the Prophet’s Tradition), history and the science of language, including grammar, prose and poetry. He was said to be the third great writer of Arabic prose chronologically after Ibn Muqaffa‘ (d. 141/759) and al-Jāh.iz. (d. 254/868). He was one of the earliest commentators of the Qur’ān; he was earlier than al-T.abarī (d. 310/923), al-T.abarsī (d. 548/1153), alZamakhsharī (d. 538/1144) and Ibn ‘Arabī (d. 638/1240).

Ibn Qutaybah took part in theological debate of his time and wrote his Ta’wīl defending the Qur’ān against the attack of philosophic scepticism. His Ta’wīl was a treatise on Qur’ānic rhetoric and on the inimitability of the Qur’ān in which he clarified through philological explanations many Qur’ānic verses assumed to be obscure by some sceptics. This obscurity is based on their allegations of the existence of contradiction, disagreement and ungrammatical usage in the verses of the Qur’ān.

Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl countered these allegations with arguments based purely on Arabic usage in prose as well as poetry, and cited many poems of pre-Islamic as well as contemporary poets as shawāhid (quotations serving as textual evidence). He dealt with the phenomena of figurative language, such as: metaphor, inversion, ellipsis and pleonasm, metonymy and allusion. He also dealt with ambiguous letters, words and particles in the verses of the Qur’ān.

iv

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I would like to express my deepest appreciation to Dr. Abdul Khaliq Kazi, the former Associate Professor of Arabic and Islamic Studies and Head of Department of Asians Languages, the University of Melbourne for his advice, encouragement and support throughout this research.

I am greatly indebted to Mr. Ali (Alan) Philpot, Mr. Barakatullah (Brian) Arab and Dr. Abdul Hadi T. Skinner who have edited, corrected the draft and proof-read the manuscript patiently and meticulously with their invaluable suggestions and advice which I highly appreciated.

However, I am solely responsible for all the defects contained in this thesis, from organization structure, translations and expressed views to typographical errors.

My thanks also go to Asst. Prof. Dr. Teddy Mantoro for his advice and assistance in many ways, as well as to those who have assisted me spiritually as well as materially, and contributed directly or indirectly to the accomplishment of this research. For this contribution I shall always be grateful.

Canberra, 6 December, 2011

Muhammad Amin A. Samad

v

TRANSLITERATION SYSTEM The English transliteration for Arabic names and terms followed in this thesis is as follows: a. Consonants: = a or ’

= b

= t

= kh

= d

= dh

= sh

= s.

= gh

= f

= n

= h

= th

= j

= h.

= r

= z

= s

= d.

= t.

= z.

= ‘

= q

= k

= l

= m

= w

= y

= ’ (like alif)

b. Vowels: Short:

long:

Fath.ah

----- : = a

= ā

Kasrah

----- : = i

= ī

D.ammah ----- : = u c. Tā’ marbūt.ah: ah, e.g., sūrah (

=

ū

)

Tā’ marbūt.ah in id.āfah: at, e.g., sūrat al-Baqarah ( d. Alif maqs.ūrah: á, e.g., qad.á (

) and shūrá (

) )

vi

LIST OF ABREVIATIONS

BSOAS

Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies

EI2

Encyclopedia of Islam (New Edition)

IC

Islamic Culture

IQ

Islamic Quarterly

IR

Islamic Review

JAOS

Journal of American Oriental Society

MW

Muslim World

Q

Qur窶卞］

SEI

Shorter Encyclopaedia of Islam

SI

Studia Islamica

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ABSTRACT

………………………………………………….

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

……………………………………

iv

…………………………….

v

…………………………………

vi

……………………………………..

vii

……………………………………………

xiv

TRANSLITERATION SYSTEM LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION

iii

Chapter I. THE SOURCES AND HISTORICAL BACKGROUND

…

1

A. An Evaluation of Some of the Literature Relevant to the Study of Ibn Qutaybah

……………………….

1

1. The Literary Works of Ibn Qutaybah a. Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān b. Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān

1

………………………

1

……………………………

4

c. Gharīb al-H.adīth………………………………….......

4

d. Adab al-Kātib …………………………………………

4

2. Books on Tafsīr (Qur’ānic Exegesis) by Others ........ a. Majāz al-Qur’ān by Abū ‘Ubaydah …………….. b. Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān by al-Farrā’

………………..

7 7 8

c. Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān

by Ibn Jarīr al-T.abarī …………………………….

3. Books on Arabic Language and Literature ………… a. Kitāb al-Ad.dād by Ibn al-Anbārī

…………….

b. Al-S.āh.ibī fī Fiqh al-Lughah by Ibn Fāris

……

9 9 10 10

viii

c. Lisān al-‘Arab by Ibn Manz.ūr B. Historical Background

…………

…………………………..

1. A Short Synopsis of Ibn Qutaybah’s Life

………..

11 12 12

2. Political, Social, and Cultural Conditions in Ibn Qutaybah’s Life

………………………………….

a. Political Condition b. Social Condition

16

…………………………………..

16

……………………………………

18

…………………………………..

19

c. Cultural Condition

3. Historical Perspective on the Development of Early Qur’ānic Exegesis

…………………………………

23

…………………………………

23

………………………………

25

(1) Traditional Commentary ……………………

26

(2) Rational Commentary

28

a. Tafsīr and Ta’wīl b. Categories of Tafsīr

……………………

(3) Symbolic (Allegorical) Commentary c. Early Development of Tafsīr

………

……………………

30 32

II. IBN QUTAYBAH’S REFUTATION OF ALLEGATIONS OF SOLECISM, CONTRADICTION AND AMBIGUITY IN THE VERSES OF THE QUR’ĀN

……………………

49

A. Variant Readings in the Qur’ān

……………………

49

B. Ungrammatical Usage in the Qur’ān 1. Inna hādhān lasāh.irān ) 2. Wa ’l-s.ābi’ūn )

(

3. Wa ’l-muqīmīn al-s.alāh )

……………

69

(

70

………

………………………

75

(

79

…………

ix

4. Nujjī al-mu’minīn )

(

………………………..

5. Fa’as.s.addaqa wa akun min al-s.ālih.īn )

85 ( ...... 87

C. Contradiction and Disagreement in the Verses of the Qur’ān

…88

1. Contradiction

…………………………………………

88

2. Disagreement

…………………………………………

90

D. Ambiguity of the Verses of the Qur’ān 1. The Meaning of Ambiguity

…………………

94

…………………………..

94

2. Muh.kamāt and Mutashābihāt ……………………………

95

3. The Ta’wīl of the Mutashābihāt

97

…………………………

III. IBN QUTAYBAH’S TREATMENT OF THE PHENOMENA OF FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE A. Metaphor 1. Majāz 2. Isti‘ārah

…………………………..

107

……………………………………………….

107

…………………………………………………

107

…………………………………………………..

114

……………………………………

121

B. Inversion (Maqlūb)

1. Ascribing Something with Its Opposite Quality

……..

122

……………….

123

2. Designating Two Contradictory Things Having One Basic Meaning with One Name

3. Advancing What will Be Clear by Retarding, and Retarding What will Be Clear by Advancing 4. Inversion by Mistake

……….

……………………………….

C. Ellipsis (H.adhf) and Brevity (Ikhtis.ār) ………………….

135 147 151

1. The Ellipsis of the Mud.āf whose function is Replaced by the Mud.āf Ilayh

………………………………………

153

x

2. The Ellipsis of the Verb

……………………………

154

3. The Ellipsis of the Main Clause of a Conditional or an Incomplete Sentence

……………………………

4. The Ellipsis of One or Two Words

…………………..

5. The Ellipsis of the Main Clause of an Oath 6. The Ellipsis of the Word lā

…………..

……………………………

156 158 160 161

7. The Use of the Pronouns for Something Which Has not Been Mentioned before

………………………………

8. The Ellipsis of the Prepositions 9. Complex Ellipsis

……………………….

……………………………………..

D. Repetition (Takrār) and Pleonasm (Ziyādah) ………………

1. Repetition

……………………………………………….

a. Repetition of Words

162 164 165 168 168

………………………………..

168

b. Repetition of Meaning ……………………………. .

170

2. Pleonasm

………………………………………………

172

a. General Pleonasm

…………………………………..

172

b. Specific Pleonasm

………………………………

173

E. Kināyah (Metonymy) and Ta‘rīd. (Allusion) …………….

1. Kināyah (Metonymy) a. Kunyah

…………………………………

…………………………………………………

b. Fulān ……………………………………………………

2. Ta‘rīd. (Allusion)

……………………………………..

F. The disagreement of the Word with Its Literal Meaning ……

1. Imprecation 2. Repetition

…………………………………………… …………………………………………….

189 189 190 192 195 200 200 202

xi

3. Rhetorical Question

204

………………………………………………

206

……………………………………………..

206

b. Adjective (Quality) c. Verb

204

…………………………………………

5. Specification

a. Noun

203

…………………………………………….

4. Imperative 6. Number

………………………………….

……………………………….

210

………………………………………………

211

……………………………

215

8. Juncture

………………………………………………

220

9. Tempora

……………………………………………….

221

…………………………………………..

224

7. Sudden Transition (Iltifāt)

10. Morphology

IV. IBN QUTAYBAH’S TREATMENT OF AMBIGUOUS LETTERS, WORDS AND PARTICLES IN THE VERSES OF THE QUR’ĀN

……………………….

228

A. Letters Assumed to Be Absurd and Stylistically Spoiling …

214

B. Words which Have Many Different Meanings

234

1. al-qad.ā’ ) 4. al-‘ahd ) 7. al-dīn )

( 5. al-ill )

13. al-sabab )

18. al-fard. )

) 3. al-ummah )

( 6. al-qunūt )

( 8. al-mawlá )

10. al-imām (

16. al-rijz )

2. al-hudá )

…………..

(

( 9. al-d.alāl )

( 11. al-s.alāh ) .14. al-z.ulm ) ‫ (ا‬and al-rijs ) 19. al-khiyānah )

(

(

( 12. al-kitāb ) ( 15. al-balā’ (

( (

17. al-fitnah ) ( 20. al-islām )‫م‬

‫(ا‬

xii

21. al-īmān )

( 22. al-d.urr )

24. al-rūh. )

25. al-wah.y )

27. al-fath. )

( 28. al-karīm )

30. al-d.arb )

26. al-farah. )

( 31. al-zawj )

33. al-nisyān )

( 36. al-sult.ān )

and al-ba’sā’ )

( 38. al-khalq )

)

C. Meanings of Particles 1. ka’ayyin ) and suwá )

10. mahmā )

( 32. al-ru’yah)

(

) ( 37. al-ba’s ) ( 39. al-rajm )

……………………………………… 312

( 4. ayyāna )

( 3. sawá )

( , siwá )‫(سِوَى‬

( 5. al-āna )َ ( 6. anná ) (

( 8. ka’anna )

( 9. lāta )

( 11. mā ) ( 12. kāda )

( 22. in al-khafīfah )

)‫ا‬

( 26. halumma )

( 29. alā ( ) 30. al-wayl )

(

( 13. bal ) (

17. aw ) ( 18. am ) ( 19. lā ) ( 20. awlá )

25. ta‘āl )

(

(

14. hal ) ( 15. law lā ) ( and law mā )

)

(

( 42. al-matā‘

( 44. al-amr )

( 2. kayfa )

7. wayka’anna )

( (

( 41. al-muh.s.anāt )

( 43. al-h.isāb )

(

( 29. al-mathal (

( 34. al-s.ā‘iqah )

35. al-akhdh )

40. al-sa‘y )

( 23. al-h.araj )

( 16. lammā ) ) ( 21. lā jarama

( 23. hā ) ( 24. hāti )

)

( 27. kallā )ّ ( 28. ruwaydan ( 31. la‘amruka )

(

xiii

32. iy ) ( 33. ladun (

)

D. The Substitution of Particles in the Verses of the Qur’ān …… 349 1. ilá )َ ( 2. bi )ِ ( 3. ‘alá )

( 4.‘an ) ( 5. fī ) (

6. li ( ِ ) 7. min ) ( CONCLUSION BIBLIOGRAPHY

……………………………………………

366

…………………………………………

373

A. Arabic Sources

………………………………………

373

B. English and Other Language Sources ………………..

382

C. Articles

……………………………………………..

384

……………………………………………

385

APPENDICES

1. Authorities and Transmitters of the Qur’ān 2. Glossary

……………

………………………………………………

385 386

xiv

INTRODUCTION Ibn Qutaybah (d. 276/889) was one of the great and early scholars among Muslims who lived in the 9th century C.E. Although he was of a Persian origin he was considered one of the great masters of Arabic language and literature. His book Adab al-Kātib (The Accomplishment of the Secretary) which is one of the mains sources of this book indicates his mastery of Arabic philology.

The Qur’ān was revealed in the early 6 th century C.E. in Arabic older than Old English (Anglo-Saxon) used in about 450 C.E. till 1150 C.E. which is totally non-understandable nowadays, as it consisted of almost purely Germanic vocabularies of Kentish, West Saxon, Mercian, and Northumbian dialects.1 On the contrary, the Arabic language of the Qur’ān which is called classical Arabic is still understood by people today, despite many difficult words and expressions in it. Here lies the importance of Ibn Qutaybah's book, Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān (The Interpretation of Difficult Passages of the Qur’ān) where he explained them referring to the Arabs' way of expression and the location of majāz (figurative expression) in it.

The Arabic language is called Lughat al-Adād ("The Language of Opposite Meanings") where many words have the same opposite meanings which may confuse some people, such as the word arīm which means "dawn" as well as "night". There are also words which have many different meanings, such as qaā which means "to decree", "to order", "to inform", and "to make". Ibn Qutaybah explains these issues as well as variant readings, ungrammatical usage, the phenomena of figurative language, and many other issues in the Qur’ān.

As Ibn Qutaybah was one of the earlier commentators of the Qur’ān, earlier than "the father of the commentary of the Qur’ān" al-abarī (d.

310/923), his books Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān and Tafsīr gharīb al-Qur’ān (Commentary of the Obscure Passages of the Qur’ān) which is also used as reference in this book were referred to by the mufassirīn (commentators of the Qur’ān) of later generations. Hence the contribution of Ibn Qutaybah in the field of tafsīr (commentary of the Qur’ān) is indispensable for those who are interested in studying comprehensively the science of tafsīr.

xv

At the end of each chapter of this book the endnotes are given more elaborately to facilitate further research for those who are interested in further study in their respective fields.

The Arabic name "Allāh" - the proper name of God among Muslims and a small minority of non-Muslim Arabs - is used in this research.

However, when the translation of a Qur’ānic verse with the name "Allāh" in it, the name is kept as given by its translator, either "Allah" or "God". _______________ Standard Dictionary (New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1973), p. 420 (s.v. English)

1

CHAPTER I SOURCES AND HISTORICAL BACKGROUND A. An Evaluation of Some of the Literature Relevant to the Study of Ibn Qutaybah There are numerous Arabic sources for our present study, dating from a generation earlier to a generation after that of Ibn Qutaybah. Ibn Qutaybah himself was a prolific writer and all - possibly except one - of his authentic works have been published. For the purpose of systematical survey we divide the sources into genre as follows: 1. The Literary Works of Ibn Qutaybah 2. Books on Tafsīr (Qur’ānic exegesis) 3. Books on Arabic Language and Literature 1. The Literary Works of Ibn Qutaybah Ibn Qutaybah was a writer and a scholar of many branches of learning: kalām (theology), the science of language (including tafsīr, h.adīth, grammar and poetry), and history, political as well as religious. He was said to be the third great writer of Arabic prose chronologically after Ibn al-Muqaffa‘ (d.

141/759) and al-Jāh.iz. (d. 254/868).1 His books were considered “a comprehensive encyclopaedia portraying the highest level of Islamic thinking which had been reached in the third century A.H.”.2 Lecomte in his dissertation on Ibn Qutaybah’s works mentions sixty book titles, among which only sixteen are extant and authentic,3 and four of which are among my major sources for my study as follows: a. Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān This book is the object of my analytical study to assess Ibn Qutaybah’s contributions to Qur’ānic exegesis. The motive for his writing the book was to defend the Qur’ān from the mulh.idīn (heretics, unbelievers) who charged the Qur’ān with imperfection, such as contradiction, obscurity, and solecism.

He said: .... Therefore, I write this book collecting the interpretations of the 1. Gerard Lecomte, “Ibn Kutayba,” EI2, p. 847.

2. Al-Sayyid Ah.mad S.aqr’s introduction to Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān (Cairo: Dār al-Turāth, 1393/1973), 2nd ed., p. 2 of the introduction.

3. See G. Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba (mort en 276/889): l’homme, son oevre, ses idées (Damascus: Catholic Printing Press, 1965), pp. 97-178.

2

difficult passages of the Qur’ān [which is also the title of the book] taken from the commentaries [of the commentators] adding with explanation and clarification, and referring to the Arabs' way of expression (lughat al-‘arab) - as long as there is no [contrary] view known (to me) from a well-informed leading scholar (mā lam a‘lam fīhi maqālan li-imām mut.t.ali‘)4 - to show the obstinate person the location of the majāz (figurative expression) and how it is possible without judging [it] with [one's] personal opinion (ra’y), or deciding [it] with [one’s own] interpretation (ta‘wīl)...5

In other words, apart from being a defence of the Qur’ān, the book also serves as a transmitter of the science of exegesis in Ibn Qutaybah’s time to following generations, since he, as he claims, does not give us his personal opinion. To judge to what extent the book complies with this statement of Ibn Qutaybah, we have to compare it with other books of exegesis belonging to earlier and later generations.

The present edition of the Ta‘wīl as stated by its editor, Saqr, is based on three manuscripts: (1) MS no. 518-tafsīr at Dār al-Kutub al-Mis.riyyah library, written by Burhān al-Dīn in 558/1163 with commentary in its margin. It contains one hundred and thirty-four folios, the first of which is missing. The symbol used by the editor to identify this manuscript in his notes is the letter J. (2) The manuscript at Murād Mullā library, anonymously written in 532/1137-8 contains one hundred and seventeen folios. The symbol is the letter M. (3) MS no. 663-tafsīr at Dār al-Kutub al-Mis.riyyah library, written by Muh.ammad ibn Ah.mad ibn Yah.yá in 379/989-90, containing eighty-five folios. Although it is not the oldest manuscript, the scribe omitted many texts and poems used by the author as shawāhid (quotations serving as textual evidence). Its symbol is the letter D.6 At the end of the book the editor includes a list showing the variant texts among the three manuscripts.7 At the bottom of the book he gives us his valuable commentary as footnotes. The purpose of this commentary, as he puts it, is “either to support a view, to weaken a statement, to elaborate a 4. In manuscript D, instead of mut.t.ali‘ (well-informed), it is written muttaba‘ (followed), see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 674.

5. In S.aqr’s quotation the word lam is missing in the expression mā lam a‘lam, see ibid, p. 77 of the introduction.

6. Ibid., pp. 85-86 of S.aqr’s introduction.

7. Ibid., pp. 673-94.

3

general concept, to clarify an obscure statement, to show the origin of an idea, or to agree with an opinion”,8 so that the reader should have a better understanding of the text. b. Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān As Ibn Qutaybah did not want to make his work Ta‘wīl lengthy, he continued it in another book with a different title, namely, Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān (Commentary on the Obscure Passages of the Qur’an). Like his Ta‘wīl, the sources of this Tafsīr are also books of exegesis and philology without departing from their schools (madhāhib). He does not give us his views except as explanation of what he has chosen from his sources. He bases his choice on the most appropriate philological point of view and the closest to the sense of the context of the verse he is dealing with.9 The significance of this Tafsīr for the present study lies in that it contains the commentary on some Qur’ānic verses explained or used as shawāhid in the Ta’wīl. It serves as a commentary and confirmation of Ibn Qutaybah’s view in his Ta‘wīl. Like the Ta‘wīl this Tafsīr is also edited by A. H. S.aqr, with footnotes as commentary, the purpose of which is similar to that which he had stated in the introduction to the Ta‘wīl mentioned above.10 His introduction is short, but contains valuable information in which he points out that the sources of the Tafsīr are taken from various books of scholars. He relies mainly on the works of two philologists, Abū ‘Ubaydah’s (d. 210/-824) Majāz al-Qur‘ān (The Literary Expression of the Qur’ān) and al-Farrā’’s (d. 207/822) Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān (The Meanings of the Qur’ān).11 S.aqr states further in his introduction that Ibn Qutaybah’s Tafsīr became an important source for Qur’ānic commentators of later generations, such as al-T.abarī (d. 311/923), al-Qurt.ubī (d. 671/1272), al-Rāzī (d.

606/-1209), and Abū H.ayyān al-Andalusī (d. 744-5/1344). Al- T.abarī was said to have copied it literally on many occasions without mentioning Ibn Qutaybah’s name.12 8. Ibid., p. 86 of S.aqr’s introduction.

9. Idem, Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān, ed. A.H. S.aqr (Beirut: Dār al-Kutub al-‘Ilmiyyah, 1398/1978), p. 4.

10. Ibid., p. “h” of S.aqr’s introduction.

11. Ibid., pp. “j” and “d”.

12. Ibid., p. “d”.

4

c. Gharīb al-H.adīth This book, Gharīb al-H.adīth (The Uncommon Words in the H.adīth) consists of three volumes, and is edited by Dr. ‘Abd Allāh al-Jubūrī from four manuscripts: (1) the Z.āhiriyyah manuscripts, written by ‘Abd al-Ghanī ibn ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Abd al-Wāh.id al-Maqdisī at Fust.āt., Cairo, in 571/1175, in two volumes, but incomplete; (2) the manuscript of Sir A. Chester Beatty in Dublin, Ireland, volume two only, but makes the Z.āhiriyyah manuscript complete; (3) the S.an‘ā’ (Sanna) manuscript, consisting of two volumes, but volume one is missing; (4) the Moroccan manuscript, consisting of four volumes, with volume four only extant.13 When Ibn Qutaybah found many h.adīths (a h.ādīth) and isnads (chains of authorities on which the h.adīths are based) had been omitted by Abū ‘Ubayd in his work Gharīb al-H.adīth, he started writing his own Gharīb al-H.adīth, containing and explaining those missing h.adīths and isnāds, and quoting shawāhid from poetry. When Ibn Qutaybah found some mistakes in Abū Ubayd’s Gharīb al-H.adīth, he corrected them in a separate book entitled Is.lāh. al-Ghalat. (The Correction of Mistakes).

In the earlier chapters of the Gharīb al-H.adīth Ibn Qutaybah explains the etymology of a number of technical terms, such as wud.ū’ (ablution), s.alāh (prayer), kāfir (unbeliever) and z.ālim (transgressor). Then he explains uncommon words in the h.adīths of the Prophet, followed by those of the s.ah.ābah (companions of the Prophet), the tābi‘īn (lit., “followers”, the generation after the s.ah.ābah) and the tābi‘ī al-tābi‘īn (lit., “followers of the followers”, the generation after the tābi‘īn).

Apart from philological, etymological and grammatical information, the book also contains a number of Qur’ānic verses and poems dealt with by Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta‘wīl. Therefore, this book is also necessary for this study. d. Adab al-Kātib The book Adab al-Kātib (The Accomplishments of the Secretary) is a compendium and a manual of Arabic stylistics dealing with lexicography, orthography, orthoepy, also verb and noun formation. It has a long introduction where Ibn Qutaybah explains the circumstances that led him to 13. For further details, see idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, ed. Dr. ‘Abd Allāh al-Jubūrī, 1st ed. (Baghdād: Mat.ba‘ah al-‘Anī, 1397/1977), vol. 1, pp. 90-114.

5

write this book.

In his introduction Ibn Qutaybah described the literary decadence of his time. A writer would be satisfied with his good handwriting and correct writing of its letters. A poet would feel he had reached his pinnacle if he could cite some lines of poetry in praising a songstress and in describing a cup of wine. A person such as this would criticise the Qur’an without understanding the meaning of its verses, and would belie the Prophet’s tradition without knowing its isnād.14 The common lexical, orthographical and orthoepical mistakes in Ibn Qutaybah’s time led him to write his Adab al-Kātib dealing with these subjects. The newly appointed vizier ‘Abd Allāh ibn Yah.yá ibn Khāqān, whom he praised in his introduction and for whom the book was written,15 was so pleased that he appointed him qād.ī (a judge) at Dīnawar.

The book is divided into four chapters. Chapter one, entitled Kitāb al-Ma‘rifah (The Book of Suitable Terms), is the lexical study of various subjects in thirty-eight sections. In section one, for example, the word h.umah is commonly believed to mean “the organ that stings in some insects such as the scorpions”, while it means “the poison and the harm from the sting”.16 Chapter two entitled Kitāb Taqwīm al-Yad (The Book of Orthography) is the study of correct spelling, laid out in sixteen sections. In section two, for example, the omission and retention of the alif al-was.l (alif of connection) in the expression bismillāh occurs respectively in the beginning and the middle or end of a sentence, such as and .17 Chapter three entitled Kitāb Taqwīm al-Lisān (The Book of Orthoepy) is the art of correct pronunciation treated in thirty-five sections. In section two, for example, the word al-ghasl is used for “the act of washing”, al-ghisl for “the thing washed”, and al-ghusl for “the water used for washing”.18 Chapter four entitled Kitāb al-Abniyah (The Book of Word Formation) deals with the formation of verbs and nouns and their meanings. The formation of verbs is laid out in sixteen sections, such as in section four the 14. Idem, Adab al-Kātib, ed. von Max Grünert (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1900), p. 2.

15. Ibid., p. 6, n. “b”.

16. Ibid., p. 22.

17. Ibid., pp. 236-237.

18. Ibid., p. 337.

6

expression means “I found So-and-so praiseworthy, I found him breaking his promise and I found him a coward.”19 The meanings of the formed words are treated in twenty-nine sections, such as in section twenty-seven the expression means where ‘alá is substituted with fī.20 The formation of nouns is treated in thirty-six sections.

For example, in section two, words in fu‘lah and fu‘alah forms are attributes of objects and subjects respectively, e.g., rajul sukhrah (a mocked man) and sukharah (a mocker), rajul subbah (an insulted man) and subabah (an insulter), and rajul khud‘ah (a cheated man) and khuda‘ah (a cheater).21 The meanings of formed nouns are treated in ten sections. For example, section six deals with words used for both singular and plural, e.g., fulk (a ship or ships), and khalq Allāh (a creature or creatures of Allah). The exception is the word zawj which means one of a pair or one pair (a couple).22 The Adab al-Kātib was published by Max Grunert from six manuscripts and one published text, identified as follows: A = Lyon’s Codex 541 (=259) B = Lyon’s Codex 535, an excellent old manuscript W = Wiener (Vienna’s) Manuscript G = Gawaliki (al-Jawāliqī)’s commentary of Ibn Qutaybah’s Adab al-Kātib L = Landberg’s Codex containing 137 folios, of which 90 folios are vowalized R = Codex of Univers. Lips. Ref. 354 C = Published text, Cairo, 1300 A.H., 229 pages Variant texts are included in the footnotes - the sources of which are identified with the above letters.23 The Adab al-Kātib demonstrates Ibn Qutaybah’s competence in this field of philology. Ibn Khaldūn (d. 737/1337) in his work Muqaddimah said that he heard from some scholars in their teaching sessions that the Adab

19. Ibid., p. 473.

20. Ibid., p. 536. Cf. idem, Ta’wīl, p. 567.

21. Idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 567.

22. Ibid., pp. 641-642; cf idem, Ta’wīl, p. 498.

23. Max Grünert’s introduction in idem, Adab al-Kātib, pp. ix-x.

7

al-Kātib of Ibn Qutaybah was one among the four sources of adab science.24 The Adab al-Kātib is essential for this study. Many topics in Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl are also treated in his Adab al-Kātib, such as the substitution of particles and the meaning of terms, such as zawj. Moreover, the Adab al-Kātib gives us some idea how Ibn Qutaybah quotes the views of leading grammarians from both schools, the Bas.ran and the Kūfan.

2. Books on Tafsīr (Qur'ānic Exegesis) by Others Books on tafsīr, which are the main sources of Ibn Qutaybah, will be evaluated here. They are Abū ‘Ubaydah’s Majāz al-Qur’ān and al-Farra’’s Ma‘ānī al-Qur’ān. Al-Tabarī’s work Jāmi‘ al-Bayān, which took Ibn Qutaybah’s works as part of its sources, will also be evaluated here, as follows: a. Majāz al-Qur’ān The book was edited by Fu’ād Sezgin in two volumes. The author, Abū ‘Ubaydah Ma‘mar ibn al-Muthanná, was one of the leading philologists of the Basran school. His main study was the rare expressions of the Arabic language and the history of the Arabs.25 Denounced for being an a‘jamī non-Arab, for he was of Jewish-Persian origin - he tried to avenge himself by writing on the shortcomings of the Arabs in which he supported the Shu‘ūbī causes. This act resulted in the aversion of the people of Bas.rah towards him. They did not even attend his funeral.26 The term majāz in the case of Majāz al-Qur’ān, as suggested by Gibb, means “interpretation” or “paraphrase”, as the book consists “... of brief notes on the meaning of selected words and phrases in the order of the suras”. Majāz al-Qur’ān, then, is “a paraphrastic interpretation”, or, in Wansbrough’s term, “periphristic exegesis” of the Qur’ān.27 In the 24. The other three sources are al-Mubarrad’s al-Kāmil, al-Jāh.iz.’s al-Bayān wa al-Tabyīn, and Abū ‘Alī al-Qālī al-Baghdādī’s al-Nawādir, see Ibn Khaldūn, Muqaddimah (Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah Azhariyyah, 1384/1930), p. 489.

25. R.A. Nicholson, A Literary History of the Arabs (Cambridge: The University Press, 1956), p. 344.

26. Carl Brockelmann, Ta’rīkh al-Adab al-‘Arabī, trans. Dr. ‘Abd al-H.alīm al-Najjār (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1961), vol. 2, p. 143. See also Yāqūt al-Rūmī, Kitāb Irshād al-Arīb ilá Ma‘rifat al-Adīb, also known as Mu‘jam al-Udabā’, and T.abaqāt al-Udabā’, ed. D.S. Margoliouth (Egypt: [al-] Mat.ba‘ah al-Hindiyyah, 1925), vol. 7, p.

16.

27. H.A.R. Gibb, “Abū ‘Ubayda Ma‘mar b. al-Muthannā,” EI2, 2, p. 158; and J.

8

introductory chapter, Abū ‘Ubaydah mentions thirty-nine kinds of majāz.

The use of this term, as found by Wansbrough, is replaced by taqdīr (restoration) by the later grammarian Abū al-Barakāt ibn al-Anbārī (d.

577/1181).28 By comparing Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl with Abū ‘Ubaydah’s Majāz al-Qur’ān in examining majāz we shall have some idea of the extent of the former’s reliance on the latter as its main source and of the development of this term in general. b. Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān The author of this book, al-Farrā’, the sobriquet of Abū Zakariyyā Yah.yá ibn Ziyād al-Kūfī, was the most well-known student of al-Kisā’ī (d. ca. 189/805). Like his teacher, he was also of Persian origin and belonged to the grammarians of the Kūfan school. However, he also took his knowledge from Yūnus ibn H.abīb al-Thaqafī of the Bas.ran school.29 He was also influenced, to some extent, by al-As.ma‘ī (d. 216/831), Abū Zayd al-Ans.ārī (d. 215/830), and Abū ‘Ubaydah, all belonging to the Bas.ran school.30 Tha‘lab (d. 291/904) of the Kūfan school who took his knowledge from al-Farrā’ praised him so much that he said that without al-Farrā’ the Arabic language would have collapsed.31 Al-Farrā’ was the first grammarian of the Kūfan school who continuously discussed grammatical problems in the verses of the Qur’ān in his Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān.32 This continuous discussion frustrated Blachère who said that the book “is highly disappointing and without any general themes, being confined for the most part to argumentation on casual syntax;...”33 This book is, however, very important for this present study since Ibn Qutaybah quoted it several times in his Ta’wīl .

Wansbrough, “Majāz al-Qur’ān: Periphrastic Exegesis,” BSOAS (Univ. of London), vol. xxxiii, part 2 (1970), pp. 247-66.

28. Wansbrough, “Majāz al-Qur’ān,” p. 157.

29. Brockelmann, Ta’rīkh, vol. 2, p. 199.

30. R. Blachére, “al-Farrā’,” EI2, 2, p. 806.

31. Brockelmann, Ta’rīkh, vol. 2, p. 199.

32. Ibid, 2, p. 196.

33. Blachère, “al-Farrā’,” p. 806.

9

c. Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān The author of Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān (The Comprehensive Exposition of the Interpretation of the Verses of the Qur’ān), Ibn Jarīr al-T.abarī (d. 310/923), is considered by Muslim scholars “the father of the science of tafsīr”. It is said that he wrote forty pages every day for forty years. Many of his works were lost, but his Jāmi‘ has survived. He was “a man of encyclopaedic learning who absorbed the whole mass of tradition in his time”.34 Al-T.abarī’s Jāmi‘, better known as Tafsīr al-T.abarī, consists of thirty volumes containing collections of h.adīths with their full isnād dealing with the commentary on the Qur’ān. Unlike Ibn Qutaybah who selected a few chapters from which he selected some verses of the Qur’ān in his Ta’wīl and Tafsīr, al-T.abarī deals with whole chapters, although not whole verses, of the Qur’ān.35 Later commentators, such as al-Zamakhsharī (d. 538/1143), Ibn ‘At.iyyah (d. 542/1147 or 546/1151), Ibn Kathīr (d. 774/1373) and al-Suyūt.ī (d. 991/1505) followed al-T.abarī in examining and explaining the whole Qur’ān in their tafsir works. Al-T.abarī’s tafsīr was highly recommended by Ibn Taymiyyah (d. 728/1328) who stated that it was one of the best, and the worthiest of its kind.36 The significance of al-T.abarī’s Jāmi‘ for this present study is that it elaborates what Ibn Qutaybah is discussing in his Ta’wīl and gives various interpretations from other commentators. Sometimes, he offers his own opinion. In so doing, the position of Ibn Qutaybah among Qur’ānic commentators will become obvious.

3. Books on Arabic Language and Literature Among the important sources on Arabic language and literature for this study are the works of Abū Bakr ibn al-Anbārī, Ibn Fāris and Ibn 34. Nicholson, A Literary History, pp. 145 and 351.

35. Ibn Qutaybah, for example, did not include seven sūrahs (chapters) in his Ta’wīl, and mentioned one verse only in sūrah 54, namely verse 14. In his Tafsīr he did not include thirty-two sūrahs, and dealt with one verse only from sūrah 21, namely, verse 10. His Ta’wīl included the missing sūrahs in his Tafsīr, and not vice versa. See his Ta’wīl, pp. 595-621 and his Tafsīr, pp. 547-554.

36. Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá Shaykh al-Islām Ah.mad ibn Taymiyyah, collected and arranged by Muh.ammad ibn Qāsim al-‘Ās.imī al-Najdī, 37 vols.

(Makkah: Maktabat al-Nahd.ah al-H.adīthah, 1404 A.H.), vol. 13, p. 361.

10

Manz.ūr, as follows: a. Kitāb al-Ad.dād The author of Kitāb al-Ad.dād (The Book of Opposite Meanings) was Abū Bakr ibn Qāsim ibn al-Anbārī (d. 328/940)37. He was a late contemporary of Ibn Qutaybah who attacked him most and who disagreed with him and his teacher Abū ‘Ubaydah on many issues. He was the most brilliant student of Tha‘lab of the Kūfan school. He was said to have memorized three hundred thousand lines of poetry as shawāhid for the Qur’ān and one hundred and twenty Qur’ānic commentaries with their isnāds.38 He was the tutor of the caliph al-Muqtadir’s son ‘Abd al-Wāh.id.39 He was included among the sixth generation of the grammarians of the Kūfan school by al-Zubaydī (d. 379/989-10).40 The book contains some terms discussed by Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl, such as al-mawlá and hal. His view on the position of the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm (those who are deeply rooted in knowledge) regarding the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt (ambiguous verses of the Qur’ān) is different from that of Ibn Qutaybah. They will be dealt with in due course. b. Al-S.āh.ibī fī Fiqh al-Lughah The book, al-S.āh.ibī fī Fiqh al-Lughah wa Sunan al-‘Arab fī Kalāmihā (al-S.āh.ibī in the Science of Language and Expression of the Arabs) was written by Abū al-H.usayn ibn Fāris ibn Zakarīyā, better known as Ibn Fāris (d. 395/1004). He was a son of a jurist of the Shāfi‘ī school and a student of the great Shāfi‘ī scholar Abū al-H.asan ‘Alī al-Qat.t.ān (d. 345/956) who was a student of Tha‘lab, al-Mubarrad (d. 284-5/898) and Ibn Abī al-Dunyā (d.

281/894). Al-Qat.t.ān was also a philololgist from whom Ibn Fāris received his knowledge at Quzwayn.41 37. Abū Bakr Muh.ammad al-Zubaydī, T.abaqāt al-Nah.wiyyīn wa ’l-Lughawiyyīn, ed. Muh.ammad Abū al-Fad.l Ibrāhīm, 1st ed. (Egypt: Muh.ammad Sāmī al-Khānjī), 1373/1954), p. 171.

38. Yāqūt al-Rūmī, Mu‘jam al-Udabā’, vol. 7, p. 73.

39. Brockelmann, Ta’rīkh, vol. 2, p. 214.

40. Al-Zubaydī, T.abaqāt, pp. 168-172.

41. See Abū al-H.usayn Ah.mad ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī fī Fiqh al-Lughah wa Sunan al-‘Arab fī Kalāmihā, ed. Mus.t.afā al-Shuwaymī (Beirut: A. Badrān & Co., 1383/1963), p. 6 (the editor’s introduction).

11

Ibn Fāris shifted from the Shāfi‘ī to Mālikī school at Rayy where he lived and died. Despite his being a follower of the Mālikī school, Ibn Fāris was suspected of having a Shī‘ī leaning, due to his glorifying ‘Alī, his being associated with the Shī‘ī enthusiast al-S.āh.ib, living in the Shī‘ī dynasty, and teaching the children of its rulers.42 The book was a collection of Ibn Fāris’s writings on the science of language. The title of the book was given after the name of the vizier alS.āh.ib Ismā‘īl ibn ‘Abbād who had a library where the book was to be lodged.

Many subjects in Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl are also mentioned by Ibn Fāris in his al-S.āh.ibī, such as the meanings of particles, isti‘ārah (metaphor), al-h.adhf wa ’l-ikhtis.ār (ellipsis and brevity), al-takrār (repetition) and al-ziyādah (pleonasm). Many similiarities are found between the two books which lead us to assume that Ibn Fāris had copied from Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl without referring to him. c. Lisān al-‘Arab The book, Lisān al-‘Arab (The Language of the Arabs), was written

by Jamāl al-Dīn Abū al-Fad.l Muh.ammad Mukarram ibn ‘Alī ibn Ah.mad al-Ans.ārī, better known as Ibn Manz.ūr and Ibn Mukarram (d.

711/1311-1312). It is an encyclopaedia containing various subjects, such as: philology, grammar, Islamic jurisprudence, literature, tafsīr and h.adīth. It was based on five earlier works, namely: Abū Mans.ūr Muh.ammad ibn Ah.mad al-Azharī’s Tahdhīb al-Lughah, Abū al-H.asan ‘Alī ibn Ismā‘īl ibn Sidāh’s al-Muh.kam, Muh.ammad ibn al-Athīr’s al-Nihāyah, al-Jawharī’s al-Qāmūs, and Abū Muh.ammad ibn Barrī’s commentary of al-Jawharī’s al-Qāmūs. The book consists of fifteen volumes and was completed in 689/1290.43 So far, I have dealt with some of the literature relevant to the study of Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl. Other literature is quoted throughout this study. We now come to the historical background, the second part of this chapter.

42. See ibid., p. 9.

43. See Abū al-Fad.l Jamāl al-Dīn Muh.ammad ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān al-‘Arab 15 vols. (Beirut: Dār S.ādir lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, [1374-5]/1955-1956), vol. 15, p. 494.

12

B. Historical Background 1. A Short Synopsis of Ibn Qutaybah’s Life Abū Muh.ammad ‘Abd Allāh ibn Muslim ibn Qutaybah al-Kūfī (from Kūfah where he was born according to some historians) al-Marwazī (from Marw or Merv in Khorasan - presently called Mary in Turkmenistan, a southern republic in the former Soviet Union, now an independent state from which his father originated), al-Dīnawarī (from Dīnawar where he became qād.ī) and al-Baghdādī (from Baghdād according to other historians, and where he settled), was born in Kūfah44 in 213/82845 and died in Baghdād in 276/889.46 The cause of his death was the eating of harīsah 44. See Ibn al-Nadīm, al-Fihrist (Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Istiqāmah, 1929), p. 86; Abū al-Barakāt Ibn al-Anbārī, Nuzhat al-Alibbā’ fī T.abaqāt al-Udabā’, ed. Dr. ‘Āt.iyyah ‘Āmir (Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksel, [1962]), p. 128; and Ibn al-Athīr, al-Kāmil fī ’l-Ta’rīkh (N.p.: Idārat al-T.ibā‘ah al-Munīriyyah, 1353 A.H.), vol. 7, p. 175.

According to al-Khat.īb al-Baghdādī, al-Sam‘ānī and al-Qift.ī, Ibn Qutaybah was born in Baghdād, see their respective works Ta’rīkh Baghdād aw Madīnat al-Salām, 14 vols.

(Egypt: Maktabat al-Khānjī, 1931), vol. 10, p. 170; al-Ansāb (reproduced in fascimile from the manuscript in the British Museum add 23,355 with an introduction by D.S. Margoliouth, D. Litt. Leyden: E.J. Brill, Imprimerie Orientale; London: Luzac & Co., 1912. Repr. Baghdād: Maktabat al-Muthanná, 1970), p. 447; and Inbāh al-Ruwāt ‘alá Anbāh al-Nuh.āh, ed. Muh.ammad Abū al-Fad.l Ibrāhīm, 3 vols. (Cairo: Dār al-Kutub alMis.riyyah, 1369-74/1950-5), vol. 2, p. 143. Ibn Khallikān mentioned Kūfah and Baghdād without stating the correct one; see Ibn Khallikān, Wafayāt al-A‘yān wa Anbā’ Abnā’ al-Zamān, ed. Dr. Ih.sān ‘Abbās (Beirut: Dār al-Thaqāfah, [1970]), vol. 3, p. 43.

45. See al-Khat.īb al-Baghdādī, Ta’rīkh Baghdād, vol. 10, p. 170; al-Sam‘ānī, al-Ansāb, p. 447; al-Qift.ī, Inbāh al-Ruwāt, vol. 2, p. 143; and Ibn Khallikān, Wafayāt, vol. 3, p. 43.

46. This is the date given by the earliest biographer al-Zubaydī, see T.abaqāt alNah.wiyyīn, p. 200; Shayms al-Dīn al-Dhahābī, Tadhkirat al-H.uffāz., 4 vols. (with continuous pagination), (Hyderabad-Deccan: Dār al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 1376/1956), vol. 2, p. 631; Ibn al-Nadīm stated 270 A.H., see al-Fihrist, p. 86; Ibn al-Athīr stated 276 A.H. and 270 A.H., see al-Kāmil, vol. 7, p. 438, and Ibn Khallikān stated 270 A.H., 271 A.H. and 296 A.H., but the right one according to him was 276 A.H., see Wafayāt, vol. 3, p. 43. This view is supported with the report of Qāsim ibn As.bagh al-Bayyānī (d. 340/952) who said that he came to Baghdād in 274/888 and learned from Ibn Qutaybah, see al-Khat.īb al-Baghdādī, Ta’rīkh Baghdād, vol. 10, p.

170.

13

(cooked meat and wheat pounded together) which caused him suffer heartburn, then lost consciousness and died.

The word qutaybah is the diminutive form (tas.ghīr) of qitbah, qitb or qatab which are the singular form of aqtāb meaning “intestines”. This is also the meaning given by Ibn Qutaybah himself in his Adab al-Kātib.47 Another meaning of this term is given by Qutaybah ibn Muslim (d. 97/716) the governor (amīr) of Khorasan who said that his name meant ikāf (the packsaddle of the donkey). The name Ibn Qutaybah was also referred to by some authors as al-Qutabī and very rarely al-Qutaybī.48 Ibn Qutaybah was also the name of a traditionist among the Shi‘īs. In response to the Umawī’s fabricated traditions praising the s.ah.ābah, especially ‘Uthmān - but with the exception of ‘Alī and Banū Hāshim - the Shi‘īs later also invented traditions of their own, praising ‘Alī and the Banū Hāshim clan. They had their isnād names like al-Suddī and Ibn Qutaybah, so that the Sunnīs would think that they were the famous Sunnī traditionists.

To make a distinction between the two Suddīs and Ibn Qutaybahs the Sunnīs called those who belonged to the Shi‘īs al-Suddī al-S.aghīr (the Junior) who was Muh.mmad ibn Marwān, and Ibn Qutaybah the Shi‘ī, those who belonged to the Sunnīs were called al-Suddī al-Kabīr (the Senior) who was Ismā‘īl ibn ‘Umar, and Ibn Qutaybah the Sunnī.49 Very little was known about Ibn Qutaybah’s early life. We only know that as a young boy he frequented the Qur’ānic school (kuttāb) from which he learned and memorized some Qur’ānic verses, prophetic traditions and poetry, became trained in fiqh (Islamic jurisprudence), nah.w (grammar, syntax) and arithmetic. Then he frequented the great mosques of Baghdād where he learned various sciences from the ‘ulamā’, such as theology, tafsīr, sharī‘ah (Islamic law), h.adīth, literature and history. He also studied books 47. See Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 77.

48. For further details, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, pp. 660-661 (s.v.

).

49. According to Ah.mad Amīn, al-Suddī al-S.aghīr was an extremist Rāfid.ī Shī‘ī; see A. Amīn, Fajr al-Islām, 12th ed. (Cairo: Maktabat al-Nahd.ah al-Mis.riyyah, 1978), p. 275. The Shī‘ī traditionist who was called Ibn Qutaybah was probably Muh.ammad ibn al-H.usayn al-‘Asqalānī (d. 301/913), who, according to Abū ‘Alī al-Nisābūrī, transmitted traditions in Palestine. See al-Dhahābī, Kitāb T.abaqāt al-H.uffāz., ed.

Wüstenfeld (Gottingen: N.p., 1833-1834), p. 79, quoted by Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, p.

29.

14

translated from foreign languages, especially Persian.50 There were twenty-eight teachers of Ibn Qutaybah in the true sense recorded by Lecomte.51 Among his important teachers were those who were known for their attachment to the Sunnah, such as the Sunnī theologian Ish.āq ibn Ibrāhīm ibn Rāhawayh al-Hanzalī (d. ca. 237/851) who was a student of Ah.mad ibn H.anbal, the Sunnī philologist and traditionist Abū H.ātim Sahl ibn Muh.ammad al-Sijistānī (d. 255/869), and the philologist al-‘Abbās ibn al-Faraj al-Riyāshī (d. 257/871) who transmitted the works of pioneers of philology in the second/eighth century, such as al-As.ma‘ī and Abū ‘Ubaydah.52 After the new caliph al-Mutawakkil changed the ideology of the state from Mu‘tazilah to Sunnī orthodoxy in 232/846 Ibn Qutaybah found himself favoured by the new government, because his views in his literary works agreed with the new trend. The vizier Abū al-H.asan ‘Ubayd Allāh ibn Yah.yá ibn Khāqān (d. 263/877) appointed him qād.ī of Dīnawar in about 236/851, and he probably remained in this office until 256/870. Then he became an inspector of maz.ālim (courts for the redress of wrongs) of Bas.rah until this city was sacked by the Zanj in 257/871. This new post was given to him probably due to the favour of another powerful ‘Abbāsī official, Sa‘īd ibn Makhlad.53 Ibn Qutaybah was also a teacher. He was generous to his students with his knowledge and books. He even allowed them access to his books before they had paid their fees. Among his students was his son Ah.mad who later became qād.ī in Egypt in 321/933. Ibn Qutaybah continued teaching in Baghdād until the end of his life at the age of 61.54 Despite Ibn Qutaybah‘s reputation as a great Sunnī scholar and an advocate of the Sunnī orthodoxy, some ‘ulamā‘ criticized and denounced him, among them being: 50. See Shawqī Dayf, al-‘As.r al-‘Abbāsī al-Thānī (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1977), p. 611.

51. See Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, pp. 47-8, n. 2, 50-74. There are fourteen other teachers of Ibn Qutaybah, but of “the second degree”. For further details, see ibid., pp.

75-82.

52. Idem, “Ibn Ķutayba”, E.I.2, p. 844.

53. Ibid., pp. 844-845.

54. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, S.aqr’s introduction, pp. 35 and 38-39.

15

(1). Abū al-H.asan ‘Alī ibn ‘Umar al-Dāraqunī (d. 385-995) accused him of leaning towards anthropomorphism (tashbīh), deviating from the ‘itrah (descendants of the Prophet).55 (2). Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad ibn ‘Abd Allāh al-D.abbī al-H.ākim (d.

405/1014-5), also known as Ibn al-Bayyi‘, also accused Ibn Qutaybah of deviating from the ‘itrah and turning away from the ahl al-bayt (the Prophet's household).

(3). Abū Bakr Ah.mad ibn al-H.usayn al-Bayhaqī (d. 458/ 1066) accused Ibn Qutaybah of being a Karrāmī, a sect among the anthropomorphism.56 These accusations were rejected by the ‘ulamā and biographers of Ibn Qutaybah, whose views were divided by Lecomte into two categories: very favourable and favourable. Those whose views belonged to the first category were: Ibn Taymiyyah,57 al-Dhahabī (d. 748/1347), Ibn Kathīr (d.

774/1372-3), and Ibn al-‘Imād (d. 1089/1678). Those whose views belonged to the second category were: Ibn al-Nadīm (d. 385/995), al-Khat.īb al-Baghdādī (d. 463/1071), al-Sam‘ānī (d. 562/1167), Abū al-Barakāt Ibn al-Anbārī (d. 577/1181), Ibn al-Jawzī (d. 579/1201), al-Qift.ī (d. 646/1248), Ibn Khallikān (d. 681/1282), and al-Suyūt.ī.58 55. Al-Dāraqut.nī was a Shāfi‘ī, but was suspected of being a Shī‘ī, see Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, p. 15.

56. See al-Jubūrī’s introduction in Ibn Qutaybah’s Gharīb al-H.adīth, pp. 19-20; and S.aqr’s introduction in Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl, pp. 49-51.

57. Ibn Taymiyyah says that the position of Ibn Qutaybah among the Sunnīs is like that of al-Jāh.iz. among the Mu‘tazilīs. As the former was the spokesman of the Sunnah, so was the latter of the Mu‘tazilah. Quoting from Kitāb al-Tah.dīth bi-Manāqib Ahl alH.adīth by an unidentified writer Ibn Taymiyyah said that the people of Maghrib (Morocco) used to say that a house without any writing of Ibn Qutaybah has no goodness in it. See Ibn Taymīyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., ed. Dr. Muh.ammad ‘Abd al-Mun‘im Khafājī (Cairo: Dār al-T.ibā‘ah al-Muh.ammadiyyah bi-al-Azhar, n.d.), p.

130.

58. See Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, pp. 16-7. Among the biographers of the second category in favouring Ibn Qutaybah, al-Khat.īb al-Baghdādī and Ibn al-Jawzī stated that Ibn Qutaybah was reliable, pious and virtuous, while Ibn Khallikān mentioned only that he was virtuous and reliable; see their respective works Ta’rīkh, vol. 10, p. 170, alMuntaz.am fī Ta’rīkh al-Mulūk wa ’l-Umam (Hyderabad Deccan: Mat.ba‘at Dā’irat al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 1357-9 A.H.), vol. 5, p. 102; and Wafayāt, vol. 2, p. 246.

16

The earliest criticism came from Ibn Qutaybah’s late contemporary Abū Bakr Muh.ammad ibn al-Qāsim al-Anbarī, who was a student of Tha‘lab. He wrote a book entitled Risālat al-Mushkil criticizing Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl and his teacher Abū H.ātim al-Sijistānī. But his books are not extant except for Kitāb al-Ad.dād in which he criticized Ibn Qutaybah’s works Is.lāh. al-Ghalat. and Ta’wīl.59 2. Political, Social and Cultural Conditions in Ibn Qutaybah’s Life a. Political Condition Ibn Qutaybah lived during the reigns of eight ‘Abbāsī caliphs: al-Ma’mūn (197-218/813-833), al-Mu‘tas.im (218-227/833-842), al-Wāthiq (227-232/842-847), al-Mutawakkil (232-247/847-861), al-Muntas.ir (247248/861-862), al-Musta‘īn (248-252/862-866), al-Mu‘tazz (252-255/ 866-869), al-Muhtadī (255-256/869-870), and al-Mu‘tamid (256-278/ 870-892). He was born in the first half of the third century of Hijrah, when the ‘Abbāsī dynasty reached its ultimate glory and prosperity under al-Ma’mūn.

The ‘Abbāsī empire extended to the Indian subcontinent and the border of China in the East, and to the coasts of the Atlantic Ocean in the West.

However, the earlier period of al-Ma’mūn witnessed much disturbance: civil war between the Hāshimīs and the ‘Alawīs which ended with the defeat of the latter, rebellions against al-Ma’mūn, and the rivalry betwen Arab and Persian elements in state affairs. Being a son of a Persian mother, Persian influence greatly increased during his reign. In order to please the Arabs he shifted the capital of his empire from Merv in Persia to Baghdād in 204/819.60 As a patron of learning, al-Ma’mūn encouraged the search for knowledge. This caused the emergence of intellectual movements, among which was the Mu‘tazilī school of theology which he himself adopted and made the official madhhab of his empire. He supported its scholars in their debates against their opponents among the Sunnī scholars.

Al-Ma’mūn was succeeded by his brother al-Mu‘tas.im who followed 59. For further details, see S.aqr’s introduction in Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl, pp.

70-76.

60. For further details, see Sir William Muir, The Caliphate: Its Rise, Decline and Fall (Oxford: The Religious Tract Society, 1891), p. 498.

17

the same path in defending the Mu‘tazilī school. It was in this period that the fitnah (civil strife) of the issue of khalq al-Qur’ān (the creation of the Qur’ān) occurred in which Ah.mad ibn H.anbal (d. 241/856) was one of its victims.

In this early ‘Abbāsī period the Persians obtained high positions in the government, such as those of viziers and army leaders. However, this condition changed with the occurrence of the so-called Barmakid and Banū Sahl disasters. This resulted with the enmity between the Arabs and the Persians. The Arabs wanted to regain the glory they had enjoyed in the Umawī period, whereas the Persians were not satisfied with the high positions they already possessed; they wanted to bring back the glory of their ancient Sassanian empire. The seed of the Shu‘ūbīyah trend grew with the atheistic tendency, which later threatened the new empire.

To get rid of these Persians and to counter their nationalistic ambition the caliph al-Mu‘tas.im tried to replace them with Turkish slaves who were renowned for their perseverance on the battle-field. They were brought into the capital city Baghdād and their number kept increasing. Then the caliph built a new capital called Sāmarrā’61 where he moved in with them.

Unlike the Persians who were highly civilized, the Turkish slaves were nomads. Their main skills were hunting, raiding and horse riding. As skilled fighters and army officials their influence in the state kept growing. It became so great that al-Mutawakkil who succeeded al-Wāthiq could not resist it. However, he was successful in shifting to the Sunnī orthodoxy as the madhhab of the state. He ordered people to abandon any debate on kalām (theology) and urged them to return to the Sunnah of the Prophet. He removed the vizier ‘Abd al-Malik al-Zayyāt and the qād.ī al-qud.āt (the chief judge) Ah.mad ibn Abī Dāwūd from their positions for being Mutazilīs. But when he appointed his vizier ‘Ubayd Allāh ibn Yah.yá ibn Khāqān assisted by twelve thousand Arabs in his attempt to stop the penetration of the Turkish officers in the state, the Turkish officers sensed the threat. They assassinated this caliph and his vizier, and appointed the caliph’s son al-Muntas.ir as a ruler.

61. The word sāmarrā’ is derived from sarra man ra’ā meaning “whoever saw it rejoiced” at its beauty, or wittily said that “whoever saw it” with the Turks settled there “rejoiced” to be at Baghdād and well rid of them. See Sir William Muir, The Caliphate, p. 509, n. 2. Another witty reading is that the word is derived from sā’a man ra’ā meaning “whoever saw it grieved” from its bad condition.

18

Al-Muntas.ir ruled for six months only. He died in 248/862 and was succeeded by al-Musta‘īn. The new caliph, who was unable to withstand the influence of his Turkish officers, moved to Baghdād. As he refused to return to Sāmarrā’ they deposed him in 251/865 and appointed al-Mu‘tazz as his successor. Baghdād was surrounded, and finally al-Musta‘īn was assassinated.

Al-Mu‘tazz imprisoned his brother al-Mu’ayyid when he heard a rumor that al-Mu’ayyid wanted to depose him. However, he was finally deposed and assassinated by the Turkish officers who sensed his intention to rid himself of them. As his successor they appointed Muh.ammad ibn al-Wāthiq who was called al-Muhtadī. His piety seemed to bother them, and his intention to dissolve them ended with his assassination in 256/870. He was succeeded by al-Mu‘tamid.

Although al-Mu‘tamid tried hard to regain his power with the help of his brother al-Muwaffaq who led his army in defending the state, this ‘Abbāsī state was far from being stable. The T.āhirīs, Sāmānīs, and S.afawīs were separating themselves from the ‘Abbāsī empire in the East, while the T.ūlūnīs were establishing their own state in Egypt; besides, the Romans were attacking the empire. This was the political condition of the ‘Abbāsī empire in the time of Ibn Qutaybah. b. Social Condition The city of Baghdād, the seat of the ‘Abbāsī caliphs, was flourishing with prosperity and luxury. Goods from the empire’s provinces overflowed into the city. The city itself, as well as the palaces of the caliphs and emirs, was decorated and furnished with goods brought by traders from China and India in the East and from Byzantine in the West.

The citizens of Baghdād consisting of different elements contributed with their different and various traditions and cultures to the society. The Persians were sharing and competing with the Arabs in running the affairs of the state as well as in the fields of science and literature. The Turks were playing their important roles in the palaces and in the army with their military skills. The Greeks were contributing with their wisdom and literature, the Arabs with their poetry, eloquence, preserved geneology, ancient traditions, familiarity with and knowledge of horses, arms, military equipment and excellent memory. The Indians were contributing with their knowledge, such as: arithmetic, astronomy, medicine, maps and carpentry.62 62. Dr. Muh.ammad Zaghlūl Sallām, Ibn Qutaybah (Egypt: Dār al-Ma‘ārif,

19

Taverns and drinking gatherings were frequented by various people.

They provided the venue for poets and men of letters to recite their works and exchange elegant talk while listening to songs and music. The citizens became more interested in beauty and art. They enjoyed flowers, fragrances, gentle voices and beautiful faces. They liked being clean, wearing good clothes and living in good houses. They enjoyed entertainment at their festivals and various occasions, and the Muslims joined their fellow citizens the Jews and the Christians in their religious festivities.63 People’s addiction to alcohol made it one of the topics of their discussions in their gatherings and the object of appreciation among their poets, such as Abū Nuwās (d. ca. 198/783) and Muslim ibn al-Walīd (d.

207/823). They started questioning whether or not the type of alcohol called nabīdh was among the prohibited alcohol (khamr) in Islam. The question developed into a very serious issue and eventually Ibn Qutaybah wrote a book entitled Kitāb al-Ashribah (The Book of Beverage) portraying the controversial issue at that time and giving his legal judgement: khamr is prohibited by the Qur’ān, and nabīdh is prohibited by the Sunnah.64 It is worthy to note that this easy and prosperous life was enjoyed by the ruling class only, namely, the caliphs, the emirs, the generals and their associates among the middle class, such as traders, high government officials and artisans. The lower classes in the land were not privy to such life. As a matter of fact, the deviation from the religion and irreligious practices within the society were not ignored by the people who wanted to bring the society back to the correct path and often revolted against the rulers. c. Cultural Condition Apart from the emergence of the Mu‘tazilī theological doctrine in the period of al-Ma’mūn who adopted it and made it the official madhhab of his empire, and the shift to the Sunnī orthodoxy by al-Mutawakkil who, unlike al-Ma’mūn, did not like to be involved in theological debates, this era saw the flourishingof learning. Books of Greek, Persian and Indian antiquities were studied and translated into Arabic. The famous translator at this time was H.unayn ibn Ish.āq (d. 261/873) who was well versed in the Greek, 1957), pp. 10-11.

63. Ibid., pp. 12-13.

64. See Ibn ‘Abd Rabbih, al-‘Iqd al-Farīd, ed. Ah.mad Amīn et al. (Cairo: Mat.ba‘at al-Istiqāmah, 1372/1953), vol. 6, p. 355.

20

Syriac, Arabic and Persian languages. The result of extensive studies of these books produced Muslim scholars such as Abū ‘Uthmān ibn Bah.r al-Jāh.iz. and Ya‘qūb ibn Ish.āq al-Kindī (d. ca. 252/866).65 Books of other religions such as the Torah (al-Tawrāh), the Gospel (al-Injīl) and the Zoroastrian Avesta were also translated. Besides al-Jāh.iz., the other scholars in this field were al-Naz.z.ām of the Mu‘tazilī school and Ibn Qutaybah of the Sunnī school.66 The Qur’ān and the H.adīth were also extensively studied. Theological controversies and debates between the followers of the Mu‘tazilī and the Sunnī schools necessitated the extensive study of both. The philologists studied the linguistic style of the Qur’ān, its words, their meanings and styles. Others studied events involved in certain verses, the asbāb al-nuzūl (the occasions which led to the revelation of the verses of the Qur’ān), and the ta’wīl of the s.ahābah in certain verses.67 It is noteworthy that the books on Qur’ānic exegesis at the end of the 2nd/8th century and the beginning of the 3rd/9th century were fragmentary and were confined to philological explanations of the verses. This was apparent in their titles, such as: Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān which was the title of the works of al-Kisā’ī, al-Farrā’ and al-Akhfash (d. 210/825), I‘rāb al-Qur‘ān, Lughat al-Qur‘ān (The Language of the Qur‘an), Gharīb al-Qur‘ān which was the title of the works of Abū ‘Ubayd Qāsim ibn Sallām (d. 223/838), and Majāz al-Qur’ān which was the title of the works of Abū ‘Ubaydah and Qut.rub (d. 206/822).68 The extensive study of H.adīth literature in the ‘Abbāsī period produced great scholars, such as the founders of the four madhāhib (schools of jurisprudence), namely, Abū H.anīfah (d. 150/767), Mālik ibn Anas (d.

179/795), al-Shāfi‘ī (d. 204/820), and Ah.mad ibn H.anbal. Moreover, efforts were also made in compiling, explaining, sorting, and setting aside the obscure h.adīth and explaining the ambiguous ones. In this period, apart from the Musnad of Ah.mad ibn H.anbal, the six canonical books of h.adīths called 65. M.Z. Sallām, Ibn Qutaybah, p. 17.

66. Ibid., p. 15.

67. Ibid., p. 16.

68. G. Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, p. xxx; see also S.aqr’s introduction in Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, p. “j” and M.Z. Sallām, Ibn Qutaybah, p. 18.

21

al-Kutub al-Sittah (the Six Books) were compiled. They were the collections of al-Bukhārī (d. 256/870), Muslim (d. 261/875), Ibn Mājah (273/886), Abū Dā’ūd (d. 275/888), al-Tirmidhī (d. 279/892), and al-Nasā’ī (d. 303/892).69 In the field of grammar two main schools of philology appeared: the Bas.ran school whose leaders were Sībawayh (d. 179/196) and al-As.ma‘ī, and the Kūfan school which came later with some differences, and still later developed into a school of its own, whose leaders were al-Kisā’ī and al-Farrā’. The caliphs of Baghdād took the side of the Kūfan school, since the teachers of their children belonged to this school, such as al-Kisā’ī, alFarrā’, al-Mufad.d.al Muh.ammad ibn Ya‘lá al-D.abbī and al-Sharq ibn Qat.t.āmī. Al-Ma’mūn, for example, took the side against Sībawayh in a debate between the latter and al-Kisā’ī on a certain grammatical issue. Ibn Qutaybah who mixed the two schools was considered to belong to the Baghdādī school. According to him al-Kisā’ī and al-Farrā’ did not belong to the Kūfan school, but to the Baghdādī school70 which was the mixture of the two schools.71 Abū al-T.ayyib ‘Abd al-Wāh.id ibn ‘Alī al-Lughawī (d. 351/962) made a suggestion which was elaborated later on by Ibn al-Nadīm that Ibn Qutaybah combined the two schools into a “Baghdādī synthesis”. This view was considered doubtful and rejected by the contemporary scholars Lecomte and al-Jubūrī respectively. Lecomte said: In fact, in addition to the point already emphasized by G. Weil... that the schools of Bas.ra and Kūfa can scarcely have assumed their distinctive characteristics before the end of the 3rd/9th century, nothing has been found in Ibn Ķutayba’s philological work, or at least in what now 69

See M.Z. Sallām, Ibn Qutaybah, p. 16.

70

Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 390 and 640.

71

Lecomte quoted Abū al-T.ayyib ‘Abd al-Wāh.id al-Lughawī who said that the city of Baghdād was not a city of knowledge, but a city of government. The existing knowledge was brought to the city to please the caliphs and their courts. Al-T.ayyib said further that the people of Baghdād mixed everything; they did not make any distinction among the schoolars of Bas.rah or between al-Ru’āsī and al-Kisā’ī, or even between the reading of the H.ijāzī and that of H.amzah. The only thing they did was invent technical terms, such as h.afd. for jarr, s.ifah for z.arf, h.urūf al-s.ifāt for h.urūf aljarr and nasq for ‘at.f, see Lecomte. Ibn Qutayba, p. 391, n. 2, quoting Abū al-T.ayyib, Marātib al-Nah.wiyyīn (Cairo: N.P., 1375/1955), pp. 101-102.

22

survives, which could really justify this point of view. Although he in effect contrasts them with the “Bas.rans”, he regularly refers to those who were later to be attached to the “School of Kūfa” as “Baghdādīs”, and the synthesis of which so much has been made is no more than a genuine eclecticism which never claimed to form a school.

All that can be said is that Ibn Ķutayba in fact joins certain reputedly Kūfi tendencies to others considered to be Bas.ran. His position may be summarized by stating that in grammar he remains on the whole a supporter of the norm, i.e., “Bas.ran”, in spite of his attachment to the teaching of al-Kisā’ī and of al-Farrā’, whereas in a more general way, in philology and especially in poetry, he does not hesitate to depart from the usually accepted views, an attitude considered to be “Kūfi”.72

In rejecting the view that Ibn Qutaybah was one of the founders of the Baghdādī school of grammar which was the mixture of the two schools, the Bas.ran and the Kūfan, al-Jubūrī’s argument is as follows: (1). Ibn Qutaybah cited only linguistic aspects (wujūh min al-lughah) from the two schools, and probably aspects of grammatical orientation in special issues, as found in his Adab al-Kātib and Gharīb al-H.adīth.

(2). Despite his vast knowledge of grammar, Ibn Qutaybah did not express his views on this subject. He cited the views of grammarians without expressing which was the more acceptable one, whereas in the field of linguistics (lughah) he exercised ijtihād (independent judgement) and gave his fatwá (legal opinion) on its issues. Therefore, in al-Juburī’s opinion, Ibn Qutaybah was not a grammarian (nah.wī), but one of the philologists (fuqahā’ al-lughah).73 Other grammarians worthy of mention here are: Ibn al-Sikkīt (d.

244/858-859) who was the last grammarian of the Kūfan school who taught the son of Ja‘far al-Mutawakkil and who wrote Is.lāh. al-Mant.iq (Reconstruction of Logic) and Tahdhīb al-Alfāz. (Expression Training), Tha‘lab who gave his commentary on the compiled poetry of the pre-Islamic poet Zuhayr ibn Abī Sulmá (d. 5/627), al-Māzinī (d. 249/863) who was said to be the first to formulate the ‘ilm al-tas.rīf (etymology), and al-Mubarrad who combined philology with literature in his work al-Kāmil fī ’l-Lughah wa ’l-Adab (The Perfect Book on Linguistics and Literature).74 72. Lecomte, “Ibn Ķutayba”, p. 846.

73. See al-Jubūrī’s introduction in Ibn Qutaybah, Gharīb al-H.adīth, pp. 17-19.

74. Sallām, Ibn Qutaybah, p. 18.

23

Among the poets of this period were: Abū Tammām (d. 228/843) who had a dīwān (compiled poems), Abū ‘Ubādah al-Buh.turī (d. 283-284/897) who had also a dīwān, Di‘bil al-Khuzā‘ī who composed poems in praising ahl al-bayt (the Prophet's household), Ibn al-Rūmī (d. 282-283/896), and Ibn al-Mu‘tazz (d. 296/863) each of whom had their own dīwān.75 3. Historical Perspective on the Early Development of Qur’ānic Exegesis a. Tafsīr and Ta’wīl The word tafsīr is the mas.dar (verbal noun) from the second form of the verb fasara, namely, fassara which means “to explain”, “to expound”, “to interpret”, or “to comment”. Tafsīr is “the explanation, revealing and exposing the sensible meaning” ( ). It is also said that the word fasara is the inversion (maqlūb) of the word safara which means “unveiling” or “uncovering”. For example, the expression (the woman uncovered) means “she revealed her face”, and the expression (the dawn uncovered) means “it unveiled the sky of the darkness of night with its light”. Tafsīr, then, is the meanings of the verses of the Qur’ān which need explanation.76 Technically, the definition of tafsīr as given by al-Zarkashī (d.

794/1392) is as follows: “It is a knowledge through which the Book of Allah revealed to His Prophet Muh.ammad, peace be upon him, may be understood, its meaning may be clear, and its legal judgements and wisdom 75. Ibid., p. 19.

76. Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 5, p. 55; Jalāl al-Dīn Muh.ammad al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān, ed. M. A. Ibrāhīm, 4 vols. 1st ed. (Cairo: Maktabat wa Mat.ba‘at al-Mashhad al-H.usaynī, 1387/1967), vol. 4, p. 167; and Abū ’l-Fad.l Muh.ammad Murt.ad.á al-Zabīdī, Tāj al-‘Arūs min Jawāhir al-Qāmūs (Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Khayrīyah, 1306/[1888]), vol. 3, p. 470. According to Muh.ammad Fu’ād ‘Abd al-Bāqī, the word tafsīr is mentioned once only in the Qur’ān, as follows: “And no question do they bring to thee but We reveal to thee the truth and the best explanation (tafsīr).” (Q. 25:33). See M.F ‘Abd al-Bāqī, al-Mu‘jam al-Mufahras li-Alfāz. al-Qur’ān al-Karīm ([Cairo]: Dār wa Maābi‘ al-Sha‘b, n.d.), p. 519 (s.v.

).

24

may be discovered..."77 The word ta’wīl is the mas.dar from the second form of the verb āla (which means “returning”), namely, awwala which means “returning (something)”, as if the commentators return the verse to its various possible meanings. It is “the act of reducing of (two or more) senses or interpretations which an expression can have or allow to one that which suits the apparent meaning”. The Arabic expression āla ilayh means “he returned to him”, while (َ ) means “he arranged, evaluated and explained the statement” (

).78

Technically, according to early commentators in general, such as Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-T.abarī, ta’wīl has the same meaning as tafsīr, so that ta’wīl al-Qur’ān has the same meaning as tafsīr al-Qur’ān.79 However, Muqātil ibn Sulaymān states on the authority of Ibn ‘Abbās that tafsīr is what is known by the ‘ulamā’, while ta’wīl by Allah alone.80 But Ibn ‘Abbās was also reported to have said that some tafsīrs are known to man, and others to Allah alone.81 Later commentators, however, make the distinction between the two terms with divergent opinions: tafsīr belongs to the s.ahābah, while ta’wīl belongs to the fuqahā’ (legists);82 tafsīr, as mentioned by al-Māturīdī 77. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān, ed. Muh.ammad Abū al-Fad.l Ibrāhīm, 4 vols (Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah, n.d.), vol. 1, p. 13.

78. Qāmūs al-Muī, 2nd ed., 4 vols. in 2 bindings (Cairo: Mat.ba‘at Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1371/1952), vol. 3, p. 341 (s.v. ); and al-Zabīdī, Tāj al-‘Arūs, vol.

7, p. 215 (s.v.

). The term ta’wīl is mentioned 17 times in the Qur’ān according to

M.F. ‘Abd al-Bāqī. It deals with the interpretation of visions as in Q. 12:6, 21, 36-37, 44-45, and 100-1, of strange behaviour as in Q. 18:78 and 82, of obscure verses as in Q. 3:7 where ta’wīl is mentioned twice, of the unseen as in Q. 10:39 where ta’wīl is mentioned once, and with the fulfilment of the event in the Hereafter as in Q. 7:53 where ta’wīl is also mentioned twice. See M.F. ‘Abd al-Bāqī, al-Mu‘jam, p. 97 (s.v. ‫)اول‬.

79. Al-Zabīdī, Tāj al-‘Arūs, vol. 7, p. 215; see also Ibn Taymiyyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., p. 113; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 167.

80. Muqātil, Tafsīr, M.S. Hasan Husnu 17, 2r quoted by Wansbrough, Quranic Studies (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1977), p. 155.

81. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 188.

82. Al-Māturīdī, Ta’wīlāt al-Qur’ān, M.S. Medine 180, quoted by Wansbrough, Quranic Studies, p. 154.

25

(d. 333/944), has a single interpretation, while ta’wīl has many interpretations; tafsīr, according to al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī (d. 502/1109), is more common than ta’wīl, as the former is used mostly for words and their synonyms, while the latter mostly for meanings and sentences; moreover, tafsīr is used for both divine and secular books, ta’wīl for divine books only;83 tafsīr is based on riwāyah (transmission of tradition), while ta’wīl involves dirāyah (comprehension), namely, research and investigation;84 tafsīr is the obvious meaning of the verses, while ta’wīl is the deep meaning derived from the verses through research and investigation. The commentators give the preponderance - which is neither definite nor final to avoid giving final interpretation to what is really meant by Allah in the Qur’ān - to what they think the most suitable meaning over other meanings.85 b. Categories of Tafsīr Based on its sources there are three main categories of tafsīr: traditional commentary ( , also called and ), 83. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 167.

84. Ibid., p. 168; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 150.

85. Al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān (Damascus: Maktabat al-Ghazālī, 1401/1981), 2nd ed., p. 63. Ibn Qutaybah used both terms ta’wīl and tafsīr in the title of his works, namely, Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān and Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān, the latter being the continuation of the former. Apparently, he did not make any distinction between the two terms, as he stated that he wrote his Gharīb al-Qur’ān in order that his Ta’wīl would not become too long. However, according Lecomte, Ibn Qutaybah did make such a distinction: tafsīr is simply paraphrasing simple texts or difficult ones due to exclusively lexicographic order, whereas ta’wīl is a kind of tafsīr with deeper meaning. See Lecomte, Ibn Qutayba, pp. 290-294. According to Ibn Taymiyyah, al-T.abarī used the term ta’wīl meaning tafsīr when he used the expression (“the statement concerning the interpretation of this verse”) in his Jāmī‘. In other words, al-T.abarī did not make a distinction between ta’wīl and tafsīr. See Ibn Taymiyyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., p. 113. Contrary to this view is that of Dr. Mus.t.afá Zayd who maintained that al-T.abarī did make a distinction between the two terms. When al-T.abarī used the expression (the interpretation of this verse according to me), in Zayd’s view, is what the Prophet meant when he prayed for his cousin Ibn ‘Abbās, saying (“O Allah, give him understanding in religion and teach him ta’wīl [of the Qur’ān]”), see Dr. M. Zayd, Dirāsāt fī ’l-Tafsīr (Cairo: Dār al-Fikr al-‘Arabī, n.d.), p. 17.

26

rational commentary (

, also called

symbolic or allegorical commentary ( briefly as follows:

and

), and

). They will be dealt with

(1) Traditional Commentary. It is either the commentary of the Qur’ān by the Qur’ān itself, by the Sunnah of the Prophet, or by the s.ahābah. An example of the commentary of the Qur’ān by itself is as follows: One Qur’ānic verse mentions that cattle are lawful to Muslims for food, but not without exception. It says: “... Lawful to you is the [flesh of every] beast that feeds on plants, save what is mentioned to you [hereafter]: ...” (Q. 5:1, Asad)86 The commentary of the expression “save what is mentioned to you [hereafter]” is given in another verse, as follows: ...

Forbidden to you is carrion, and blood, and the flesh of swine, and that over which any name other than God’s has been invoked, and the animal that has been strangled, or beaten to death, or killed by a fall, or gored to death, or savaged by a beast of prey, save that which you [yourselves] may have slaughtered while it was still alive; and [forbidden to you is] all that has been slaughtered on idolatrous altars.

(Q. 5:3, Asad).87

This is the strongest commentary of this category of tafsīr, since it comes from the Qur’ān itself. It is Allah Who explains what He means in the Qur’ān.

The example of the commentary of the Qur’ān by the Sunnah of the Prophet is as follows: When the verse “Those who have attained to faith, and who have not obscured their faith by wrongdoing - it is they who shall be secure, since it is they who have found the right path!” (Q. 6:82, Asad) was revealed, it distressed the s.ahābah. They asked the Prophet, saying: “O Messenger of Allah, is there any of us who has not obscured his faith by wrongdoing?”

86. See also Q. 22:30.

87. For another example, see Q. 44:3 where the commentary of “the Blessed Night” is given in Q. 97:1 which is, in turn, clarified in Q. 99:3-5.

27

The Prophet answered: “It is not what you think it means. Haven’t you heard what the pious servant of Allah [i.e., Luqman the sage] said to his son? He said: ‘O my dear son! Do not ascribe divine powers to aught beside God: for, behold, such [a false] ascribing divinity is indeed an awesome wrong!’ (Q. 31:13, Asad). It [i.e., the word z.ulm in the verse] means shirk (polytheism).”88 This Prophetic commentary of the Qur’ān is also strong, since it is the duty of the Prophet to explain what has been revealed to the people, as mentioned in the Qur’ān, as follows:

“And upon thee [too] have We bestowed from on high this reminder, so that thou might make clear unto mankind all that has ever been thus bestowed upon them, and that they might take thought.” (Q. 16:44, Asad).

However, the acceptance of this Prophetic commentary is also on condition that it is reported by reliable authorities.

With regard to the commentary of the s.ahābah, although not so strong as the two commentaries mentioned earlier, it is also accepted by the Muslims. This is because the s.ahābah were people who met the Prophet, witnessed the revelation, knew the asbāb al-nuzūl and knew more of the Arabic language and its eloquence which enabled them to better understand the divine texts.

Although the traditionist al-H.ākim accepted the commentary of the s.ahābah and raised it to the same level of the Prophetic commentary, one has to be careful in accepting this commentary of the s.ahābah or the tābi‘īn for the following reasons: There are many commentaries attributed to the s.ahābah or tābi‘īn without isnād (chains of authority), so that we cannot make a distinction between the genuine and the fabricated ones. Moreover, many isrā’ilīyāt (Jewish legends) were spread among Muslims, some of which contained legends and beliefs contradictory to the teachings of Islam.

There were also some extremists who fabricated sayings and attributed them to the s.ahābah to support their views, or to flatter the rulers. There is also the possibility that the atheists (zanādiqah) fabricated sayings and attributed 88. Muh.ammad ‘Alī al-S.ābūnī (ed.), Mukhtasar Tafsīr Ibn Kathīr, 3 vols.

(Beirut: Dār al-Qur’ān al-Karīm, 1402/1981), vol. 2, pp. 594-595.

28

them to the s.ahābah or the tābi‘īn in order to destroy Islam.89 (2) Rational commentary. It is a commentary based exclusively on the commentator’s ability to grasp the meanings of the Qur’ānic verses due to the absence of traditional commentary on the verses in question. This can be accomplished only if he possesses and exercises the knowledge of the sciences of the Qur’ān and the Arabic language, such as naskh (abrogation of legal passages of the Qur’ān), asbāb al-nuzūl, ah.kām (laws contained in the Qur’ān), i‘rāb, balāghah (eloquence), and classical Arabic poetry.

The commentary of this genre, however, was opposed by a group of Muslim scholars for the following reasons: (a) They said that rational commentary was a statement concerning Allah without knowledge, an act which was prohibited by Allah, as mentioned in Q. 2:169 and 7:33. (b) They contended that it was the duty of the Prophet to explain the Qur’ān as mentioned in Q. 16:44, and this duty was exclusively the Prophet’s privilege. (c) The Prophet warned people from giving interpretation of the Qur’ān based on their personal opinion. In a tradition on the authority of Ibn ‘Abbās the Prophet said: “Whoever speaks on the Qur’ān without knowledge (‘ilm) let him make his place in Hell.”90 (d) The s.ahābah and the tābi‘īn refrained from giving their interpretation of the Qur’ān with their personal opinion. Abū Bakr, for example, was reported to have said: “Any land may carry me, and any sky may overshadow me if I spoke on the Qur’ān with my personal opinion or with what I have no knowledge.”91 89. See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān, 2 vols. (Beirut: Dār al-Fikr, 1408/1988), vol. 2, pp. 23-24.

90. See Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 13, p. 370. Quoting from Ibn al-Anbārī’s work al-Radd ‘alá Man Khālafa Mus.h.af ‘Uthmān, which is not extant, alQurt.ubī mentions two interpretations on the above h.adīth: (a) Whosoever gives his own opinion on the ambiguous verses of the Qur’ān on which neither the s.ah.ābah nor the tābi‘īn have ever expressed their opinion, he will be exposed to Allah’s wrath; (b) Whoever gives an opinion that he knows is wrong about the verses of the Qur’ān, he will be exposed to Allah’s wrath, and this is the right view according to al-Qurt.ubī; see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 32. In another tradition on the authority of Jundub, the Prophet said: “Whoever interprets the Qur’ān by independent reason is wrong even if he arrives at the right meaning.” For similar h.adīths, see al-Tirmidhī, Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p.

199 no. 2950 (chap. tafsīr al-Qur’ān). See also al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān, p. 154.

91. See Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 13, pp. 371-372 and al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān, p. 154.

29

On the other hand, Muslim scholars en masse accept the rational interpretation for the following reasons: (a) Allah urges Muslims to contemplate the contents of the Qur’ān when He said: “[All this have We expounded in this] blessed divine writ which We have revealed unto thee, [O Muhammad,] so that men may ponder over its messages, and that those who are endowed with insight may take 92 them to heart.” (Q. 38:29, Asad)

They maintain that pondering over the Qur’ān can be achieved only by searching its deeper meanings and mysteries, and therefore, giving one’s personal opinion in the interpretation of the Qur’ān is justified. (b) Muslim scholars are urged to discover the laws in the Qur'an by searching and finding its deeper meanings, based on Q. 4:83, and this can only be carried out by giving one’s independent judgement. (c) If rational interpretation is prohibited because it is based on independent judgement, then the use of independent judgement in Islamic laws would also have been prohibited.

Consequently, many of these Islamic laws would have been ineffective.

This is contrary to what has been established among Muslim scholars that a mujtahid (a legist who exercises ijtihād, i.e., independent judgement in a legal question based upon the interpretation of the Qur’ān and the Sunnah) is always rewarded, whether his judgement is right or wrong. (d) The s.ahābah themselves have different interpretations on some Qur’ānic verses, as the Prophet did not explain all the verses of the Qur’ān. He explained only those which needed explanation, leaving the rest to be understood by the s.ahābah themselves. If personal opinion was not allowed on the Qur’ān, the Prophet would have explained the whole Qur’ān, and the s.ahābah would not have given their personal opinion.(e) The Prophet prayed for his cousin Ibn ‘Abbās that Allah would teach him the ta’wīl of the Qur’ān. If the term ta’wīl here means the interpretation based on what have been reported from the Prophet rather than Ibn ‘Abbās’s own personal opinion, then singling him out with this prayer would have been futile.

The arguments of scholars who opposed rational commentary were countered by other scholars with the following arguments: (a) Giving one's interpretation on the Qur’ān with ijtihād (lit., exertion, namely, independent judgement) is not a statement concerning Allah without knowledge, but 92. For similar verses, see Q. 4:82 and 47:24.

30

rather with knowledge and which is permitted in religion, since a mujtahid according to a h.adīth will be rewarded with two merits if he is right, and one merit if he is wrong in his ijtihād. Since ijtihād is a meritorious act, it cannot be a prohibited one at the same time. (b) With regard to the Prophet’s warning against practising tafsīr without knowledge, Ibn al-Naqīb gives us five views which constitute five types of prohibited tafsīr, namely, tafsīr without having the sciences required for it; tafsīr of ambiguous passages which are known by Allah alone; tafsīr intended to support a straying sect, and in so doing, making the tafsīr subordinate to the sect; stating with certainty the meaning intended by Allah without proof; and lastly, tafsīr based on one’s own discretion (istih.sān) and whim (hawá).93 (c) That the Prophet was appointed to explain the Qur’ān does not mean that nobody else was allowed to do it. This is apparent as the verse mentioned above ends with “and that they might take thought”. (Q. 16:44, Asad). Many verses in the Qur’ān were not explained by the Prophet, and it is the duty of Muslim scholars to find their meanings and interpretations. (d) The s.ahābah’s restraint from giving their own tafsīr was a precaution against stating what may not have been meant by Allah. Abū Bakr himself gave his personal opinion concerning the kalālah (a deceased person who has left as heir neither a descendant nor an ascendant)94 in the Qur’ān 4:176 and said: “I say it with my opinion; if it is right it is from Allah, and if it is not, it is from Satan.”95 Among the exponents of the rational commentary, to mention a few, were al-Ghazālī, al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, and al-Qurt.ubī.96 (3) Symbolic (Allegorical) Commentary. It is a commentary of the Qur’ān which is different from its apparent meaning due to some hints which appeared through inspiration to some dedicated people endowed with knowledge. Contrary to the acquired knowledge known as , this type of knowledge known as

comes directly from Allah, as

93. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 191.

94. Kalālah is one of the three terms which ‘Umar wished the Prophet had defined in his lifetime, the other two being the khilāfah (caliphate, succession) and the ribā (usury), see A.Y. Ali, The Holy Qur’ān (Doha: Qatar National Printing Press, n.d.), p. 182, n. 520.

95. Al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān, pp. 164-166.

96. Ibid., pp. 167-8.

31

mentioned in the Qur’ān, as follows: (“…and unto whom We had imparted knowledge [issuing] from Ourselves.” Q. 18:65, Asad).97 There is a great difference between the esoterical commentary ( ) claimed by the Bāt.inīs (adherents of inner meanings of the Qur’ān) and the symbolic commentary ( ). To the Bāt.inīs, the only acceptable meaning is the esoterical one, whereas the Sūfīs accept both the ostensible and the symbolic meanings. The Sūfīs urge people to learn the ostensible meaning before they learn the symbolic meaning. They say that whoever claims to have understood the mysteries of the Qur’ān - through mystical interpretation - without knowing the ostensible meaning is like a man who claims to have reached the roof of the house without passing through the door.98 Muslim scholars have different views on this symbolic tafsīr. Those who reject it associate it with the esoterical tafsīr which, in their view, distorts the meaning of the Qur’ān. However, the exponents of this type of tafsīr give conditions for its validity, as follows: it is not contrary to its obvious meaning; it is not considered the only valid meaning by rejecting the obvious one; it is not a remote meaning which is beyond the context of its words, such as interpreting the term lama‘a as a verb meaning “to shine” ather than “indeed with” in the verse “For, behold, God is indeed with the doers of good.” (Q. 29:69, Asad); it is not contrary to Islamic teachings and to reason; and finally, it does not contain a view which might confuse people.99 One example of the symbolic commentary is Ibn ‘Abbās’s interpretation of the verse: “When God’s succour comes, and victory,” (Q. 110:1, Asad) as a sign of the Prophet’s approaching death.100 97. Idem, (ed.), Mukhtas.ar, vol. 2, p. 427. See also Q. 2:282.

98. See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 2, p. 79.

99. See al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān, p. 175; al-Zarqānī mentions the fifth condition is that the allegorical commentary has to be supported by a legal shāhid (textual evidence); see al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 2, p. 81.

100. See Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad ibn Muh.ammad al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘ liAh.kām al-Qur’ān, 20 vols. in 10 bindings (Beirut: Dār Ih.yā’al-Turāth al-‘Arabī, 1967), vol. 20, p. 232; Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad b. Ismā‘īl al-Bukhārī, S.ah.īh.

32

c. Early Development of Tafsīr The Qur’ān was revealed to Prophet Muhammad in the Arabic language.101 Although in clear Arabic,102 the s.ahābah had different levels of knowledge in understanding the Qur’ān. This is natural, since it is unlikely that any book written on any subject in any particular language and style will be fully understood by any native speaker of that language. ‘Umar, for example, did not know the meaning of the word abban in the verse (“And fruits and fodder”. Q. 80:31). On one occasion, whilst he was reading from the pulpit the verse (“Or [that He will] take them to task through slow decay?” Q. 16:47, Asad), he asked the meaning of takhawwuf. A Bedouin of Hudhayl tribe told him that according to the language of this tribe the word means tanaqqus. (diminution, decrease).103 Besides ‘Umar, Ibn ‘Abbās who was nicknamed turjumān al-Qur’ān (the interpreter of the Qur’ān), was reported to have said that he had not known the meaning of the word fāt.ir in the verse ‫(األنعام‬ )١٤ : “He is the Creator of the heavens and the earth,” Q. 6:14, Dawood)104 until two Bedouins came to him asking his judgement on their dispute over a well; one of them said anā fat.artuhā (“I was the one who made it”), while the other said anā ibtada’tuhā (“I was the one who started digging it.”)105 al-Bukhārī (N.p: Dar al-Fikr, n.d.), pp. 183-184. Another classification of tafsīr which appeared in the second half of the second century A.H. was the following categories: legalistic tafsīr, linguistic tafsīr, formal tafsīr of scholars, and the tafsīr of the mutashābihāt which is known to Allah only; see M.O.A. Abdul, “The Historical Development of Tafsir”, Islamic Culture (Hyderabad, The Islamic Culture Board), vol. l, no. 1 (July, 1976), p. 144. Wansbrough, on the other hand, gives us five categories of tafsīr i.e., narrative (haggadic), legal (halakhic), textual (masoretic), rhetorical, and allegorical; for further details, see J. Wansbrough, Quranic Studies, pp. 119-246.

101. See Q. 12:2, 39:28 and 42:3.

102. See Q. 26:195.

103. See Dr. Muh.ammad H.usayn al-Dhahabī, al-Tafsīr wa ’l-Mufassirūn, 3 vols (Cairo: Dār al-Kutub al-H.adīthah, 1396/1976), vol. 1, p. 74; and Ah.mad Amīn, Fajr al-Islām, p. 196.

104. See also Q. 12:101, 14:10, 35:1, 39:46 and 42:11.

105. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 44; al-Suyūt.ī did not mention that the

33

It was also reported that he had not known the meaning of the word iftah. in the verse (“Our Lord! Judge rightly between us and our people,” Q. 7:89) until he heard a woman called Dhū Yazan say to her husband meaning (“I shall prosecute you”).106 Generally speaking, the s.ahābah understood the Qur’ān more than any other people, since it was revealed in their language. However, they had different levels of understanding. Some of them had more knowledge of the Arabic language and were more familiar with its pre-Islamic literature which helped them grasp the meanings of the Qur’ānic texts - than other people. Others used to accompany the Prophet and witnessed the asbāb al-nuzūl of certain Qur’ānic verses. Some others knew more of the ways of the Arabs in the pre-Islamic era. Those who knew the Arabs’ way of performing their pilgrimage and worshipping their idols, and those who were familiar with the customs and traditions of the Jews and Christians in pre-Islamic Arabia had better understanding of Qur’ānic verses dealing with these particular subjects.107 The Prophet explained to the s.ahābah the meanings of Qur’ānic verses which were not understood by them or those that needed explanation. Zakāt, for example, originally means “growth”, but technically means “obligatory charity”, was explained by the Prophet in detail. This explanation was later transmitted to the people of the next generation, so that they also became well-acquainted with the divine texts. However, such information was included in the h.adīth literature, since tafsīr as an independent science emerged later in the early third century A.H. After the death of the Prophet questions on Qur’ānic verses were statement anā ibtada’tuhā was that of the other Bedouin in the dispute. See al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 4 106. Al-T.abarī mentioned that the word fatah.a which means qad.á (to judge) is the language of the Murād tribe and that according to al-Farrā’ the people of ‘Umān (Oman) called their qad.ī by the name al-fātih. and al-fattāh.; see Abū Ja‘far ibn Jarīr al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān, 30 vols. (Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah lilT.iba‘ah wa al-Nashr, 1406-7/1986-7), vol. 9, p. 3; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘ , vol. 1, p.

44. Al-Suyuti gives the meaning of ufātih.uk as uh.ākimuk (I argue with you), see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 5.

107. A. Amīn, Fajr al-Islām, pp. 197-199.

34

directed to the s.ahābah. The prominent exegetes among them in this period were: ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Abbās, ‘Abd Allāh ibn Mas‘ūd, ‘Alī ibn Abī T.ālib and Ubayy ibn Ka‘b; to a lesser degree, Zayd ibn Thābit, Abū Mūsá al-Ash‘arī, ‘Abd Allāh ibn al-Zubayr, Abū Bakr, ‘Umar and ‘Uthmān. They moved to other cities in Muslim lands and transmitted to people what they had learned from the Prophet and what they knew from the asbāb al-nuzūl.

They opened schools for teaching tafsīr in important cities. In Makkah the school was led by Ibn ‘Abbās; among his students were: Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr (d.

94/713), Mujāhid ibn Jabr (d. 103/722) whose tafsīr has been published,108 T.āwūs ibn Kaysān al-Yamānī (d. 106/725), ‘Ikrimah (Ibn ‘Abbās’s client, d.

105/723) and ‘At.a’ ibn Abī Rabāh (d. 114/732). In Madīnah, it was led by Ubayy ibn Ka‘b (d. 22/641); among his students were: Muh.ammad ibn Ka‘b al-Qurz.ī (d. 117/735), al-Rāfi‘ ibn Mahrān (his agnomen was Abū al-‘Āliyah al-Riyāhī, d. 90/709 or 117/735 or 93/712) and Zayd ibn Aslam (his agnomen was Abū Usāmah, the client of ‘Umar, d. 136/754). In Iraq it was led by ‘Abd Allāh ibn Mas‘ūd (d. 32/652); among his students in Kūfah were ‘Alqamah ibn Qays (d. ca. 62/682 or 72/692) and Masrūq ibn al-Ajda‘ (d. 63/683). In Bas.rah, they were al-H.asan al-Bas.rī (d. 110/728), Qatādah ibn Di‘āmah al-Sudusī (d. 118/736), ‘At.a’ ibn Abī Muslim al-Khurasānī (d.

135/753) and Murrah ibn Shurāh.īl al-Hamadhānī (his agnomen was Abū Isma‘īl, d. 76/696).109 In this period of the tābi‘īn, many isrā’iliyyāt (Jewish traditions used to amplify Qur’ānic allusions) found their way into tafsīr. This is because people were curious to know the details of stories mentioned in the Qur’ān.

For example, they wanted to know the size of Prophet Noah’s ark, the number and names of the as.h.āb al-kahf (Men of the Cave) and the colour of 108. The complete tafsīr of Mujāhid was edited and published by A. Surtī based on a manuscript from the sixth century of Hijrah. It was entitled Tafsīr Mujāhid, 2 vols (Beirut: n.d.). See Ahmad von Denffer, ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān: An Introduction to the Science of the Qur‘ān (Leicester: The Islamic Foundation, 1403/1983), p. 130.

Mujāhid was reported to have asked Ibn ‘Abbās’s commentary on the whole Qur’ān and recorded it. For this reason Sufyān al-Thawrī said: “If the commentary comes from Mujāhid it is sufficient for you.” See Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 13, p. 369.

109. Al-S.ābūnī, al-Tibyān, pp. 73-84; A. Amīn, Fajr al-Islām, pp. 204-205; and Dr. Muh.ammad B. Mahrān, Dirāsāt Ta’rīkhiyyah min al-Qur’ān al-Karīm (N.p.: Imām Muh.ammad ibn Su‘ūd Islamic University, 1400/1980), pp. 104-105.

35

their dog, the kind of tree from which Allah talked to Prophet Moses and the kind of birds which were revived by Allah for Prophet Abraham. Such details could be found in the Torah or its commentary and legends put into it.110 Moreover, some of the Jews who converted to Islam brought the isrā’iliyyāt with them. Although the Prophet was reported to have said that Muslims should neither believe nor disbelieve what the people of the Book related to them, they consulted them; even Ibn ‘Abbās was reported to have listened to them.111 Ibn Khaldūn gave us his account on this matter and said:

110. These are, according to Ibn Taymiyyah, unnecessary details which have been concealed by Allah in the Qur’ān; see Ibn Taymīyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 13, p. 367.

111. Mahrān mentions nine reasons for the infiltration of isrā’iliyyāt and nas.rāniyyāt (legends from Christians) in tafsīr which have been mentioned above.

For further details, see Mahrān, Dirāsāt Ta’rīkhiyyah, pp. 105-111. Ibn ‘Abbās was reported to have asked Ka‘b al-Ah.bār the interpretation of the term Umm al-Kitāb (the Mother of the Book) and al-marjān (the coral), see Ignaz Goldziher, Madhāhib al-Tafsīr al-Islāmī, trans. & annot. Dr. ‘Abd al-H.alīm al-Najjār (Cairo: Mat.ba‘ah al-Sunnah al-Muh.ammadiyyah, 1374/1955), p. 88; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp. 9 and 126. Such questions do not necessarily mean that Ibn ‘Abbās did not know the meaning of these words, but rather to learn Ka‘b al-Ah.bār’s understanding of these words based on his knowledge of the Jewish tradition. Ibn ‘Abbās was also reported to have asked Ka‘b al-Ah.bār the meaning of the verse: “They extol His limitless glory by night and by day, never flagging [therein]” (Q. 21:20, Asad) and how the angels glorify Allah continuously. “Do your blinking of your eyes and your breathing afflict you?,” asked Ka‘b al-Ah.bār. “No,” answered Ibn ‘Abbās. “The angels’ continuous glorification of Allah is like that,” said Ka‘b al-Ah.bār. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 19. In justifying Ibn ‘Abbās’s questioning the Jewish converts to Islam, Muh.ammad al-Dhahabī said that the questions did not touch the ‘aqīdah (belief) or us.ūl al-dīn (the fundamentals of the religion of Islam), but rather the stories of the past. In this way, Ibn ‘Abbās was combining two h.adīths: one allowed the Muslims to speak about Banī Isrā’īl (the children of Israel, namely, the Jews and their tradition) without restriction, and the other prohibited the Muslims from believing or disbelieving the people of the Book (the Jews and the Christians). However, al-Dhahābī does not maintain that Ibn ‘Abbās asked the Jewish converts in such an extensive way as assumed by Goldziher and A. Amīn, since many stories reported by al-T.abarī in his Jāmi‘ were not sound, and Ibn ‘Abbās himself warned the Muslims from asking the people of the Book; see al-Dhahābī, al-Tafsīr wa ’l-Mufassirūn, vol. 1, pp. 71-74.

36

.... The Arabs had no books or scholarship. The desert attitude and illiteracy prevailed among them. When they wanted to know certain things that human beings are usually curious to know, such as the reason for the existing things, the beginning of creation, and the secrets of existence, they consulted the earlier people of the Book about it and got information from them. The people of the Book were the Jews who had the Torah and the Christians who followed the religion (of the Jews). Now the people of the Torah who lived among the Arabs at that time were themselves Bedouins. They knew only as much about the matter as is known to ordinary people of the Book (in contrast to the learned rabbis). The majority of those Jews were Himyarites who had adopted Judaism. When they became Muslims, they clung to the information they possessed, such as information about the beginning of creation and information of the types of forecasts and predictions. That information had no connection with the commandments of the Islamic Law. Such men were Ka‘b b. al-Ah.bār, Wahb b. Munabbah, ‘Abdallāh b. Sallām and similar people. The Qur’ān [sic] commentaries were filled with materials of such tendencies transmitted on their authority. 112

It was commonly believed that the recording of oral traditions attributed to the Prophet started only at the second century of A.H. after the death of all of the s.ah.ābah and prominent tābi‘īn, such as Sa‘īd ibn al-Musayyab (d. 100/713) and al-H.asan al-Bas.rī. Mālik ibn Anas, for example, stated that Ibn Shihāb al-Zuhrī (d. 124/742) was the earliest compiler.113 However, the extant and earliest religious book written in the early period of Islam was al-S.ah.īfah al-S.ah.īh.ah (The Authentic Scroll) of Hammām ibn Munabbih. The compiler Ibn Munabbih (d. 101/719) was a student of the prominent s.ah.ābī (a companion of the Prophet) Abū Hurayrah (d. 58/677). Two identical manuscripts of it were found; one in Damascus, and the other in Berlin. It was discovered, edited and published by Muhammad Hamidullah in Damascus in 196l. It contained one hundred and thirty-eight h.adīths on the authority of Abū Hurayrah. Many of these h.adīths were identical to those reported by Ah.mad ibn H.anbal in his Musnad and al-Bukhārī in his S.ah.īh.. Some s.ah.ābah and tābi‘īn had 112. Ibn Khaldūn, Muqaddimah, p. 368; the translation is rendered by Rosenthal, see idem, The Muqaddimah: An Introduction to History, trans. Franz Rosenthal, 3 vols. (New York: Pantheon Books Inc., 1958), vol.2, p. 445.

113. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Kitāb S.ifat al-S.afwah, 4 vols. 1st ed. (Hyderabad Deccan: Mat.ba‘at Dā’irat al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 1357/[1938]), vol. 2, p. 78.

37

recorded the h.adīths, but their recordings were lost, such as Sa‘īd ibn ‘Ubādah (d. 15/637), Ibn ‘Abbās (d. 69/689), Samrah ibn Jundub (d.

60/680), Jābir ibn ‘Abd Allāh (d. 78/670), ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Amr ibn al-‘Ās. (d. 65/685) and Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr (d. 95/714).114 In the early period of the second century A.H. religious knowledge had not yet been divided into branches and therefore scholars were not specialists in one particular branch. Tafsīr was still included in the H.adīth and the mufassirīn (scholars on tafsir) were themselves muh.addithīn (scholars on h.adīths), until the two sciences separated completely in the early third century A.H. Among scholars who wrote tafsīr based on what they had learned from the s.ah.ābah and the tābi‘īn with sanad (isnād, chains of authorities on which traditions and historical writings are based) were Wakī‘ ibn al-Jarrāh. (d. 196/811), Sufyān ibn ‘Uyaynah (d. 198/813), Shu‘bah ibn al-Hajjāj (d. 160/776), ‘Abd al-Razzāq ibn Hammām (d.

211/827) and Abū Khālid Yazīd ibn Hārūn (d. 206/822).115 Unfortunately, none of these works are extant. However, there are some extant works of this second century A.H., among which are: Tafsīr (MS. Husnu 17) of Muqātil ibn Sulaymān (d. 150/767), al-Sīrah al-Nabawiyyah (Cairo, 1955) of Ibn Ish.āq (d. 151/768) in the recension of Ibn Hishām (d. 218/834), Tafsīr (MS. Ayasofya 118) of Muh.ammad ibn Sā’ib al-Kalbī (d. 146/763), and Tafsīr al-Qur’ān al-Karīm (Rampur, 1965), of Sufyān al-Thawrī (d.

161/778).

They contained mainly commentaries and paraphrastic explanations in addition to the asbāb al-nuzūl, except Ibn Ish.āq’s Sīrah which contained mainly the Prophet’s biography and asbāb al-nuzūl.116 114. See Dr. S.ubh.ī al-S.ālih., ‘Ulūm al-H.adīth wa Mus.t.alah.uh (Beirut: Dār al-‘Ilm lil-Malāyīn, n.d.), pp. 23-33. Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr was reluctant to write a tafsīr, probably because he did not want to give his personal opinion of the Qur’ān, particularly the mutashābihāt. One day he was asked to do so and he replied: “To lose a part of my body is better than to write a tafsīr”; see Ibn Khallikān, Wafayāt al-A‘yān, edited and annotated by Muh.ammad Muhyī al-Dīn ‘Abd al-H.amīd, 6 vols. (Cairo: Maktabat alNahd.ah al-Mis.riyyah, 1384/1964), vol. 2, pp. 112-113. However, eventually he consented when he was asked by the Caliph ‘Abd al-Malik ibn Marwān.

115. For further details see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, pp. 211-212.

116. These books belonged to the category of haggadic (narrative) tafsīr as suggested by Wansbrough; see Quranic Studies, pp. 122-138. Some Muslim scholars considered Muqātil ibn Sulaymān as an unreliable authority, because he was said to have received his knowledge from the people of the Book and to have been a Zaydī

38

In this period of compilation the ‘Abbāsī dynasty was seizing political power after successfully overthrowing the Umawī dynasty in 132/750. In this critical situation, traditions exaggerating Ibn ‘Abbās’s piety, virtue and knowledge, were invented for the political ends of his descendants who were ruling the Muslim empire. Moreover, before the ‘Abbāsī dynasty took power the qus.s.ās. (story tellers) had already used the highly respected position of Ibn ‘Abbās’s family among Muslims to fabricate traditions in his and ‘Ali’s name. Consequently, according to al-Shāfi‘ī, there were only about one hundred traditions handed down by Ibn ‘Abbās.117 Ibn H.anbal was reported to have said that there are three things which have no basis: tafsīr, malāh.im (apocalyptic h.adīths), and maghāzī (accounts of the early battles in Islam).118 As h.adīths, tafsīr and sayings ascribed to Ibn ‘Abbās transmitted through various channels and isnāds were so numerous that there was hardly a single Qur’ānic verse without one or more commentaries attributed to him.

This led the critics among scholars to examine and evaluate these channels and isnāds. Among the critics of h.adīth and tafsīr transmission in this period were Yah.yá ibn Sa‘īd al-Qat.t.ān (d. 198/813) and ‘Abd al-Rah.mān ibn Mahdī (198/814). Their views were widely accepted by scholars such as the traditionist Ah.mad ibn H.anbal and Yah.yá ibn Ma‘īn (d. 233/848) and scholars of the following generation.119 Among the evaluated channels are the following: (1). Mu‘āwiyah ibn S.ālih. - ‘Alī ibn Abī T.alh.ah al-Hāshimī (d. 143/760-1) Ibn ‘Abbās. This is the best channel. Although it was reported that ‘Alī with anthromorphic leanings; others accepted him as reliable. Al-Shāfi‘ī, for example, praised him and put his knowledge in tafsīr on the same level as Zuhayr ibn Abī Sulmá’s in poetry and Abū H.anīfah’s in Islamic jurisprudence; see Kamāl al-Dīn al-Dumyarī, H.ayāt al-H.ayawān al-Kubrá (Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Sharqiyyah, ca.

1300/[1882-1883]), vol. 1, pp. 297-298 (article dhubāb). However, Abū H.ātim reported from al-Sammāk who said that ‘Ikrimah stated: “Everything I have told you about (the interpretation of) the Qur’ān is from Ibn ‘Abbās.” See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 211.

117. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 209.

118. See Ibid., p. 178.

119. See Ibid., p. 209; and Nabia Abbott, Qur’ānic Commentary and Tradition.

Studies in Arabic Literary Papyri II (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1967) , p. 112.

39

ibn Abī T.alh.ah did not hear the tafsīr directly from Ibn ‘Abbās but from his students Mujāhid or Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, his tafsīr was accepted as reliable. Al-T.abarī, Ibn Abī H.ātim, Muslim and other h.adīth compilers relied on his transmission. Ah.mad ibn H.anbal said of it as follows: “There is a scroll in Egypt on tafsīr transmitted by ‘Alī ibn Abī T.alh.ah, and if a man goes there to get it is not a great thing,” meaning that it deserved this great effort.

(2). Qays ibn Muslim al-Kūfī (d. 130/748) - ‘At.ā’ ibn al-Sā’ib - Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr - Ibn ‘Abbās. This is also a very good channel, the isnād is s.ah.īh. (sound) based on the conditions laid down by al-Bukhārī and Muslim.

(3). Ibn Ish.āq - Muh.ammad ibn Abī Muh.ammad (the client of Zayd ibn Thābit’s family) - ‘Ikrimah or Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr - Ibn ‘Abbās. This channel is still good, and the isnād is h.asan (good) according to the standard laid down in accepting h.adīths.

4). Al-D.ah.h.āk ibn Muzāh.im al-Hilālī (d. 103/722) - Ibn ‘Abbās. This is a weak channel. It is weaker if the channel is Juwaybir - al- D.ah.h.āk - Ibn ‘Abbās.

(5). Ismā‘īl ibn ‘Abd al-Rah.mān (al-Suddī al-Kabīr, d. 128/745) - Abū Mālik (or Abū S.ālih., Ummu Hānī’s client) - Ibn ‘Abbās. The reports of al-Suddī al-Kabīr are found in the collections of h.adīth compilers Muslim, Abū Dāwūd, Ibn Mājah, al-Nasā’ī and al-Tirmidhī. Ibn Abī H.ātim did not include them among the sound reports.

(6). Muqātil ibn Sulaymān - Ibn ‘Abbās. Although praised by al-Shāfi‘ī, many scholars considered him weak, because he reported from Mujāhid and al- D.ah.h.āk, but he never had contact with them. Moreover, he was known to be a follower of al-tajsīm and al-tashbīh (anthropomorphism).

Al-Suyūt.ī preferred al-Kalbī to Muqātil. When Wakī‘ was asked about Muqātil’s tafsīr, he said, “Do not look at it.” When he was asked what to do with it, he said, “Bury it.” Ah.mad ibn H.anbal said about him: “I do not like to report anything from Muqātil.”120 (7). Muh.ammad ibn Sā’ib al-Kalbī - Abū S.ālih. - Ibn ‘Abbās. This is the worst channel, especially if Muh.ammad ibn Marwān (al-Suddī al-S.aghīr, d. 189/805) is included in it. Al-Kalbī was reported to have 120. See Muhyī ’l-Dīn ibn Sharaf al-Nawawī, Tahdhīb al-Asmā’ wa ’l-Lughāt, 3 vols. (Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Munīriyyah, 1927), vol. 2, p. 111.

40

said on his death-bed: “Everything I have told you from Abū S.ālih. are lies.” His reports were frequently narrated by al-Tha‘labī and al-Wāh.idī.121 In the late second and early third century A.H. lexical tafsīr became more developed. Apart from traditional sources and lexical explanation, grammatical phenomena as well as symbolic problems were also included.

Grammatical phenomena were justified with shawāhid from ancient poetry and secular rhetoric, while symbolic problems were solved by applying the periphrastic principle “taqdīr” (supposition), but mainly expressed with the term majāz. Among the extant lexical tafsīr in this period are Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān of al-Farrā’, Majāz al-Qur’ān of Abū ‘Ubaydah, and later Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān of Ibn Qutaybah.122 The process of tafsīr compilation with isnād reached its culmination with Ibn Jarīr al-T.abarī. His tafsīr belonged to the category of tafsīr bi ’l-ma’thūr. Immediately after putting the verse - partly or wholly - he explained it by paraphrasing and mentioning oral traditions from the s.ah.abah or tābi‘ī with full isnād. He evaluated them, especially if two or more meanings or variant readings were involved, and gave his opinion, although he was against al-tafsīr bi’l-ra’y. He gave his own legal judgement from the Qur’ānic verses, as he had a madhhab of his own.

As a compiler, al-T.abarī also included some contradictory traditions and isrā’ilīyāt, all with their isnād in his tafsīr. For example, he mentioned a tradition from Mu‘āwiyah from ‘Alī ibn T.alh.ah from Ibn ‘Abbās who said that the meaning of in Q. 2:260123 is (cut them into pieces). Then 121. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, pp. 208-9; H.ajji Khalīfah, Kashf al-Z.unūn ‘an Asāmī ’l-Kutub wa ’l-Funūn (Lexicon), edited by Gustavus Fluegel, 7 vols. (Leipzig and London: Published for the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland, 1835-1856), vol. 2, pp. 334-335; and al-Dhahābī, al-Tafsīr wa ’l-Mufassirūn, vol. 1, pp.

77-81. One of the prominent authorities on tafsīr in this period, ‘Amir Abū ‘Amr al-Sha‘bī (d. 103/721), was reported to have rebuked Abū S.ālih.: “How could you interpret the Qur’ān when you cannot read it?” He was also reported to have told al-Suddī (al-Kabīr): “Beating your backside with a drum is better than this circle of yours.” With regard to al-D.ah.h.āk, he did not meet Ibn ‘Abbās, and he did not claim to have met him, but he met Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr at al-Rayy from whom he took Ibn ‘Abbās’s tafsīr. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 31.

122. See Wansbrough, Quranic Studies, pp. 218-27.

123. The verse runs as follows:

Asad

41

al-T.abarī mentioned another tradition that he was told by Muh.ammad ibn Sa‘īd, having heard it from his father, that he was told by his uncle who was told by his father from his father from Ibn ‘Abbās, that means َ (tie them up).124 Scholars’ objections to his tafsīr was that some of his and Pickthall translated it respectively as follows: “Said He: ‘Take, then four birds and teach them to obey thee’” and “(His Lord) said: Take four of the birds and cause them to incline unto thee,...” See Muh.ammad Asad, The Message of the Qur’ān, trans. and expl. (Gibraltar: Dār al-Andalus, 1984), p. 59; and Muh.ammad M. Pickthall, trans., The Glorious Qur’ān (New York: Muslim World League, 1977), p. 41.

124. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol 3, pp. 35-6. Accepting both meanings, Ibn Kathīr said that the birds were tied up, slaughtered, and cut into pieces. See al-S.ābūnī (ed.), Mukhtasar, vol. 1, p. 237. Ibn Qutaybah holds the same view based on his understanding of the texts. He states that the expression means (join them to you). Then the birds were cut into pieces. The ellipsis of the expression faqat..ti‘hunna (then cut them into pieces) is apparent in the verse (“then place them separately on every hill [around thee]”, Asad’s translation). The word juz’an means “in pieces”, namely, after the birds had been cut into pieces. A similar expression would be “Take this cloth and make it a banner on every lance of yours,” meaning, it has to be cut into pieces before the pieces are made into banners; see Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, p. 96; and idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 2, p. 593. Ibn al-Anbārī includes the term s.āra among the words which have opposite meanings. He states that the expression

means “I collected it” (

) as well as “I cut and separated

it” ( ); see Muh.ammad ibn Qāsim ibn al-Anbārī, Kitāb al-Ad.dād, edited from a unique transcript by M.A. Ibrāhīm (Kuwayt: Dār al-Turāth al-‘Arabī, 1960), p. 36.

The term s.urhunna is the language of Madīnah, Hijāz and Bas.rah, meaning “cause them to incline”. The variant reading s.irhunna is that of a group of people in Kūfah meaning “cut them into pieces”. But a group of grammarians of Kūfah state that in the Arabic language neither fas.urhunna nor fas.irhunna means “cut them into pieces”, but both mean “cause them to incline”. S.irhunna is the language of Hudhayl and Sālīm; see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 3, pp. 35-6. A. Y. Ali, rejecting the idea of slaughtering, translated s.urhunna as “tame them”, see A.Y. Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 106. Pickthall and Asad shared the same view and translated it respectively as “cause them to incline unto thee” and “teach them to obey thee” as mentioned above. However, the term of s.urhunna meaning “cut them into pieces”, according to Ibn ‘Abbās, agrees with that in the Nabatean language, see ‘Abd Allāh Ibn ‘Abbās, Kitāb Gharīb al-Qur’ān, verified and presented by Dr. Ah.mad Būlūt. (Cairo: Maktabat al-Zahrā’, 1993),p. 40. Nabatea or Nabatæa was an ancient Arab kingdom in South-West Asia, now West Jordan; see Abū

42

authorities were weak, such as al-Suddī al-S.aghīr and Juwaybir, and that it contained some isrā’iliyyāt which he acknowledged. However, these materials had their own valuable contribution to his tafsīr collection. It is said that it is in itself an encyclopedia of traditional commentary in which various views of religion during his time were recorded and critically evaluated.

Al-T.abarī’s method of writing tafsīr was followed by many commentators in later generations, such as Ibn ‘At.iyyah, Ibn Kathīr, and alSuyūt.ī. Ibn ‘At.iyyah was a grammarian, a philologist, a man of letters, a poet and a qād.ī in Andalusia. His work al-Muh.arrir al-Wajīz fī Tafsīr al-Kitāb al-‘Azīz (The Short Deliverer in the Commentary of the Glorious Book) was a collection of opinions mentioned by commentators of traditional commentary. It was praised by Ibn Khaldūn who considered it the first tafsīr in which traditions were critically scrutinised. All commentaries were abridged, and the most likely interpretations were selected.125 It was also praised by Ibn Taymiyyah who preferred it to al-Zamakhsharī’s al-Kashshāf, although al-T.abarī’s tafsīr is the soundest one.126 It is still in manuscripts consisting of ten volumes.

The second great commentator of traditional tafsīr after al-T.abarī was Ibn Kathīr whose agnomen was Abū al-Fidā. His work Tafsīr al-Qur’ān al-‘Az.īm contains commentaries from the salaf (the s.ah.ābah, tābi‘īn and tābi‘ī al-tābi‘īn) with isnād. He evaluated them and rejected the unsound ones. He mentioned the verse, explained it in simple language, gave shawāhid from other verses, or h.adīths to clarify the meaning, and rejected the isrā’iliyyāt.

Al-Suyūt.ī was a prolific writer. His work al-Durr al-Manthūr fī ’l-Tafsīr bi ’l-Ma’thūr (The Scattered Pearls in Traditional Exegesis) was a short copy of his Turjumān al-Qur’ān. However, another and more popular exegesis was Tafsīr al-Jalālayn written by his teacher Jalāl al-Dīn al-Mah.allī (d. 863/1459) and later continued by himself. Al-Mah.allī started al-Qāsim ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il al-Wāridah fī ’l-Qur’ān al-Kariīm: Riwāyat ‘an al-S.ah.ābī ’l-Jalīil Ibn ‘Abbās, Rad.iya Allāh ‘anhu. Edited, commented and annotated by Dr. ‘Abd al-H.amīd al-Sayyid T.alab. Kuwayt: Mat.bū‘āt Jāmi‘at alKuwayt, 1985, pp. 61-62, n. 2.

125. Ibn Khaldūn, Muqaddimah, vol. 2, p. 446.

126. See Ibn Taymīyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 13, p. 388.

43

his tafsīr from the beginning of chapter 18 (sūrat al-Kahf) till the end (sūrat al-Nās), including chapter 1 (sūrat al-Fātih.ah), then he passed away.

Al-Suyūt.ī continued the work from chapter 2 (sūrat al-Baqarah) till chapter 17 (sūrat al-Isrā’). The book is not purely traditional as it lacks isnād.

Another leading commentator after al-T.abarī was Mah.mūd ibn ‘Umar al-Zamakhsharī (538/1143-1144) whose agnomen was Jār Allāh.

Contrary to his contemporary Ibn ‘At.iyyah who was a Mālikī Sunnī, al-Zamakhsharī was a H.anafī Mu‘tazilī. His tafsīr entitled al-Kashshāf ‘an H.aqā’iq al-Tanzīl (The Unveiler of the Realities of the Revelation) was a purely rational commentary. The characteristic of this tafsīr is that it offers brief explanation, contains no isrā’iliyyāt, largely relies on Arabic expression and philological interpretation of the Qur’ān through his mastery of Arabic language. In addition, it uses a question-and-answer dialogue style “if you say...” (fa’in qulta ...) “I would say...” (qultu...). His main interest was in the rhetoric of the Qur’ān which was neglected by al-T.abarī. As a Mu‘tazilī he put great efforts in interpreting the Qur’an in such a way as to suit the Mu‘tazilī theology in general, and in Allah’s abolute oneness and justice in particular. For example, the verse meaning “Some faces will on that Day be bright with happiness, looking up to their Sustainer” (Q. 75:22-23, Asad) indicates that Muslims will see Allah in the Hereafter. But as a Mu‘tazilī, al-Zamakhsharī did not believe in seeing Allah in the Hereafter, because He is spiritual. Therefore, he explained the word nāz.irah stating that it has an idea of expectation, like the word muntaz.irah (expecting), giving an example in the expression (I am looking forward to what So-and-so will do to me).127 These verses belong to the category of the mutashābihāt according to the Mu‘tazilīs, whereas verses that agree with their view are placed by them into the category of muh.kamāt (clear verses), such as the following verse: “No human vision can encompass Him, whereas He emcompasses all human vision: for He alone is unfathomable, all-aware.” (Q. 6:103, Asad). Similarly, al-Zamakhsharī 127. Abū al-Qāsim Mah.mūd ibn ‘Umar al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf ‘an H.aqā’iq al-Tanzīl, ed. by W. Nassau Lees et al. with continuous pagination, 2 vols. (Calcutta: Mat.ba‘at al-Līsī, 1856), vol. 2, p. 157.

44

explained the term kursī (throne) in the verse which means “His throne doth extend over the heavens and the earth...”

(Q. 2:255, Ali). He gave four interpretations on this verse, three metaphorically, namely, Allah’s greatness, knowledge, and power, and one literally which was a report that Allah created a throne beside the ‘Arsh (the Throne) under which were the sun and the moon, or, as reported by alH.asan, the Throne itself.128 In the second half of the sixth century A.H. a Sunnī commentator, Fakhr al-Dīn al-Rāzī (d. 606/1209), wrote his tafsīr called Mafātīh. al-Ghayb (The Keys of the Unknown). Since he was interested in philosophy and scientific explanation of the universe, he explained verses which refer to nature and its phenomena, such as rain and earthquake. As a Shāfi‘ī follower, he explained the legal prescriptions of the Qur’an according to this school, although he also mentioned other madhhabs. As a Sunnī he refuted the Mu‘tazilīs’ use of reasoning and tradition to support their view. He mentioned asbāb al-nuzūl more often, but he did not go into the details of rhetoric or grammar. He used istit.rād (digression) so much that his tafsīr contained many subjects which were not necessarily logically related. It is not surprising that it was said in exaggeration that his tafsīr contains everything except tafsīr.129 The frequent use of istinbat. (deduction) in his approach strongly emphasises the rationalistic nature of his commentary.

He wrote his tafsīr until sūrat al-Anbiyā’ (chapter 21), about half of the Qur’ān. The work was continued by his student Shihāb al-Dīn al-Khāwī, then by Najm al-Dīn al-Qāmūlī, probably from the notes of his lectures.

At the seventh/thriteenth century another Sunnī commentator appeared, al-Bayd.āwī (d. 685/1286 or 691/1292). His work Anwār al-Tanzīl wa Asrār al-Ta’wīl (The Lights of the Revelation and the Mysteries of the Ta’wīl) is a mixture of traditional and rational commentaries. He took the tafsīr from al-Zamakhsharī and selected from him his own tafsīr by removing from it most of the Mu‘tazilī theology, such as the expression (praise be to Allah Who created the Qur’ān), since as a Sunnī he did not believe in the creation of the Qur’ān. The remaining Mu‘tazilī ideas were debated by him by presenting the Sunnī commentary, consulting 128. Ibid., vol. 1, p. 170 129. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 213.

45

and using the similar method used by al-Rāzī and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī in their tafsīr books. In presenting variant readings, he used the term wa fī qirā’ah (and in another variant reading) and wa qīla (and it is said) for the variant reading he approved and doubted respectively. He took great interest in grammar and the Shāfi‘ī fiqh to which he belonged. Following al-Zamakhsharī’s method he cited h.adīth at the end of each sūrah mentioning its value.

One of the major Shī‘ī books on tafsīr is the work of Abū ‘Alī alFad.l al-T.abarsī (d. 496/1153 or 538/1144) entitled Majma‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān (The Collection of the Explanation on the Commentary of the Qur’ān). As a Mu‘tazilī follower, he expanded the Mu‘tazilī thought, and as a Shī‘ī, he gave more symbolic (allegorical) commentary in his tafsīr.

For example, after giving the interpretation of the verse “Then We raised you up after your death so that you might give thanks” (Q. 2:56) he stated that according to some people among the upholders of the Shī‘ī school, this verse proved that the raj‘ah (return after occultation) was a possible occurrence for some people. This is because the manifestation of miracles among imāms and saints (awliyā’) is possible.130 He gives a different interpretation of the term al-ghayb in the verse (“Those who believe in the unseen” Q. 2:3) and supports the view of Ibn Mas‘ūd and a group of people among the s.ah.ābah that the word al-ghayb here means what is unknown to people. This is because this interpretation is more general and includes the time of al-Mahdi’s occultation (ghaybah) and return (raj‘ah).131 Among the Ismā‘ilī Shī‘īs it is worth-mentioning Ismā‘īl ibn Hibat Allāh (d. 1173-4/1760). His tafsīr is entitled Mizāj al-Tasnīm (The Mixture of Tasnīm).132 For the Ismā‘ilīs the ostensible meaning of the Qur’ān is only 130. Abū ‘Alī al-Fad.l ibn al-H.asan al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān, 10 vols. in 5 bindings (S.aydā: Mat.ba‘at al-‘Irfān, 1333/[1915]), vol. 1, p.

115.

131. Ibid., p. 38. This Shī‘ā view is also obvious in his commentary on the “light verse” (Q. 24:35) where he quoted the statement of the Shī‘ī eighth imām, ‘Alī al-Rid.ā (d. 203/818), that the mishkāt (the niche) is the Shī‘ī community, and the mis.bāh. (the lamp) is Prophet Muh.ammad. See ibid., vol. 7, p. 143.

132. The title is derived from the Qur’ānic verse

“And

mixed with the water of Tasnīm” (Q. 83:27). This mixture of pure wine and Tasnīm is

46

the symbol of its inner meaning. Therefore, the whole Qur’ān is mutashābihāt and in need of interpretation which is known only by their imāms. One example of this esoteric interpretation (al-tafsīr al-bāt.in) of the Qur’ān attributed to Ibn Hawshab al-Kūfī (d. 266/880) is as follows: “The seven verses of the sūra [i.e., sūrat al-Fātih.ah (chapter 1)] symbolise the seven degrees of religion. The sūra of Praise [i.e. sūrat al-H.amd, another name for sūrat al-Fātih.ah] opens the Book of God, and similarly the degrees of religion open the door of knowledge in God’s religion.”133 The idea of inner meaning was derived from the following verse: “.... And thereupon a wall will be raised between them [and the believers], with a gate in it: within it [bāt.inuhu] will be grace and mercy, and against the outside thereof [z.āhiruhu], suffering.” (Q. 57:13, Asad).134 One of the compilers of the allegorical tafsīr was Abū ‘Abd alRah.mān al-Sulamī (d. 412/1021). His work Haqā’iq al-Tafsīr (The Realities of Interpretation) contained neither philological explanation nor traditional commentary, despite his recognition of its validity. He confined himself exclusively to the symbolic meanings of the Qur’ānic verses which had not previously been compiled and the sayings of the s.ūfīs and other important personalities, such as al-H.allāj (ex. 309/922) and Ja‘far al-S.ādiq (d.

148/756).135 An example of al-Sulamī’s tafsīr is the interpretation of the for as.h.āb al-yamīn (those of the right hand, i.e., people who will enter Paradise in general), while the pure water of Tasnīm is for al-muqarrabīn (those who are brought near unto their Lord, i.e., people who will enter Paradise with the privilege of being near to God). See al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.ar Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 616.

133 Translated from edition of Arabic text by Kamil Hussein in Collectanea of the Isma’ili Society (Leiden: N.p., 1948), vol. 1, p. 189, quoted by John Alden Williams (ed.), Islam (New York: George Braziller, 1961), p. 235.

134 See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 2, p. 74.

135. Al-H.allāj was reported to have said (I am the Truth), and Ja‘far alS.ād.iq was reported to have fallen down and lost consciousness while he was performing his prayer. When he was asked what happened, he said that he kept on repeating a Qur’ānic verse until he heard it spoken by its Speaker. See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 2, pp. 91 and 87. However, Ibn Taymiyyah said that a large number of sayings attributed to Ja‘far al-S.ādiq were not authentic; see Ibn Taymiyyah, al-Rasā’il al-Munīriyyah, vol. 1, p. 230, quoted by Jullandri, “Qur’ānic Exegesis and Classical

47

verse )٦٦ “Yet if We were to ordain for them, ‘Lay down your lives,’ or, ‘Forsake your homelands,’ only a very few of them would do it...” (Q. 4:66, Asad).

The word (lay down your lives) and (forsake your homelands) mean respectively that Prophet Moses asked his people “to kill their selves” and “to remove worldly love from their hearts”.136 When the mystical commentary of the s.ūfīs was denounced by the ‘ulamā’, al-Ghazālī (d. 504/1111) came to the rescue. Being himself a s.ūfī, he said that the words of the Qur’ān belong to “the world of humanity”, whereas their meanings belong to what he called “the world of angels”. He contended that man cannot reach the truth because of the weakness of his faith, his lust for wordly things and his adherence to the literal meaning of the Qur’ān which can only be revealed to the elect through intuition.

Defending the mystical interpretation of the Qur’ān through intuition which occurs when reason stops, he said: “Why should it be impossible that beyond reason there should be a further plane, on which appear things which do not appear on the plane of the intelligence, just as it is possible for the intelligence itself to be a plane above the discriminating faculty and senses?”137 Apart from the mystical interpretation used by the s.ūfīs, Muh.yī ’l-Dīn ibn ‘Arabī (d. 638/1240) and later his student ‘Abd al-Razzāq al-Kāshānī (d.

730/1330) used another category of mystical tafsīr, namely, (speculative or theosophical commentary). Without openly rejecting the obvious meanings of the verses, they went further with their speculative interpretation to support the idea of (Unity of Being). Ibn ‘Arabī’s tafsīr was lost, but we can find some glimpse of it in his works al-Futūh.āt al-Makkiyyah and Fus.ūs. al-H.ikam. He was charged by some ‘ulamā’ like Ibn Taymiyyah and al-Taftāzānī with heresy, and his idea of h.ulūl Tafsīr”, IQ xii (1968), p. 109.

136. MS. no. 50 fol. 48, Dār al-Kutub al-Mis.rī, Cairo, p. 78, quoted by Jullandri, “Qur’ānic Exegesis”, p. 109.

137. Al-Gazālī, Mishkāt al-Anwār, ed. Abū al-‘Alā’ ‘Afīfī (Cairo: Dār al-Qawmīyah lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1383/1964), pp. 77-8; and W.H.T. Gairdner, Al-Ghazzali’s Mishkāt al-Anwār (“The Niche for Lights”), a translation with introduction (Lahore: Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, 1952), pp. 146-147.

48

(substantial union of a divine spirit with man) and as heretical.

However, some others defended him, such as al-Fīrūzābādī and al-Suyūt.ī.138 An example of this speculative commentary is the verse “And He is with you wherever you may be...” (Q. 57:4, Asad) which is explained by al-Kāshānī in his Ta’wīlāt al-Qur’ān (The Interpretations of the Qur’ān) as “God is everywhere because He created His existence everywhere”. This Ta’wīlāt was mistakenly ascribed to Ibn ‘Arabī.

In this chapter a glimpse of some literature related to the study of Ibn Qutaybah’s contribution to Qur’ānic exegesis, a short synopsis of Ibn Qutaybah’s life, political, social and cultural conditions in his life as well as a glimpse of early Qur’ānic exegesis have been presented. We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah was born when the ‘Abbāsī dynasty reached its ultimate glory and prosperity under al-Ma‘mūn in the first half of the third century A.H. He witnessed the government's shifting from the Mu‘tazilī theological school to the Sunnī orthodoxy under al-Mutawakkil as the madhhab of the state. He found himself in line with the new trend and became a champion and an advocate of the Sunnī orthodoxy. He defended the Qur’ān and the Sunnah against philosophic scepticism and heresies in his time through his writings.

138

138.T.H. Weir, “Ibn ‘Arabi”, SEI, p. 146 and Jullandri, “Qur’ānic Exegesis”, pp. 113-114.

49

CHAPTER II IBN QUTAYBAH'S REFUTATION OF ALLEGATIONS OF SOLECISM, CONTRADICTION AND AMBIGUITY IN THE VERSES OF THE QUR’ĀN A. Variant Readings in the Qur’ān There has never been any disagreement among the ‘ulamā’ that the Qur'ān was revealed in seven ah.ruf (lit., "letters"), as it was reported by many s.ah.ābah, such as ‘Umar, ‘Uthmān, Ubayy ibn Ka‘b, Abū Hurayrah, ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Abbās, and ‘Abd Allāh ibn Mas‘ūd139 in many h.adīths.

One of these h.adīths runs as follows: [from ‘Umar b. al-Khat.t.āb] I heard Hishām b. H.ākim140 recite the sūra of the Furqān (25) during the lifetime of the Messenger of God, may God bless him and grant him peace. I listened to his recitation, and [noticed that] he was reciting according to many h.arfs in which the Messenger of God had never had me recite. I was about to grab hold of him in [the middle of his] prayer, but I waited till he had recited the final salutations. When he had finished, I seized him by his robe and said: 'Who taught you to recite the sūra which I have just heard you recite?' He said: 'The Messenger of God taught me to recite it.' I said: 'You are lying. By God, the Messenger of God himself taught me to recite this sūra which I have just heard you recite.'

So I hurriedly took him to the Messenger of God and said: 'O Messenger of God, I have heard this man recite the sūra of the Furqān in 139.

Al-Suyūt.ī mentions also other s.ah.ābah, all twenty-one in number, see alItqān, vol. 1, p. 131. Ibn al-Jazarī also mentions the same names, but excludes Sulaymān ibn Surād, see al-Nashr fī ’l-Qira’āt al-‘Ashr, ed. by Muh.ammad ‘Alā’ alD.abbā’ (Egypt: al-Maktabah al-Tijāriyyah al-Kubrá, n.d.), vol. 1, p. 21.

140.

Hishām ibn H.ākim ibn H.izām ibn Khuwaylid al-Qurashī al-Asadī was one of the s.ah.ābah. He belonged to the Quraysh tribe of Banī Asad (ibn Khuzaymah); see Ibn H.ajar al-‘Asqalānī, Kitāb al-Is.ābah fī Tamyīz al-S.ah.ābah 4 vols. (Baghdād: Dār al‘Ulūm al-H.adīthah, n.d.), vol. 3, p. 603.

50

h.arfs in which you never taught me to recite, and it was you yourself who taught me to recite the sūra of the Furqān.' (...) The Messenger of God said: 'Let him go, ‘Umar; and you Hishām, recite.' So he recited for him the recitation I had heard him recite and the Messenger of God said: 'It was sent down like that.' Then the Messenger of God said: '[Now] you recite, ‘Umar', and I recited it as the Messenger of God had taught me. Then the Messenger of God said: 'It was sent down like that.' Then the Messenger of God said: 'Indeed, this Qur'ān was sent down in seven h.arfs. You should recite whichever comes easily to you.'[15]141

But the ‘ulamā’ have different opinions on the meaning of the term ah.ruf in these h.adīths. According to al-H.āfiz. Abū H.ātim ibn al-H.ayyān alBustī (d. 354/965) as reported by al-Qurt.ubī, there are 35 different opinions, but al-Qurt.ubī himself mentions five opinions only.142 The term h.arf (pl. ah.ruf) means "an edge", "an aspect", "a boundary", "a margin", "a side", and "a part of something". A letter is called h.arf because it is a part of the alphabet.143 The example of the word h.arf meaning wajh (an aspect, a side) in the Qur’ān is as follows: "And there is, too, among men many a one who worships God on the border-line [of faith]: thus, if good befalls him, he is satisfied with Him, but if a trial assails him, he turns away utterly,..." (Q. 22:11, Asad). Here worshipping Allah when one is only in favourable conditions or in doubt is called "worshipping Allah one-sidedly".144 141.

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 10; John Cooper, The Commentary of the Qur’ān

by Abū Ja‘far Muh.ammad b. Jarīr al-T.abarī, being an Abridged Translation of Jāmi‘ al-Bayān ‘an Ta’wīl Ay al-Qur’ān, with introduction and notes (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987), vol. 1, p. 17; Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 34-35; and al-Bukhārī, S.ah.īh., vol. 6, p. 100.

142.

Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, pp. 42-46. Al-Suyūt.ī says that there are forty different opinions, but he mentions sixteen opinions only, then he mentions the thirtyfive different opinions given by Ibn H.ibbān al-Bustī, see al-Itqān, vol. 1, pp. 131-141.

143.

Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, vol. 1, p. 23.

144.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 35-6. Lane's translation of the above verse is as follows: "And of men is he who serves God standing aloof with respect to religion, in fluctuating state, like him who is in the outskirts of the army, who, if sure of victory and spoil, stands firm, and otherwise flees." See Edward W. Lane, Arabic-English Lexicon,

51

As many different views exist concerning what the seven ah.ruf correspond to, some important ones are mentioned here, as follows: a. As the term ah.ruf is applicable to the alphabet, the word, the meaning and the side, it is considered ambiguous, so the seven ah.ruf is ambiguous.

This is the view of the grammarian Ibn Sa‘dān.145 b. They are the seven dialects of the Arabs in which the Qur’ān was revealed, among which was the dialect of the Quraysh. The other dialects are those of the Hudhayl, Thaqīf, Hawāzin, Kinānah, Tamīm, and Yamān.146 This is the correct view according to al-Bayhaqī. However, according to Abū H.ātim al-Sijistānī, the seven dialects are: the Quraysh, Hudhayl, Tamīm, al-Azd, Rabī‘ah, Hawāzin, and Sa‘d ibn Bakr. Ibn Qutaybah, who rejects this view, insists that the Qur’an was revealed in the language of the Quraysh, citing the Qur’anic verse: "And never have We sent forth any apostle otherwise than [with a message] in his own people's tongue, …" (Q. 14:4, Asad).147 c. They are the seven categories of the contents of the Qur’ān, namely: nahy (prohibiting), amr (commanding), h.alāl (lawful), h.arām (unlawful), muh.kam (clear), mutashābih (ambiguous), and amthāl (parables).

Another view is that they are: amr, zajr (reprimand), targhīb (encouragement of good), tarhīb (discouragement of evil), jadal (dialectic), qas.as. (narrative), and mathal (parable, pl. amthāl)148. Yet another view is that they are: wa‘d (promise), wa‘īd (threat), h.alāl, h.arām, mawā‘iz. (exhortations), amthāl, and ih.tijāj (protest). Several categories are also included by some scholars, such as nāsikh (abrogating) and mansūkh (abrogated). d. They are dialectal readings for a single expression or a single word, with different vowelisations, but have the same meaning, such as the Book 1, 8 pts. with continuous pagination (New York: Fredrick Ungar Publishing Co., 1956), pt. 2, p. 550. For further details, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp. 93-94; see also J. Cooper, Commentary, vol. 1, pp. 29-30.

145.

Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 131.

146.

147.

148.

Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, vol. 1, p. 24.

Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 135.

The two views are based on h.adīth, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 24; and J. Cooper, Commentary, vol. 1, p. 29.

52

expression "come!" can be expressed in many different dialects, such as: halumma, aqbil, ta‘āl, iyyāya, qas.dī, nah.wī, and qurbī. This view is attributed by Ibn ‘Abd al-Barr to the majority of the ‘ulamā’, pointing out the h.adīth reported by Ah.mad and al-T.abrānī on the authority of Abū Bakrah, as follows: The Prophet said: "Gabriel said: 'O Muh.ammad, recite the Qur’ān according to one h.arf.' Michael said: 'Request more [than this for him].' He said: '[Recite] according to two h.arfs.' [This continued] until it reached seven ah.ruf. Each one is curative and sufficient - as long as one does not finish up a verse of punishment with a verse of mercy, or a verse of mercy with one of punishment - as if one were to say ta‘āl, aqbil, and halumma (all meaning 'come')..."149 This type of variant reading was permitted at first, since it was difficult for the early Muslims to recite the Qur’ān with one reading due to their illiteracy and lack of ability to grasp and memorise the Qur’ānic verses perfectly. For example, Ibn Mas‘ūd was reported to have read to an unidentified person the verse "Verily, [in the life to come] the tree of deadly fruit will be the food of the sinful." (Q. 44:43-4, Asad). But the man read t.a‘ām alyatīm ("the food of the orphan"). When Ibn Mas‘ūd failed to correct him, he said: "Can you read t.a‘ām al-fājir ("the food of the insolent)?"

When the man said "yes", he said: "So, do it!" Later, when the one reading became easy for people, these variant readings became abrogated. This is the view of Sufyān ibn ‘Uyaynah, Ibn Wahb, Ibn ‘Abd al-Barr, al-T.ah.āwī, al-Bāqillānī, al-T.abarī and others.150 In other words, in the early period of Islam, those Arabs who could not memorise or recite correctly the Qur’ān, due to reasons such as illiteracy and lack of memory or ability to articulate properly, were temporarily permitted to recite it in their own words and languages, provided that they did not change the meaning. Once they could recite it properly as taught by the Prophet, they had to adhere to it, and their former readings became abrogated and later called qirā’āt munkarah ("rejected

149.

J. Cooper's translation, see Cooper, Commentary, vol. 1, p. 21; see also alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 134.

150.

Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, pp. 134-135. According al- al-T.abarī, the person was Abū al-Dardā’ rather than Ibn Mas‘ūd, see Jāmi‘, vol. 25, p. 78

53

readings"). This is apparently what al-T.abarī meant when he stated that the ‘Uthmānic recension contained one reading only. e. They are seven variant readings based on seven aspects. According to Ibn Qutaybah, they are as follows: 1. The variant i‘rāb (desinential or grammatical inflection, rules governing vowel endings) of the word or the vowelisation of its letters which changes neither its s.ūrah (form) nor its meaning, such as the reading wa hal yujāzá illā ’l-kafūru, meaning "Is ever any requited [thus] but the utterly ingrate?" instead of wa hal nujāzī illā ’l-kafūra, meaning "But do We ever requite [thus] any but the utterly ingrate?"

(Q. 34:17, Asad). Both readings convey the same idea and meaning, namely, only the ingrate - like the people of Sheba whose ungratefulness led to the downfall of their kingdom Sheba, as mentioned in the previous verses - will be requitted by Allah.151 The first reading belonged to Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘, Abū ‘Amr and Ibn ‘Āmir, while the second reading belonged to H.amzah, al-Kisā’ī, H.afs. and ‘Ās.im.152 2. The variant i‘rāb of the word and the vowelisation of its letters which change its meaning only, not its s.ūrah, such as the reading of rabbunā (in the nominative) and bā‘ada (in the indicative) instead of rabbanā (in the vocative) and bā‘id (in the imperative) in the verse rabbunā bā‘ada bayna asfārinā, meaning "long has our Sustainer made the distance between our journey-stages!" instead of rabbanā bā‘id bayna asfārinā, meaning "Our Sustainer! Make long the distances between 151.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 36.

See Abū Bakr Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah fī ’l-Qirā’at, verified by Dr. Shawqī D.ayf, 2nd ed. (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1400/[1979-1980]), pp. 528-529. AlFarrā’ also mentions the two variant readings without giving any details of it, see Abu Zakariyā Yah.yá al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, ed. A.Y. Najātī and M.A. al-Najjār , 3 vols. (Egypt: al-Hay’ah al-Mis.riyyah al-‘Āmmah lil-Kuttāb, 1972-1980), vol. 2, p. 359.

Another example is the verse wa ya’murūna ’l-nāsa bi ’l-bakhli instead of bi ’l-bukhli; both have the same meaning, namely, "and bid others to be niggardly" (Q. 4:37 and 57:24, Asad). The mas.dar (verbal noun) bakhal is the root of the verb bakhila and bakhala, whereas bukhl is that of bakhula. The other similar variant reading is ilá maysurah instead of ilá maysarah (Q. 2:280), see Ibn Qutaybah Ta’wīl, p. 36; it is like the terms maqbarah and maqburah, and mashraqah and mashruqah, see alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 181.

152.

54

our journey-stages." (Q. 34:19, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah, these two variant readings serve dual purposes: describing the prayer of the people of Sheba (Saba’) and the answer to this prayer.153 The first reading belonged to Abū S.ālih., Muh.ammad ibn al-H.anafīyah, Abū al‘Āliyah, Nas.r ibn ‘Ās.im and Ya‘qūb. It was also reported that Ibn ‘Abbās said that the people of Sheba complained that Allah had made their journey-stages long, although Allah had shortened the journey for them. They made this statement arrogantly and discontentedly ( ). This reading was chosen by Abū H.ātim who said that the people of Sheba did not ask Allah to lengthen their journey-stages but rather to shorten them.154 The second reading was that of the masses (qirā’at ’l-‘āmmah) according to al-Qurt.ubī. It was the reading of Nāfi‘, ‘Ās.im, Ibn ‘Āmir, H.amzah and al-Kisā’ī according to Ibn Mujāhid.155 3. The variant letters of the word which change its meaning only without changing its i‘rāb and s.ūrah, such as wa’nz.ur ilá ’l-‘iz.āmi kayfa nunshiruhā, meaning "and look at the bones how We revive them", instead of kayfa nunshizuhā, meaning "how We put them together" (Q. 2:259, Asad).156 The first reading belonged to Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘ and 153.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 36-37 and 41. Another example cited by Ibn Qutaybah which belongs to this category of variant reading is the reading of Ibn ‘Abbās wa’ddakara ba‘da amahin, meaning "and he remembered after forgetting" instead of wa’ddakara ba‘da ummatin, meaning "he remembered after a long period of time" (Q. 12:46). The two readings mean that the man who had been released from prison remembered the case of Prophet Joseph after a period of time and after he had forgotten it. Both readings, Ibn Qutaybah asserts, were revealed to the Prophet to include these two meanings, ibid., pp. 37 and 40.

154.

See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, pp. 290-291. The first reading is also chosen by Asad in translating the verse in question, see The Message, p. 34.

155.

See al-Qur t.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 290; Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p.

529. Apart from the variant readings rabbanā bā‘id and rabbunā bā‘ada, al-Farrā’ also mentions rabbanā ba‘‘id, rabbanā ba‘uda, and rabbunā ba‘‘ada, see Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 359-360. They are all written in one rasm, namely .

156.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 37 and 41. Another example is the reading of furrigha ‘an qulūbihim, meaning "fear is emptied [i.e., freed] from their hearts" instead of fuzzi‘a ‘an qulūbihim, meaning "the terror [of the Last Hour] is lifted from their hearts." (Q. 34:23, Asad), see ibid., pp. 37 and 42. The latter reading belongs to the

55

Abū ‘Amr, whereas the second belonged to ‘Ās.im, Ibn ‘Āmir, H.amzah and al-Kisā’ī.157 4. The variant words which change the s.ūrah, but not the meaning, such as the variant reading of Ibn Mas‘ūd as well as ‘Abd al-Rah.mān ibn alAswad in kānat illā zaqyatan wahidah instead of s.ayh.atan wāh.idah both readings mean "Nothing was [needed] but one single blast [of Our punishment]" (Q. 36:29, Asad), since the word zaqyah is the synonym of s.ayh.ah (lit. "a shout").158 5. The variant words which change its s.ūrah and meaning, such as ‘Alī's reading of wa t.al‘in mand.ūd, meaning "and a clustered spadix" instead of wa t.alh.in mand.ūd, meaning "and a clustered acacia" (Q.56:29).159 However, according to Abū Bakr al-Anbārī, ‘Alī went back to the Qur’ān (‘Uthmānic recension) accepting that wa t.alh.in was the right reading. When it was read to him wa t.alh.in mand.ūd he said: "Why don't you read wa t.al‘in?" and cited the verse lahā t.al‘un nad.īd "(and tall-palm-trees) with their thickly clustered dates." (Q. 50:10, Asad).

Qays ibn ‘Abbād said to him: "O Prince of the believers, shall we rub it off from the mus.h.af?" He answered: "Today the Qur’ān (meaning the ‘Uthmānic recension) is not to be disturbed ( )."160 seven qurrā’ except Ibn ‘Āmir who read fazza‘a; see Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p.

530.

157.

See Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 189.

158.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 37; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 18 and al-Qur t.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 21. Another example is the reading of ka ’l-s.ūf al-manfūsh instead of ka ’l-‘ihn al-manfūsh, both have the same meaning, namely, "like fluffy tufts of wool."

(Q. 101:5, Asad), see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 37.

159.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 37. Instead of wa t.al‘in mand.ūd, Ibn al-Jazarī who quoted Ibn Qutaybah's view mistakenly put wa t.al‘in nad.īd which he himself rejected and said that this reading has nothing to do with the varying of readings (

); see Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, vol. 1, pp. 27-28. Al-Suyūt.ī correctly quoted the same variant reading, see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 132.

160.

In another report when ‘Alī was asked whether the term wa t.alh.in should be replaced with wa t.al‘in in the mus.h.af, he answered: "The Qur’ān should be neither disturbed nor replaced" (

); see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17,

56

6. The variant reading by means of inversion ( ), such as Abū Bakr's reading of wa jā’at sakrat ’l-h.aqq bi ’l-mawt, meaning "and the agony of truth comes in death," instead of wa jā’at sakrat ’lmawt bi ’l- h.aqq, meaning "and the agony of death comes in truth." (Q. 50:19, Pickthall).161 Al-Qurt.ubī states that Ibn Mas‘ūd also read the above verse the same as the reading of Abū Bakr and that we should not follow this reading. He contends that there are two reports about Abū Bakr's reading: one which is the same as the one in the mus.h.af, and that is what we should follow, and the other is what is mentioned above and should be rejected; probably he forgot when he read that reading, or the narrator might have made mistakes in narrating this report. Moreover, as reported by Abū Bakr al-Anbārī, Masrūq said that when Abū Bakr was dying, he called his daughter ‘Ā’ishah. When she saw him she said: "This is like what the poet said: ‘... a day when she rattled in her throat (in dying) and the heart became annoyed with it'". Abū Bakr told her: "Why don't you read wa jā’at sakrat ’l-mawt bi ’l- h.aqq?" Here he did not read the verse with inversion.162 7. The variant reading by means of addition and omission , such as ‘amilat (with the omission of h) instead of ‘amilathu in the verse wa mā ‘amilathu aydīhim, meaning "and their hands made it not" (Q. 36:35).163 The first reading belonged to H.amzah, and alKisā’ī, whereas the second belonged to Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘, Abū ‘Amr, pp. 208-209.

161.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 24 and 37; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 26, p. 100.

162.

See Abū al-Fidā Ismā‘īl Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr al-Qur’ān al-‘Az.īm, with introduction by Dr. Yusūf ‘Abd al-Rah.mān al-Mur‘ishī, 4 vols. (Beirut: Dār alMa‘rifah, 1407/1987), vol. 4, p. 240; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp. 12-13. It is also the view of Ibn H.azm that the above variant reading of Abū Bakr belonged to the category of the qira’āt munkarah. He asserts that anybody other than the Prophet could make mistakes and should not be followed; see Abū Muh.ammad ‘Alī Ibn H.azm, alIh.kām fī Us.ūl al-Ah.kām, ed. Ah.mad Shākir, 8 vols. in 2 bindings (Cairo: Mat.ba‘at al‘Ās.imah, n.d.), vol. 4, p. 537.

163.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 38.

57

Ibn ‘Āmir and H.afs. who took it from ‘Ās.im.164 Another example cited

by Ibn Qutaybah is the addition of unthá ("female") according to Ibn Mas‘ūd's variant reading at the end of the verse , meaning "Behold, this is my brother: he has ninety-nine ewes." (Q. 38:23, Asad).165 The variant readings which have different meanings as mentioned above belong to the category of ikhtilāf taghāyur (difference by variation) which serve as complements or commentary to the others. With regard to the variant readings which contradict each other which belong to the category of what Ibn Qutaybah called ikhtilāf tad.ādd (difference by contradiction) this kind of reading is not permissible; it does not exist except in verses dealing with injunction or prohibition among abrogating (nāsikh) and abrogated (mansūkh) verses.166 Although Muslim scholars have different interpretations regarding the meaning of the seven variant readings of the Qur’ān, they all agree to its validity as part of revelation. A question arises whether the seven variant readings are included in the present ‘Uthmānic recension. Some scholars among the fuqahā’ (Muslim jurists), qurrā’ (Qur’ān reciters), and mutakallimīn (Muslim scholastic theologians), such as Ibn H.azm, confirm it, contending that they are part of the revelation, and as such, are also preserved by Allah, based on the Qur’ānic verse: ".... Lo! We verily are its Guardian" (Q. 15:9).167 The second view is that of the great majority of the ‘ulamā’. They say that the ‘Uthmānic recension contains the seven variant readings which agree to the rasm (orthography) - also called s.ūrah or shakl (consonantal outline, consonantal skeleton) - of this recension only, compiled according

164.

See Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 540.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 38; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 174. The addition of unthā (female) and dhakar (male) for emphasis is common among the Arabs; they say, for example, ("this is a male man"), see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, 165.

vol. 23, p. 91.

166.

See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 40; and al-Tirmidhī, Sunan, vol. 5, pp. 193-194 (h.adīth no. 2943).

167.

Ibn H.azm, al-Ih.kām, vol. 4, pp. 520-521.

58

to the Prophet's last presentation of the Qur’ān to Gabriel.168 Any other variant reading which is different from the rasm of the ‘Uthmānic recension is unacceptable. Moreover, reading the variant readings based on dialects was permitted only in the beginning of Islam, when the Arabs had difficulty in using the Quraysh dialect.169 The third view is that of al-Qāsim ibn Farh. al-Shāt.ibī (d. 590/1194) who said that the seven ah.ruf were included in Abū Bakr’s compilation, but only one variant reading in the ‘Uthmānic recension.170 Based on this statement of Ibn Qutaybah, the possible readings are those belonging to aspect one (such as wa hal yujāzá illā ’l-kafūru instead of wa hal nujāzī illā ’l-kafūra) and two (such as rabbunā bā‘ada instead of rabbanā bā‘id), and probably also aspect three (such as nunshiruhā instead of nunshizuhā) of his categorization. However, according to Muslim scholars who advocate the seven variant readings based on the seven Arabic tribal dialects, the only remaining reading in the ‘Uthmānic recension is the language of the Quraysh tribe to which the Prophet and the people of Makkah belonged. Moreover, as mentioned earlier, the Prophet's order to read the Qur’ān with the seven variant readings was only permitted to ease the burden for the illiterate and non-Qurayshī Arabs with their different tribal dialects. ِAfter the death of the Prophet, the s.ah.ābah still read the Qur’ān in seven variant readings according to the readings they had received from him.

Disputes concerning these variant readings appeared and later became intense and almost caused fitnah (dissention), especially among Muslim armies stationed far away from Makkah and Madīnah. This happened in 30/651 during the campaign of Azerbaijan and Armenia when the people of Shām (Syria) and Iraq met and listened to each other's reading of the Qur’ān.

When they heard the difference in their readings they disagreed and almost accused each other of infidelity. In the meantime, the number of variant readings was increasing in the course of time until it reached about thirty, spreading throughout the Muslim lands.

This incident was witnessed by Hudhayfah al-Yamān who became alarmed and feared of the spread of this fitnah. He went back to Madīnah and told ‘Uthmān: "Rescue this community before they disagree like the 168.

Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, vol. 1, p. 31.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 42.

170.

See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, p. 223.

169.

59

disagreement among the Jews and the Christians." This news so shocked ‘Uthmān that he immediately acted accordingly.

It was to prevent this fitnah that ‘Uthmān ordered Zayd ibn Thābit, ‘Abd Allāh ibn al-Zubayr, Sa‘īd ibn al-‘Ās. and ‘Abd al-Rah.mān ibn alH.ārith ibn Hishām to copy the texts of the Qur’ān from the authorized copy kept by H.afs.ah, the Prophet's wife and ‘Umar's daughter. He said that if the three last scribes disagreed with the former (Zayd ibn Thābit) about the texts of the Qur’ān, they should write them in the dialect of the Quraysh, as the Qur’ān was revealed in their dialect.171 Then ‘Uthmān sent four copies to different cities accompanied with a qāri’: to Makkah with ‘Abd Allāh ibn alSā’ib, to Syria with al-Mughīrah ibn Shihāb, to Bas.rah with ‘Āmir ibn ‘Abd al-Qays, and to Kūfah with Abū ‘Abd al-Rah.mān al-Sulamī. In Madīnah two copies were kept, one with Zayd ibn Thābit, and another by ‘Uthmān for himself. These qurrā’ taught people in their respective cities the variant readings which had been confirmed being from the Prophet, reported by a h.adīth mutawātir (a h.adīth handed down by many chains of unimpeachable transmitters), and in agreement with the rasm of the copy (of the ‘Uthmānic recension) they possessed. They did not teach them the abrogated readings nor those which had been reported with a h.adīth āh.ād (a h.adīth reported by one chain of transmitters), although it agreed with the rasm of the copy. In so doing, the variant readings reported with tawātur and which agreed with the rasm of the copy were recorded and preserved. It was reported that ‘Uthmān also sent a copy to Yaman (Yemen) and Bahrayn. He ordered all other copies to be burnt, including the mus.h.af of Ibn Mas‘ūd and of Ubayy ibn Ka‘b.

As the ‘Uthmānic recension was written without dots and vowelisation it included all mutawātir readings from the Prophet, such as fatabayyanū (Q. 4:94) which was the reading of all qurrā’ (as in our present mus.h.af) except H.amzah who read fatathabbatū.172 Similarly, bushran (Q. 7:57) which was the reading of ‘Ās.im (as in our present mus.h.af) is also read nashran, which was the reading of A‘mash and H.amzah; bushr is the easing (takhfīf) of bushur, the broken plural of bashīr; nashr is the mas.dar of the

171.

172.

Ibn H.azm, al-Ih.kām, vol. 4, p. 523.

See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 337.

60

verb nashara (to spread).173 These variant readings were not the result of an ijtihād in finding possible readings in ‘Uthmānic recension, but rather from the readings taught by the Prophet himself to the s.ah.ābah. The s.ah.ābah, in turn, taught them to the people of the next generation, the tābi‘īn until they reached us. Abū ‘Amr ibn al-‘Alā’ (d. 154/771), who was one of the seven qurrā’ and one of the leading grammarians of Bas.rah, said that if he were allowed to read other than what had already been read and taught he would have read a different reading. When he was asked by al-As.ma‘ī how to make the distinction between wa taraknā ‘alayh (Q. 37:108) and wa bāraknā ‘alayh (Q. 37:113) since both were written orthographically the same in the ‘Uthmānic codices, he answered that it could only be known by hearing it from the early mashāyikh (scholars). This also indicates that variant readings had already existed earlier than the ‘Uthmānic recension, and therefore, were not the product of it.174 We have noticed that among the seven variant readings advocated by Ibn Qutaybah which could be included in the ‘Uthmānic recension are three readings only. They are those which do not change in the rasm, although they change in the i‘rāb, the meaning or the wording. What happens, then, with the rest of the variant readings? They are found in the books of tafsīr.

We have also noticed that there are many interpretations regarding the meaning of the term ah.ruf. The Qur’ānic commentators know that it has something to do with reading the Qur’ān, as the Prophet allowed us to read whichever is convenient for us among the seven ah.ruf. The term "seven" itself does not necessarily mean the exact number. It could be a metonym for "several", since this term is often synonymous with "several" in Arabic 173.

Al-Qurt.ubī mentions seven variant readings of bushran. They are: (1) bushran itself and (2) nashran, as mentioned above; (3) nushuran which was the reading of Abū ‘Amr and the people of the two holy cities, Makkah and Madinah; nushur is the broken plural of nāshir in the pattern of shāhid and shuhud; (4) nushran which was the reading of al-H.asan and Qatādah; nushr is the easing (takhfīf) of nushur, like reading kutb and rusl for respectively kutub and rusul; (5) bushrá which was the reading of Muh.ammad al-Yamānī; (6) bashran; bashr is the mas.dar of bashara which means bashshara (to bring good news); and (7) bushurá. Al-Qurt.ubī does not give us the names of the qurrā’ to whom the last two variant readings belong; see al-Jāmi‘, vol.

7, pp. 228-229.

174.

See the introduction of Dr. Shawqī D.ayf (ed.) in Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb alSab‘ah, p. 12.

61

usage. Likewise, the term "seventy" and "seven hundred" could mean respectively "many" and "very many."175 According to (al-Qād.ī) ‘Iyād. (d.

544/1149), the term "seven", "seventy", and "seven hundred" indicates the greatness in number of units, tens and hundreds respectively.176 It is not surprising, then, that the grammarian Ibn Sa‘dān (d.230/845) suggests that the term ah.ruf meant in the h.adīth is ambiguous.177 It is noteworthy to include the views of two contemporary scholars regarding the meaning of seven ah.ruf and their existence or non-existence in the ‘Uthmānic codices. They are Mannā‘ al-Qat.t.ān and Muh.ammad ‘Abd al-‘Az.īm al-Zarqānī. According to the contemporary scholar Mannā‘ alQat.t.ān the more acceptable view is that the seven ah.ruf are the seven languages of the Arabs for one meaning, such as aqbil, ta‘āl, halumma, ‘ajjil and asri‘. They are different words for one meaning, namely, "come!” This is the view of Sufyān ibn ‘Uyaynah and Ibn Jarīr al-T.abarī.

Among the arguments of followers of this view are as follows: (1). A man read a different reading from what ‘Umar had learned from the Prophet. The Prophet told them that both were correct, and said that the Qur’ān is correct as long as the verse of mercy is not substituted with that of punishment and vice versa. (Reported by Ah.mad ibn H.anbal with reliable transmitters as well as al-T.abarī).

(2) Busr ibn Sa‘īd said that Abū Juhaym al-Ans.ārī told him that two men disagreed on a verse, each claimed to have received it from the Prophet.

When they asked him about it he said that the Qur’ān was sent down with seven ah.ruf, that they should not dispute over the Qur’ān, for disputing over it could lead to infidelity (kufr). (Reported by Ah.mad).

(3). Al-A‘mash said that Anas read inna nāshi’at al-layl hiya ashaddu wat.’an wa as.wabu qīlā (Q. 73:6). When he was told that it should be wa aqwamu qīlā he said that aqwamu, as.wabu and ahya’u are the same.

(Reported by al-T.abarī, Abū Ya‘lā and al-Bazzār with sound transmitters).178 175.

See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 8, pp. 145-146.

176.

See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 131.

177.

Ibid.

Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 465.

178.

62

(4) The tābi‘ī Muh.ammad ibn Sīrīn said that he was told that Gabriel and Michael came to the Prophet. Gabriel told the Prophet to read the Qur’ān in two h.arfs. Michael told Gabriel to give him more which he did until it reached seven ah.ruf. Muh.ammad ibn Sīrīn said further that there is no variance of reading in the matters of h.alāl, h.arām, amr or nahy. It is like saying ta‘āl, halumma and aqbil. We read in kānat illā s.ayh.atan wāh.idah (Q. 36:29 and 53), whereas Ibn Mas‘ūd read in kānat illā zaqyatan wāh.idah. (Reported by al-T.abarī, the h.adīth is mursal as the name of the s.ah.ābah was not mentioned in the isnād).179 The argument against the view that the seven readings are seven languages (dialects) of the Arabs is that there are more than seven languages of the Arabs. In addition, ‘Umar and Hishām ibn H.ākim who had different readings belonged to the same Quraysh tribe and language. It was unlikely that ‘Umar would reject his own language. Therefore, the difference was in wording but the same in meaning as mentioned above.180 Al-T.abarī who has the same view answers a hypothetical question: "Where can we find in the Qur’ān a single reading read in seven different languages with different wordings but agree in meaning?" He says: "We do not claim that they still exist nowadays." "What, then, would happen to the other six variant readings?", another hypothetical question. He answered that the Muslim community was ordered to preserve the Qur’ān and was given a choice in reading and keeping any of the seven ah.ruf.181 At the time of ‘Uthmān, the situation necessitated adherence to one reading only in order to avoid the fitnah (civil strife). The Muslim community which is immune from error (ma‘s.ūm) agreed to this decision.182 The third view is that the seven ah.ruf are the seven aspects: amr, nahy, h.alāl, h.arām, muh.kam, mutashābih and amthāl. The argument against this view is that since the Muslims are allowed to choose any of the seven ah.ruf, 179.

See Mannā‘ al-Qat.t.ān, Mabāh.ith fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān. 19th edition (Beirut: Mu’assasat al-Risālah, 1406/1983), pp. 162-163.

180.

Ibid, p. 163 181.

See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 20.

182.

There is a h.adīth stating that "the community of Muh.ammad (or, in another version, 'my community') will never agree on an error". (Reported by al-Bukhārī, alTirmidhī, Ibn Mājah, and Ah.mad ibn H.anbal).

63

they may choose the h.arām aspect of a particular verse, whereas others choose its h.alāl aspect. It is inconceivable that the legal judgment of something could be halal and h.arām at the same time. Moreover, the flexibility in the possibility in reading up to seven ah.ruf would not be in turning something h.alāl, for example, into h.arām, or changing its meaning.

The h.adīth mentioned before stated that the Prophet confirmed that variant readings would not be contradictory to each other.183 The fourth view says that the seven ah.ruf are based on seven aspects (similar to Ibn Qutaybah's view). However, al-Qat.t.t.ān states that some of these variant readings claimed by the followers of this view are of āh.ād (reported by one chain of authority), whereas there has never been any disagreement among Muslim scholars that the accepted readings of the Qur’ān are those reported in mutawātir (many chains of authority).

Furthermore, the majority of the claimed variant readings vary only in the vowelisation of consonants of the words and the way of expressing them, like the variant i‘rāb, tas.rīf (conjugation), tafkhīm (emphatic pronunciation), imālah (inclining), iz.hār (clear pronunciation), idghām (contraction) and ishmām (giving "the flavour" of one sound to another). These types of variant readings do not change the wording or the meaning, and therefore belong to one word.184 Al-Qat.t.ān states further that the upholders of this fourth view believe that the ‘Uthmānic codices include all these seven ah.ruf. Since the ‘Uthmānic codices write without alif following letter mīm, it can be read either in singular (li’amānatihim) or in plural (li’amānātihim). The same with which is written without alif after letter bā’, so that it can also be read bā‘id. However, this cannot be applied to variant readings based on addition (ziyādah) and omission (naqs), such as wa a‘adda lahum jannātin tajrī tah.tahā ’l-anhār (Q. 9:100) and min tah.tihā ’l-anhār with the additional min. Another example is the reading wa mā khalaqa ’l-dhakara wa ’l-unthá (Q. 92:3) and wa ’l-dhakara wa ’l-unthá with the omission of mā khalaqa. Similarly, the variant reading based on inversion and

183.

Al-Qat.t.ān, Mabāh.ith, pp. 164-165.

184.

Ibid., pp. 165-166.

64

substitution cannot be included in the ‘Uthmānic codices.185 Al-Qat.t.ān contends that should the seven ah.ruf be included in the ‘Uthmānic codices, the ‘Uthmānic codex - the copy kept by ‘Uthmān himself which is also called al-Mus.h.af al-Imām, the Master Copy of the Qur’ān - would not have become conclusive in settling the conflict in difference of readings. This conflict was permanently settled only by uniting people in one of the seven ah.ruf revealed in the Qur’ān. Otherwise, the conflict would have remained unsettled and there would not have been any difference between ‘Uthmānic compilation and that of Abū Bakr. The permission to read in seven ah.ruf was only given in the beginning to obviate inconvenience. This permission was no longer needed in the time of ‘Uthmān. The compilation of the Qur’ān in one reading by ‘Uthmān was agreed by the s.ah.ābah. It was such a great work, al-Qat.t.ān contends, that it ended the conflict in variant readings and united the community.186 Another contemporary scholar, Shaykh Muh.ammad al-Zarqānī, chooses the view of Abū al-Fad.l al-Rāzī regarding the seven ah.ruf which is almost similar to that of Ibn Qutaybah. Al-Zarqānī quoted al-Rāzī's view as follows: 1) The variation of number and gender of the noun: singular, dual or plural, masculine or feminine, such as the reading (liamānātihim) in plural and (liamānatihim) in singular.

2) The variation in tenses of the verb: mād.ī (past), mud.āri‘ (imperfect) and amr (imperative), such as reading qālū rabbanā bā‘id bayna asfārinā and ...rabbunā ba‘‘ada...

3) The variation in wujūh al-i‘rāb (aspects of grammatical inflection), such as wa lā ["not" indicating negation] yud.ārru kātibun wa lā shahīd and wa lā ["not" indicating prohibition] yud.ārra... (for being majzūm by lā) 4) Variation by means of omission and addition, such as wa mā khalaqa ’ldhakara wa ’l-unthá and wa ’l-dhakari wa ’l-unthá with the omission of mā khalaqa.

5) Variation by means of inversion, such as wa jā’at sakratu ’l-mawt bi ’lh.aqq which is also read wa jā’at sakratu ’l- h.aqq bi ’l-mawt.

185.

186.

Ibid., p. 166.

Ibid., pp. 1 and 666-667

65

6) Variation by means of substitution, such as munshizuhā and nunshiruhā, as well as wa tal h.in and wa tal‘in.

7) Variation of languages (dialects) in fath., imālah, tarqīq (softening the pronunciation), tafkhīm, iz.hār and idghām, such as the opening and shading in reading atá and mūsá in the verse (Q. 79:15) and Q. 20:9), so that it is read atá and até as well as mūsá and mūsé. Similarly, the word balá is read balá as well as balé in balá qādirīn (Q. 75:4).187 One of the main differences between al-Razi's view and that of Ibn Qutaybah is that Ibn Qutaybah does not include the variation of dialects in pronouncing words as one of the seven ah.ruf. The reason is that despite these variations, such as the Hudhalīs in pronouncing letter h.ā’ of h.attá sounding like the letter ‘ayn and read ‘attá h.īn for h.attá h.īn, they still belong to the same word and meaning. On the contrary, al-Rāzī counts it as one of the seven ah.ruf to which al-Zarqānī leans, since the difference among the Arab tribes in the past was mainly in dialects.188 Al-Zarqānī quotes Ibn H.ajar who stated that al-Rāzī adopted and edited Ibn Qutaybah's view on the seven a h.ruf.189 According to al-Zarqānī the seven ah.ruf in al-Rāzī's view were included in the ‘Uthmānic codices. Each of these codices contained the rasm which agrees with all or some of the seven ah.ruf, so that each codex contained at least one h.arf. The word liamānatihim (Q. 70:32), for example, both in singular or in plural are included in these codices, because it was written in the singular, but a small alif was added to it to indicate that it can be read in plural.190 The word ya‘kifūna and ya‘kufūna, rabbanā bā‘id and 187.

See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, pp. 155-157.

Ibid., pp. 161-163.

189.

Ibid., p. 158.

190.

The reading li’amānatihim in the singular is that of Ibn Kathīr, whereas the rest of the qurrā’ read li’amānātihim in the plural. Al-T.abarī states that the correct reading is li’amānātihim in the plural. Dr. Labīb al-Sa‘īd criticises al-T.abarī in this and other cases where correct readings were considered wrong by him. Al-Sa‘īd contends that this reading of Ibn Kathīr was also transmitted with tawātur (handed down by many chains of unimpeachable transmitters). Moreover, like the rest of the qurrā’, Ibn Kathīr read al-amānāt and amānātikum in the plural in Q. 4:58 and Q. 8:27 188.

66

rabbunā bā‘ada, as well as wa lā yud.ārru and wa lā yud.ārra are all included in these codices, since they contained no vowel signs.191 With regard to the fourth variant reading which is variation by means of addition and omission al-Zarqānī gives an example other than that given above. It is wa a‘adda lahum jannātin tajrī tah.ahā ’l-anhār and ...min tah.tihā... with the addition of min, both readings are mutawātir, and both agree with the rasm of the mus.h.af. The reading with the addition of min agrees with that in the Meccan codex (the mus.h.af sent to Makkah), whereas that with the omission of min agrees with that of other codices. Any reading which does not agree with the rasm of any of the ‘Uthmānic codices are abrogated by the last reading read by Gabriel to the Prophet - then the Prophet to Gabriel - at the year of his death. This includes Ibn ‘Abbās's reading wa kāna warā’ahum malikun ya’khudhu kulla safīnatin s.ālih.atin ghas.ban with the addition of s.ālih.atin. All of the s.ah.ābah agreed that this reading had been abrogated.192 respectively. He could have read both in the singular as he did in Q. 70:32 above, had it been from his own whim rather than from Allah. See Dr. Labīb al-Sa‘īd, Difā‘an alQirā’āt al-Mutawātirah fī Muwājahat al-T.abarī ’l-Mufassir (A Defence on the Mutawātir Qirā’āt in Countering the Commentator al-T.abarī) (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, [1398]/1978), p. 116. It is noteworthy that al-T.abarī lived in the period of ikhtiyār ("choice"). It was the period where scholars of the Qur’ānic text chose their own readings in verses written in ambiguous rasm. The choice was governed by three criteria: the rasm of the mus.h.af, the Arabic language and the isnād. This period of ikhtiyār ended in 322/934 when Ibn Mujāhid's choice of the seven variant readings of the text (qirā’āt) of the seven qurrā’ was declared canonical by the authorities in Baghdād, as they were qirā’āt with mutawātir isnāds. See A. Jones, "The Qur’ān - II," in Arabic Literature to the End of the Umayyad Period, eds. A.F.L. Beeston et al.

(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983), pp. 241-242. Al-T.abarī chose the readings based on his knowledge of the Arabic language, whereas many other readings were later accepted and included in the seven qirā’āt. Al-T.abarī passed away earlier in 310/923. Had he lived and witnessed the canonisation of the seven qirā’āt, he would not have chosen or preferred one among the seven canonised qirā’āt.

191.

Al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, pp. 169-170.

192.

Ibid., p. 170. Quoting from Abū ‘Amr al-Dānī (d. 444/1052) in his work alMuqnī‘, A.T. Welch mentioned variant readings among the ‘Uthmānic codices. For example, it was written in the standard codex in Madīnah (Q. 3:184) and (Q. 40:21), whereas in the mus.h.af sent to Damascus it was written

67

With regard to the fifth variant reading which is variation by means of inversion, al-Zarqānī states that the example given above which is wa jā’at sakratu ’l- h.aqq bi ’l-mawt (the inversion of ...al-mawt bi ’l- h.aqq) is also abrogated. A similar abrogated inverted reading is idhā jā’a fat h.u ’llāh wa ’l-nas.r (the inversion of ... nas.ru ’llāh wa ’l-fat h.). The valid example given by al-Zarqānī for the inverted reading is fayaqtulūna wa yuqtalūna and fayuqtalūna wa yaqtulūna. Both reading are mutawātir, and agree with the rasm of the ‘Uthmānic codices, since they contain no vowel signs.193 With regard to the sixth variant reading which is variation by means of substitution, al-Zarqāni states that some readings of this genre are acceptable which agree to the rasm of the ‘Uthmānic codices, like fatabayyanū and fatathabbatū, for both are written with the same rasm, namely, .

Other readings such as ka ’l-s.ūfi ’l-manfūsh rather than ka ’l-‘ihni ’l-manfūsh and fa’md.ū ilá dhikri ’llāh rather than fa’s‘aw ilá dhikri ’llāh, these readings are abrogated and do not agree with the ‘Uthmānic codices.194 With regard to the seventh variant reading which is the variation of languages or dialects, these readings do not change the words and therefore also agree with the rasm of the ‘Uthmānic codex. One example is the verse (with the additional bi) and (Q. 36:35) and

. Similarly, it was written in the standard codex

(Q. 40:26), whereas in the mus.h.af sent to Kūfah it was written

ْ‫عَمِلَت‬

(with the ellipsis of hu) and (with the addition of alif). These brought Welch to the following conclusion: "Such variations can best be explained as resulting from carelessness on the part of the scribes or lack of concern for exact uniformity among the authorities." See A.T. Welch, "al-Ķur’ān", EI2, p. 408. The reading wa bi’l-zubur wa bi’l-Kitāb was that of Ibn ‘Āmir and was written in the mus.h.afs of the people of Syria; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 296. The reading ‘amilat was that of the Kūfans, whereas the rest read ‘amilathu, including ‘Ās.im, as in the Egyptian standard edition of the mus.h.af issued in 1924, and Nāfi‘; see Mus.h.af al-Jamāhīrīyah bi-Riwāyat al-Imām Qālūn (Tripoli: Jam‘iyat al-Da‘wah al-Islāmīyah al-‘Ālamīyah, 1395/1986), p. 442. The reading was that of ‘Ās.im, as in the Egyptian standard edition, whereas was that of Nāfi‘ as in the Mus.h.af al-Jamāhīrīyah, p. 469. This finding supports the view that the variant readings were kept in the ‘Uthmānic codices, and that they were not the outcome of the scribes' negligence or "lack of concern for exact uniformity among the authorities" as assumed by Welch.

193.

Ibid., pp. 170-171.

194.

Ibid., 171.

68

hal atāka h.adīth mūsá (Q. 20:9) in which the letter yā’ is written instead of alif in atāka and mūsá, namely, and to indicate that both words can be read with imālah, namely, atéka and musé.195 The letter yā’ in words such as mūsá ‘īsá and mus.t.afá is called alif maqs.ūrah (lit., "a shortened alif") and phonetically written with letter a with an accent aigu on it (á) according to McGill University transliteration system. (See the table of the transliteration system on p. v above).

We have seen how al-Zarqānī explained and defended the view of alRāzī concerning the seven ah.ruf and their inclusion in the ‘Uthmānic codices. He has proved that variation of readings by means of inversion, substitution as well as addition and omission which could not take place in the ‘Uthmānic codices according to al-Qa t.t.ān could and did occur. This argument can also be used to justify Ibn Qutaybah's view which, as mentioned earlier, is very similar to that of al-Rāzī.

Al-Zarqānī rejects the view of al-T.abarī and Sufyān ibn ‘Uyaynah that the seven a h.ruf are the seven dialects of one word with the same meaning. It is like the reading of halumma, aqbil, ta‘āl, ‘ajjil, asri‘, qas.dī and nah.wī used when we call someone to come to us as mentioned before. All these, alZarqānī contends, belong to one variant reading only, namely, the substitution of the words in general which is broader than the substitution with exclusively synonymous words.196 Al-Zarqānī also rejects the view that there was only one reading that remained in the ‘Uthmānic codices and the rest were abrogated and excluded from them with the approval of the s.ah.ābah. He states that these are false arguments. Even in the time of the Prophet people disagreed on reading the Qur’ān in variant readings. The Prophet confirmed to them the existence of these variant readings which are a mercy for them and for the Muslim community at large. When he was told to read the Qur’ān to his people with one reading, he asked for more and said that his community could not bear it. As his community will remain till the Resurrection Day, and so their inability to bear only one reading will also remain. If Muslim nations have problems with the correct pronunciation of some letters of the Qur’ān and some dialects, how could it be possible that the s.ah.ābah who were living in the best generation close this door of mercy and lenience that had been 195.

196.

Ibid.

Ibid., p. 175.

69

opened by Allah to the Muslims? How could they disagree with the Prophet's guidance in his asking lenience for his community with variant readings? How could they disagree with the Prophet in his confirming the existence of these variant readings (rather than limiting them to one reading) in settling the disagreement among people in his community? How could ‘Uthmān do such things without any action from the s.ah.ābah to prevent him from doing these deeds? In addition, how could the ijmā‘ (agreement) take place on keeping one h.arf and abandoning the other six a h.ruf when the meaning of ah.ruf itself had not been agreed upon? Had this actually happened, why did not ‘Uthmān allow these six ah.ruf to remain in history, not to be totally forgotten, since they were not abrogated? Why did not history keep them, when the s.ah.ābah kept in history the abrogated and isolated readings, even fabricated traditions that reach us today and will reach people in the future?197 We have seen how al-Qat.t.ān and al-Zarqānī adopted different views about the seven ah.ruf and how these two scholars defended their respective views. Al-Qat.t.ān adopted the view of al-T.abarī and others that the seven ah.ruf were seven synonyms of a word, and only one reading existed in the ‘Uthmānic codices, as the other six were only optional. On the other hand alZarqānī adopted al-Rāzī's view which is similar to that of Ibn Qutaybah, and contended that the seven ah.ruf which are seven aspects of readings existed in the ‘Uthmānic codices.

B. Ungrammatical Usage in the Qur’ān Ibn Qutaybah mentions five main grammatical errors (alh.ān, sing. la h.n), in the Qur’ān alleged by his opponents. They are as follows: 1.

for

(Q. 20:63)

2.

for

3.

for

4.

for

5.

Ibid., pp. 177-178.

(Q. 4:162) (Q. 21:88)

for 197.

(Q. 5:69)

(Q. 63:10)

70

He cites the statement of ‘Ā’ishah on the authority of Abū Mu‘āwiyah Muh.ammad ibn H.āzim al-Tamīmī (d. 193/809), from Hishām ibn ‘Urwah ibn al-Zubayr (d. 146/763-4) and from his father from ‘Ā’ishah who said that there were three scribes' errors in the Qur’ān, mentioning the first three errors above.198 He also cites the statement of ‘Uthmān who said: "I see a solecism in it, and the Arabs will correct it with their tongue ( ); so, he did it, but kept the rasm as it was. Moreover, al-Hajjāj was reported to have assigned ‘Ās.im, Nājiyah ibn Rumh., and ‘Alī ibn As.ma‘ to trace any Qur’ānic book which did not agree with the ‘Uthmānic recension, to destroy it and to give its owner sixty dirhams as compensation.199 1.

Regarding the first alleged solecism, namely, inna hādhāni lasāh.irān, Ibn Qutaybah mentions three views, as follows: a. According to grammarians whom Ibn Qutaybah does not identify, among whom was al-Kisā’ī, it is the dialect of the Balh.arth (Banī ’l-H.ārith) ibn Ka‘b tribe who express the dual with alif in all of the three cases. They say, for example, marartu birajulān, qabid.tu dirhamān, and jalastu bayna yadāh.200 The example in poetry is as follows: 198.

This report was narrated by Is.h.āq ibn Ibrāhīm ibn Mukhlad, known as Is.h.āq ibn Rāhawayh (d. 238/853), one of Ibn Qutaybah's teachers. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 25-26.

199.

Ibid, p. 51. This is probably what was meant by Ibn Abū Dā’ūd when he said that al-Hajjāj ibn Yūsuf "has changed in the ‘Uthmānic codex eleven ah.ruf ", such as lam yatasanna became lam yatasannah (Q. 2:259) and biz.anīn became bid.anīn (Q. 81:24); see Abū Bakr ‘Abd Allāh Ibn Abī Dā’ūd, Kitāb al-Mas.āh.if, ed. Arthur Jeffery (Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Rah.mānīyah, 1355/1936), pp. 117-118. Instead of changing the ah.ruf in the ‘Uthmānic codex which seemed to be in the above statement, al-Hajjaj changed the ah.ruf that did not agree with the ‘Uthmānic codex as stated by Ibn Qutaybah above. Al-T.abarsī and Saqr reject the genuinness of the stories concerning the statements of ‘Ā’ishah and ‘Uthmān mentioned above and considered them fabricated ones; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 139; and Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 26, n. 3.

200.

See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 20; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 20. According to al-Suyūt.ī, it is also the dialect of the Banī Kinānah, see al-Itqan, vol. 2, pp. 273-274.

71

"He was hit with a blow that led him to a barren, dusty place." Here bayna udhunāhu is used instead of bayna udhunayh.201 b. It is the error of the scribe and therefore should be read inna hādhayn lasāh.irān. This is the view of Abū ‘Amr al-‘Alā’ and ‘Īsá ibn ‘Umar among the qurrā’ who affirm ‘Ā’ishah's statement, and ‘Ās.im ibn Abī alS.abāh al-Jah.darī who explicitly supports ‘Uthmān's statement mentioned before. ‘Ās.im al-Jah.darī, the muqri’ and mufassir of Bas.rah, in his mus.h.af (codex) followed the ‘Uthmānic recension, but read inna hādhayn, wa ’l-s.ābi‘īn, wa ’l-muqīmūn, and wa ’l-s.ābirūn.202 c. Some unidentified qurrā’ read in hādhān sāh.irān based on Ubayy ibn Ka‘b's reading in his mus.h.af, in dhān illā sāh.irān, as well as that of ‘Abd Allāh ibn Mas‘ūd who read an hādhān sāh.irān.203 Abū al-Khat.t.āb claimed to have heard the Kinānah tribe using alif invariably for the dual; see Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, ed. Dr. M.F. Sezgin (Egypt: Muh.ammad Sāmī Amīn al-Khānjī, n.d.), p. 21. Besides the Balh.arth, al-T.abarī mentions also the Khath‘am and the Zubayd tribes in Yemen, see his work, Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 121.

According to Ibn Jamā‘ah, among the grammarians who state that the Banī al-H.ārith use alif invariably in the dual number is al-Kisā’ī. Other tribes mentioned by al-Kisā’ī are the Khath‘am, the Zubayd and the Hamadān. Abū Khat.t.āb mentioned the Kinānah; others mention the Banī al-‘Anbar, the ‘Udhrah, the Murād and others; see Dr. ‘Abd al‘Al Mukarram in his note in Abu ‘Abd Allāh ibn Khālawayh, al-Hujjah fī ’l-Qirā’āt alSab‘, ed. and annot. Dr. ‘Abd al-‘Alī Sālim al-Mukarram (Beirut and Cairo: Dār alShurūq, 1399/1979), p. 242, n. 6, quoting Ibn Jama‘ah's marginal notes on the commentary on Ibn al-H.ājib's al-Shāfiyah (N.p.: Mat.ba‘at Dār al-T.ibā‘ah al-‘Āmirah, n.d.), vol. 1, p. 277.

201.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 50;and al-Zabīdī, Tāj al-‘Arūs, 10/405. According to Ibn Manz.ūr, the poem belonged to Hawbar al-H.ārithī who mentioned udhunayh instead of udhuynāh, see Lisān, vol. 10, p. 64, vol. 9, p. 163, and 20, p. 226. Another example from poetry is as follows: in which abā abāhā and ghayatāhā are used respectively for abā abīhā and ghayatayhā; see Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, p. 242; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 16.

202.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 51.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 52; and Abū Zakariyā Yah.yá ibn Ziyād al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, ed. A.Y. Najātī and M.A. al-Najjār, 3 vols. (Egypt: al-Hay’ah alMis.riyyah al-‘Āmmah lil-Kuttāb, 1972-1980), vol. 2, pp. 183-184. The variant reading in hādhān lasāh.irān and in hādhān sāh.irān are also attributed to Ibn Mas‘ūd, see A. 203.

72

Commenting on this reading Ibn Khālawayh states that the qurrā’ unanimously agree in reading inna except Ibn Kathīr and H.afs. from ‘Ās.im, both read in; they read hādhān (with alif) except Abū ‘Amr who read hādhayn (with yā’). They agree in reading with the light nūn in the dual form hādhān, except Ibn Kathīr who read it with a stressed nūn, namely, hādhānn.204 The argument of those who read inna hādhān is the report of alD.ah.h.āk from Ibn ‘Abbās who said that Allah revealed the Qur’ān in the language of all the tribes of the Arabs, and in this case, in the language of the Balh.arth ibn Ka‘b tribe that uses alif invariably in the dual form. The argument of those who read in is that by reading inna with the light nūn, it invalidates its grammatical function, so that hādhayn in the accusative case returns to its original nominative case hadhān. Therefore, there is no solecism in this case. Moreover, another argument is that the word in here does not mean "verily", but rather mā (not), and the letter lām means illā (except), so that the reading means ("These two people are none but two magicians"). The example from the Qur’ān is the verse meaning ("No human soul but has a guardian over it." Q. 86:4).205 Abū al-‘Abbās al-Mubarrad interprets the meaning of inna in this reading as na‘am (yes). He says that when a Bedouin came to Ibn al-Zubayr saying: "May Allah curse the camel that carried me to you," he answered inna wa rākibuhā, meaning na‘am wa rākibuhā ("yes, and its rider"). As a shāhid, he cites the poems of ‘Ubayd Allāh ibn Qays as follows:

("My reprovers came early in the morning abusing me and I blamed them; they said, 'Hoariness has come upon you, and you have become old,' and I said 'yes'").206 Jeffery, ed. Materials for the History of the Text of the Qur’ān: The Old Codices (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1937), pp. 146 and 60.

204.

Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, p. 242 and Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 419.

205.

206.

Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, pp. 242-243 and 368.

Ibid., p. 243. The view that particle inna in the verse inna hādhān means "yes" is rejected by al-T.abarsī with the following argument: (a) If it was so, hādhān

73

The argument of those who read hādhayn is the afore-mentioned statement of ‘Uthmān who considered hādhān to be a solecism and stated that the Arabs would correct it with their tongues. If it were said that ‘Uthmān was more entitled to correct the solecism, it would be said that the solecism is not an error, but rather a deviation from using the Qurayshī dialect.207 The argument of those who read hādhānn is that the stress on the letter nūn serves as a substitute for the missing alif as an indication that a letter is missing in that word. Therefore, this stress indicates that the word hādhān is made of incomplete letters and to distinguish it from words made of complete letters. In other words, as the word is the combination of and the dual , one of its two alifs is replaced with the stressed nūn.208 Ibn Qutaybah states that the word hādhān was written in the ‘Uthmānic codex (Mus.h.af al-Imān) without alif, and in fact, the dual is always written in it without alif, such as qāla rajulāni ( Q. 5:23), fa’ākharāni yaqūmāni (

Q. 5:107).209 Moreover, it is reported by

would become mubtada’ and lasā h.irān its khabar with the emphatic la. This emphatic la in the khabar in the Arabic language should not occur with a simple mubtada’, except in an isolated case or necessity. In other words, the mubtada’ has to be emphasised first, then the emphatic la can be added to its khabar; (b) Quoting Abū ‘Alī, translating inna with "yes" in the above verse does not fit in the structure of the sentence. It is not correct to say "yes, these two are surely sorcerers" confirming Prophet Moses's statement in verse 61: "Woe unto you! Do not invent lies against God, lest He afflict you with most grievous suffering: for He who contrives [such] a lie is already undone!" (Q. 20:61, Asad). It is also improper to say "yes ..." after the statement: "So they debated among themselves as to what to do; but they kept their counsel secret") (Q. 20:62, Asad). See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, pp.

15-16.

207.

Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, pp. 243-244.

208.

Ibid., p. 121.

209.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 57. This is also apparent in the mus.h.af of Madīnah.

See Mus.h.af al-Jamāhīrīyah, pp. 111 (Q. 5:25) and 125 (Q. 5:109) which is based on the reading of Nāfi‘, the qāri’ of Madīnah. However, in the Egyptian mus.h.af which is based on the reading of ‘Ās.im, the qāri’ of Kūfah, the alif of the dual is written in rajulān and fa’ākharān yaqūmān.

74

‘Abd Allāh from ‘Amr ibn ‘Abd Allāh al-Awdī from Wakī‘ from al-A‘mash from Ibrāhīm who said that people thought that in reading, the letter alif and the letter yā’ were the same, and that inna hādhāni and inna hādhayni were identical when reading.210 Al-Farrā’ gives three reasons for reading inna hādhān in the above verse: (a) It is the language of the Banī al-H.ārith as mentioned earlier; (b) When the Arabs say muslimūn they added in the written word the letter waw after a d.ammah on the letter mīm that preceded it. When they say muslimīn, they added the letter yā‘ after putting a kasrah on the letter mīm. However, when they say ithnayn, if they put the letter yā‘, it would not be preceded by a kasrah, but by a fath.ah. Therefore, they keep the letter alif as it is and write ithnān; similar to the case of ithnān is hādhān (c) The letter alif is a support for the word hādhā. In the dual number only one letter is added to it, namely, the letter nūn, so that it becomes hādhān in all cases. It is like alladhī in which the letter yā’ remains after adding the letter nūn in the plural, so that it becomes al-ladhīn, except for the Banī Kinānah who read it as alladhūn.211 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions five views given by Arabic grammarians as well as by himself in justifying the above reading as follows: a. It is the language of the Kinānah and the Banī ’l-H.ārith to always put the letter alif in the dual form as mentioned earlier. b. The word inna means "yes", which is the view of Abū ’l-‘Abbās and alMubarrad as mentioned earlier, so that it does not affect the inflection of words which follow it, namely, hādhān remains as it is. c.

The whole expression hādhān las.āh.irān - which consists of mubtada’ (subject) and khabar (predicate) - is the khabar of the hidden mubtada’, namely, the d.amīr al-sha’n (the pronoun indicating circumstances) which serves as the ism of inna. Therefore, the full expression is . d. The same as above, except that sāh.irān is the khabar of the hidden 210.

Ibn Abī Dā’ūd Sulaymān al-Sijistānī, Kitāb al-Mas.āh.if, p. 104. This is also the view of al-T.abarsī who said that the best view is that inna hādhān lasāh.irān belongs to the language of the Kinānah tribe, or, according to Abū al-H.asan and Abū ‘Alī al-Fārisī, the language of the Banī al-H.ārith; see Majma‘ al- Bayān, vol. 4, pp. 1617.

211.

See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 184.

75

mubtada’, so that the full expression is

.

e. The letter hā’ in hādhān should be joined with inna instead of dhān, so that it is read . f. According to al-Suyūt.ī, the significance of the alif of the dual in hādhān is that it rhymes together with the word that follows it, namely, sāh.irān as well as yuridān, so that they all rhyme together. As evidence, he gives similar examples from the Qur’ān. The use of tanwīn (nunation) with the additional alif in the word salāsil - so that it becomes salasilan - will make it rhyme with the word that follows it, namely, aghlālan and sa‘īran (Q. 76:4). Similarly, the nunation of Saba’ changes it to Saba’in to rhyme with binaba’in and yaqīnin. (Q. 27:22).212 Al-Zarqānī gives four variant readings of as follows: (a) was the reading of Nāfi‘ and others; (b)

was the reading of Ibn

Kathīr; (c) was the reading of H.afs.; and (d) was the reading of Abū ‘Amr. As the ‘Uthmānic codices contained the seven ah.ruf the word hādhān was written without alif or yā’, so that it could be read with the four variant readings mentioned above.213 2.

With regard to the verse "Lo! those who believe, and those who are Jews, and Sabaeans, and Christians..." (Q. 5:69, Pickthall), Ibn Qutaybah gives us the reasons for 212.

Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 573-574. However, the variant reading salāsilan belongs to Nāfi‘, al-Kisā’ī, Abū Bakr from ‘Ās.im, and Hishām from Ibn ‘Āmir. The reading of Qunbul, Ibn Kathīr and H.amzah is salāsila’ (with waqf, a slight stop) without alif or tanwīn. The rest of the qurrā’ also read salāsila’ but with the additional alif. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 123. Following the variant reading of the qāri’ of Madīnah, Nāfi‘, the mus.h.af printed by the Islamic Call Society in Libya in 1986 writes salāsilan. On the other hand, the mus.h.af printed in Egypt, which is largely circulated in the Muslim world, writes salāsila’, following the reading of ‘Ās.im, the qāri’ of Kūfah. See Mus.h.af al-Jamāhīriyyah, p. 575 (Q. 76:4). For the Egyptian mus.h.af see the text of the Qur’ān in the translation of Asad, Ali, or Pickthall. A similar example is the reading of Nāfi‘ qawārīran and of ‘Ās.im qawarira’ (Q. 76:15).

213.

See al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, pp. 373-374 and 393.

76

reading al-s.ābi’ūn without falling into a grammatical error, as follows: The word al-s.ābi’ūn is marfū‘ (in the nominative case),214 because it is radd ‘alá mawd.i‘ (a return to the position) of the whole expression inna ’l-ladhīna āmanū, namely, in the nominative case. The assertive particle inna does not affect the meaning of the sentence. Therefore, it is possible to say, for example, .This expression conveys the same meaning as (except for emphasis which Ibn Qutaybah does not mention).

Other "sisters" of inna do affect the meaning of the sentence, so that the word after the conjunction must also be affected; for example, . Here the word zaydun has to be put in the accusative case, because la‘alla affects the meaning of the sentence, namely, the existence of doubt in it, whereas inna does not. Ibn Qutaybah contends further that according to the grammarian al-Kisā’ī of the Kūfan school, it is possible to say or . This is also the view of the grammarians of the Bas.ran school. They say it is possible to read inna ’llāha wa malā’ikatuhu (instead of malā’ikatahu) yus.allūna ‘alá ’l-nabiyyi (Q. 33:56), and cite the following poem of D.ābi’ al-Burjumī as a shāhid: "Faman yaku amsá bi ’lmadīnati rah.luhu, fa’innī wa qayyārun [instead of qayyāran] bihā lagharību.215 According to al-Farrā’, since the subject al-ladhīna is indeclinable, the effect of inna on it is weak, therefore the word al-s.ābi’īn which is connected to it is also weak and can be ignored; consequently, it is possible to read als.ābi’īn in the nominative case, namely, al-s.ābi’ūn. However, he disagrees with al-Kisā’ī in the possibility of using the expression .

Because the word ‘abd is declinable, the effect of inna cannot be weak on it as well as on the word connected to it, namely, zayd; therefore, zaydan 214.

However, ‘Ā’ishah, Ubayy and others are reported to have al-s.ābi‘īna in their codices, see Ibn Abī Dā’ūd al-Sijistānī, Kitāb al-Mas.āh.if, p. 232.

215.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 52-53. The poem was cited by D.abī ibn al-H.ārith al-Burjumī in his prison when he was jailed in the time of ‘Uthmān for slandering women of unblemished reputation (qadhf al-muh.s.anāt). It means: "Whoever makes Madinah his final destination, [as for me] I and [my riding animal] Qayyār are strangers in it." Qayyār was the name of his horse or his camel. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 311, n. 2.

77

should be used here. He contends further that the afore-mentioned poem of al-Burjumī does not support al-Kisā’ī's view in accepting zaydun in the above example. The reason is that qayyār is connected to the pronoun ī in innī, an indeclinable, and metonymically expressed word, whereas zayd is connected to a declinable word ‘abd. Similarly, it is not possible to read inna ’llāha wa malā’ikatuhu (Q. 33:56) for the same reason. In addition, it is more likely and permissible to say qayyārun (besides the usual reading qayyāran) than al-s.ābi’ūn. The reason is that the word al-ladhīna with which it is connected can be read as al-ladhūna in the nominative case.216 Another reason for justifying the reading al-s.ābi’ūn is that, according to al-Kisā’ī, the word is following the noun in the term hādū, which does not mean "the Jews" as usually interpreted, but "the people who repented and returned to the right way", an interpretation similarly given to the verse innā hudnā ilayka ("behold, unto Thee have we turned in repentance!" Q. 7:156, Asad). Since some of the Sabaeans were included among "the people who repented and returned to the right way", the word al-s.ābi’ūn is placed in the nominative case. Al-Kisā‘ī probably means that al-s.ābi’ūn is in the nominative case because this term is connected to people who are following the right path, namely those who are hādū as well as āmanū. Again, alFarrā’ rejects this view stating another interpretation that the believers in the beginning of the verse refer to the pretending believers only and not the sincere ones, then the Jews and Christians are mentioned. The verse continues with "... whosoever [among them, i.e., the pretending believers,217 the Jews, the Sabaeans and the Christians] believeth in Allah and the Last Day and doth 216.

Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 310-311.

217.

Similarly, it is said that the believers in the verse: "And [always], O you believers - all of you - turn unto

God in repentance, so that you might attain to a happy state!" (Q. 24:31, Asad) are pretending believers only, namely, the hypocrites; see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p.

220. However, al-Qurt.ubī does not include hypocrites in the term al-mu’minūn ("the believers") in this verse and states that asking for repentance is incumbent exclusively on believers; see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 90, and vol. 12, p. 238. The Prophet was reported to have said in one h.adīth on the authority of Ibn ‘Umar as follows: "Verily, I turn unto Him in repentance a hundred times every day" (Reported by al-Bukhārī, Ibn H.anbal and al-Bayhaqī).

78

right - there shall no fear come upon them neither shall they grieve." (Q. 5:69, Pickthall).218 It means that whoever among those people, whether they disbelieve or pretend to believe, will be safe if they become believers.

Al-Zamakhsharī gives us the reason for reading al-s.ābi’ūn instead of al-s.ābi’īn in the above verse: it is the mubtada’ (subject) of a hidden khabar (predicate) kadhālik ("like that"). It is like saying ("Lo! those who believe, and those who are Jews, and Christians, all of them will be so-and-so, and the Sabaeans will also be like that"). Al-Zamakhsharī rejects the view that al-s.ābi’ūn should be ma‘t.ūf to the phrase , because this could occur only after the completion of the sentence, namely, after mentioning the predicate. Therefore, according to him, it is wrong to say, for example, , (but rather, ).219 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions five views reported from Abū al-Baqā’, including the three views mentioned above. The two remaining views are as follows: a. Inna in the verse in question means "yes", and the words that follow, including al-s.ābi’ūn, are in the nominative case. As a shāhid, the poem of ‘Ubayd Allāh ibn Qays mentioned before was cited.220 b. Al-s.ābi’ūn is a plural treated as a singular number, and its letter nūn is the letter of the inflection ( ). There is no further comment from al-Suyūt.ī.221 This means that al-s.ābi’ūna, being treated as a singular noun, its letter wāw remains, although the word is in the 218.

See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 312. An almost identical verse with the word al-s.ābi‘īna (in the accusative case) put after, rather than before, the word alnas.ārá (the Christians), and with the addition of "surely their reward is with their Lord" is found in Q. 2:62. Nāfi‘ read al-s.ābūn and al-s.ābīn without hamzah in the Qur’ān, whereas other qurrā’ read them with hamzah, namely, al-s.ābi’ūn and al- s.ābi’īn; see Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 158; see also Mus.h.af al-Jamāhīriyyah, pp. 120 (Q. 5:71) and 10 (Q. 2:61).

219.

See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 373.

220.

This poem is also used as a shāhid in dealing with the verse inna hādhān lasāh.irān,as mentioned earlier.

221.

Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 274.

79

accusative case; instead, its letter nūn is inflected with fath.ah, so that it becomes al-s.ābi’ūna. It is like the term Fir‘awnu (in the nominative case) and Fir‘awna (in the accusative case).222 3.

The verse in question runs as follows:

222.

There are many different views about the Sabaeans. According to Abū ‘Ubaydah, they were people who changed their religion. The root meaning of s.aba’a is "to rise, to grow". The expression means "the stars rise from their points of rising", and s.aba’at sinnuh means "his tooth is growing"; see Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 1, p. 172. The Sabaean is called S.ābi’ (pl. S.ābi‘ūn) as well as S.ābin (pl.

S.ābūn) which is the variant reading of Nāfi‘. The root meaning of s.abā (present: yas.bū) is "to lean". According to al-Suddī and Ish.āq ibn Rāhawayh, they are a sect among the people of the Book. According to Abū al-‘Āliyah and al-D.ah.h.āk they belonged to a sect among the people of the Book who read the Psalms (al-Zabūr), and for this reason, Abū H.anīfah and Ish.āq ibn Rāhawayh allowed the Muslims to eat their slaughtered animals and to marry their women. On the other hand, according to al-Qurt.ubī they were people who believed in one God but believed also in the stars' influence, and for this reason, Abū Sa‘īd al-Istakhrī stated that they were non-belivers. Al-Khalīl said that they claimed to be the followers of Prophet Noah. According to Mujāhid, al-H.asan and Ibn Abī Nujayh, they are people who mix Judaism with Magian. According to Qatādah and al-H.asan, they worship angels, face the Qiblah in their five daily prayers and read the Psalms. According to Ibn Kathīr, the right view is that of Mujāhid and Wahb ibn Munabbih who said that they were neither Jews, Christians, Magians nor polytheists, but rather people who remained in their nature and did not follow any particular religion. Therefore the polytheists called a person who converted to Islam a Sabaean, namely, a person who was not a follower of any religion on earth at that time. See alS.ābūnī, Mukhtasar, vol. 1, p. 72; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, pp. 434-435. B. Carra de Vaux divides the Sabaeans into two groups: the followers of Prophet Yah.yá (John the Baptist), and the pagan Sabaeans who lived under the Muslim rule. For further details, see B. Carra de Vaux "al-Sabi‘a", SEI, pp. 477-8. See also M. Asad, The Message, p. 14, n. 49.

80

"But as for those from among them who are deeply rooted in knowledge, and the believers who believe in that which is revealed unto thee, and that which was revealed before thee and those who are [especially] constant in prayer, and those who pay the poor-due, and the believers in Allah and the Last Day - these it is unto whom We shall grant a mighty reward." (Q. 4:162)

Following the ‘Uthmānic recension it is written wa ’l-muqīmīn als.alāh (in the accusative case) in the above verse rather than wa ’l-muqīmūn al-s.alāh (in the nominative case). The latter is grammatically considered the correct one, as it is connected to al-mu‘minūn which is also in the nominative case. Ibn Qutaybah mentions five different views among the grammarians concerning wa ’l-muqīmīn al-s.alāh in the above verse, as follows: a. The expression is ma‘t.ūf (conjoined) with the pronoun ka in ilayka, so that the verse means ("...,they believe in that which has been revealed unto thee, ... and unto those who were constant in prayer"). This view, however, is rejected by the grammarians of the Bas.ran school. They contend that a noun cannot be connected with a pronoun in the genitive case, unless it is accompanied by the preposition of that pronoun. In this case, the verse should be read wa ilá ’l-muqīmīn al-s.alāh. The absence of the preposition ilá in the Qur’ānic text wa ’lmuqīmīn al-s.alāh indicates that there is no such connection as mentioned above.223 b. The expression is ma‘t.ūf with the pronoun ka in qablika, so that the verse means ("... and in that which was revealed before thee and before those who were constant in prayer"). This view is also rejected by the grammarians of the Bas.ran school on the same argument mentioned above. In this case, the term qabl is not mentioned in al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh.224 c. The expression is ma‘t.ūf with mā unzila ilayka, so that the verse means 223.

See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 139.

224.

Ibid.

81

("... believe in that which is revealed unto thee ... and believe in those who are constant in prayer"). This is the view of al-Kisā’ī. As a shāhid it is mentioned in the Qur’ān ("and trusts the believers", Q. 9:61, Asad) which means

.

d. The expression is in the accusative case because it is a praise ( ), as if it is said

("I praise those who are constant in

prayer"), or ("I mean those who are constant in prayer").

According to Sībawayh and others among the grammarians of the Bas.ran school the transition of a noun into the accusative case is a legitimate grammatical device to emphasise its significance, in this case, those who are constant in prayer.225 Asad, Pickthall and Ali follow this view by adding the term "especially" - between parenthesis by Asad and Ali - in translating this expression (al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh). e. The expression is in the accusative case as a break required after using long successive words in the nominative case. Then the expression goes on and returns to the nominative case. This is the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah.226 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions six views, including those mentioned above except the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah. The remaining two views are as follows: a. The expression is ma‘t.ūf with the word qabl in qablika, so that the verse means ("... and that which was revealed before thee and that which was revealed to those who were constant in prayer"). b. The expression is ma‘t.ūf with the pronoun hum in minhum, so that the verse means "But as for those from among them who are deeply rooted in knowledge ... and from 225.

This is also the view of al-Farrā’ according to Ibn Qutaybah; see Ta’wīl, pp.

53-4; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 366; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 139; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 13; and al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, p.

388.

226.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 53; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 142.

Similar to al-muqīmīn is al-s.ābirīn in Q. 2:177. Of all the qurrā’ only ‘Ās.im al-Jah.darī read it as al- s.ābirūn, although in writing, he kept it as al- s.ābirīn for the same reasons mentioned before. For further details, see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 53-54.

82

among those who are constant in prayer").227 This view, as mentioned earlier, is rejected by the grammarians of the Bas.ran school, since the Qur’ānic text does not say wa min al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh.

Al-T.abarī gives us some views on the verse in question. He says that Qur’ānic commentators do not agree that al-rāsikhūn fi ’l-‘ilm and almuqīmīn al-s.alāh mentioned in the above verse relate to the same category of people. Those who say so maintain that al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh is in the accusative case for the following reasons: a. It was the scribe's error and should be al-muqīmūn al-s.alāh. This is the view of Abān ibn ‘Uthmān ibn ‘Affān and ‘Ā’ishah; it is also the reading of Ibn Mas‘ūd in his codex.228 b. The expression is s.ifah (the characteristic) of al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm. It is because of the length of the verse that al-muqīmūn al-s.alāh is changed into the accusative case (i.e., al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh) as a praise. This is the view of some grammarians of the Bas.ran and the Kūfan schools. They say that the Arabs occasionally change the i‘rāb of the middle s.ifah of something they are praising or blaming, and finally return to the i‘rāb of the first s.ifah.229 Other grammarians say that al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh is not the s.ifah of alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm, although the latter are also found among the former. In this case, al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh is in the genitive case (khifd.). Al-T.abarī gives us some views in understanding the verse, some of which have already been mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah and al-Suyūt.ī above. Their different understandings of the verse are as follows: 227.

These views are reported by Abū al-Baqā’. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

274; see also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 139.

228.

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 18. This is also the reading of Ubayy, Anas, ‘Ās.im al-Jah.darī, Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, and others. See Arthur Jeffery, ed., Materials, pp.

38 and 216. Al-Zamakhsharī mentions that this reading is that of Mālik ibn Dīnār, ‘Ās.im al-Jah.darī and ‘Īsá al-Thaqafī, as written in the codex of ‘Abd Allāh (ibn Mas‘ūd); see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 336. According to al-Qurt.ubī, the reading of Ubayy is al-muqīmīn, as in the ‘Uthmānic recension; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 13.

This is also the reading of Abu ‘Amr in one report, see al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, p. 388.

229.

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 18.

83

a.

("... and the believers believe in that which is revealed unto thee, and that which was revealed before thee and [believe] in [the injunction of] performing prayer...").

Al-mu’tūn al-zakāh is in the nominative case because it is ma‘t.ūf with almu’minūn, so that the verse means ("and the believers believe in that which is revealed unto thee ... they are those who pay the poor-due"). b. ("...and the believers believe in that which is revealed unto thee ... and in angels"), so that the almuqīmūn al-s.alāh are the angels who pray to Allah by glorifying Him and asking forgiveness for people on the earth. c. ( "... and believe in those who are constant in prayer, they and those who pay the poordue..."). Those who are constant in prayer in the above view are the angels or the prophets - or the infallible imāms according to the Shī'īs as mentioned by al-T.abarsī.230 d.

"But as for those from among them who are deeply rooted in knowledge ... and from among those who are constant in prayer" as mentioned by al-Suyūt.ī (b) above. e. ("..., and the believers believe in that which has been revealed unto thee, ... and unto those who were constant in prayer"), as mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah (a) above.

The best view according to al-T.abarī is the second view (b) above which is that of al-Kisā’ī. Therefore, the verse means ("... and the believers of them believe in that which is revealed unto thee O Muhammad from the Book, and that which was revealed among My Books before thee, and in the angels who are constant in prayer."). If we go back to the s.ifah of al-rāsikhūna fi ’l-‘ilm, the verse means ("But as for those from among them who are deeply rooted in knowledge, and the believers in the Books, and the angels, and those who pay the poor-due, and the believers in Allah 230.

See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 140.

84

and the Last Day...").231 If we examine the view chosen by al-T.abarsī for the interpretation of the verse in question, it contains the pillars of faith and of Islam. The belief in Allah, His angels, His messengers - as angels and messengers are those who are constant in prayer232 - His revealed Books, and the Last Day mentioned in the verse, are among the pillars of faith. The five pillars of Islam are represented by establishing the obligatory prayers and paying the zakāt mentioned in this verse as well as other verses scattered throughout the Qur’ān.

If we look into the meaning of the verse in question, we find that they are almost identical to those of verses 2-5 of sūrat al-Baqarah. These verses run as follows:

"This is the Book wherein there is no doubt, a guidance for those who fear Allah (al-muttaqīn), who believe in [the existence] of that which is beyond the reach of human perception (al-ghayb), and are constant in prayer, and spend out of what We have provided for them, and who believe in that which is revealed unto thee, and that which was revealed before thee, and are certain of the Hereafter. These are rightly guided by their Lord, and these shall surely prosper (al-muflih.ūn)." (Q. 2:2-5).

The similarity between the two groups of verses is as follows: Q. 2:2-5 Q. 4:162 a. a. b.

b.

c.

c.

d.

d.

e.

e.

f.

f.

231.

For further details, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 6, pp. 19-20.

232.

See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 274.

85

g.

g.

h.

h.

We have noticed that the meaning of the two groups are almost identical. The expression yu’minūna bimā unzila ilayka wa mā unzila min qablika is found in both groups. The term al-ākhirah (the Hereafter) in Q. 2:4 is itself al-yawm al-ākhir (the Last Day) in Q. 4:162. As those who are constant in prayer in Q. 2:2-5 are the muttaqīn it is highly probable that those who are constant in prayer in Q. 4:162 are the al-rāsikhūn fi ’l-‘ilm and al-mu’minūn. For this reason, I lean to the view of Sībawayh, al-Farrā’, Khalīl and the grammarians of the Bas.ran school in general, that al-muqīmīn al-s.alāh is in the accusative case because it indicates praise as mentioned above. There are many ways to emphasise a statement: we highlight it, underline it, or write it in italics. One of many ways to emphasise a statement in the classical Arabic literature as well as in the Qur’ān is by changing its case, as we have noticed above.

4.

With regard to the verse kadhālika nunjjī ’l-mu’minīn ("thus We save believers" Q. 21:88), Ibn Qutaybah says that although it is written in the mus.h.af with one letter nūn, all the qurrā’ read it with two nūns, namely, nunjī, except ‘Ās.im who read it nujjī with one nūn.233 The reason for dropping the second nūn, in their view, is that this letter nūn is hidden in the letter jīm, or, as al-T.abarī put it, is not clearly pronounced, as is in allā (originally an lā), so that this letter nūn is dropped. The subject is then Allāh, and the object is al-mu’minīn which is in the accusative case.234 On the other hand, ‘Ās.im’s reading is acceptable among some grammarians, such as al-Farrā’, Abū ‘Ubayd, and Tha‘lab. They base their view on the assumption that there is a hidden mas.dar (verbal noun) after the 233.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 54; and Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 430.

Beside ‘Ās.im, Ibn ‘Āmir also reads nujjī with one nūn; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 60.

234.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 55; Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, p. 250; and alT.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 65.

86

verb which serves as the subject in the verse, namely, al-najā’, so that the verse reads nujjī ’l-najā’u ’l-mu’minīn which later becomes nujjī ’lmu’minīn. It is like the expression d.uriba al-d.arbu zaydan which later becomes d.uriba zaydan; the more acceptable expression is man kadhaba kāna sharran lahu ("whoever lies it is bad for him") in which the subject alkadhib (lying) is not expressed but understood. As a shāhid in poetry they cite the satiric poem of Jarīr ridiculing Farazdaq, as follows: ("Even if Qufayrah [Farazdaq's mother] bore a dog's cub, dogs would be cursed of that cub"). La subba ... al-kilābā here means la subba al-sabbu ... al-kilābā, so that al-kilābā remains in the accusative case.235 Abū ‘Ubayd who chooses ‘Ās.im's reading says that he (Abū ‘Ubayd) does so, because he does not like to disagree with the text of the mus.h.af; moreover, there is also a variant reading similar to this verse, namely, li-yajziya qawman bimā kānu yaksibūn ("so that He may requite people according to what they have earned." Q. 45:14). This verse is read

by Abū Ja‘far al-Madanī li-yujzā qawman, meaning li-yujzā ’l-jazā’u qawman.236 The use of the mas.dar of a verb as a subject in the above examples is unacceptable according to al-Zajjāj and Abū H.ātim, because it only repeats the meaning of the verb. They say that it is not possible to say d.uriba zaydan meaning d.uriba ’l-d.arbu zaydan, because the verb d.uriba has already indicated the action of beating (al- d.arb), and therefore, the use of al- d.arb is redundant. They reject ‘Ās.im’s reading nujjī ’l-mu’minīn as a solecism, because the noun al-mu’minīn is in the accusative case where no subject is mentioned. Therefore, the proper expression with nujjī is al-mu’minūn, like the expression kurrima ’l-s.ālih.ūn.237 Another view of Abū ‘Ubayd is that the reading nujjī is originally nunjī, and the second nūn is contracted with the letter jīm. However, the idea of contraction (idghām) is rejected by al-Nah.h.ās who says that because the articulation of the two letters is very different no grammarian allows the contraction of nūn with jīm. For example, the verse man jā’a bi’l-h.asanah 235.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 55-56; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 210; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 335.

236.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 55; and Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, p. 250.

237.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 55, n. 1.

87

(Q. 6:160, 27:89, and 28:84) is never read maj jā’a bi ’l-h.asanah. The best explanation for this, according to al-Qurt.ubī, is that of ‘Alī ibn Sulaymān alAkhfash. He says that due to the combination of two letter nūns in nunjī the second nūn is dropped. It is like wa lā tafarraqū (Q. 3:103) which is originally wa lā tatafarraqū.238 Another view worth mentioning is that of Abū ‘Alī who says that ‘Ās.im should have read nunjī with two letter nūns, but only one nūn was clear. People who heard his reading thought that there was a contraction between the letter nūn and the letter jīm. Therefore, they changed it with one letter nūn.239 If we look into the present Qur’ānic text based on the variant reading of ‘Ās.im we find that a small lone letter nūn is put after the letter nūn in n-jy. Its purpose is to help the reader in reading the word, so that he will read it rather than . However, since this lone nūn is not joined with the rasm of the word, the rasm is not affected or changed. It is written like this: . Therefore, I lean to the view of Abū ‘Alī above. It means that ‘Ās.im did really read nunjī like the other qurrā’. The only difference is that he did not pronounce the second nūn clearly, since it was not written in the ‘Uthmānic recension.

5.

According to Ibn Qutaybah most of the qurrā’ read fa’as.s.addaqa wa akun (without waw) rather than wa akūna.240 He states that the reason for reading akun is that according to some grammarians the word akun takes the position of fa’as.s.addaqa, namely, in the apocopate form (jazm). Without (fā’) the word has to be in the apocopate form, namely, as.s.addaq.

Originally, the expression is law lā akhkhartanī ... atas.addaq wa akun min 238.

239.

240.

See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 335.

See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 60.

The text says

without

, but this must be misprinted, as none

of the qurrā’ read it that way. It should be wāw" is meant by Ibn Qutaybah the absence of wāw in

, and the expression "without , namely, not

. See

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 56, al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 87-88; and vol. 3, p. 160, and Ibn Khālawayh, al-H.ujjah, p. 346.

88

al-s.ālih.īn. As a shāhid they give the following example in poetry: ("Give me your camel so that I may leave you and go back to my way," namely, "treat me well and bring back your kindness to me, for this may induce me to make peace with you and bring me back to what I used to be"). Without la‘allī it is read us.ālih.kum in the apocopate form, and that is the reason astadrij is also in the apocopate form.

However, it is also possible to read wa akūna which is the reading of Abū ‘Amr ibn al-‘Alā’ according to Ibn Qutaybah, and of Ibn Mas‘ūd and other qurrā’ according to al-Farrā’.241 Ibn Mas‘ūd maintains that this reading is correct and not disagreeing with the rasm of the mus.h.af, since the letter waw may be dropped in the text while it remains there in the reading. It is like the letter alif which is dropped in al-Rah.mān ( ) and Sulaymān (

).242 C. Contradiction and Disagreement in the Verses of the Qur’ān

There are some Qur’ānic verses in which, to some people, contradiction ( ) seems to occur. In other verses disagreement ( ) seems to occur because of (a) not noticing the existence of relevance, (b) misunderstanding the words, or (c) misunderstanding the expression used in these verses. To prove the absence of such contradiction and disagreement in these verses Ibn Qutaybah explains them one by one, among which are as follows: 1. Contradiction a. ("For on that Day neither man nor invisible being will be asked about his sin." Q. 55:39, Asad) seems to be contradictory with "But by 241.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 56; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 259; and Ibn Mujāhid, Kitāb al-Sab‘ah, p. 637. Besides Ibn Mas‘ūd, according to the codex of Ibn ‘Abbās it is read wa akūna. The codex of Ubayy ibn Ka‘b reads fa’atas.addaqa.

Ibn Mas‘ūd's variant reading is

. See A. Jeffery, Materials,

pp. 171 and 206.

242.

See A. Jeffery, Materials, pp. 171 and 206. See also al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 87-88 and vol. 3, p. 160.

89

thy Sustainer! [On the Day of Judgment] We shall indeed call them to account, one and all, for whatever they have done!" )Q. 15:92-93, Asad).

Ibn Qutaybah's commentary is that the Resurrection Day ( ) will last fifty thousand years.243 On that day people will be and then will not be questioned. They will be questioned and put on trial in Allah's court.

After the completion of reckoning good and bad deeds they have done on the earth, then what Allah described when He said "When the sky is rent asunder and becomes red like [burning] oil" (Q. 55:37, Asad) will take place. The talking and arguing will cease, the faces of the blessed will turn white and of the damned will turn black (Q. 3:106-7 and 39:6). The two parties will be identified with marks; the leaves containing the record of their deeds will fly from their hands; the blessed will be sent to Heaven and the damned will be sent to Hell (Q. 56:8-9 and 41). This is the moment where neither man nor invisible being (jinni) will be questioned about his sin as mentioned in the above verse.244 b. It is stated in one verse "[And] He will say: 'Contend not before Me, [O you sinners,] for I gave you a forewarning [of this Day of Reckoning].'" (Q. 50:28, Asad), whereas in the other it is stated: "And then, behold, on the Day of Resurrection you all shall place your dispute before your Sustainer." (Q. 39:31, Asad). Ibn Qutaybah's commentary is that 243.

Ibn Qutaybah is referring to the Qur’ānic verse:

"Whereby the angels and the Spirit ascend unto Him in a Day whereof the span is fifty thousand years." (Q. 70:4). This is the interpretation of ‘Ikrimah, Qatādah and Ibn ‘Abbās as reported by al-T.abarī. However, in another report attributed to Ibn ‘Abbās he was asked about the day in which the span is fifty thousand years. He asked the questioner about the day in which the span is one thousand years mentioned in Q. 32:5). When the questioner declined to answer, Ibn ‘Abbās told him that both days were mentioned by Allah in the Qur’ān, and He Himself knew them best. Ibn ‘Abbās did not want to give any commentary on them. See alT.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 29, p. 45.

244.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 65. According to Qatādah, the questioning will occur before their mouths were sealed, their hands spoke and their feet testified as mentioned in Q. 36:65. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 174; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 295.

90

people will argue against each other where the wronged will complain against the wrong-doers, and when the disputes are settled Allah will tell them not to speak, argue or make any excuse any longer, for their arguments and excuses will be of no avail. Ibn Qutaybah presents one interpretation given by ‘Ikrimah on the verse "That Day on which they will not [be able to] utter a word, nor be allowed to proffer excuses!" (Q. 77:35-36, Asad) and the verse Q. 39:31 above. ‘Ikrimah said that on that Day they will argue with each other, then Allah will seal their mouths, and their hands and legs will talk.245 2. Disagreement a. Not noticing the existence of relevance, as follows: (1) The verse “And if you have reason to fear that you might not act equitably towards orphans,” continues with “then marry from among [other] women such as are lawful to you - [even] two, three, or four" (Q. 4:3, Asad) which seems irrelevant. Ibn Qutaybah's explanation is that if you fear that you might not deal fairly with the orphans that are assigned to you, then fear also that you might not do justice among women if you marry them. Therefore, marry two, three or four wives and not more.

Otherwise, you will not be able to do justice among them. The verse continues with: "But if you have reason to fear that you might not be able to treat them with equal fairness, then [only] one - or [from among] those whom you rightfully possess." It means that if you still fear that you would not be able to do justice with two, three or four wives, then marry one wife only, or confine yourself to your imā’ (slave girls) whom your right hand possesses. This is more appropriate, so that you would not become unfair with them. Quoting Ibn ‘Abbās Ibn Qutaybah said that like the orphans, women are also under the protection of men. Since justice is highly required from the guardians of orphans towards these orphans, so it is with the husbands towards 245.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 66. See also Q. 36:65. In the Hereafter the wronged will dispute against the wrong-doers, the speakers of truth against the liars and nonbelievers against believers and the weak against the arrogant; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 254.

91

their wives. Therefore, the number of wives is limited to four and not more to avoid injustice.246 (2) One verse reads: "God has laid down that the Ka‘bah, the Inviolable Temple, shall be a symbol for all mankind; and [so, too] the sacred month [of pilgrimage] and the garlanded offerings," then the verse continues with "that these [are symbols] meant to make you aware that God is aware of all that is in the heavens and all that is on earth, and that God has full knowledge of everything." (Q. 5:97, Asad). The second part of the verse seems to be irrelevant to the first part.

In order to show the existence of relevance between the two parts of the above verse, Ibn Qutaybah described at first the condition of the Arabs before the advent of Islam. He said that the Arabs in the pre-Islamic era were accustomed to waging war among themselves, shedding blood and taking others' property unjustly, frightening travellers, seeking vengeance and killing an innocent person rather than the killer in revenge. They even killed a close friend or a relative in retaliation for another close friend or relative.

An example can be seen with Tawbah ibn al-Mud.arris al-‘Abasī who wrote a poem consoling his mother after killing his own maternal uncle in revenge for his brother's assassination. They might kill three, four or more persons in revenge for one person. An unidentified poet wrote a poem regarding such an event when he said "They accused you of killing one of their men; in revenge, they killed eight men )of yours(; then they continued tending (their camels) fearlessly (of any retaliation from you)." For this reason Allah made the Ka‘bah, the Inviolable Temple and the sacred territory (al-h.arām) around it, so that people who were afraid for themselves could take refuge within this sacred territory.

Allah made the sacred month so that when it arrived people and their 246.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 72-73. This is also the view of Qatādah and Mujāhid. This is one interpretation given by al-T.abarī. The other interpretation is that of ‘Ā’ishah who says that the verse deals with the guardians of orphans who intend to marry them for their wealth and beauty with lower than the minimum dowry. The verse prohibits them from doing so unless they pay the dowry in full, or marry other women.

For further details, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 4, pp. 155-160; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

5, p. 11; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, pp. 459-461.

92

property became safe again. After they had sacrificed or put the garland around the neck of the animals to be sacrificed they would be free to go and travel in search of their subsistence which would make them prosper and safe from poverty. If Allah had left these Arabs in their state of ignorance and continuous state of hostility, travelling and trade would have stopped and they would have become extinct. Allah did not want this to happen. He did what He did because He knew what was good for them and wanted us to know that Allah is aware of all that is in the heavens and all that is on earth and has full knowledge of everything. b. Misunderstanding the words, as follows: (1) The word kuffār in the following verse is misunderstood by some people as "infidels" rather than "tillers". The verse runs as follows: "Its parable is that of [life-giving] rain: the herbage which it causes to grow delights the tillers of the soil..." (Q. 57:20, Asad). They wondered why the verse specified the infidels alone in rejoicing on seeing the growth of the plants when the believers would not have their faith decrease if they shared the infidels' joy. Ibn Qutaybah states that the word kuffār in the above verse means "the farmers", as the root-meaning of the word kafara from which kuffār is derived means "to cover". The farmer who sows the seeds is called kāfir, because he covers them with soil when he plants them. The night is called kāfir because it covers everything with its darkness. It is in this sense that the pre-Islamic poet Labīd said “...in a night where the clouds covered its stars". In addition, another Qur’ānic verse mentions the word zurrā‘ (farmers) instead of kuffār, as follows: "... [they are] like a seed that brings forth its shoot, and then He strengthens it, so that it grows stout, and [in the end] stands firm upon its stem, delighting the sowers..." (Q. 48:29, Asad).247 (2) The word subātan in the following verse is misunderstood by some people and translated as "sleep" rather than "rest". The verse reads as follows: “And [We] made your sleep for rest." (Q. 78:9, ‘Ali). Therefore they wonder how sleep is made for sleep. Ibn Qutaybah explains that subātan in the above verse means "rest", so that the verse means "and We made sleep for rest for your body". Saturday 247.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 75-76; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 255.

93

is called meaning "the day of rest" on which the children of Israel have rest. The word sabt originally means "stretching" from which it becomes "rest". The expression means "the woman undid the plait of her hair". However, sleep is sometimes called subāt because sleep occurs with stretching.248 Another meaning of subāt is given by al-Qurt.ubī which is "cutting" ( ). The expression means “he cut his hair,” and if someone sleeps he cuts his relation with people and his work.249 c. Misunderstanding the expression in the verses, as follows: (1) The verse

“... and goblets that will [seem to] be crystal"

(lit., "and goblets which were crystal"), then the verse continues with “Crystal-like, [but] of silver" (Q. 76:15-6, Asad) (lit., "crystal [made] of silver"). To some people the two verses seem to disagree. The first verse mentions goblets made of crystal, then in the second, the crystal is made of silver. Ibn Qutaybah's explanation is that everything in Paradise such as beds and cups are different from what we have in this world. Allah mentions what we know in this world to indicate what we do not know in the next world. Referring to Ibn ‘Abbās's statement, Ibn Qutaybah says that there is nothing in this world similar to that in Paradise except in names. The goblets in this world are made of crystal or of silver. In Paradise these goblets are white as silver and pure as crystal. The verse, then, means according to Ibn Qutaybah "crystal as if it were silver" rather than "crystal-like, [but] of silver" as viewed by Ibn Kathīr and translated by Asad above.250 (2) The verse “That We may send upon them stones of clay" (Q. 51:33, Pickthall). This verse seems to indicate 248.

249.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 79-80; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 171.

Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 172.

250.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 80. Al-Qurt.ubī and Ibn Kathīr also mention Ibn ‘Abbās's interpretation with the addition that Ibn ‘Abbas makes the exception with the crystal that it is of silver. But he says further that the crystal of Paradise is like silver (in its whiteness) with the purity of crystal. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 141. Ibn Kathīr also quotes Ibn ‘Abbās's statement who says that the goblets are of silver but transparent so that its content can be seen through it; such goblets will not be found in this world. See Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 486.

94

that the stones were made of clay. Referring to Ibn ‘Abbās's interpretation, Ibn Qutaybah says that these stones are ājurr (baked bricks), for it is as hard as stone.251 D. The Ambiguity of the Verses of the Qur’ān 1. The meaning of ambiguity The word tashābuh (similarity, resemblance, likeness), which is the mas.dar of the word mutashābih (ambiguous, obscure) as explained by Ibn Qutaybah, is the resemblance of a word with another in its appearance when they differ in meaning. For example, the fruit of Paradise resembles that of the earth, but the taste is different, as mentioned in the following verse: ("It is given to them [namely, the people of Paradise] something resembling it." Q. 2:25). The verb tashābaha ("to resemble one another") in the verse "their hearts are all alike" (Q. 2:118) means "their hearts resemble each other in infidelity and in harshness". The verb ishtabaha ("to resemble one another") in the expression ("the matter is obscure to me") means "it resembles another matter, so that I can hardly make any distinction between the two".

The verb shabbaha ("to liken, to make equal or similar") in the expression ("you made me uncertain") if you covered the truth with falsehood ( ). Magicians ( ) are called ("dubious persons"), because they make falsehood seem reality.252 The word mutashābih may also be applied to something ambiguous (mysterious) and subtle, even if it does not make us confused with its resemblance to something else. The letters of the alphabet at the openings of many chapters of the Qur’ān, known as al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah (lit., "disjoined letters"), are sometimes called mutashābih since they resemble other letters. These ambiguous letters will be dealt with in chapter four of this study.

251.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 81. Al-Qushayrī states that the verse said "stones of clay" to distinguish it from the "stones of water" which are hail stones. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 48.

252.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 101-102.

95

2. Muh.kamāt and Mutashābihāt There has never been any dispute among Muslim scholars regarding the existence of muh.kamāt (clear verses) as well as mutashābihāt (ambiguous verses) in the Qur’ān. The Qur’ān itself affirms their existence as follows: “He it is Who hath revealed unto thee (Muhammad) the Book, containing verses that are clear in and by themselves [namely, precise in meaning] - they are the essence of the Book - and others allegorical..." (Q. 3:7). But they disagree in regard to the verses which are considered to belong to the mutashābihāt and in the possibility of knowing their ta’wīl.

The Ash‘arīs and the Mu‘tazilīs believe that the mutashābihāt are explained by the muh.kamāt, but what is ambiguous (mutashābih) according to the Ash‘aris is clear (muh.kam) according to the Mu‘tazilīs and vice versa. For example, the Qur’ānic verse “Then whosoever will, let him believe, and whosoever will, let him disbelieve;" (Q. 18:29, Pickthall), and “Yet, you cannot will, except by the will of Allah." (Q. 76:30, Dawood). According to the Ash‘arīs, the first verse is mutashābih because they do not believe in the infinite free-will, while the second one is muh.kam. The Mu‘tazilīs hold the opposite view, because they do not believe in finite free-will.

Generally speaking, the muh.kamāt are verses which decide clearly and elaborately with clear evidence the ruling of something whether it is h.alāl (lawful, permissible), h.arām (unlawful, prohibited), wa‘d (promise), wa‘īd (threat), thawāb (reward), ‘iqāb (punishment), amr (command), zajr (reproof), khabar (news of the past), mathal (parable), ‘iz.ah (sermon, advice), ‘ibar (deterrent examples), etc. These muh.kamāt verses are the mother of the Book, namely, the foundation (origin, source) of the Book, wherein the religion of Islam, the religious obligations (al-farā’id.), penal laws (al-h.udūd), and matters concerning Muslims' religious affairs are found. However, there are different opinions among the ‘ulamā’ on what is precisely meant by muh.kamāt and its relation to mutashābihāt, among which are as follows: a. The muh.kamāt are verses which are to be acted upon (al-ma‘mūl bihā) and abrogate others, while the mutashābihāt are verses which are

96

abrogated and which are not to be followed. Among the followers of this view are Ibn ‘Abbās, Qatādah, al-Rabī‘, and al-D.ah.h.āk ibn Muzāh.im.253 b. The muh.kamāt are verses in which h.alāl and h.arām are explained; the rest are mutashābihāt. This is the view of Mujāhid.254 c. The muh.kamāt are verses which have no more than one ta’wīl, while the mutashābihāt are those which are subject to many interpretations. This is the view of Muh.ammad ibn Ja‘far ibn al-Zubayr.255 Al-Sayyid alMurtad.á who supports this view states that the majority of the mutashābihāt have many meanings. It is difficult to know which of these interpretations is meant by Allah.256 d. The muh.kamāt are verses which deal with stories of nations and messengers sent to them which were elaborately told to the Prophet and then to his followers. The mutashābihāt are those which are ambiguous due to the repetition of the stories in different chapters of the Qur’ān; some stories are related in the same wording with different meanings, but others in different wording but with the same meanings. This is the view of Ibn Zayd who cites the verse: "A-L-R. (This is) a Book, with verses that have been made clear in and by themselves, and then have been distinctly spelled out from One Who is wise and all aware." (Q. 11:1). One example of the mutashābihāt given by Ibn Zayd is the story of Prophet Moses mentioned in many chapters in the Qur’ān with different wording but with the same meanings (ideas). Another example is the use of ("introduce therein" Q. 23:27) which has the same meaning with ("load therein" Q. 11:40), 28:32) which has the same meaning with hand into" Q. 27:12), and 20:20, Asad) has the same idea with 253.

("thrust thy hand" Q. ("put thy ("a snake, moving rapidly", Q. ("a serpent,

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 3, pp. 114-115.

254.

Ibid., p. 115.

255.

Ibid., pp. 115-116. This is also the view of Abū ‘Alī al-Jubbā’ī, according to al-T.abarsī, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 409.

256.

See al-Murtad.á, al-Amālī. vol. 2, p. 97.

97

plainly visible", Q. 7:107, Asad).257 e. The muh.kamāt are verses whose meanings and interpretations are known by the ‘ulamā’, while the mutashābihāt are those whose interpretations are known to Allah alone, such as the time of the coming of the Doomsday, and al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah. This is the view of Jābir ibn ‘Abd Allāh ibn Rubāb to which al-T.abarī leans.258 3. The ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt One of the big issues in the course of the history of the Qur’ānic exegesis is whether the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm (those who are deeply rooted in knowledge) know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt or not. One group, such as Ibn H.azm, says that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm do not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. The other group, such as Ibn Qutaybah, believes that they know them. The discrepancy lies in their way of reading and understanding the following verse: " But those in whose hearts is perversity follow the part thereof that which is allegorical seeking (to create) dissension and seeking its interpretation.

None knoweth its interpretation save Allah. And those who are deeply rooted in knowledge say: ‘We believe in it; it is all from our Lord’; but only the wise take heed." (Q. 3:7) The core issue in the above verse is lā ya‘lamu ta’wīlahu illā ’llāh wa al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm yaqūlūn āmannā bihi. Those who assert that the alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm do not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt, in reading the above verse, make a pause in illā ’llāh, and then start a new sentence with wa al-rāsikhūn fī al-‘ilm, as translated above. Asad, Ali, Pickthall and Dawood all make a full stop after translating illa ’llah. Among those who hold this view are: Ā‘ishah, ‘Urwah ibn al-Zubayr, al-H.asan al-Bas.rī, Mālik, al-Kisā’ī and al-Farrā’. But those who assert that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l‘ilm know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt, instead of making that pause, they continue the reading with wa ’l-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm, which, in so doing, becomes connected with Allāh by means of the conjunction wa ("and").

257.

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 3, p. 116; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

258.

Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 3, pp. 116-117; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

409.

1, p. 409.

98

Consequently, the meaning of the verse becomes that beside Allah, the alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm also know the ta‘wīl of the mutashābihāt. Among those who hold this view are Ibn ‘Abbās, al-Rabī‘ and Muh.ammad ibn Ja‘far ibn al-Zayd.259 Ibn al-Anbārī accepts both interpretations and includes this verse among the al-ad.dād in his work al-Ad.dād. However, he states that the majority of scholars hold the first view.260 Ibn Qutaybah maintains that the significance of the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān is that as the Qur’ān was revealed in the language of the Arabs with its own way of expression and style, such as the use of brevity, elaborateness, emphasis, symbolic expression, the concealment of meanings at one time and then revealing it at another, it can be understood by quickunderstanding people only. Otherwise, every verse would be clear to everybody, disregarding his level of understanding. Consequently, there would be neither rivalry for precedence (tafād.ul) among people, nor diligent study (to understand the Qur’ān), and ideas would become dead. Similarly, in every branch of knowledge, there are things which are sublime and subtle through which students should pass, so that they will ascend from one level to another, until they reach its highest level. In this way, scholars will possess the merit of insight and good judgment, for which they will be rewarded by Allah.261 Ibn Qutaybah gives many examples from the hadīths, the sayings of the s.ah.ābah, poetry and Arabic expressions to indicate the existence of difficult expressions which cannot be easily understood, similar to the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān. One of them is the saying of the Prophet, as follows: "Women who dress and at the same time are naked will not enter Heaven," meaning that women who wear very thin or skimpy clothes which reveal the outline of their bodies are effectively naked. Such women will not enter Heaven.262 Ibn Qutaybah explicitly asserts that he does not belong to "those who claim that the mutashābih in the Qur’ān is unknown to the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l‘ilm". His arguments are as follows: a. Allah would not reveal anything in the Qur’ān except for the benefit of 259.

Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 410.

260.

Ibn Al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 424-425.

261.

262.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 86.

For further details and more examples, see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 87-98.

99

mankind, and that He would expose what He meant by what He had revealed.263 b. It is impossible to believe that the Prophet himself did not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. Since he knew the mutashābihāt, despite the verse "None knoweth its interpretation save Allah" it is possible that his elected s.ah.ābah would also have known it. He taught ‘Ali the tafsīr. Ibn ‘Abbās, for whom the Prophet had prayed to become expert in the ta’wīl of the Qur’ān, was reported to have said that he knew everything in the Qur’ān except four things which he knew later, namely: (filth, Q. 69:36),

(compassion, Q. 19:13),

Q. 9:114), and

(soft of heart,

(inscription, Q. 18:9).264

c. If the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm did not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt, they would not have any supremacy over seekers of knowledge, or even the ignorant among Muslims, because all of them say, "We believe in it; it is all from our Lord." d. The word yaqūlūn in the verse is a hāl (an adverb or a circumstantial phrase) to the verb ya‘lamu. It is like the expression "Nobody comes to you except ‘Abd Allāh and Zayd says 'I am happy to visit you.'"), meaning ("Nobody comes to you except ‘Abd Allāh and Zayd, saying 'I am happy to visit you.'" As a shāhid from poetry Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of Yazīd ibn Mufarrigh al-H.imyarī lamenting an unidentified person, or satirising ‘Ubbād ibn Ziyād according to S.A. S.aqr, or regretting the loss of his servant Burd by selling him out of necessity according to alT.abarsī.265 The poem reads as follows:

"You have cut your tie with Umāmah after weary days, and the wind is weeping its grief, and the lightning is illuminating (in) a cloud."

263.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 98.

Ibid., p. 99.

265.

Ibid., p. 101, n. 2; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 410.

264.

100

It means "the lightning illuminating the cloud is also weeping its grief". If the lightning did not share with the wind in its grief, it would not have made any sense ( ) to mention it in the poem.266 Ibn Qutaybah considers the term mushkil as a synonym of mutashābih.

He states that since the word mushkil literally means "something which makes a form" (ashkala), namely, "it takes the form of something else", it resembles it.267 He believes that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. With this in mind, Ibn Qutaybah calls his book which is being studied here Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān.

It is worthy to mention here the arguments of a scholar who held a different view, living in a different time and place, to compare it with those of Ibn Qutaybah. The person was Ibn H.azm, an advocate of the Z.āhirī school who lived in Andalusia (Muslim Spain) in the fifth/eleventh century, two centuries after Ibn Qutaybah's time. Ibn H.azm insisted that the alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm do not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. His main argument is as follows: a. The word al-rāsikhūn fī ’l‘ilm in the verse in question is the subject of a new sentence. The conjunction wa ("and") in the verse joins two sentences instead of two nouns, as translated above. b. Allah prohibited people from seeking the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt, for He said in the verse that those who seek and follow its ta’wīl are those in whose hearts is perversity and are creators of fitnah. c. Had the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm known the ta’wīl they would have explained it to the people, because they are enjoined by Allah to do so, or they would be cursed by Him. He said: “Those who hide the proofs and the guidance which We revealed, after We had made it clear in the Scripture: such are accursed of Allah and accursed of those who have the power to curse." (Q. 2: 159, Pickthall).268 If they explained it to the 266.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 101. See also Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 424. For further details on this poem, see al-Murtad.á, al-Amālī, vol. 1, p. 44; and Abū al-Faraj al-As.bahānī, Kitāb al-Aghānī, ed. Rudolph E. Brünnow, 20 vols. (Leiden: E.J. Brill), vol. 17, pp. 53-55.

267.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 102.

268.

Many interpretations are given on his verse: (a) It is about the Jewish rabbis

101

people, these people would have the same knowledge of it with the explainer, so that it would not become mutashābih any longer. In other words, there would be no more mutashābihāt left unexplained. Yet, the Qur’ān states the existence of the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān. Since the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm would never conceal the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt if they knew it, for fear of Allah’s curse, and since no ta’wīl has been given, it means that they do not know it. d. ‘Ā’ishah reported that the Prophet, after reading the verse in question, said: "If you see people who follow what is mutashābih [in the Qur’an], they are those whom Allah called as such [namely, those in whose heart is doubt]. Therefore, beware of them."269 Both Ibn al-Anbārī and Ibn Qutaybah regarded al-h.urūf almuqat.t.a‘ah as mutashābihāt. For the former, they are the only ambiguous contents of the Qur’ān,270 whereas for the latter their interpretation is known by the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-ilm which will be dealt with in due course.

Among the arguments given by those who assert that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm do not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt are the following: a. Ibn Mas‘ūd's variant reading of Q. 3:7, as reported by Ibn Dā’ūd on the authority of al-A‘mash, is as follows: ("and those al-rāsikhūna fī ’l-‘ilm say: 'We believe in it.'"271 Nobody knows its interpretation except Allah. b. Ubayy ibn Ka‘b's variant reading is ("Its interpretation is with Allah only, and the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm and the Christian priests who concealed the prophecies about Prophet Muh.ammad; (b) It is about the Jews of Madīnah who concealed the law of stoning; (c) It is applicable to anyone who conceals the truth or the teachings of Islam. This verse is the reason why Abū Hurayrah narrated the h.adīths of the Prophet. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, pp.

184-185. Another Qur’ānic verse referred to by Ibn H.azm is as follows: "And (remember) when Allah laid a charge on those who had received the Scripture (He said): Ye are to expound it to mankind and not to hide it...." (Q. 3:187, Pickthall).

269.

For further details on Ibn H.azm's view on the mutashābihāt, see al-Ih.kām, vol. 4, pp. 489-494.

270.

Ibid., vol. 1, p. 44 and vol. 4, p. 491.

271.

A. Jeffery, Materials, p. 32; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 191.

102

say 'We believe in it'").272 c. In the codex of Ibn ‘Abbās it is written wa yaqūlu ’l-rāsikhūna fī ’l‘ilm.273 d. A h.adīth reported by al-Bukhārī, Muslim and Abū Dā’ūd on the authority of ‘Ā’ishah that the Prophet, after citing the verse in question (Q. 3:7) warned the Muslims not to seek the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān. e. A h.adīth reported by Ibn Mardawayh from ‘Amr ibn Shu‘ayb from his father who reported from his (‘Amr's) grand-father, that the Prophet said: "The verses of the Qur’ān were not revealed to contradict one another; therefore, act upon what you know in it, and believe in what is ambiguous in it."274 A similar h.adīth was also reported by al-H.ākim on the authority of Ibn Mas‘ūd, and by al-Bayhaqī on the authority of Abū Hurayrah. f. It was reported by Ibn Abī H.ātim that ‘Ā’ishah said: "Their [i.e., alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm's] soundness of instruction is that they believe in its (the Qur’ān's) mutashābihāt without knowing their ta’wīl. g. Al-Dārimī in his Musnad reported from Sulaymān ibn Yassār that ‘Umar beat S.abīgh ibn ‘Isl for his questioning about the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān.275 h. Ibn ‘Abbās's statement that tafsīr is divided into four categories: known by everybody, known by the Arabs through their language, known by scholars, and known by Allah alone.276 i. If the seeking of the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt were permitted, Allah would not have denounced it, as mentioned in the beginning of the verse in question (Q. 3:7). j. It would not be eloquent to begin the sentence in the verse in question with yaqūlūn āmannā bihi; instead, wa hum yaqūlūn…or wa yaqūlūn… would

272.

Jeffery, Materials, pp.123-4; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 191.

273.

Jeffery, Materials, p. 196. See also al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 3, p. 113; and alS.ābūnī (ed.), Mukhtas.ar, vol. 1, p. 265.

274.

275.

276.

Al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.s.ar, vol. 1, p. 265 See Ibn Taymiyyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., p. 130.

Al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.ar, vol. 1, p. 265; Ibn Taymiyyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., p. 136; and Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá (Muqaddimat al-Tafsīr), vol. 13, p. 375.

103

be proper.277 Moreover, it would be stylistically deviating from the ostensible meaning of the text to consider the expression yaqūlūn āmannā bihi as a āl for exclusively al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm with the exclusion of Allāh.278 k. If the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm knew the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt with a dalālah (an indicant, a hint), their faith in the mutashābihāt would have been like that in the muh.kamāt; therefore, this faith of theirs in the mutashābihāt would not have been highly praised. l. The expression kullun min ‘indi rabbinā ("it is all from our Lord") in the verse indicates that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm believe in what they know in detail and what they do not. Otherwise, the expression would not have any meaning.

Among the arguments given by those who assert that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt are the following: a. A h.adīth stating that the Prophet prayed to Allah for Ibn ‘Abbās that He would teach him the ta’wīl of the Qur’ān. b. A statement of Ibn ‘Abbās, as reported by Mujāhid, that he was one of the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm who knew the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. c. The statement of Ibn Mas‘ūd that he knew the asbāb al-nuzūl of the verses of the Qur’ān. d. The statement of al-H.asan that he would like to know the meanings and the asbāb al-nuzūl of the verses of the Qur’ān.

277.

This is also the view of S.ābigh ibn ‘Isl who was beaten by ‘Umar when he said that if the wāw is wāw ‘at.f (wāw of conjunction) between the two nouns and not wāw isti’nāf (wāw of continuation between two sentences or phrases), the verse would have said wa yaqūlūn; see Ibn Taymiyyah, Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās., p. 130. For further details on S.abīgh, see Abbott, Qur’ānic Commentary, pp. 107-10.

278.

At least two Qur’ānic verses use the same style as the verse (Q. 3:7) in question, and therefore, weaken this argument. One of them is "And thy Lord shall come with angels, rank in rank" Q. 89:22, Pickthall) in which "rank in rank" is attributed to the angels only. The other verse deals with the distribution of the fay’ (the spoils) of the Banī al-Nad.īr among the three groups of people, namely, the muhājirīn, the ans.ār (Q. 59:8-9), and "...and those who came (into the faith) after them, say: 'Our Lord! Forgive us...'" Q. 59:10, Pickthall).

104

e. The s.ah.ābah asked the Prophet or the more knowledgeable among themselves, such as Ibn ‘Abbās, the meaning of verses unclear to them.

Moreover, they learned from the Prophet not more than ten verses at one time and acted according to their contents. Then they learned about ten other verses until they learned the whole Qur’ān. f. Allah enjoins the Muslims to ponder the meanings of the Qur’ānic verses without restriction to the muh.kamāt. g. The s.ah.ābah and the tabi‘īn gave their commentary on all the verses of the Qur’ān, with the exception of some mutashābihāt. However, it does not mean that nobody knows their ta’wīl. The ‘ulamā’ among these people have agreed that the Qur’ān is understandable and explicable, and the existence of the mutashābihāt in it does not necessarily mean that Allah conceals His knowledge of them from people. h. Allah mentions in the Qur’ān that its verses, without exception, are bayān (explanation), hudan (guidance), shifā‘ (healing) and maw‘iz.ah (advice).

These can only be achieved by understanding their meanings. i. It would be unreasonable that Allah would reveal to the Prophet through Gabriel something which neither Gabriel nor the Prophet could understand. Since the purpose of sending His revelation is to be understood, it would be useless to reveal something which is beyond human understanding. j. It is true that some knowledge is kept by Allah Himself, such as the time of the occurrence of the Doomsday, but such things are not revealed in the Qur’ān, which are not meant to be known by mankind. k. Assuming that some Qur’ānic verses are mutashābihāt the ta’wīl of which is known by Allah alone could be abused as a pretext to avoid complying with many Qur’ānic verses. l. Allah in the verse in question denounced exclusively those in whose hearts is perversity, due to their ignorance and evil intention, for they do not want to find the truth, but to create dissension (fitnah). To these people the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt would not be known, but rather to the alrāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm.

Al-Farrā’'s position on this issue is clear, namely, al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm do not know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. He states that al-rāsikhūn is marfū‘ by yaqūlūn, and not by ya‘lamu. It is similar to the verse "..., their gaze returning not to them, and their

105

hearts as air" (Q. 14:43), where af’idatuhum is marfū‘ by hawā’, not by lā yartaddu.279 Here "their hearts" is a subject for a new sentence, and is not connected with "their gaze".

Abu ‘Ubaydah’s position on the above issue is not clear. He does not give us his commentary on Q. 3:7 except that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm are the ‘ulamā’ who are also of sound faith ( ).280 It is possible that his position is like that of al-Farrā’, or else, he would have said that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm also know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. If it is so, then Ibn Qutaybah disagrees not only with al-Farrā’, but also with Abū ‘Ubaydah, two of his prominent teachers.

The complexity of the issue is that there is no indication that the verse in question limits the division of the Qur’ānic verses into exclusively muh.kamāt and mutashābihāt. Moreover, the ‘ulamā do not agree as to what belongs to the category of mutashābihāt as well as their interpretation.

However, the effective enquirers (al-muh.aqqiqīn) among the mufassirīn bring about reconciliation between the two contending views by accepting both of them with the following explanation: The Qur’ānic verses in their relation to each other can be divided into three categories: absolutely clear ( ), absolutely ambiguous (

), and partly clear and partly ambiguous (

). The nature of the ambiguity of the mutashābihāt is either in wording (lafz.), such as the word abb (fodder - which is an uncommon word among the Arabs - in Q. 80:31); in meaning (ma‘ná), such as the attributes of Allah; or in both wording and meaning, such as the injunction on fighting the idolators in Q. 9:5. These mutashābihāt in their relation to human level of understanding are divided into three categories: things which are completely unknown by people and beyond human understanding, such as the appearance of the beast as one of the signs of the Doomsday mentioned in Q. 27:82; things which can be known by people, such as uncommon words and some laws; and lastly, things which are known by exclusively the alrāsikhūn fī ’l-ilm. In other words, they know some mutashābihāt and do not know some others which belong to the first category. This type of knowledge is the one which the Prophet had prayed for, his cousin Ibn 279.

280.

Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 78, and vol. 1, p. 191.

Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 86.

106

‘Abbas. When the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm said āmannā ("we believe"), they believed in the mutashābihāt regardless whether they knew the ta’wīl of them or not.

107

CHAPTER III IBN QUTAYBAH’S TREATISE OF THE PHENOMENA OF FIGURATIVE LANGUAGE In this chapter the phenomena of figurative language in the verses of the Qur’ān will be dealt with. They will be divided into six categories based on Ibn Qutaybah’s treatment. They are: metaphor (majāz and isti‘ārah), inversion (maqlūb), ellipsis (h.adhf) and brevity (ikhtis.ār), repetition (takrār) and pleonasm (ziyādah), metonymy (kināyah) and allusion (ta‘rīd.), and the idiomatic expression entitled “the disagreement of the word with its literal meaning” ( ).

A. Metaphor Metaphor is the use of words to indicate something different from their basic meanings. For example, if we speak of somebody who is stubborn, merciless or cruel, we can say “he has a heart of stone”. Although Ibn Qutaybah put majāz and isti‘ārah in a separate chapter both are entered here under metaphor, since both are, as we shall see, closely related. He said that many of the majāz fall into the category of isti‘ārah.281 1. Majāz The basic meaning of the term majāz is “a crossing”, “a passage”. It is derived from the verb jāza, yajūzu, meaning “to pass”, “to travel (through)”.282 In classical terminology it means “the way of expression”.

Abū ‘Ubaydah in his Majāz al-Qur’ān used this terminology in this sense rather than its later meaning as figurative speech which is in contrast with h.aqīqah (the real meaning).283 Ibn Qutaybah still used this term in this sense when he said that the Arabs had majāzāt (pl. of majāz) in their expression, meaning “the ways and sources of expression” ( ). Among these majāzāt he mentioned isti‘ārah, tamthīl, - simile, known in modern 281. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 134.

282. See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 5, p. 326.

283. For further details, see ‘Iwad. H.amad al-Qawzī, al-Mus.t.alah. al-Nah.wī: Nash'atuhu wa Tat.awwuruhu h.attá Awākhir al-Qarn al-Thālith al-Hijrī (Riyadh: ‘Imādat al-Shu’ūn al-Maktabāt, Riyadh University, 1401/1981), pp. 15-16.

108

terminology as tashbīh, which he did not treat in a particular chapter maqlūb, takrār, and others.284 On the other hand, he also used it in contrast with h.aqīqah, as we shall see later.

According to Ibn Taymīyah, the division of words into h.aqīqah and majāz was not found in the statements of the salaf, but in those of scholars in later generations. Neither the s.ah.ābah nor the tabi‘īn had ever used these technical terms. They were not found in the statements of early Muslim legists, such as Abū H.anīfah, Mālik, al-Shāfi‘ī and al-Awzā‘ī, as well as philologists, such as al-Khalīl, Sībawayh, and Abū ‘Umar ibn al-‘Alā’.

They appeared in the third/ninth century, or probably at the end of the second/eighth century, and became well-known in the fourth/tenth century.285 Ibn Qutaybah wanted to prove that majāz as a figure of speech and, in contrast with h.aqīqah, did actually occur in the verses of the Qur’ān.

This was to counter the existing view in his time that rejected such a possibility. We know that he was a contemporary of Dā’ūd ibn ‘Alī ibn Khalaf al-As.bah.ānī (d. 270/884), the founder of the Z.āhirī school of law.

This school insists on the literal meanings of the Qur’ān, and as such, was said to have rejected the occurrence of majāz in the Qur’ān. This view of rejecting the occurrence of majāz in the Qur’ān was also held later by some scholars from different schools, such as Abū ’l-‘Abbās Ah.mad ibn Ah.mad al-T.abarī, better known as Ibn al-Qas.s. (d. 335/947) of the Shāfi‘ī school, Ibn Khuwayz Mundhādh (d. ca. 400/1010) of the Mālikī school, and Abū Muslim Muh.ammad ibn Bah.r al-As.bahānī (d. 370/981) of the Mu‘tazilī school of theology. Their main argument was that a speaker would only resort to majāz if he were unable to express himself properly by using h.aqīqah, and such a weakness obviously could not be attributed to Allah.286 On the other hand, Ibn Qutaybah wanted to repudiate what he considered the excessive use of majāz which, in his view, led to misinterpreting the verses of the Qur’ān. Although he did not mention the people who held this view, it is possible he had the Mu‘tazilīs in mind. He said that some people interpreted black magic (sih.r) as being merely a trick, 284. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 20.

285. For further details, see Ibn Taymīyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwá, vol. 7, pp. 87-90 (Kitāb al-Imān).

286. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 255.

109

rejected the existence of the interrogation and the punishment by the two angels (Munkar and Nakīr) in the grave, the statement that the shuhadā’ (martyrs) were alive, the sound of demons, and the harm caused by ghouls (desert demons appearing in ever varying shapes). They said that when people were alone in the desert they could easily imagine seeing and hearing something that did not really exist.287 In modern terminology, the definition of majāz is as follows: “It is a word not used in its proper meaning (context) due to the [existence of] coherence or indication which prevents it from having the basic meaning as the intended one ).”

The example from poetry is as follows:

“A person dearer to me than myself stood to protect me from the sun. He stood to protect me; amazingly, ‘a sun’ was protecting me from the sun.”288

What the poet means by ‘a sun’ is a man of great personality who is very dear to him.

If there is an affinity between the original and the intended meanings in the majāz, it is called isti‘ārah. Otherwise it is called majāz mursal. An example of isti‘ārah can be seen in the following Qur’ānic verse: “…, to lead you out of the deep darkness into the light..” (Q. 57:9, Asad). The verse is a metaphor for bringing people from ignorance and error into guidance and truth. There is an affinity between darkness and ignorance, and between light and guidance. An example of majāz mursal can be seen in the following poem: “My 287. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 115-120. See also al-Jāh.iz., al-H.ayawān, 7 vols.

(Cairo: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1366/1947), vol. 6, pp. 248-252 in which the author indicated his disbelief in ghouls, and said that stories about them were invented by bedouins in their poetry and laymen who did not make any distinction between what to believe, doubt, and what to disbelieve. Some of them falsely claimed to have seen ghouls; others, killed, accompanied, even married them.

288. See Abū Ya‘qūb Yūsuf ibn Abī Bakr al-Sakkākī, Miftāh. al-‘Ulūm, ed. and annot. Na‘īm Zarzūr, 2nd ed. (Beirut: Dār al-Kutub al-‘Ilmīyah, 1407/1987), p. 371.

For the definition of majāz according to al-Sakkākī which is slightly different from what has been mentioned above, see ibid., p. 359.

110

country, although it wronged me it is [still] dear to me.” What the poet means with his country is its inhabitants. Here, there is no affinity between the country and its inhabitants.

After illustrating majāz in modern technical terminology, we come to Ibn Qutaybah’s view and see what he meant by this term. Stating the occurrence of majāz in Arabic expression as well as in the Qur’ān, Ibn Qutaybah gave the example of the word umm (“mother”). When the Arabs say that their land is their mother, it is because, like their mother, it was from it they started their lives, to it they would return, and from it they obtained their food and provision. In poetry he cited the poem of Umayyah ibn Abī al-S.alt as follows: “And the land is our refuge and was our mother. In it our grave will be, and in it we are born.”289

The example from the Qur’ān given by Ibn Qutaybah is the verse: “his mother will be an abyss” (Q. 101:9). As the mother is the sponsor, the sustainer, the shelter, and the nurse to her baby, so is Hell to the unbeliever to which he will be brought.290 Another example is that the Prophet’s wives are “the mothers of the believers” (Q. 33:6), meaning that reverence should be due to them as to their own mothers.

Ibn Qutaybah rejects the views of an unspecified group of people who say that Allah’s statements in the Qur’ān are metaphors, and not intended in the real sense. There are those among them who say that Allah’s order to the angels to prostrate to Adam (Q. 2:34) was only an inspiration, like His inspiration to the bees to choose habitations in the hills and trees (Q. 16:68).

They refer to Allah’s statement: “And it is not given to mortal 289. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 104; Sayf al-Dīn al-Kātib, et al., eds. and comment., Sharh. Dīwān Umayyah ibn Abī al-S.alt (Beirut: al-Wat.anīyah, 1352 A.H.), p. 28; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 112. Abū ‘Uthmān ‘Amr ibn Bah.r al-Jāh.iz. said

instead of

in the above poem, see Kitāb al-H.ayawān, vol. 5, p.

437; 290. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 104. According to Ibn Zayd and Ibn ‘Abbās, Hell is called "a mother" because to it the unbeliever will take refuge as a baby does to his mother. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, pp. 182-183; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 167.

111

man that God should speak unto him otherwise than through sudden inspiration, or [by voice, as it were,] from behind a veil, or by sending an apostle to reveal, by His leave, whatever He wills [to reveal]: for, verily, He is exalted, wise.” (Q. 42:51, Asad). Here they say that He did not really say to the heaven and earth “come [into being] both of you willingly or unwillingly!”, and they did not really answer “we do come in obedience” (Q. 41:11). According to them this expression merely means “We created them both, and so they exist.” In poetry, it is like the poem “My camel complained to me against the long journey” in which the camel did not actually complain to the poet, but rather the poet spoke about his frequent journeys and of tiring his camel, and that if it were able to speak it would have complained to him.291 Similarly, Allah did not actually say to Hell “Art thou filled?” and Hell did not actually say “[Nay,] is there yet more [for me]?” (Q. 50:30), but the statements merely indicate the vastness of Hell. In addition, Hell does not actually call the sinful person who turns away (Q. 70:17), but the expression indicates that Hell would be their future abode as if it called them to it. It is like the fly calling its friend in the following poem: “I have descended the two valleys and another valley where the ‘mute and tender’ creature [i.e., the fly was buzzing as if it were] calling [its] close friend [to the plant and water].”292

Here the fly did not actually call, but buzzed to indicate the existence of plants and water in the valley.

Before refuting the above statements, Ibn Qutaybah makes a clear distinction between “saying” and “speaking” in regard to the occurrence of majāz. He says that majāz can occur on the word “saying” but not on “speaking”. We can say, for example, “the wall says, so it leans” ( ); “say (it) to me with your head” meaning “tilt it” ( 291. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 106-107; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 303. The camel is said to complain when it is tired of walking, when it extends its neck and moans very often, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, p. 440.

292. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 108.

112

) and “the camel says... [or complains]” as mentioned earlier in the poem. But we cannot say that the wall speaks, since the word denotes the act of speaking. However, Ibn Qutaybah asserts, exception occurs in one case, namely, when the speaker is an animate being giving advice or moral lessons, so that we can say that it informs, it spoke, and it reminded. The example in poetry is the poem of Abū ’l-‘Atāhiyah as follows:

“Silent tombs advised you, hidden tongues reproached you. They spoke about decayed faces and resting images. They showed you your grave in the graveyard, while you are [still] alive, not dead.”293

The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “Have We ever bestowed upon them from on high a divine writ which would speak [with approval] of their worshipping aught beside Us?” (Q. 30:35, Asad). Here the verse means “Or have We revealed to them any evidence from which they will seek guidance that will guide them?”294 Ibn Qutaybah gives us two conditions for a word to become majāz: it shall not be accompanied with its mas.dar, and it shall not be emphasised with takrār (repetition). For example, we say “the wall will fall down” and we do not say “the wall will fall down with strong willingness”. He does not give us an example for the use of repetition here. The example for the use of mas.dar in the Qur’ān is as follows: literally means “And Allah spoke to Moses with speaking,” translated by Asad as: “...: and as God spoke His word unto Moses” (Q. 4:164). Here the verb kallama is 293. Ibid., p. 110 and idem, ‘Uyūn al-Akhbār, 4 vols. (Cairo: Dār al-Kitāb, 1324 A.H.). vol. 2, p. 306. There are various versions of this poem: for example, in one version it is written , and , instead of , and ; see Abū ’l‘Atāhiyah, Dīwān Abī ’l-‘Atāhiyah (Beirut: Dār S.ādir, Dār Bayrūt, 1384/1964), p. 92; in another version, according to Mas‘ūdī's report, it is written

and

instead of and ; see Anonymous, al-Anwār al-Zāhiyah fī Dīwān Abī ’l‘Atāhiyah (Beirut: Mat.ba‘at al-Ābā’ al-Yasū‘īyīn, [1304-1305]/1887), p. 53, n. 1.

294. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 110 and idem, Tafsīr, p. 342.

113

accompanied with its mas.dar, namely, taklīm to indicate that the speaking is real and actually happens, not majāz. Moreover, the expression kallama (to speak to) itself, as mentioned earlier, indicates that it is real. The example for the use of takrār in the Qur’ān is as follows: “And Our word unto a thing, when We intend it, is only that We say unto it: Be! and it is.” (Q. 16:40, Pickthall). Here the word qawlunā is emphasised with takrār (repetition of qawl with naqūl), and the statement itself is emphasised with the word innamā.295 Despite the frequent occurrence of majāz in the Qur’ān, Ibn Qutaybah was extremely cautious with it. He rejects the view that the order of Allah to the angels to prostrate themselves to Adam in Q. 2:34 was an ilhām (inspiration), because, according to him, it involved dialogues of events: Allah’s order to the angels and Iblīs to prostrate, Iblīs’s refusal to comply, his expulsion from the Garden (Jannah), and his plea for the postponement of punishment to Judgement Day.296 Ibn Qutaybah also rejects the interpretation of qawl in the above verse as a subjection (taskhīr) because, he contends, it cannot be applied to something which refuses to comply, and in this case, Iblīs.297 With regard to the verse Q. 42:51 Ibn Qutaybah asserts that wah.y includes: things shown by Allah to His prophets in their vision; speaking behind the veil such as His speaking to Prophet Moses; and speaking with a message by sending the Trustful Spirit (al-Rūh. al-Amīn, i.e. Gabriel). What he means here is that Allah actually spoke to Prophet Moses, not majāz.

We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah rejects the occurrence of majāz in many Qur’ānic verses such as Q. 41:11 and 50:30 mentioned above. He bases his argument on several Qur’anic verses and h.adīths according to his understanding without applying majāz. The Qur’ānic verses state that Allah would make parts of the bodies of wrong-doers testify against them on the 295. Idem, Ta’wīl, p. 111.

296. For further details on this dialogue and event, see Q. 7:11-8; 15:31-44; 17:61-5; 38:71-85.

297. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 112. Ibn Qutaybah cites an example in which the term means from the poem of al-‘Ajjāj (d. 144/762) dealing with the earth, as follows: "He revealed [i.e., subjected] to it [the earth] to be settled and it became settled." See also ibid., pp. 111-112 and 490. For further details on this poem, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, pp. 380-1.

114

Last Day (Q. 24:24, 36:65 and 41:20-1), that He makes the mountains, birds and everything praise Him (Q. 17:44, 34:10 and 38:18-9), and that Prophet Solomon understood the language of ants (Q. 27:18-9); that Hell would burst with rage (Q. 67:8) and its crackling and roar would be heard by the wrong-doers (Q. 25:11-2). In a h.adīth it was reported that when Hell saw those who denied the coming of Doomsday, they heard its crackling and roar, saying “qat, qat” which means “enough, enough (h.asbī, h.asbī)."298 In other h.adīths it was reported that the food informed the Prophet that it had been poisoned, and that a camel complained to him that its master had starved and overworked it. All these, in Ibn Qutaybah’s view, are h.aqīqah and have no room for majāz.299 2. Isti‘ārah The term isti‘ārah literally means “borrowing, loan, or lending”. It is borrowing one meaning of a word other than its basic or primary meaning.

According to ‘Abd al-Qāhir al-Jurjānī (d. 470/1078) isti’ārah is “a word which in the language has a known basic meaning, is temporarily lent, as it were, to something other than the original object. Therefore metaphor in Arabic is called ‘loan’”.300 It is lending the meaning of one object to another object, the aim being the attribution of the dominant trait in the first object to the second one. For example, if we want to say that a person is brave, we lend and associate the meaning of the object lion to that person, so that the lion's dominant trait, namely, bravery, can be attributed to him. So, we say (“I saw a lion”), meaning a brave man.

With regard to isti‘ārah in its early development, Ibn Qutaybah gave 298. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 113.

299. Ibid., pp. 114-5. Al-T.abarī mentions the view of as well as of Ibn ‘Abbās that Allah did actually talk to and order the heaven to raise its sun, moon and stars, and to the earth to bring out its trees and fruit, and to split its rivers, see alT.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 24, p. 64. The h.adīth mentioning the Jewish woman who tried to poison the Prophet was reported by Bukhārī, Muslim, Abū Dā’ūd, al-Dārimi, Ibn Mājah and Ah.mad ibn H.anbal; see Wensinck, al-Mu‘jam, vol. 2, p. 533 (s.v. ); the h.adīth mentioning the camel that complained to him was reported by Abū Dā’ūd; see ibid., vol. 3, p. 168 (s.v.

).

300. See ‘Abd al-Qāhir al-Jurjānī, Asrār al-Balāghah fī ‘Ilm al-Bayān, ed. Ritter (Istanbul: Mat.ba‘at Wizārat al-Ma‘ārif, 1954), p. 29.

115

us his understanding of it. He said that the Arabs used to borrow a word and put it in place of another, if this borrowed word is the cause of, close to, or similar to the word it replaces. For example, they said “We kept walking on the pasture [al-samā‘ lit., 'the sky'] until we came to you." Here the pasture is called samā’ which is the rain that causes the existence of the pasture, and in turn, the rain itself is called samā’ from which it falls down, and which is the cause of it. The poet Mu‘āwiyah ibn Mālik ibn Ja‘far ibn Kilāb calls the rain “the sky” in his following poem: “When the rain [lit., ‘the sky’ that causes it to fall] falls on the land of a tribe [so that it becomes fertile], we care for it [namely, we move to that fertile land and care for the plants which grow because of the rain], although they are angry [about our coming].”301

Ibn Qutaybah mentions in his Ta’wīl fifty main examples of isti‘ārah in the verses of the Qur’ān. Some of them will be dealt with here as follows: a. “..., and their hearts (as) air.” (Q. 14:43, Pickthall).

The air is a metaphor for emptiness, namely, their hearts are empty of good things, because they do not pay attention to anything, like an empty place which contains nothing but air.302 b.

“Is then he who was dead [in spirit] and whom We thereupon gave life, and for whom We set up a light whereby he might see his way among men - [is then he] like one [who is lost] in the darkness deep, out of which he cannot emerge?” (Q. 6:122, Asad). Here death, life and light are respectively metaphors for infidelity, guidance and faith.303 301. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 135; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, pp. 439-440; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 216.

302. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 139. According to Abū ‘Ubaydah the verse means that their hearts become empty of reasoning, for they have no intellect ( ), see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 344; Another interpretation is given by Ibn ‘Abbās, that their hearts become empty due to their fright and terror, see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 3, p. 321.

303. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 140; al-Farrā’ gives “misguidance” instead of “infidelity” as the metaphor for "death" in this verse, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

116

“and lifted from thee the burden that had weighed so heavily on thy back?” (Q. 94: - , Asad). The word wizr originally means “something a person carries on his back”, used here as a metaphor for sin,304 or specifically, the sin in the Jāhiliyyah (pre-Islamic) period.305 d.

“But as for those with faces shining, they shall be within God's grace, therein to abide.” (Q. 3:107, Asad). The grace here is a metaphor for Paradise, as it is through Allah's grace that one can enter it.306 This verse, however, is used in our time as an example of majāz mursal where the condition (h.āl), in this case, Allah’s grace, is used as a metaphor for the place (mah.all), namely, Paradise.

The term rah.mah can also be a metaphor for rain and sustenance respectively in the following verses:

c.

”And He it is who sends forth the winds as a glad tiding of His coming grace...” (Q. 7:57, Asad), and “Whatever grace God opens up to man, none can withhold it...”

353.

304. This is the view of Ibn Qutaybah and Abū ‘Ubaydah, see Ta’wīl, p. 140 and Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 303. This is also the view of Mujāhid and Qatādah.

According to al-D.ah.h.āk, wizr means shirk (polytheism). See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 150. According to al-Murtad.á, sin is called wizr because it is a burden for the sinner.

However, anything which can be a burden can be called wizr. Therefore, it is possible that the term wizr in the above verse means the Prophet's sorrow of his people's disbelief when he and his companions were still in a weak position; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 508.

305. Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, p. 532. This is also the view of Ibn Zayd when he said that wizr means "the Prophet's sin before his prophethood". See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 150. The word athqāl (load) is also a metaphor for sin in Q. 29:13; see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 140 and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p.331.

306. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 145; al-Zamakhsharī gives "the permanent reward", whereas al-T.abarsī gives "Allah's reward" and "Allah's Paradise" for the meaning of

in the above verse, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 226 and Majma‘ al-

Bayān, vol. 1, p. 485.

117

(Q.35:2, Asad).307 Rah.mah which means grace on the needy can be a metaphor for many different things. In this case, it is said that the term has wujūh, homonyms. Ibn al-Jawzī (d. 598/1201), al-H.usayn ibn Muh.ammad alDāmaghānī, and Abū al-Fad.l H.ubaysh ibn Ibrāhīm Tiflīsī (d. ca.

600/1203) mentioned respectively sixteen, fourteen, and thirteen wujūh of rah.mah in various verses of the Qur’ān. All of them included what have been mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah above, namely: Paradise, rain and sustenance. Others, to mention a few, are: Islam (Q. 2:105), faith (Q. 11:28), prophethood (Q. 38:9), the Qur’ān (Q. 10:5), and well-being (Q. 39:38).308 e.

“And, verily, this [revelation] shall indeed become [a source of] eminence for thee and thy people...” (Q. 43:44, Asad). The word dhikr (remembrance) is a metaphor for sharaf (eminence) which is something to be remembered.309 Ibn al-Jawzī, alDāmaghānī, and Tiflīsī mentioned respectively twenty, eighteen and seventeen wujūh of dhikr, including the term sharaf and its three examples from the Qur’ān as mentioned above. Among them are: remembering (Q. 3:135), mentioning (Q. 2:200), tawh.īd (monotheism) (Q. 20:124), the Qur’ān (Q. 21:2, 50), the Torah (Q. 16:43 and 21:7) the 307. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl. pp. 145-146; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

431 and vol. 4, p. 400 and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 229 and vol. 14, p. 321.

308. For further details, see Jamāl al-Dīn Abū al-Faraj ‘Abd al-Rah.mān ibn alJawzī, Nuzhat al-A‘yūn al-Nawāz.ir fī ‘Ilm al-Wujūh wa ’l-Naz.ā'ir, ed. Muh.ammad ‘Abd al-Karīm Kāz.im al-Rād.ī, 2nd ed. (Beirut: Mu'assasat al-Risālah, 1405/1985), pp.

331-334; idem, Muntakhab Qurrat al-‘Uyūn ’l-Nawāz.ir fī ’l-Wujūh wa ’l-Naz.a'ir fī ’lQur’ān al-Karīm (Summary of Qurrat al-‘Uyūn), ed. Muhammad al-Sayyid al-Saft.āwī and Dr. Fu'ād ‘Abd al-Mun‘im Ah.mad (Alexandria: Munsha'at al-Ma‘ārif, n.d.), pp.

135-138; al-H.usayn ibn Muh.ammad al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs al-Qur’ān aw Is.lāh. alWujūh wa al-Naz.ā'ir fī ’l-Qur’ān al-Karīm, ed. ‘Abd al-‘Azīz Sayyid al-Ahl (Beirut: Dār al-‘Ilm lil-Malāyīn, [1403-4]/1983), pp. 199-202; and Abū al-Fad.l Hubaysh ibn Ibrāhīm [al-] Tiflīsī, Wujūh (Vujūh-i) Qur’ān, ed. Dr. Mahdī Muh.aqqiq (Tehran: 1360/[194] ), 4th ed., pp. 112-114.

309. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 147; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 93; and alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 49. Other Qur’ānic verses in which dhikr is a metaphor for sharaf according to Ibn Qutaybah are Q. 21:10 and 23:71.

118

Friday prayer (Q. 62:9), and the Preserved Tablet (Q. 21:105).310 f.

“And neither the heaven nor the earth wept for them, nor were they reprieved.” (Q. 44:29). Ibn Qutaybah’s commentary on this metaphorical verse is as follows: If the Arabs want to emphasise the awful condition, especially the failing health of a great and noble king they say: “The sun was becoming darkened, the moon was becoming eclipsed, and the wind, the lightning, the sky and the earth [all] were weeping for him.” The listener will understand this hyperbole, that the disaster was so severe and extensive that the elements of nature almost shared the grief of the people. On the contrary, with regard to Pharaoh and his followers, neither the sun nor the earth wept for them. In poetry, such hyperbole was also employed, as in the following poem:

“The sun, weeping for you, is rising without veiling the brightness of the stars and the moon.”

As the sun is rising without light, the day appears to be like the night, and the light of the moon and the stars is not diminished by the lightless sun.311 Ibn Qutaybah gives us three interpretations of the above verse as follows: (a) When Allah destroyed Pharaoh and his people by drowning them and destroying their houses and gardens, no one was left to weep for them, mourn or miss them; (b) The expression “the heaven and the earth” in the verse means “the inhabitants of the heaven and the earth”, so that the verse means “nobody among the inhabitants of the heaven and the earth wept for them”. The argument of the upholders of this view is that it occurs in other Qur’ānic verses where the word “inhabitants” or “people” is not mentioned, such as the verse “…and ask the township” (Q. 12:82, Pickthall), which means

310. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 302-6; idem, Qurrah, pp. 117-122; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 180-3; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 103-107.

311. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 167-168; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, p. 83.

According to al-T.abarsī and al-Murtad.á the poem is the elegy of Jarīr on ‘Umar ibn ‘Abd al-‘Azīz, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 64; and Amālī, vol. 1, pp. 38-39.

119

“its inhabitants”,312 and “... till the war lay down its burdens” (Q. 47:4, Pickthall) which means “till the people at war lay down their arms”. This view, as we have seen earlier, belongs to the category of majāz mursal, according to the modern terminology; (c) The interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, that every believer has a door in heaven through which his deeds ascend and his sustenance (rizq) descends; when he dies, this door, his traces and places of prayer weep for him. As for the unbeliever, no deed will ascend to heaven for him, no door in heaven will open for him and no trace of his on the earth will weep for him.313 g.

“Hence, [be patient,] even though they who are bent on denying the truth would all but kill thee with their eyes whenever they hear this reminder, and [though] they say, ‘[As for Muhammad,] behold, most surely he is a madman!.’” (Q. 68:51, Asad). Pickthall and Ali translate yakādu layuzliqūnaka respectively as “would fain disconcert thee” and “would almost trip thee up”. Ibn Qutaybah’s commentary on this verse is that the disbelievers looked at the Prophet with hostility so stern that they almost made him slip and fall down.314 This kind of hyperbole had been used in classical poetry. Some unidentified grammarians were said to have criticised it as an excess and an exaggeration, but Ibn Qutaybah defended it, saying that it was quite possible and a good way of expressing one’s view. He cited many examples from the classical 312. For another example from the Qur’ān, see Q. 11:84. The Arabs used to mention a place when they mean its content. They say, for example, (I have eaten a good pot). See al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, pp. 216-217. In the English language we say "the kettle boils" when we mean the water in it.

313. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 169-170; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 25, pp. 74-75; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 64-65; see also al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, pp. 140-142 and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, pp. 153-154.

314. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 170. Ibn ‘Abbās's variant reading for

is

, meaning “in order to kill and to destroy you”, see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 5, p. 341. Therefore, the verse means "they looked at you with a kind of look that if they could kill or destroy you with it, they would have done it". Al-Qurt.ubī asserts that

is also the variant reading of Ibn Mas‘ūd, al-A‘mash, Abū Wā'il

and Mujāhid; see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 255.

120

poetry, one of which is as follows: “When they met in a place their looking at each other [almost] removed the ground”,

meaning that their looking at each other was extremely hostile and malicious so that it almost brought them to the ground. 315 Ibn Qutaybah states that there are many Qur’ānic verses indicating hyperbole (mubālaghah fī ’l-was.f) which he includes in the category of the figure of speech called isti‘ārah, by using the word kāda (almost), either explicitly or by implication. For example, in order to show the graveness of the Christians’ statement that Allah has a son, He said: “Assuredly ye utter a disastrous thing, whereby almost [takādu] the heavens are torn, and the earth is split asunder and the mountains fall in ruins, that ye ascribe unto the Beneficent a son, when it is not meet for (the Majesty of) the Beneficent that He should choose a son.” (Q. 19:89-92, Pickthall). Here the word takādu (the present tense of kāda) is mentioned. The example in which the word kāda exists by implication, is as follows: “[Remember what you felt] when they came upon you from above you and from below you, and when [your] eyes became dim and [your] hearts came up to [your] throats, ...” (Q. 33:10, Asad). The verse portrays the seriousness of the situation in the battle of the Trench, that "[their] hearts almost reached to [their] throats.”316 When the word kāda exists only by 315. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 171; idem, Tafsīr, p. 482 and idem, Ta’wīl Mukhtalif al-H.adīth, ed. M.Z. al-Najjār (Beirut: Dār al-Jayl, 1393-1973), pp. 342-343.

See also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 7, p. 218; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 256.

316. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 171. Al-Farrā’ says that the verse means "they were so frightened that their lungs swelled and pushed their hearts upward to their throat", see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 340. It is said that this happens when a person is in the state of fear, so that a coward is said to have his lung swollen.

However, the expression is only to indicate the disturbance of the heart of a person who is in such extreme terror that his heart almost reaches his throat; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 145.

121

implication in such a case as above, Ibn Qutaybah asserts it can be replaced with ka’anna (as if), so that the verse means “as if the beats of violently agitated hearts reached the throat”.317 In fact, among the fifty examples of the isti‘ārah from the Qur’ān, this hyperbole is the longest treatment given by Ibn Qutaybah to demonstrate its significance. He gives more than twenty examples from classical poetry, such as the poems of Imru’ al-Qays, al-Nābighah, ‘Antarah, Dhū al-Rummah, and others.318 His objective is clear: to show that hyperbole is not a lie, but a figure of speech indicating the greatness, severity or seriousness of a statement or an event. h. “... for there is no living creature which He does not hold by its forelock....” (Q. 11:56, Asad). It means that He subjugates and controls it.319 The origin of this meaning is that if you grasp its forelock you subjugate and control it. From this idea it can be said in the du‘ā' (supplication) (“my forelock is in your hand”), meaning “you are my sovereign and conqueror”.320 Here the forelock is representing the whole body when we say “This is a graceful forelock.”321 This example, then, belongs to the category of majāz mursal in modern terminology.

To sum up, Ibn Qutaybah’s understanding of majāz and isti‘ārah is rudimentary. For example, he puts majāz mursal, homonyms, and hyperbole in the category of isti‘ārah, since they do not represent their basic meanings. This instance is comprehensible, as Ibn Qutaybah was giving the transitional meanings of the terms from classical to modern terminology.

B. Inversion (Maqlūb) Ibn Qutaybah mentions us four types of inversion in his Ta’wīl, as follows: ascribing something with its opposite quality ( ), such as calling a foolish person a bright one; designating two contradictory 317. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 172.

318. For further examples of hyperbole in poetry, see ibid., pp. 172-180.

319. Ibid., p. 181; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 290; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 52; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 170.

320. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 181 and 155.

321. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p.123.

122

things having one basic meaning with one name ( ), such as calling amām (before) warā’ (behind), as the basic meaning of warā’ is what is absent from our eyes, either before or behind us; advancing what will be clear by retarding, and retarding what will be clear by advancing in the word order ( ), such as the Qur’ānic verse “Then he drew nigh and came down” (Q. 53:8) which is clearly understood by inversion, namely, “then he came down and drew nigh”); and lastly, the inversion of words by mistake ( ), such as the expression “adultery is a religious duty for stoning” which should be “stoning is a religious duty for adultery”. Ibn Qutaybah’s treatment of them is as follows: 1. Ascribing something with Its Opposite Quality Ibn Qutaybah mentions three motives for ascribing something with its opposite quality, as follows: a. (for pessimism and optimism), such as saying to the sick “good health” encouraging (countering) pessimism about the sickness and optimism to health. b. (for hyperbole, lit., “for exaggeration of description”), such as calling the sun jawnah (black) because of its intense light, and the crow a‘war (one eyed) for its keen sight. It means that even one eye is sharp enough for the crow, as if it does not need the other eye. c. (for sarcasm), such as the answer of ‘Ubayd ibn al-Abras. to Imru’ al-Qays ibn H.ajar of the Kindah tribe, as follows: “Why do you not ask the troops of the Kindah tribe the day they fled away [and were called]: ‘where, where [are you going]?’”,

meaning “come back!”. ‘Ubayd ibn al-Abras.’s tribe Banī Asad had killed Imru’ al-Qays’s father. Imru’ al-Qays threatened the Banī Asad tribe with retaliation, but ‘Ubayd ibn al-Abras. disregarded the threat, ridiculing the Kindah’s defeat in the battle and citing the above poem. 322 The example in 322. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 177; see also Abū al-Faraj alAs.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 19, p. 85.

123

the Qur’ān is as follow: “And, when they felt Our might, behold them fleeing from it! (But it was said unto them): Flee not, but return to that (existence) which emasculated you and to your dwellings,..” (Q. 21:123).323 2. Designating Two Contradictory Things Having One Basic Meaning with One Name The Arabic language is known as lughat al-ad.dād (the language of opposite meanings), because it has many words which have opposite meanings. Apart from words, some sayings also seem to be contradictory, such as (“Whoever has good faith will live long”) and (“Good faith will lead to destruction”), for good faith cannot lead to long life and destruction at the same time. For the Arabs, these two expressions are not contradictory, since they are used to emphasise two different situations. With regard to the words which have contradictory meanings, one of the two meanings is usually more prevalent than the other, although both are derived from one basic meaning. Words of this type are called by Arabic philologists al-ad.dād (words which have opposite meanings).

Ibn Qutaybah cites thirteen ad.dād only in his Ta’wīl, three of which are without examples from the Qur’ān. We shall trace their basic meanings and see how Ibn Qutaybah treats them, as follows: a.

(dawn, night, or part of the night) The basic meaning of s.arīm is “something cut”. The verb s.arama and s.aruma mean “to cut, to leave, to separate”. The word al-s.armān or alas.ramān (lit. “the two separating things”) means “the night and the day”, because they are separated from each other; it can also mean “the wolf and the crow”, because they isolate themselves from people.324

323. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp.185-186 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

4, p. 41. Here al-T.abarsī is quoting Ibn Qutaybah. For another example of sarcasm in the Qur’ān, see Q. 11:87.

324. Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 336; al-Zamakhsharī, Asās al-Balāghah (Beirut: Dār S.ādir - Dār Bayrut, 1965) p. 354 (s.v. ); and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p.

124

Ibn Qutaybah gives us the meanings of s.arīm, namely, the morning and the night. Day and night are called s.arīm, because one of them is departing when the other is approaching. The example from the Qur’ān in which s.arīm means “night” is as follows: “And in the morning it became [burned and black] like [the blackness of] night.” (Q. 68:20).325 b. (darkness, twilight, dusk, light; curtain) The verb sadafa in the expression sadafa al-h.ijāb means “he loosened the curtain”. The word sadfah and sudfah mean “darkness” as well as “light”. Sudfah also means “the door” as well as “the curtain put on the door to protect it from the rain”.326 According to Ibn Qutaybah, the basic meaning of sudfah is “a curtain”.

It means both “light” and “darkness” as if the darkness when it comes becomes “a curtain” for the light, and vice versa.327 c. (a shouter, a crier out) S.ārikh applies to a person who asks help as well as the person who responds to give help, as both of them cries out to each other. No 1684 (s.v.

).

325. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 186-7; idem, Tafsīr, p. 479; Ibn al-Anbārī, alAd.dād, p. 8; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 336. This is also the view of Ibn ‘Abbās, al-Farrā’, and Abū ‘Amr ibn al-‘Alā’ī; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p.

241; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 336. Al-Qurt.ubī quotes another view of Ibn ‘Abbās, who said that the term

in the above verse means "black ashes" in

the language of the Khuzaymah tribe. Another view is that of al-Thawrī who says that it means "the harvested field"; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 242; see also Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 345; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 336.

326. According to Abū Zayd (darkness), while in that of Qays it means said that

in the language of Banī Tamīm means (light). Al-As.ma‘ī was reported to have

in the language of Najd means "darkness", while in that of others it

means "light". According to Ibn Fāris

means "the mixture of darkness" (

), see Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 148. For further details, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 9, pp. 146-8; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1333 (s.v.

).

327. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 178; see also Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 9.

125

example is given by Ibn Qutaybah, neither from poetry nor from the Qur’ān.328 Ibn Fāris, however, gives us an example from the Qur’ān, as follows: “… It is not for me to respond to your cries, nor for you to respond to mine...” (Q. 14:22, Asad). Here mus.rikh which is like s.ārikh, is translated as the person who responds to the crier for help.329 d. (opinion, belief, doubt, assumption, uncertainty) Z.ann means both yaqīn (certainty) and shakk (doubt), because, according to Ibn Qutaybah, z.ann has a part of certainty, as in the following Qur’ānic verse: “I was sure that I should have to meet my reckoning.” (Q. 69:20).330 The example from poetry is the poem of Durayd ibn al-immah, as follows: “So I told them: be sure that [the enemy of] two thousand well-equipped warriors [will come to you], the best among them are with armour.”331

It means “be sure of their coming to you”.

According to Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī the term z.ann has four homonyms, namely: (1) yaqīn (certainty), as in “I was sure that I should have to meet my reckoning.” (Q. 69:20) as mentioned above; (2) shakk (doubt), as in “We think it no more than an empty guess ...” (Q. 45:32, Asad), namely, doubt it; (3) tuhmah (accusation), as in “... and ye imagined various (vain) thoughts about God”. (Q. 33:10, Ali), namely, accusing Him of not going to help them; and (4) h.usbān (consideration, thinking), as in “he never thought that he would have to return to God”. (Q. 84:14, Asad). Ibn al-Jawzī mentions three homonyms of z.ann, namely, yaqīn, shakk, and kadhib (falsehood). The examples given for the 328. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 187.

329. See Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 348.

330. See also Q. 2:230 and 249; 18:53, and 21:31.

331. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 187-8; idem, Tafsīr, p. 406; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi', vol. 1, p. 375 and vol. 11, pp. 3-4; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 462; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 39-40; and Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 14.

126

first two are the same as those mentioned above. The example for the last, which, according to Ibn al-Jawzī, is the view of al-Farrā’, is “They follow nothing but falsehood; yet, falsehood can never take the place of truth.” (Q. 53:28).332 e.

and

(may be, perhaps)

Both ‘asá and la‘alla according to some scholars whom Ibn Qutaybah does not identify indicate certitude as well as doubt. He gives us only one example with la‘alla in the Qur’ān as follows: “... and [that] We have appointed thereon broad paths, so that they might find their way.” (Q. 21:31, Asad).333 Al-Suyūt.ī gives more details about ‘asá and la‘alla. He said that these words signify hope for something desirable and fear of something undesirable ( ). He mentions the opinion of some scholars about the term ‘asā as follows: Ibn Fāris: The term is used for something imminent, as in “Say thou: ‘It may well be that something of that which [in your ignorance] you so hastily demand has already drawn close unto you’.” (Q. 27:72, Asad). Al-Kisā’ī: Every ‘asá in the Qur’ān signifies khabar (report, news); in this case, it is in singular form; when it is interrogative, it is in plural form, such as in the following verse where the word ‘asaytum is used: “[Ask them:] 'Would you, perchance, after having turned away [from God’s commandment, prefer to revert to your old ways, and] spread corruption on earth, and [once again] cut asunder your ties of kinship?’” (Q. 47:22, Asad). This rhetorical question is an allusion to the moral darkness and chaotic conditions of pre-Islamic Arabia. Ibn ‘Abbās, as reported by Ibn Abī H.ātim and al-Bayhaqī: Every ‘asá in the Qur’ān is bound to happen. Ibn al-Anbārī: Similar to Ibn ‘Abbās’s view, with the exception of the following verses: (a) “Your Sustainer may well show mercy unto you; ...” (Q. 332. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 198; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 311-312; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 425-426; and idem, Qurrah, pp. 172-173. For further details on z.ann, see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, pp. 1924-1925 (s.v.

333. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 188.

).

127

17:8, Asad) where Allah did not bless the Jews of Banū al-Nad.ir, but punished them; and (b) “[O wives of the Prophet!] Were he to divorce [any of] you, God might well give him in your stead spouses better than you...” (Q. 66:5, Asad), where the Prophet’s wives were not replaced with others. Some scholars reject this exception on the grounds that blessing and replacement mentioned respectively in the above verses were conditional: that they did not commit such transgression again in the first verse, and that the Prophet divorced his wives in the second. Since none of these conditions was fulfilled, the general rule that the verb ‘asá in the Qur’ān is bound to happen has no exception.

Al-Zarkashī: Both ‘asá and la‘alla are about something bound to happen with certainty when the expression comes from Allah. When it comes from people, it contains hope and wish, since they are subject to uncertainty and assumption, whereas Allah is not. Since Allah's statements always contain certainty, He can express them directly without using ‘asá or la‘alla, as in “... If you ever abandon your faith, God will in time bring forth [in your stead] people whom He loves and who love Him...” (Q. 5:54, Asad) where the word saufa (“will”) is used. He can also give the impression of uncertainty for those to whom Allah is speaking, as in “… But God may well bring about good fortune [for the believers] ...” (Q. 5:52, Asad).334 Al-Zamakhsharī, commenting on the verse ) “... it may well be that your Sustainer will efface from you your bad deeds, ...” (Q. 66:8, Asad), said that apart from the fact that it is bound to happen, ‘asá (as well as la‘alla) also gives a moral lesson that the Muslims should put greater weight on their position between fear and hope ( ).335 With regard to la‘alla, al-Suyut.ī says that it has many meanings, the most common of which are: (1) expectation, namely, hope for something desirable ( ), as in “... so that you might attain to a happy state”. (Q. 2:189, Asad), and fear of something undesirable 334. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 203-205; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p.

159; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 157; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 134.

335. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1503.

128

(

“..., the Last Hour may well

), as in

be near”. (Q. 42:17, Asad); (2) motivation (

), as in

“But speak unto him in a mild manner, so that he might bethink himself or [at least] be filled with apprehension.” (Q. 20:44, Asad); here the motive of speaking in a mild manner to Pharaoh is to make him heed or fear Allah; (3) question, as in “But what could tell thee but that perchance he might grow (in spiritual understanding)?” (Q. 80:3, Ali). Al-Suyūt.ī says further that according to alWāqidī as reported by al-Baghawī and quoted from al-Zarkashī, every la‘alla in the Qur’ān signifies motivation, except in (Q. 26:129) where it signifies a simile, namely, which means “as if ye will last forever”. This exception is an isolated view, according to alZarkashī, since no grammarian has ever held this view, although it is mentioned in the S.ah.īh. of al-Bukhārī. Other scholars say that la‘alla in this verse signifies plain hope. Supporting al-Wāqidī’s view and countering alZarkashī’s, al-Suyut.ī relates a view similar to that of al-Wāqidī, namely, the view of ‘Abd Mālik. It is reported by Ibn Abī H.ātim from al-Suddī, that according to ‘Abd Mālik la‘alla in the Qur’ān means kay (“in order that”, “so that”), except one verse, namely, which means as mentioned above. Moreover, Qatādah says that in one of the variant readings it is read (“as if ye will last forever”).336 f.

(buyer) and

(seller)

The root-word shará or ishtará is the synonym of bā‘a, meaning “to sell” or “to buy”. Ibn Qutaybah states that and , both mean “buyer” and “seller”, because the buyer himself is a seller, namely, a trader of money with something, and vice versa. The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “And they sold him for a paltry price - a mere few silver coins:...”(Q. 12:20, Asad). The example from poetry is the poem of Yazīd ibn Rabī‘ah ibn Mufarrigh al-H.imyarī, 336. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 232-233 and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 392-394. Ibn Fāris said that according to some grammarians of the school of Bas.rah la‘alla signifies hope; others said that it is motivation, as in Q. 16:15; see Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 170.

129

known as Ibn Mufarrigh (d. 69/689) as follows: “And I sold [the servant called] Burd, I [regretfully] wish I were vermin [after I had sold him]."337

Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Dāmaghānī mention three homonyms of al-shirā’ (buying, or selling), namely: (1) (buying, purchasing), as in Behold, God has bought of the believers their lives and their possessions,...” (Q. 9:111, Asad); (2) (selling), as in

“Vile is that [false pride] for

which they have sold their own selves ...” (Q. 2:90, Asad), and (3) (preference, choice), as in “[for] it is they who have preferred error to guidance ...” (Q. 2:16).338 In selling and buying people exchange something for something else they prefer. In this sense the above verse is translated by Asad, as follows: “[for] it is they who have taken error in exchange for guidance.” (Q. 2:16, Asad).

We notice that Ibn Qutaybah does not treat the term bay‘ here other than as a homonym of shirā’, which might be better translated as “trading” as it includes buying, selling and exchanging. g.

(behind) According to Ibn al-Anbārī the term warā’ belongs to the category of al-ad.dād, as it may mean “behind” as well as “before”,339 whereas according to Ibn Qutaybah it has basically one meaning, namely, “what is concealed from someone”. Ibn Qutaybah says further that this term means “behind” as well as “before”, because anything absent from our sight is

337. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 188; idem, al-Shi‘r wa al-Shu‘arā’, ed. Ah.mad Shākir, 2 vols. (Cairo: Dār Ih.yā' al-Kutub al-‘Arabīyah, 1364 A.H.), vol. 1, p. 321; Abū al-Faraj al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 17, p. 55; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 48 and 304; al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 2, pp. 95-96; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

3, p. 21; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 373; and idem, Qurrah, p. 150.

338. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 373-374; idem, Qurrah, p. 150; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 263. For further details, see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1544 (s.v. ).

339. Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 34.

130

warā’, whether before or behind us. The word al-muwārāh (disguise) and al-tawārī (concealment) are derived from it. The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “... because [I knew that] behind them was a king who is wont to seize every boat by brute force”. (Q. 18:79, Asad). The term warā’ in this verse, according to Ibn Qutaybah, means “before”, which, according to alZarkashī, belongs to the Coptic language.340 Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīīi mention five homonyms of warā’, whereas al-Dāmaghānī mentions six, among them being: (1) khalf (behind), as in “But they cast this [pledge] behind their backs, ...” (Q. 3:187, Asad); (2) amām, quddām (before), as in “Hell is before him, ...” (Q. 14:16), meaning “awaiting for him”; (3) siwá (other than), as in “But those who desire other than that are truly transgressors.” (Q. 23:7); (4) ba‘d al-mawt (after death), as in “Now, behold, I am afraid of [what] my kinsfolk [will do] after my death, ...” (Q. 19:5); and (5) al-dunyā (the world), as in “… They will be told: ‘Turn back to the world and seek for light!...’”

(Q. 57:13), meaning “you should have sought light while you were on earth, not here in the Hereafter”.341 340. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 189; idem, Tafsīr, p. 270; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 412; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 487; al-Zarkashī, alBurhān, vol. 4, pp. 288-289; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 6, p. 104; see also Lane, Lexicon, pt. 8, p. 2933 (s.v. ). According to al-Qurt.ubī, some commentators say that

in this verse means "behind", but the majority say it means

Ibn ‘Abbās and Ibn Jubayr read

instead of

‫أَمَام‬

("before"), as

. Al-Māwardī mentions three

views concerning the use of meaning , as follows: (1) It is possible in any condition and place, because it belongs to al-ad.dād; (2) It is possible only with time, because it can be passed by man, so that it becomes behind it; and (3) It is possible only with bodies which have no direction ( ), such as two stones which are opposite each other, so that they are behind each other; this is the view of ‘Alī ibn ‘Īsá. See al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 35-36.

341. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 608-9; idem, Qurrah, pp. 233-234 (mentions three homonyms only); Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 307; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 486.

131

h.

(significant)

Jalal is applied to both small and big, because small is big compared to what is smaller than itself, so that it is both small and big. No example is given by Ibn Qutaybah. i. . (some) and (all) The word ba‘d. and kull may mean “some” or “all”, because something in its entirety, as a whole thing, is only “some”, a part of something else, so that it becomes “some” and “all” at the same time. The examples from the Qur’ān in which ba‘d. means kull and vice versa, are as follows: “... he said: ‘I have now come unto you with wisdom, and to make clear unto you all of that on which you are at variance...” (Q. 43:63); here ba‘d. means kull.342 “Behold, I found there a woman ruling over them; and she has been given [abundance] of some [good] things,...”

(Q. 27:23); here kull means ba‘d.. No example is given by Ibn Qutaybah from poetry.343 j. (above) Fawqa means also dūna (below) compared to what is above it, as in the following Qur’ānic verse “Behold, God does not disdain to propound a parable of a gnat, or of something [even] less than that....” (Q. 2:26, Asad). The expression (even something above it), means (even something below it), namely, even something less than a gnat as translated above. This is the view of Ibn Qutaybah, Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn al-Anbārī.344 Al-Farrā’ 342. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 189-190; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 205. However, according to al-Zajjāj and al-T.abarī, ba‘d will not mean kull, see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 54; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 25, p. 55.

343. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 190. According to al-Qayrawānī there is an ellipsis of the expression ("she liked") in the above verse rather than interpreting "all" as "some", so that the verse means "she has been given all things she liked"; see Makkī ibn Abī T.ālib al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān [mistakenly] attributed to alZajjāj; re-ed. by Ibrāhim al-Abyārī, 3 pts. with continuous pagination (Beirut: Dār alKitāb al-Lubnānī, 1406/1986), pt. 3, p. 783.

344. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 190; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

132

mentioned the fly and the spider as examples of things “above the gnat”.

For him, it is possible to interpret fawqa as “smaller” in this verse, but he prefers to interpret it as “larger”, as a gnat is extremely small.345 Lane translates in the above verse as “a gnat and what exceeds it in smallness or in largeness; what is smaller than it, or what is larger than it, by the latter being meant the fly (Q. 22:72) and the spider (Q. 29:40)”.346 Both Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention nine homonyms of fawqa whereas Ibn al-Jawzī mentions eight - among which are as follows: (1) akbar (greater, bigger), as in Q. 2:26 above in which means “something bigger than a gnat”; it is similar to the interpretation of Qatādah and Ibn Jurayj who say that means (“something greater than a gnat”). 347 None of them say that fawqa here means dūna as claimed by Ibn Qutaybah, Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn alAnbārī; (2) akthar (more), as in “...; but if there are more than two females...” (Q. 4:11, Asad); (3) afd.al (better), as in “The Hand of God is better than their hands.”

(Q. 48:10), namely, what Allah did for them is better than what they did in the pledge of H.udaybīyah; (4) arfa‘u fī ’l-manzilah (higher in position), as in “But they who are conscious of God shall be above them on Resurrection Day...” (Q. 2:212, Asad), namely, their position will be higher than that of non-believers; and (5) fawqa ru’ūsihim (above their heads), according to al-Dāmaghānī, as in

35; and Ibn al-Anbārī. al-Ad.dād, pp. 249-250.

345. See al-Farrā‘, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 20-21.

346. Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2462 (s.v.

).

347. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 67. Ibn ‘Abbās was reported to have mentioned as something above the gnat. According to Abū ‘Ali al-Fārisī, fawqa is possible to mean "smaller" if it refers to quality, such as the ("This is small and above small") and it is not possible to say

("This is little and above little"). But ("This is an ant and above the ant") and

("a donkey and above the donkey") to mean respectively smaller than the ant and the donkey, because they are not qualities but nouns. See al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, pp. 107-108.

133

“And [did We not say,] when We caused Mount Sinai to quake above the heads of the children of Israel as though it were a [mere] shadow, ...” (Q. 7:171).348 k. and (to fear) Khashiya and khāfa both mean “to fear”, but may also mean ‘alima (“to know”), because fear is a part of knowing, as in “... and we knew that he would bring bitter grief upon them by [his] overweening wickedness and denial of all truth.” (Q. 18:80), and “And warn hereby those who know that they will be gathered unto their Sustainer” (Q. 6:51).349 As a shāhid, Lane cites a poem and its translation in which the term khashiya means ‘alima, as follows: “And I know assuredly that he who follows the right direction shall dwell in the Gardens of Paradise with the Prophet Mohammad.”350

l.

(hope)

Rajā’ which means “hope” may also mean khawf (fear), because a person who hopes is in doubt and has a part of fear that what he hopes will not be fulfilled, as in “What is amiss with you that you do not fear Allah's majesty, ...” (Q.71:13, Asad). The example from poetry is the poem of Abū Dhu’ayb al-Hudhalī, as follows: “When the bees sting him he fears not their stings.”351

348. For further details, see T.iflisī, Wujūh, pp. 228-9; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp.

473-4; idem, Qurrah, pp. 188-189; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 364-365.

349. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 190-191. For more examples, see Q. 2:182 and 229. See also Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, pp. 184-185 and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, pp. 745 (s.v. ) and 823 (s.v. ).

350. Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 745 (s.v.

).

351. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 191; idem, Tafsīr, p. 271; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 169; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 3, p. 50 and vol. 18, p. 303; see also Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 73; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, pp. 494-495; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 794 (s.v., ).

134

The above verse according to al-Qurt.ubī means, “what is amiss with you that you do not fear Allah’s majesty and His ability to punish you, namely, what is your excuse for not fearing Him?” He quotes the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, Abū al-‘Āliyah, ‘At.ā’ ibn Abī Rabāh., as follows: “What is amiss with you that you do not look forward to reward from Allah and do not fear punishment from Him?” The term is also interpreted as (“you do not see”) by Ibn ‘Abbās in another report and Mujāhid, as well as (“you do not care”) by Ibn Mujāhid in another report and al-D.ah.h.āk. This last interpretation is based on the language of H.ijāz, as asserted by Qut.rub.

Similarly, in the languages of Hudhayl, Khuzā‘ah and Mud.ar the expression means (“I do not care”).352 According to al-Farrā’, the Arabs use the word rajā’ meaning “fear” only if it is accompanied with jah.d (denial, negation), as in the examples above, and in the expression meaning I did not fear him”).353 Ibn al-Jawzī, Tiflīsī, and al-Dāmaghānī mention respectively two, three, and five homonyms of rajā’: (1) amal (hope), rajā’, and t.ama‘ (ambitious desire) according to Ibn al-Jawzī, Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī respectively, as in “... they have the hope of the mercy of God; ...” (Q. 2:218, Ali); (2) khawf which is also the language of Hudhayl according to Ibn ‘Abbās, (khashyah, fear, according to Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī), as in “And whoever feared the meeting with his Sustainer...” (Q. 18:110); (3) al-t.ama‘, according to Tiflīsī, as in “... they strive for His mercy” (Q. 17:57); (4) al-h.abs (arrest), as in “They said (unto Pharaoh): Arrest him and his brother“ (Q. 7:111 and 26:36); (5) al-nawāh.ī (sides), as in “And the angels [will appear] on its sides,...” (Q.69:17, Asad); and (6) al-tark (leaving), as in “Thou mayest put off for a 352. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 303.

353. Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 9-10; see also ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt alQur’ān, pp. 183-184, n. 5.

135

time whichever of them thou pleasest, ...” (Q. 33:51, Asad).354 m. (to give up all hope) Ya’isa may also mean ‘alima (to know), for knowing and being sure of something make a person abandon all hope for other things, as in “Have, then, they who have attained to faith not yet come to know that, had God so willed, He would indeed have guided all mankind aright?” (Q. 13:31, Asad). The example from poetry is the poem of Suh.aym ibn Wathīl al-Yarbū‘ī, as follows: “I told them at the mountain path when they captured me: ‘Do you not know that I am the son of the rider of the horse Zahdam?’”355

We have seen that many words belonging to al-ad.dād treated by Ibn Qutaybah were included later in the category of words having many homonyms. They were treated by writers in the field of (homonyms and synonyms in the Qur’ān).

3. Advancing what will Be Clear by Retarding, and Retarding what will Be Clear by Advancing.

354. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 308; idem, Qurrah, p. 123; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 109110; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 197-198; and Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, pp. 55 and 65.

355. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 192; idem, Tafsīr, pp. 227-228; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 534; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 6, pp. 153-154; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 6, p.

260 (s.v. ); al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 3, p. 53; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, pp. 109-110. It is said that ya'isa meaning ‘alima is the language of Hawāzin tribe, see al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, p. 390. Ibn Qutaybah does not give us any example for the basic meaning of ya'isa in the Qur’ān which is in Q. 12:87; see Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 633; idem, Qurrah, p. 246; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 501. There are variant versions in the verse in question: (a) ibn fāris Zahdam; the horse Zahdam belonged to Suh.aym ibn Wathīl al-Yarbū‘ī; therefore, in this case, the poem belonged to his son Jābir ibn Suh.aym; (b) ibn qātil Zahdam; Zahdam was a person killed by Wathīl; in this variant version the poem belonged to Suh.aym; (c) ibn fāris Lāzim; Lāzim was the horse of Suh.aym; in this variant version, the poem belonged to Jābir ibn Suh.aym; see Ibn al-Kalbī, al-Khayl: Nasab al-Khayl fī ’l-Jāhilīyah wa ’l-Islām (Leiden: N.p., 1928), p. 17, quoted by ‘Abd al-Salām M. Hārūn in Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 6, p. 154, n. 1.

136

Ibn Qutaybah quotes thirteen Qur’ānic verses, several examples from poetry and one example of an Arabic expression of the time to illustrate this category of inversion, thus evidencing the existence of such inversion in the Qur’ān, Arabic poetry and in common use. These examples will be discussed as follows: a. Arabic Expression The expression meaning “present the she-camel to the water basin” is the inversion of (“present the water basin to the she-camel”). As a matter of fact, they are presented to each other. b. Arabic Poetry An unidentified poet said: “You see the bull in it making the shade enter his head,” is the inversion of “making his head enter the shade”. As the bull's head and the shade become intermingled, they enter one into the other, leading Ibn Qutaybah to observe that though the first expression is not incorrect, the second one is more appropriate.356 Al-A‘shá said: “Until it burned up and the firebrand became (hot) like its dust.” It means “its dust became (hot) like (the heat of) its firebrand”.357 c. Qur’ānic verses (1) “So think not that Allah will fail to keep His promise to His messengers” (Q. 14:47, Pickthall) in which inversion is claimed to take place, namely, the inversion of (“... He will fail to keep to His messengers His promise”). According to Ibn Qutaybah, inversion occurs because the verb akhlafa (to violate) applies equally to the promise as well as to the messengers. We can say “I fail to keep the promise”, and “I fail [to keep

356. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 194.

357. Ibid., p. 197; al-A‘shā's version of the poem is ("Until it was kindled, then the firebrand was like its dust"); see Maymūn ibn Qays al-A‘shá, Diwān al-A‘shá (Beirut: Dār S.ādir, 1966), p. 18.

137

promise with] the messenger”.358 (2) “Now [as for me, I know that,] verily, these [false deities] are my enemies, [and that none is my helper] save the Sustainer of all the worlds” (Q. 26:77, Asad) in which the inversion of (“I am their enemy”) takes place. This is because, Ibn Qutaybah asserts, “whomsoever you treat as an enemy will also treat you as such.”359 (3) “and then [he] drew nearer, and came close” (Q.53:8, Asad) is the inversion of (“and then he came close and drew nearer”), because Gabriel came close by drawing nearer, and drew nearer by coming close.360 This view is similar to that of al-Farrā’ who states that the meaning of the verse is . However, he states further that it is possible to say, for example,

(“he came close, so he came

nearer”), or (“he came nearer, so he came close”), because both verbs have similar or nearly similar meanings. Therefore, it could be claimed that inversion does not occur in the above verse.361 (4) “Nay, but man shall against himself be an eye-witness” (Q. 75:14, Asad) is said to be the inversion of meaning “nay, but the one who will be an eye-witness against 358. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 193. Al-Farrā’ says that if a transitive verb has two objects, and one of them is a person, the person should be mentioned first, although it can be mentioned second; for further details, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 79-80. Al-Zamakhsharī said that wa‘d is mentioned first in the verse to indicate that Allah does not break His promise, let alone breaking away from His messengers; see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 713.

359. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 193. Al-Farrā’ gives the interpretation of the above verse, namely, "if you worship them, they will be enemies for me [namely, Prophet Abraham] till the Judgement Day". In this case, there is no inversion; see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 281.

360. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 193. See also al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt.

2, p. 725.

361. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 95. According to al-Zajjāj both words have the same meaning, except that daná means "to be near" (qaruba), whereas tadallá means "to become nearer" ( ), see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

5, p. 173.

138

man will (come) from himself”, namely, his limbs. Because his limbs are parts of him, they took his place, namely, “himself” in the above verse.362 (5) (“old age has already reached me” Q. 3:40) is claimed to be the inversion of (“I have reached old age”).363 Abū ‘Ubaydah gives the same interpretation but does not acknowledge inversion has taken place here, but rather that this is the Arabic way of expression.364 Al-Zamakhsharī who does not see any inversion here says that the verse means (“old age has affected me and weakened me”); it is like the expression “the high [namely, old] age has reached him”.365 According to al-T.abarsī both expressions are correct, because old age reaches you when it happens, and you reach old age through the passing of time. It is unlike the expression (“I have reached the town”) which cannot be inverted by saying (“the town has reached me”), in as much as the town does not reach or come to us.366 (6) “Man is created out of haste” (Q. 21:37) is the inversion of “Haste is made with man.” It means that haste is made as part of human nature. This is the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah.367 362. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 193 and idem, Tafsīr, p. 500. This interpretation of Ibn Qutaybah is cited by al-T.abarsī under the name of al-Qutaybī, but without mentioning the occurrence of inversion, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 396. AlQayrawānī mentions two interpretations of this verse, also without mentioning the occurrence of any inversion in it, as follows: (1) ("but man shall be an eye-witness against himself") and (2) ("but man, [there] shall be an eye-witness againnst himself"). The second interpretation is like the expression ("Zayd, there is a boy in his house"). This is the interpretation to which al-Qayrawānī leans. See I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, pp. 536-537.

363. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 195.

364. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 92.

365. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 202.

366. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 439.

367. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 193, 195 and 197-198; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 38-39. From here, namely page 198, Ibn Qutaybah deals

139

Al-T.abarsī gives two main views about the meaning of the term insān in the above verse: Adam and man. Those who say that it is Adam, have three views regarding the meaning of the above verse: (a) Adam was created after the creation of other creatures at the end of the day of the year of creation; it was Friday and Adam was created after sunset; (b) Adam was created not through the slow process of creation of babies; (c) when Adam was created his spirit filled most parts of his body; he became physically active and grasped at the fruits of Paradise. Those who say that it is man, have four different interpretations: (a) Man was created with the impatience to rush when dealing with his affairs. This is the view of Qatādah, Abū Muslim, and al-Jubbā’ī. The type of expression in this verse is common among the Arabs. For example, they say of a sleeper “he was not created but of sleep”, and of a criminal, “he was not created but of evil”. (b) There is inversion in this verse, namely, “the haste was created out of man”, which is the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah and Qut.rub. This vew, however, is weak according to alT.abarsī, because in order to put Allah’s words into inversion one needs ta’wīl, whereas no ta’wīl is needed here; (c) The term ‘ajal means (clay), so that the verse means that man was created from clay, which is, according to al-T.abarsī, also the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah and a group of linguists. As a shāhid from poetry they cite the following poem: “and the date palms grow between water and clay (soil)”. (d) Man was created in haste, as Allah said

(“be and it is”).368

(7) “Praise be to Allah Who hath revealed the Scripture unto His slave, and hath not placed therein any crookedness. (But hath made it) straight...” (Q. 18:1-2, Pickthall) is the inversion of “... Who hath revealed the Scripture ... made it straight, and hath not placed therein any crookedness.” This is the view of the majority of scholars, such as alwith the inversion by mistake up to page 205 inclusively. He then begins examining this particular inversion we are dealing with again.

368. For further details, see al-T.abarsi, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, pp. 47-48; see also al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 2, pp. 115-119.

140

Akhfash, al-Kisā’ī, al-Farrā’, Abū ‘Ubayd, as well as al-T.abarī, who based his view on Ibn ‘Abbās’s interpretation. Qatādah, however, says that there is no inversion in this verse, as the verse means , as translated by Pickthall above.369 (8) ) “And his wife was standing (there), and she laughed. But We gave her glad tidings of Isaac, ...” (Q. 11:71, Ali) is the inversion of (“We gave her glad 370 tidings of Isaac then she laughed”).

What made Sarah laugh? Al-Farrā’ mentions two views: She laughed because of the glad tidings that she would have a son; this is the interpretation of those who state that there is inversion in the verse above. According to al-Qurt.ubī, this is also the view of al-Farrā’ who said that Sarah laughed because she was happy after hearing the good tidings. The other view is that there is no inversion in the above verse. Al-Qurt.ubī said further that at the time of Prophet Abraham people who did not touch food presented to them were suspected of being enemies or robbers. Since the angels who appeared like human beings did not touch the food presented by Prophet Abraham, he became afraid. His fear was noticed by the angels who told him not to be afraid. So, his wife Sarah laughed.371 According to Muqātil, Sarah laughed because she saw Abraham who could challenge one hundred men by himself being afraid of three men, his guests. The best view according to al-Nah.h.ās, is that when the angels told Abraham not to be afraid, he became happy; Sarah laughed because she was pleased with his happiness.372 According to Qatādah she laughed because she was amazed to see that her guests whom she was serving did not touch the food. According to al-Zajjāj she laughed because she was amazed and happy to learn that Lot's people would be punished. She had advised Abraham to take his nephew Lot with him, for 369. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 205-6; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

133; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 126; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 351; alQayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 713; and al-T.abarsi, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p.

449.

370. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 206; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10, p. 460; and alQayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 725.

371. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 21-22.

372. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 67.

141

she feared punishment might come to his people.373 (9) “But they gave him the lie, and cruelly slaughtered her ...” (Q. 91:14, Asad) is the inversion of (“But they cruelly slaughtered her and gave him the lie”). However, Ibn Qutaybah says that it is also possible that there is no inversion here. This is also the view of al-T.abarī and al-Qurt.ubī. Al-T.abarī said that it is possible to mention the motive before or after the deed, for example (“You gave, so you did good”) and (“You did good, so you gave”).374 (10) “Thus have their (so-called) partners (of Allah) made the killing of their children to seem fair unto many of the idolaters ...” (Q. 6:137, Pickthall). This is the reading of the jumhūr of the qurrā’, of the peoples of Makkah, Madīnah, Kūfah, and Bas.rah. Ibn Qutaybah said that “some reciters”, namely, Ibn ‘Āmir, read the verse as follows: which means that the killing of the idolaters’ children by what they called “partners” of Allah has been made to seem fair to the idolaters.

The difference between the two readings is as follows: In the first reading it reads (a verb in active voice), (the object of the verb ), (genitive case), and it reads of

(the subject of

(a verb in passive voice),

), and

). In the second reading

(nā’ib fā’il of

),

(the object

(in genitive case, but is the subject of the verbal noun

). In the first reading the so-called partners of Allah made the killing of the idolaters’ children by their own parents seem to be fair. But in the second reading the so-called partners of Allah are only indirectly the killers, because of the idolaters' belief in their existence, influence, and will. To this second reading Ibn Qutaybah said that is the 373. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 180. This view of al-Zajjāj was chosen by al-S.ābūnī, see M.A. al-S.ābūnī, S.afwat al-Tafāsīr (Beirut: Dār al-Qur’ān alKarīm, 1402/1981), vol. 2, p. 24.

374. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 206; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 269; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 79; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 137; and alQayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 725.

142

inversion of

.375

Al-Qurt.ubī mentions four variant readings for the above verse, follows: (1) the reading of the great majority of qurrā’ mentioned above in which the idolaters killed their own children, and this act was made to seem fair by the so-called partners of Allah to the parents; , “their killing of their (own) children” where the pronoun

means

hum is hidden. The ellipsis of the pronoun is also found in the verse “Man never tires of asking for the good [things of life]:...” (Q. 41:49, Asad), meaning

(“of his asking for good

[things of life]”). The (partners) in the above reading according to alFarrā’ and al-Zajjāj are the people who serve the idols. Another view says that they are the tempters, and it has also been said that they are the devils; (2) the variant reading of al-H.asan which is also a possible reading according to al-Qurt.ubī. is similar to the expression

(“Zayd was beaten by

‘Amr”) meaning (“he was beaten by ‘Amr”). As a shāhid from poetry is Sībawayh’s poem: So that Yazid was made to cry by D.āri‘ because of an argument, and was beaten in such a way that would make people perish.

meaning (“D.āri‘ made him cry”). As a shāhid from the Qur’ān itself is the variant reading of Ibn ‘Āmir and ‘Ās.im from the report of Abū Bakr who read - instead of meaning

“He was offered praise ... by men” (Q. 24:36-7); (3)

the variant reading of the people of Shām in which means the idolaters’ children whom they killed and with whom they shared kinship and inheritance. This reading is also acceptable; (4) the variant reading of Ibn ‘Āmir and of the people of Shām (Syria) as reported by Abū ‘Ubayd as mentioned above.376 375. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 207-208.

376. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, pp. 91-92; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1,

143

The reading of Ibn ‘Āmir is disputable. Among those who reject this reading are: al-Nah.h.ās, al-Farrā’, Abū Ghānim Ah.mad ibn H.amdān, alT.abarī and al-Zamakhsharī. Al-Nah.h.ās said that the grammarians allow the separation between (the annexed, the first of the governed noun of the genitive construction) and

(what is annexed to, namely, the

second of the governed noun of the genitive construction) with

(an

adverb denoting place or time), not with nouns. In Ibn ‘Āmir’s reading is separated from with a noun ( ), and therefore, his reading is not acceptable.377 Al-Mahdāwī justifies Ibn ‘Āmir’s reading by comparing it with the following line of poetry: “I cast at her [my wife] with a small arrow the way Abū Mazādah cast at the young camel.

Here

as

is separated from its

, namely,

with a

noun which is the object.378 Al-Farrā’ rejects this argument, saying that this is only the view of the grammarians of H.ijāz, and nothing similar to it is found in Arabic.379 Abū Ghānim Ah.mad ibn H.amdān al-Nah.wī said that Ibn ‘Āmir’s reading is a mistake and should not be followed. The separation between the and the with a z.arf is allowed only for the reason of poetic necessity, because the does not separate, as in the following poem of Abū H.ayyah al-Numayrī: -

p. 357; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, pp. 370-371.

377. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 92.

378. Ibid.

379. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 358.

144

“It [the house] is [so well designed] like the book written one day by a Jewish scribe who makes some of his writings close to each other, and others well separated”.

Here the word yahūdī is separted from kaff by yawman. Al-Qushayrī said that a group of people rejected this view, as this reading was reported mutawātir from the Prophet. Moreover, it was written in the ‘Uthmānic codex (with ) indicating the soundness of Ibn 380 ‘Āmir’s reading.

Al-T.abarī and al-Zamakhsharī who rejected the reading of Ibn ‘Āmir of the above verse381 were opposed by many ‘ulamā’, such as Ibn al-Munayyir al-Iskandarī, Abū H.ayyān al-Nah.wī, Niz.ām al-Dīn alNisābūrī, and Ibn al-Jazarī. Ibn al-Munayyir asserted that alZamakhsharī thought that Ibn ‘Āmir’s variant reading was based on his own ijtihād, whereas, in fact, it was revealed to the Prophet, and the Prophet read it to Gabriel and to people with tawātur, as with the rest of the seven variant readings.382 Niz.ām al-Dīn al-Nisābūrī, defending the variant reading of Ibn ‘Āmir, said: The right view according to me, in this case, is that the Qur’ān is a h.ujjah (proof) on others, and not the others being a h.ujjah on it. As the seven variant readings are all mutawātir, how could it be then possible to say that some of them are wrong? If such a variant reading [of Ibn ‘Āmir] has been reported in the miraculous Qur’ān then it is necessary to assert that it is right and eloquent.383

Ibn al-Jazarī who disagreed with al-Zamakhsharī on Ibn ‘Āmir’s reading on the above verse said that the right view was not what al380. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 93.

381. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 33; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, pp. 437-438.

382. Ibn al-Munayyir, al-Ins.āf (in the margin of al-Kashshāf), vol. 2, p. 53, quoted by Dr. Labīb al-Sa‘īd, Difā‘, pp. 75-76.

383. Niz.ām al-Dīn al-Nīsābūrī, Gharā'ib al-Qur’ān wa Raghā’ib al-Furqān, in the margin of al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 31.

145

Zamakhsharī said, and he asked Allah’s protection from reading the Qur’ān with ra’y (personal opinion) and al-tashahhī (personal wish). He said further that it would be impossible to reject the reading of Ibn ‘Āmir who was one of the great tābi‘īn who took the learning from the s.ah.ābah, like ‘Uthmān ibn ‘Affān and Abū al-Dardā’.384 (11).

“Let not, then, their worldly goods, or [the happiness which they may derive from] their children excite thy admiration: God but wants to chastise them by these means in this worldly life, and [to cause] their souls to depart while they are [still] denying the truth.” (Q. 9:55, Asad). According to Ibn ‘Abbās’s interpretation on the authority of alKalbī referred to by Ibn Qutaybah the above verse means “Do not let their riches and their children in the world please you; on the contrary, Allah will punish them because of them [i.e., their riches and children] in the Hereafter.” Therefore, the inversion occurred between and , so that the above verse means that the occurrence of punishment will not be in this world, but in the Hereafter.385 This is also the interpretation of al-Farrā’.386 According to al-Qurt.ubī, Ibn ‘Abbās’s view is also shared by Qatādah. This is also the view of the majority of Arabists according to al-Nah.h.ās. However, there is also another view which states that there is no inversion in the above verse. The punishment occurs in this world, namely, in their toil of collecting wealth and in spending it by force in order to conceal their hypocrisy.387 (12).

“And but for a decree that had already gone forth from thy Lord, and a term already fixed, the judgement would (have) been inevitable (in this world).” (Q. 20:129, Pickthall). The inversion here occurs between and as 384. For further details, see Ibn al-Jazarī, al-Nashr, vol. 2, pp. 263-264.

385. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 208; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p.

723.

386. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 442.

387. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 164; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 3, p. 33; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 39.

146

translated by Pickthall above. This is also the view of Qatādah.388 Instead of “the judgement”, the inevitable thing according to Ibn Qutaybah and alT.abarī respectively is “the punishment” and “the destruction” .389 Another view specifies the inevitable punishment, namely, the death of the leaders of the unbelievers in the battle of Badr. Had it not been decreed by Allah regarding the fixed terms of the rest of the unbelievers and the promise of punishing them in the Hereafter, they would have been killed the way their leaders were (in the battle of Badr).390 (13) And if any [secret] matter pertaining to peace or war comes within their ken, they spread it abroad - whereas, if they would but refer it unto the Apostle and unto those from among the believers who have been entrusted with authority, such of them as are engaged in obtaining intelligence would indeed know [what to do with] it. And but for God’s bounty towards you, and His grace, all but a few of you would certainly have followed Satan. (Q. 4:83, Asad).

According to Ibn Qutaybah the inversion in the verse occurs between and

, so that the verse becomes

(“… such of them as are engaged in obtaining intelligence would indeed know [what to do with] it but a few of them [would not know]).”391 Al-Qurt.ubī mentions three views on this verse: (1) It means “they spread it abroad except a few ( ) which are not spread abroad and revealed”; this is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and a group of grammarians, such as al-Kisā’ī, al-Akhfash, Abū ‘Ubayd, Abū H.ātim, and al-T.abarī. (2) Similar to the view of Ibn Qutaybah above, which is also 388. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 260 and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 3, p. 33.

See also al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 725.

389. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 208-9; and al-T.abarsī, Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 167.

390. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 35.

391. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 209.

147

that of al-H.asan.392 We notice that these two views state the occurrence of inversion. The words are put together after and according to the first and the second view respectively. Al-Farrā’ and alKalbī prefer the first view, whereas al-Zajjāj prefers the second. (3) It means “had it not been for the grace of Allah and His mercy on you by sending you a messenger among yourselves who brought evidence on you, you would have become unbelievers and idolaters, except a few among you.” There is no inversion here.393 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah’s treatment of this topic was very brief and limited. Scholars of later generations had more things to say and gave more elaborate explanations.

4. Inversion by Mistake Ibn Qutaybah asserts that inversion by mistake occurs in poetry, because the poets invert and omit words by mistake or by necessity for the sake of rhyme or the correctness of the meter of the verses. As an example is the poem of an unidentified poet as follows: “What you have said is obligatory like adultery is obligatory for stoning”

which is the inversion of “like stoning is obligatory for adultery” ( ).394 Did any of the philologists or Qur’ānic commentators ever explicitly mention the occurrence of inversion by mistake in the Qur’ān? As far as we know, none of them. However, by implication, the way some Qur’ānic verses were explained, this type of inversion seems to occur. Abū ‘Ubaydah, for example, when he illustrated the occurrence of inversion in some 392. According to al-T.abarsī, this is also the view of the majority of the philologists (ahl al-lughah), see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 82.

393. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 292; see also al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 279-280. Al-T.abarsī mentions the fourth view which is almost similar to the third, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 82.

394. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 199; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 99; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 253.

148

Qur’ānic verses never claimed that this inversion is by mistake, because inversion is itself one of the ways of expression by the Arabs.

Ibn Qutaybah in rejecting the occurrence of inversion by mistake in the verses of the Qur’ān, states that Allah does not make any mistake nor is compelled to. However, he treats briefly four Qur’ānic verses suspected to belong to this category of inversion, as follows: a.

“And so, the parable of those who are bent on denying the truth is as that of the beast which hears the shepherd’s cry, and hears in it nothing but the sound of a voice and a call [lit. ‘him who cries unto what hears nothing but a cry and a call’]. Deaf are they, and dumb, and blind: for they do not use their reason.” (Q. 2:171, Asad) According to Abū ‘Ubaydah whom Ibn Qutaybah referred to as “some philologists” ,395 the word yan‘iqu, “the one who calls”, namely, the shepherd, should mean yun‘aqu, “the one which is called”, namely, the sheep. Therefore, the verse means that the similarity of unbelievers when they are called to Islam is like the deaf sheep which do not hear except a shout and cry when they are called by the sheep-tender, as translated by Asad above.396 What Abū ‘Ubaydah means is that although it is read yan‘iqu it means yun‘aqu, and this inversion in meaning is not a mistake, because it is used by the Arabs. They say, for example (“this dress is not sufficient for my size”, namely, “it does not fit me” when it is meant “my size does not fit the dress” They also say (“I put my head into the cap”), when they mean

“I put the cap onto my head.”397

This interpretation of Abū ‘Ubaydah is also that of Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, ‘Ikrimah, al-Suddī, al-Zajjāj, Sībawayh and al-Farrā’. Al-Farrā’ gives an example in the Arabic expression , meaning, “So-andso fears you like the fear of the lion”, which means

(“... like his

395. This is one example of the expresssion "some" which means "one" in the classical Islamic literature. It is said "some scholars say" or "some jurists say" when it sometimes means "one scholar" and "one jurist".

396. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 199; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 64.

397. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 63-64.

149

fear of the lion”).398 Ibn Qutaybah rejects this interpretation and contends that the verse means “the likeness of those who disbelieve and our likeness in their preaching are like the one who calls to someone who does not hear.” The expression “and our likeness” ( ), is omitted in the verse as the mode of expression in the verse gives an indication of its existence.399 This view is similar to that of Ibn Zayd, Qut.rub, and al-T.abarī, namely, the disbelievers calling their idols is like calling to the deaf.400 Ibn Qutaybah gives another interpretation of al-Farrā’, namely, “the likeness of preaching of those who disbelieve” which means “the likeness of preaching to those who disbelieve”;401 it is like the expression (“If you meet So-and-so greet him the emir’s greeting”).

The expression

(“the emir’s greeting”) here means

(“the way you greet the emir”). Therefore, it means “the way the emir is greeted”, not “the way the emir greets”.402 b. “...that his treasure-chests alone would surely have been too heavy a burden for a troop of ten men or even more.” (Q. 28:76, Asad). There is an inversion here according to Abū ‘Ubaydah, that the verse means “a troop of ten men or even more would have too heavy a burden with the treasure-chests” ( ).403 The word is the plural of (a treasure-chest or a store) and (a 404 key).

Asad, Ali and Arberry use the first meaning as seen above, 398. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 214; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol.

1, pp. 99-100.

399. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 203; and idem, Tafsīr, p. 68.

400. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi', vol. 2, pp. 214-215.

401. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 203.

402. Al-Farrā’ mentions both views and says that both are correct; see, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 99-100. For further details on the above verse, see al-Murtad.á, Āmālī, vol. 1, pp. 154-157.

403. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 64 and vol. 2, p. 39.

404. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, pp. 311-312. Lane mentions two Arabic words for the "key", also the plural of

with its plural

, and

with its plural

.

is

which means "a place in which things are reposited, stowed, laid

150

whereas Pickthall uses the second. The size of a troop ( ) according to Ibn ‘Abbās consists of people between three and ten, whereas according to Mujāhid, Qatādah and Abū S.ālih. it is respectively between ten and fifteen, between ten and forty, and forty people.405 Asad translates it as "ten men or even more" as noticed above, since this term “is used here metonymically, pointing to the great weight involved...”406 According to Ibn Qutaybah and al-Farrā’, there is no inversion in this verse, as it means that the treasure-chests, due to their heaviness, made the troop of mighty men who were carrying them bend down.407 Here Ibn Qutaybah disagrees with Abū ‘Ubaydah. c. “for, verily, to the love of wealth is he most ardently devoted.” (Q. 100:8, Asad) is claimed to be the inversion of (“for, verily, his love of wealth is ardent”) or, according to alFarrā’, , meaning (“for, verily, he is ardently in love of wealth”). Ibn Qutaybah rejects the occurrence of inversion here, because, like Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Kalbī, he translates as (miserly), so that the verse means “Verily, for his love of wealth he is miserly ( ).”408 Here Ibn Qutaybah leans towards the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah rather than that of al-Farrā’. d. “... and make us examples to the righteous”.

(Q. 25:74). There is inversion here according to Mujāhid, namely,

up, kept, preserved, or guarded (syn. property (syn.

and

); a hoard, a treasure, or a buried

)"; see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2329 (s.v.

).

405. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 266. Ibn Qutaybah mentions Qatādah's view only, namely, ‫ عُصْبَة‬constitutes between ten and forty people, see Tafsīr, p. 335.

406. See Asad, The Message, p. 603, n. 85.

407. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 199 and 203; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 310.

408. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 200 and 204; idem, Tafsīr, p. 536; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, pp. 285-286; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 307; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 180; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 162; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 530; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 234.

151

and make those who are righteous examples for us”.409 Ibn Qutaybah’s interpretation of the above verse in refuting the occurrence of inversion in it is that it means “and make us examples in good things by which the righteous will follow”. To support his view Ibn Qutaybah cites the following verse: “and [as] We raised among them leaders, so long as they bore themselves with patience and had sure faith in Our messages, guided [their people] in accordance with Our behest.” (Q. 32:24, Asad).

Here a’immah means qādah (leaders), according to Ibn ‘Abbās’s interpretation.410 However, Ibn Qutaybah also gives Mujāhid’s interpretation as reported by al-T.abarī, that the verse in question means “make us follow the examples of people before us so that people who come after us will follow our example.”411 We have seen how Ibn Qutaybah treated the Qur’ānic verses in which inversion by mistake seemed to occur. Through his philological explanation he proved the absence of inversion, much less inversion by mistake.

Unfortunately, Ibn Qutaybah’s treatment of this topic is very brief and lacks detail. More explanation on this topic would have been valuable and helpful.

This brevity is probably due to his conviction that there is no inversion by mistake in the Qur’ān and that no philologist explicitly mentions its occurence in the verses of the Qur’ān.

C. Ellipsis (H.adhf) and Brevity (Ikhtis.ār) Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl mentions nine categories of ellipsis and brevity which occur in the Qur’ān. They are as follows: (1) the ellipsis of the mud.āf whose function is replaced by the mud.āf ilayh ( ), for example, “And ask the township” (Q. 12:82), meaning “ask the inhabitants (ahl) of the township”; (2) the effect of a verb on two things when it is actually intended for one of 409. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 200 and 205; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 83.

410. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 205, and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 34.

411. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 205; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 274; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 34.

152

them, while the verb of the other is hidden ( ), such as “So decide upon your course of action, you and your partners” (Q. 10:71), meaning “so decide upon your course of action and call (wa ad‘ū) your partners”; (3) the ellipsis of the main clause of a conditional or an incomplete sentence due to its clarity to the listener ( ), such as “And were it not for God's favour upon you and His grace and that God is compassionate, a Dispenser of grace...” (Q. 24:20, Asad) with the ellipsis of the main clause “He would have punished you” ( ) according to Ibn Qutaybah; (4) the ellipsis of one or two words, such as “And as for those with faces darkened, [they shall be told:] ‘Did you deny the truth after having attained to faith?’” (Q. 3:106, Asad), with the ellipsis of the words (“it will be said to them”) in the Qur’ānic text; (5) the ellipsis of the main clause of an oath when there is an indication of its presence in the sentence ( ) such as “By those angels who drag forth souls with violence, and by those who with joyous release release them; by those who swim swimmingly along; by those who are foremost with foremost speed; by those who conduct the affairs of the universe!” (Q. 79:1- , Rodwell) with the ellipsis of the words “you will be surely raised” (

) at the end of these verses; (6) the ellipsis of

the word lā (no, not) while the sense of the sentence indicates its presence ( ), such as “God makes [all this] clear unto you, lest you go astray; ...” (Q. 4:176, Asad) with the ellipsis of the word la in the text, namely, ; (7) the use of a pronoun for something which has not been mentioned before (

), such

as “Lo! We revealed it on the Night of Power!”

(Q. 97:1, Pickthall) with the ellipsis of the pronoun “it” (hu) referring to the Qur’ān which was not mentioned beforehand; (8) the ellipsis of propositions, such as “And Moses chose out of his people seventy men” (Q. 7:155, Asad) with the ellipsis of

153

the word min (among, from, out of) in the text, namely, ; and lastly, (9) the complex ellipsis which is unspecified by Ibn Qutaybah due to its complexity, such as “He who desires might and glory [ought to know that] all might and glory belong to God [alone]....” (Q. 35:10, Asad) with the ellipsis of the expression (“he will know to whom power belongs”) according to Ibn Qutaybah, and “ought to know that” as put by Asad. These categories of ellipsis will be discussed with some selected examples, as follows: 1. The Ellipsis of the Mud.āf whose Function is Replaced by the Mud.āf Ilayh As mentioned earlier, the omitted mud.āf and its function are replaced by the mud.āf ilayh in its relation to its verb. Ibn Qutaybah mentions ten Qur’ānic verses and five verses of poetry which belong to this category of ellipsis. Three Qur’ānic verses and one verse of poetry will be discussed as follows: a. “... for their hearts are filled to overflowing with love of the [golden] calf...” (Q. 2:93, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah, as translated by Asad, the verse means “the love of the calf” with the ellipsis of h.ubb (love).412 This is also the view of al-Farrā’ and Abū ‘Ubaydah.413 b.

“For the H.ajj are the months well known....”

(Q. 2:197, Ali). According to Ibn Qutaybah the verse means “the time of pilgrimage” (waqt al-h.ajj) with the ellipsis of the word waqt.414 This is also the opinion of al-Farrā’, who heard al-Kisā’ī saying (“verily the summer is two months, and verily the t.aylasān is three months”), meaning

“the summer time

412. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 210. Al-Zamakhsharī says that the meaning of the verse in question is "love and desire to worship the calf had penetrated into their hearts like the penetration of gum into clothes", see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 90.

413. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 61; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 1, p. 47; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 163; and al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 31.

414. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 210.

154

and the time for wearing the t.aylasān (a shawl-like garment worn over head and shoulders)...415 Instead of , it is also said 416 (“the time for performing the pilgrimage”). c. “in which case We would indeed have made thee taste double [chastisement] in life and double [chastisement] after death, ...” (Q. 17:75, Asad) with the ellipsis of ‘adhāb (punishment), rendered as “chastisement” by Asad. This is the view of Ibn Qutaybah, Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī.417 This is also the view of Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, and others.418 d. As evidence from poetry is the following poem of Abū Dhu’ayb: “They brought him [the wine’s owner] with profit which he had tried [to obtain], so that it became kept [and] permissible [to drink], and drinking it became easy.”

The words means (“they brought its owner”) with the ellipsis of the word s.āh.ib (owner).419 2. The Ellipsis of the Verb It is the ellipsis of a verb which belongs to one of two objects. These objects are literally affected by another verb, although in meaning, only one of them is affected by it ( ). Ibn Qutaybah mentions examples from two Qur’anic verses and four verses of poetry. The Qur’ānic verses and two verses of poetry will be discussed as 415. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 119; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p.

405; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 227.

416. What al-Qurt.ubī means is that, it is like

, which means

, see al-Jāmi', vol. 2, p. 405.

417. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 210; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

386; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 779.

418. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 301; see also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 3, p. 431.

419. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 211; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 79 (s.v. ).

155

follows: a.

“Immortal youths will wait upon them with goblets, and ewers, and cups filled with water from unsullied springs by which their minds will not be clouded and which will not make them drunk; and with fruit of any kind that they may choose, and with the flesh of any fowl that they may desire. And [with them will be their] companions pure, most beautiful of eye.” (Q. 56:1722, Asad).

According to Ibn Qutaybah the fruit, the flesh of fowls and the companions pure are brought to the inhabitants of Paradise, with the ellipsis of the verbs wa yu’tūna bi (“and it will be brought to them”) which affects the fruit, the flesh and the companions pure.420 b. The poem heard by al-Farrā’ from Banī Dubayr: “I foddered it [the animal] with straw and [watered it] with cold water,” with the ellipsis of the verb (I watered it).421 420. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 212-3. It is assumed here that Ibn Qutaybah reads also h.ūr ‘īin in dative case, like and , see Ta’wīl, p. 213. Al-Farrā’, alQurt.ubī, al-T.abarsī and al-Zamakhsharī mention three possible readings of

:

(genitive), (accusative), and (nominative). (1) is the reading of H.amzah and al-Kisā’ī and others, because it is affected by a hidden verb, namely,

("they enjoy") as if it is said

("They enjoy bowls, fruit, flesh and companions pure, most beautiful of eye"). (2) is the reading in Ubayy ibn Ka‘b's and Ibn Mas‘ūd's codices which is also the reading of al-Ashhub al-‘Uqaylī, al-Nakhā‘ī, and ‘Īsá ibn ‘Umar al-Thaqafī. The noun is affected by the hidden verb ("and they marry"). (3) which is the reading of the jumhūr, as if it is said ("and with them companions pure, most beautiful of eye"). For further details, see al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, pp.

123-124, al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp. 204-205; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 215-6. For a slightly different interpretation, see al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 2, pp. 1441-1442.

421. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 213; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p.

124. According to al-Qurt.ubī, the ellipsis of the verb is due to its being related to the verb foddering, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 357.

156

c. The verse of ‘Ubayd ibn al-H.usayn al-Numayrī, better known as al-Rā‘ī (“the Shepherd”), as follows:

When the pretty girls appeared one day and pencilled (their) eyebrows and eyes

with the ellipsis of the verb kah.alna (smeared with kohl). The verse means “and they pencilled their eyebrows and smeared their eyes with kohl.”422 3. The Ellipsis of the Main Clause of a Conditional or an Incomplete Sentence The main clause of a conditional sentence is omitted for brevity, as the hearer knows it. Ibn Qutaybah gives us four examples of Qur’ānic verses and three from poetry. Two Qur’ānic verses and one verse of poetry will be discussed as follows: a.

“If there were a Qur’ān with which mountains were moved, or the earth were cloven asunder, or the dead were made to speak, (this would be the one!)....” (Q. 13:31, Ali)). We notice the omitted main clause given by Ali is “this would be the one”. Ibn Qutaybah expresses a similar view when he states that the omitted words are (“it would have been this 423 Qur’ān”), which is also the view of al-Zubayr ibn al-‘Awwām, Mujāhid, Qatādah and al-D.ah.h.āk.424 422. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 213; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 123; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 205. Lane translates the above poem as follows: "When the females content with their husbands (or with their beauty) shall go forth (or went forth) one day, and shall lengthen (or lengthened) with black collyrium the eyebrows and the eyes." See Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 1215 (s.v. ). Al-Numayrī was a camel-herdsman (

); see Brockelmann, Ta’rīkh, vol. 1, p, 217; and Nicholson,

A Literary History, p. 245.

423. Ibn Qutaybah. Ta’wīl, p. 214; this view was also mentioned by later commentators, such as al-Qayrawānī, Ibn Kathīr and al-Zamakhsharī; see I‘rāb alQur’ān, pt. 1, p. 21; Tafsīr, vol. 2, pp. 533-4; and al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 691.

424. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, pp. 318-9. See also al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb alQur’ān, pt. 1, p. 21

157

According to Abū ‘Ubaydah, there are many omitted main clauses in this verse, so that it means that if there were a Qur’ān with which mountains were moved, they would have moved , or the earth were cloven asunder, it would have been cloven asunder were made to speak, they would have been resurrected

, or the dead .425

According to some grammarians the omitted main clause is in the previous verse, namely, (“for [in their ignorance] they deny the Most Gracious...” Q. 13:30, Asad). Therefore, the verse means that they would still disbelieve Allah even if He sends a Qur’ān with which the events mentioned above occured. However, this view is not preferred by al-Farrā’ who states that it is possible that the omitted clause is (“they would have disbelieved”).426 Similarly, according to alZajjāj, the omitted clause is

(“they would not believe”), as the

omitted clause is revealed in another verse which reads: And even if We were to send down angels unto them, and if the dead were to speak unto them, and [even if] We were to assemble before them, face to face, all the things [that can prove the truth], they would still not believe unless God so willed....” (Q. 6:111, Asad). This is the interpretation adopted by Asad when he rendered the omitted clause as “they ... would still refuse to believe in it.”427 b.

“Is, perchance, he who worships [God] throughout the night, prostrating himself or standing [in prayer], ever-mindful of the life to come, and hoping for his Sustainer’s grace, [equal to one who denies the truth]? Say: ‘Can they who know and they who do not know be deemed equal?’” (Q. 39:9, Asad). The main clause omitted in the above verse, according to Asad, is “equal to one who denies the truth”. Ibn Qutaybah does not mention it precisely, but says that it is the opposite of 425. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 331.

426. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 319; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol.

2, pp. 7 ad 63.

427. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 319; Asad, The Message, p. 465; and alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 293.

158

what is mentioned in the verse. This is self-evident, as the verse continues with the two opposite things, namely, those who know and those who do not know.428 Al-Zajjāj states that since those who know are above those who do not know, so those who obey are above those who disobey.429 c. An unidentified poet says the following line:

I [come to] see you, for I do not know whether it is anxiety which is worrying me, and a worried man in olden times was humble and lean.

In this verse, the poet does not mention the main clause, namely, other than anxiety.430 4. The Ellipsis of One or Two Words four verses from poetry as examples. Three Qur’ānic verses and one verse from poetry will be treated as follows Ibn Qutaybah in this category of ellipsis mentions ten Qur’ānic verses and: a.

“And when Abraham and Ishmael were raising the foundations of the Temple, (they prayed): ‘O our Sustainer! Accept Thou this: for, verily, Thou alone art all-hearing, all-knowing!’” (Q. 2:127, Asad). According to al-Farrā’, Ibn Qutaybah and al-Qayrawānī, the omitted words are (“both saying”), namely, both Abraham and Ishmael said the prayer, as translated by Asad above.431 In addition, the words (“and both are saying”) are found in the variant readings of Ubayy and ‘Abd Allāh ibn 428. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 215; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

491.

429. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.15, p.240. For further details, see alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, pp. 1349-1350.

430. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 215.

431. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 216; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 78; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, p. 14. It was said that Ishmael was still young at the time, and Abraham alone built the Ka‘bah. This is an isolated view, and therefore, according to al-T.abarsī, is unacceptable. Both Abraham and Ishmael built the Ka‘bah, although Ishmael merely handed stones to Abraham, according to Ibn ‘Abbās. Moreover, both prayed that their duty be accepted by Allah, indicating that both built it. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 207; see also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 104.

159

Mas‘ūd.432 b.

“for thy Sustainer has ordained that you shall worship none but Him. And do good unto [thy] parents.” (Q. 17:23, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah and al-Farrā’, the omitted word is respectively was.s.á and aws.á, both meaning “He enjoined”.433 The verb was.s.á for parents is explicitly used in other verses; for example, “Now [among the best of the deeds which] We have enjoined upon man is goodness towards his parents....” (Q. 46:15, Asad), and “And [God says:] We have enjoined upon man goodness towards his parents: ...”

(Q.31:14, Asad). Moreover, instead of it is written in Ibn Mas‘ūd’s codex and Ibn ‘Abbās’s variant reading.434

c.

So, when the prediction of the

second [period of your iniquity] came true, [We raised new enemies against you, and allowed them] to disgrace you utterly, ...” (Q. 17:7, Asad). We notice here the ellipsis of the words ba‘athnāhum (“We sent them”) as the word ba‘athnā (“We sent”) has been mentioned in the previous verse which reads: Hence, when he prediction of the first of those two [periods of inquity] came true, We sent [ba‘athnā] against you some of Our bondmen...” (Q. 17:5).435 d. The poet al-Namir ibn Tawlab said in his poem: “For verily, death will meet the person who 432. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 126; al-Farrā’ mentions the variant reading of ‘Abd Allāh only, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 78 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 1, p. 207.

433. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 217 and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

120. Al-T.abarsī mentions the ellipsis of both terms wa qad.á and wa aws.á, in the above verse, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, pp. 408-409.

434. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 237.

435. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 218; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 116; al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, p. 19; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 223; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 759.

160

fears it wherever [he is or he goes].”

In this verse the ellipsis of the word kāna or dhahaba occurs after aynamā.436 5. The Ellipsis of the Main Clause of an Oath Ibn Qutaybah mentions only two examples of the ellipsis of the main clause of an oath from the Qur’ānic verses and does not give an example from poetry, as follows: a.

“By those angels who drag forth souls with violence, and by those who with joyous release release them; by those who swim swimmingly along; by those who are foremost with foremost speed; by those who conduct the affairs of the universe!” (Q. 79:1- , Rodwell).

We notice, as said by Ibn Qutaybah, the ellipsis of the main clause (“you will be surely raised”) at the end of these verses. Al-Qurt.ubī adds with (“and you will be surely accounted for [your actions]”). This main clause is easily understood by the listener as stated by al-Farrā’, and is indicated in the succeeding verse “even though we may have become [a heap of] crumbling bones?”

(Q. 79:11, Asad) with the ellipsis of

(“shall we be raised?”).437

b.

“Qāf. By the Glorious Qur’ān (thou art God's Apostle). But they wonder that there has come to them a warner from among themselves. So the unbelievers say: ‘This is a wonderful thing!

What! When we die and become dust, (shall we live again?) That is a (sort of) return far (from our understanding).’” (Q. 50:1-3, Ali).

436. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 217; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 235; and idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p. 538. Al-T.abarī and al-Qurt.ubī mention dhahaba only, see Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 154l; and al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 262.

437. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 224; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, pp. 194-195; and al-Zamakshsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1574. Al-T.abarsī mentions the ellipsis of either of the two main clauses, namely, ("they will verily be raised") or ("verily, there is an example in them"), see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 429.

161

Ibn Qutaybah interprets here the main clause of the oath as (“shall we be resurrected?”).438 Al-Farrā’ mentions his interpretation and the ellipsis of the main clause of the oath in this verse as follows: “Qaf. By the glorious Qur’ān, you will be surely raised after death ... Shall we be raised when we are dead and have become dust?”439 6. The Ellipsis of the Word Lā Ibn Qutaybah mentions four examples of the ellipsis of ‫ ال‬from the Qur’ān and two from poetry. Two examples from the Qur’ān and one from poetry will be treated as follows: a.

“Verily, it is God [alone] who upholds the celestial bodies and the earth, lest they deviate [from their orbit]...” (Q. 35:41, Asad). We notice here the ellipsis of lā, so that the verse means (“so that they do not deviate”).440 However, according to al-Zajjāj, there is no need for the ellipsis of lā here, as the meaning of upholding in the verse is preventing, so that the verse means “Allah prevents... from deviating.”441

b. “ and neither speak loudly to him, as you would speak loudly to one another, lest all your [good] deeds come to nought without your perceiving it.” (Q. 49:2, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah the verse means (“[so] that your good deeds will not come to nought”).442 This is the view of the grammarians of the Kūfan school.

438. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 223-224; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 4.

439. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 75. Al-T.abarsī mentions a similar view to that of al-Farrā’, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 140-141.

440. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 225. Beside the ellipsis of lā, both al-Qurt.ubī and al-T.abarsī also mention the ellipsis of

(lit, "disliking"), so that the verse means

("disliking them to deviate"), see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 356 and Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 412; see also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1181.

441. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 356. Al-Zamakhsharī also mentions this interpretation with the ellipsis of min, so that the verse means ; see alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1181.

442. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 225 and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p.

162

The grammarians of the Bas.ran school, however, say that the verse means (“because it will bring your good deeds to 443 nought.”). c. The poet Imr’ al-Qays says: “So, I said with oath: by Allah I will remain sitting, even if they beat my head and limbs in front of you.”

The expression lā abrah.u (abrah.u with the ellipsis lā) means “I shall continue”.444 7. The Use of the Pronoun for Something, Which Has Not Been Mentioned Before Ibn Qutaybah mentions eight examples from the Qur’ān and six from poetry for this type of ellipsis. Three Qur’ānic verses and two verses of poetry will be dealt with as follows: a.

“Now if God were to take men [at once] to task for whatever [wrong] they commit [on earth], He would not leave a single living creature upon its surface....” (Q. 35:45, Asad). We notice that the pronoun hā refers to the earth,

70.

443. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 306. As in the previous verse (Q. 35:41), al-T.abarsī also mentions the occurrence of the ellipsis of or َ (namely, ّ ) in this verse, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 130. Al-Zamakhsharī gives two interpretations of the verse , as follows: (a) ("because it brings your good deeds to nought"), and (b)

"for bringing your

good deeds to nought, namely, for fear of bringing them to nought"). He cites the variant reading of Ibn Mas‘ūd ("so that your good deeds come to nought"), see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1385. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the occurrence of the ellipsis of ‫ ال‬in in Q. 4:176 meaning is the language of the Quraysh, see Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 43.

444. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, pp. 249-250 and alT.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 28.

163

although the earth has not been mentioned before in this verse.445 b. “thereby raising clouds of dust.” (Q. 100:4, Asad).

The pronoun “it” in bihi [lit. by it, with it, or in it] in this verse, according to Ibn Qutaybah, refers to the valley )‫(بِاْلوَادِي‬.446 Al-Qurt.ubī and Ibn Kathīr simply said that it is referring to the place where the morning raid mentioned in the previous verse (Q. 100:3) occurred.447 Al-T.abarsī mentions both views,448 whereas al-Zamakhsharī mentions two more interpretations of ‫ به‬in the verse, namely that the pronoun is referring to the act or the time of raiding.449 c.

“Then which of the favours of your Lord will ye deny?” (Q. 55:13, Ali). The pronoun of the dual refers to both man and demon (jinn). Man has been mentioned earlier in the previous verse, but jinn has not been mentioned yet; it is mentioned later in verse 15.450 Man and jinn are later referred to as (“the two dependents”, lit., “the two burdens”, because they burden the earth).451

445. Ibn Qutaybah Ta’wīl, p. 226; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 361, and vol.

15, p. 195; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 156; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, pp. 412-413; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1182. In fact, the earth has been mentioned earlier in the previous verse (Q. 35:44). The above verse was misquoted by Ibn Qutaybah when he used rather than . However, a similar verse using the term follows:

and

rather than

and

is as

"Now, if God were to

take men [immediately] to task for all the evil that they do [on earth], He would not leave a single living creature upon its face." (Q. 16:61, Asad).

446. Ibn Qutaybah Ta’wīl, p. 226.

447. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 158; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 579.

448. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 529.

449. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1627.

450. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 228; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 159.

Asad translates ālā’ as "powers" since the repeated verse "bears not only on the bounties which God bestows on His creation but, more generally, on all manifestations of His creativeness and might...", and refers the dual ("of you both") to "the two categories of human beings, men and women, ..." rather than man and jinn. For further details, see The Message, pp. 824-825, n. 4.

451. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1436.

164

d. The poet T.arafah said: “I wish I could free you from it and become free [myself].” The pronoun (it), according to Ibn Qutaybah, refers to

(the waterless desert, the open country).452

e. The poet al-Muthaqqib al-‘Abdī said in his poem:

I do not know when I go to a country whether a good thing [or a bad thing] is intended [to me], which of the two will follow me: whether the good thing which I seek, or the bad thing which awaits [lit. seeks] me.

The pronoun ayyuhumā (which of the two) in the above poem refers to the good thing and the bad thing. The latter is mentioned later only, in the second verse, not in the first.453 8. The Ellipsis of the Prepositions This category of ellipsis is called by Ibn Qutaybah [ ] (the ellipsis of the prepositions). H.urūf al-s.ifāt is the Baghdādī technical term for the h.urūf al-jarr (prepositions), three of which are dealt with here

by Ibn Qutaybah. They are, as we shall see from the examples given by Ibn Qutaybah, li, ‘an, and min. Two examples from the Qur’ān and one from poetry are dealt with as follows: a.

“But when they have to measure or weigh whatever they owe to others, [they] give less than what is due!”

(Q. 83:3, Asad). The verse means . as translated by Asad above with the addition of the preposition “to” and “for”. 454 This is also the view of al-Akhfash and al-Farrā’. They say that like the verb wazana and kāla we can say or (“I 452. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 227.

453. Ibid., p. 228; idem, al-Shi‘r wa al-Shu‘arā’, vol. 1, p. 357; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 231 and vol. 2, pp. 7-8; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 22, p.

98.

454. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 228; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 289; see also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1588.

165

advised you”), and or (“I ordered you [to do] it”), with or without the preposition la and bi respectively. Al-Farrā’ was reported to have said that he heard a bedouin woman saying “When people left we came to the merchant so that he measured us one or two mudds [of grain]”, instead of saying (“he measured for us”). This is the language of the people of H.ijāz and the surrounding Qays tribe.455 b.

“For (every) engagement will be enquired into (on the Day of Reckoning).” (Q. 17:34, Ali), with the ellipsis of the preposition ‘an, so that the verse means . 456

c. The poet al-‘Ajjāj said: Under what Allah has chosen for him [among] the trees”, with the ellipsis of the preposition min, so that the verse means as translated above with the addition of “among”.457 9. Complex Ellipsis The complex ellipsis includes what Ibn Qutaybah calls the expression which becomes obscure and difficult to understand due to its brevity and ellipsis ( ). He mentions ten examples from the Qur’ān, and five from poetry. This type of ellipsis also includes an unspecified category of ellipsis from which he gives four examples from the Qur’ān, but no example from poetry. For the first type of complex ellipsis two examples from the Qur’ān and one from poetry will be discussed, and two examples from the Qur’ān for the second type as follows: a.

455. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, pp. 245-6; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 252. Other examples are the people of Hijāz say and , whereas others say and ; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 451.

456. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 230; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

27; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 414; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 42.

457. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 229; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

229; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 4, p. 265.

166

“Is, then, he to whom the evil of his own doings is [so] alluring that [in the end] he regards it as good [anything but a follower of Satan]? For, verily, God lets go astray him that wills [to go astray], just as He guides him that wills [to be guided].

Hence, [O believer,] do not waste thyself in sorrowing over them: verily, God has full knowledge of all that they do!” (Q. 35:8, Asad) Asad mentions the omitted words “anything but a follower of Satan” as we notice above. But according to Ibn Qutaybah the omitted words in the verse are , so that the above verse means: “Would, then, he to whom the evil of his own doings is [so] alluring that [in the end] he regards it as good, waste thyself in sorrowing over him?"458 Al-Kisā’ī has the same view and says that the word man is the subject (mubtada’) of an omitted khabar, namely, (“you would waste yourself in sorrowing over him”). He says further that this is an uncommon Arabic expression known only to a few people. This is also the view of al-Zajjāj.459 The clue of this missing clause is “do not waste thyself in sorrowing over them” mentioned in the second part of the verse. b.

“Say: ‘They are [lawful] in the life of this world unto all who have attained to faith - to be theirs alone on Resurrection Day....’” (Q. 7:32, Asad).

According to Ibn Qutaybah and al-Farrā’, there is an omitted or the believers and shared with non-believers in this world, but on Resurrection Day it is only for the believers.460 This is also the view of Ibn ‘Abbās, al-D.ah.h.āk, al-H.asan, Qatādah, al-Suddī, Ibn Jurayj and Ibn Zayd. word in this verse, namely, mushtarikah, meaning “shared (with non-believers)”. Therefore, the verse means that the adornment of Allah is fThe other view is that of Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr who says that the

458. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 219.

459. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, pp. 324-325. For other interpretations, see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1170; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 401.

460. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 222; al-Farrā’, and Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

377. Instead of , al-Zamakhsharī interprets the ellipsis of the clause as "is not only for them, because the idolaters are their partners in it (the world)", see alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 445.

167

verse means that the beauty which Allah has brought forth for His creatures in this world, will be on the Day of Resurrection exclusively for those who believed while they were in this world.461 c. The poet al-Shanfará said before he was executed:

So, do not bury me, verily, burying me is forbidden for you, but [leave me to the hyena to which it is said after hunting it]: ‘Hide yourself O Umm ‘Āmir’ [i.e. the hyena].

The poet wanted his corpse to be left to the hyena.462 d.

“Art thou not aware of those who, having been granted their share of the divine writ, now barter it away for error, and want you [too] to lose your way?” (Q. 4:44, Asad). The verse means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, “barter away guidance for error”. The words “with guidance ” is omitted, but mentioned in another verse, namely “[for] it is they who have taken error in exchange for guidance; ...” (Q.2:16, Asad).463 e.

“Thereupon God sent forth a raven which scratched the earth, to show him how he might conceal the nakedness of his brother’s body....” (Q. 5:31, Asad). Ibn

461. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, pp. 199-200. See also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 2, p. 413.

462. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 221; idem, al-Shi‘r wa ’l-Shu‘arā', vol. 1, p. 26; Ibn ‘Abd Rabbih, al-‘Iqd al-Farīd, vol. 1, p. 101; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān. vol. 1, p. 74. According to Abū al-Faraj al-As.bahānī and al-Mufad.d.al, instead of khāmirī it is abshirī in the poem; see al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 21, p. 136; and C.J. Lyall, ed., The Mufad.d.alīyāt: An Anthology of Ancient Arabian Odes; compiled by alMufad.d.al son of Muh.ammad [al-D.abbī] according to recension and with the commentary of Abū Muh.ammad al-Qāsim Muh.ammad al-Anbārī, 1st ed. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1921), p. 197. According to al-Jāh.iz. the poem belongs to Ta’abbat.a Sharran, whereas according to al-Murtadá, it might belong to Ta’abbat.a Sharran or alShanfará; see al-Jāh.iz., al-H.ayawān, vol. 6, p. 450 and al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 2, p. 72.

463. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 230; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 242; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 519.

168

Qutaybah mentions the full meaning of the verse as follows: “Then Allah sent a raven scratching on the ground to hide a dead raven to show him how to hide his brother’s naked body.”464 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, Ibn Mas‘ūd and Mujāhid, Allah sent two ravens fighting each other until one of them was killed and buried by the other. Another commentary states that the raven scratched on the ground to hide his food for further use, as it is the habit of the ravens to do so.465 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah divided ellipsis and brevity into categories and gave examples from the Qur’ān and classical poetry.

Although, being a man of letters, he gave many examples from poetry, his treatment of this topic lacks detail. More elaborate treatment is given by commentators of later generations, like al-T.abarī and al-Qurt.ubī.

D. Repetition (Takrār) and Pleonasm (Ziyādah) 1. Repetition Like ellipsis, repetition is also one of the characteristics of the Arabic language. It is used to emphasise something. In the Qur’ān it is used generally for emphasising and elaborating meaning. Ibn Qutaybah mentions two categories of repetition: repetition of words and repetition of meaning.

They will be dealt with as follows: a. Repetition of Words Ibn Qutaybah cites seven examples from the Qur’ān in which repetition of words occurs. Two of them will be discussed hereunder: (1) . Say: “O you who deny the truth! I do not worship that which you worship, and neither do you worship that which I worship. And I will not worship that which you have [ever] worshipped, and neither will you [ever] worship that which I worship. Unto you, your moral law, and unto me, mine!” (Q. 109:16, Asad).

Ibn Qutaybah’s commentary on these verses is that the disbelievers seemed to have said to the Prophet: “Surrender to some of our idols so that we shall believe in your God.” So, Allah revealed to 464. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 231.

465. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 141.

169

him: “I do not worship that which you worship, and neither do you worship that which I worship.” It means that they would not believe until he did what they had suggested. Time elapsed and they came again to the Prophet, saying: “If you worship our idols for a day, a month, or a year, we shall worship your God for a day, a month, or a year.” For this, Allah revealed: “And I will not worship that which you have [ever] worshipped, and neither will you [ever] worship that which I worship,” denouncing their readiness to believe in Allah at one time and associate Him with others at the other.466 The repetition in these verses serves many purposes, among which are: (a) for emphasis; this is the view of al-Farrā.467 (b) for rendering in line with the disbelievers’ statement “You worship our idols and we will worship your God, then you worship our idols and we will worship your God, so that we shall go on like this year after year.” The repetition in the verses in question is used in accordance with the disbelievers’ repetition; (c) for indicating the difference of time, namely, “I do not worship now what you worship, and you do not worship now what I worship. And in the future I shall not worship what you worship, and in the future you will not worship what I worship.” This is the view of alAkhfash and al-Mubarrad; (d) for indicating the difference of idols; in pre-Islamic Arabia when people became bored with worshipping the same idols they replaced them with new ones. Therefore, the verses mean: “I do not worship the idols you worship today, and you do not worship what I worship, for you worship the idols you have now; and I shall not worship the idols you worshipped yesterday which you have abandoned, and you will not worship what I worship, for I worship my 466. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 238; and al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 1, pp. 83-84 in which al-Murtad.á is quoting Ibn Qutaybah. The asbāb al-nuzūl of these verses as reported by Ibn Ish.āq from Ibn ‘Abbās is that al-Walīd ibn al-Mughīrah, al-‘Ās. ibn Wā'il, al-Aswad ibn ‘Abd al-Mut.t.alib and Umayyah ibn Khalaf met the Prophet and said to him: "O Muhammmad, let us worship what you worship, and you worship what we worship, so that we share all together in all of our matters. If what you are bringing is better than what we have, then we will have our share from it by joining you. But if what we have is better than what you have, then you will have your share by joining us." Then Allah revealed: "Say: O disbelievers!...". See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p.

224.

467. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 552; and al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 1, p. 84.

170

God”; and (e) for indicating the existence of distinction between the two ways of worship; the particle in and which follows it is , so that they respectively mean “your way of worship” ( “our way of worship” (

) and

).468

(2) “Then which of the favours of your Lord will ye deny?” (Q. 55:13, Ali).

The above verse is repeated 31 times in Sūrat al-Rah.mān (chapter 55). The purposes of this repetition according to Ibn Qutaybah is to remind people of Allah’s favours to them and to call their attention to His power and mercy to His creatures. The verse is repeated after mentioning the favours of Allah so that they would understand and acknowledge them.469 It is, Ibn Qutaybah states further, like telling a man to whom you have given your favours and assistance continuously and who still denies your favours: “Didn’t I provide you accommodation when you were outcast? Do you deny this? Did I not pick you up when your leg was injured? Didn’t I make you perform the pilgrimage (a lam ah.ijj bika) when you had not performed it? Do you deny this?.”470 468. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, pp. 225-9; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 552; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1638; alMurtad.á , Amālī, vol. 1, p. 85; and Mah.mūd ibn H.amzah ibn Nas.r al-Kirmānī, Asrār al-Takrār fī ’l-Qur’ān, ed. ‘Abd al-Qādir ‘At.ā (Cairo: Dār al-I‘tis.ām, 1398/1978), pp.

226-227.

469. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 239. If the repetition of the above verse serves as reminder to people about Allah's favours, why does it also occur after mentioning something other than favours, even punishment or threat? To this, al-Murtad.á gives us his answer as follows: Although the punishment is itself not a favour, but mentioning, describing or giving a warning of it is a great favour. This is because punishment as well as reward is intended only for those who deserve it. See al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 1, p. 88 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 206. Asad, however, renders the translation of ālā’ here as "powers" adopting the interpretation of some of the earliest commentators, such as Ibn Zayd; see p. 208, n. 170 above and Asad, The Message, pp.

824-825, n. 4.

470. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 240. Al-Qurt.ubī is quoting the interpretation of Ibn Qutaybah, whom he called al-Qutabī, on the above verse, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp.

159-60. For other examples of repetition, see Q. 102:3-4; 94:5-6; 75:34-35; 82:17-18; 54:15, 17, 22, 32, 40 and 51. Partial repetition of words is also treated by Ibn

171

b. Repetition of Meaning According to Ibn Qutaybah the repetition of a meaning or an idea by using different wording is intended to elaborate the meaning and to extend the expression, such as , meaning, “I order you to fulfil (your promise) and I forbid you from betraying (it).” The order to fulfil one’s promise is itself the prohibition from betraying it. He mentions three examples from the Qur’ān and one from poetry. Two examples will be discussed as follows: (1) “In both of them will be [all kinds of] fruit, and date-palms and pomegranates.” (Q. 55:68, Asad).

Although the date-palms and the pomegranates are fruit, Ibn Qutaybah states, they are specially mentioned to indicate their excellence.471 (2) “Or do they, perchance, think that We do not hear their hidden thoughts and their secret confabulations? Yea, indeed, [We do,] and Our heavenly forces are with them, recording [all].” (Q. 43:80, Asad).

The meaning of the word sirr (a secret) is repeated in this verse with the word najwá (a confidential talk), as najwá is itself sirr, a secret.

It is also possible, Ibn Qutaybah asserts, that sirr means a personal secret, while najwá means what is discussed secretly by people and kept Qutaybah, namely, when a letter is substituted by another in the repeated word, because the speaker does not like to repeat the same word, such as and , and

, and

and

. However, he does not mention any example

from the Qur’ān for this partial repetition, and hence, we do not deal with it in this study.

471. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 240; Abū Mans.ūr ‘Abd al-Mālik al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah wa Asrār al-‘Arabīyah (Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Adabīyah, 1318 A.H.), p. 216; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 211; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb alQur’ān, pt. 3, pp. 818-819. It is said that the date-palm and the pomegranate were singled out in this verse because at that time they were people's main food and were grown abundantly from Madinah to Makkah and Yaman. Another view is that both are not only fruit; the date-palms are food and fruit, whereas the pomegranates are fruit and medicine; this is the view of Abū H.anīfah. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p.

186. According to al-Farrā’, the date-palm and the pomegranate were singled out in this verse to attract the inhabitants of Paradise ( ), see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 119. For further details, see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1438.

172

for themselves.472 2. Pleonasm Pleonasm is the redundancy of words, namely, the use of more words than are needed to express the meaning; for example, “divide something into four quarters” and “each of the two twins”. Here the words “four” and “two” are redundant, since things divided into quarters will become four quarters, and the twins are two children.

Ibn Qutaybah gives us two categories of pleonasm in his Ta’wīl: general and specified. The general pleonasm is the addition of unspecified words in the statement, while the specific one is the addition of a certain word in it. There are fifteen examples of pleonasm mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah. In this study two Qur’ānic verses for each category (whenever Ibn Qutaybah mentions more than one) and one verse of poetry (whenever available) will be discussed as follows: a. General Pleonasm Ibn Qutaybah cites seven examples of general pleonasm in the Qur’ān, two of which are as follows: (1) “uttering with their mouths something which was not in their hearts, ....” (Q. 3:167, Asad). Ibn Qutaybah asserts that the expression “with their mouths” is to emphasise that they actually said what is not in their hearts, not just in writing or gesture.473 The purpose of this expression is to emphasise 472. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 240-241 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

5, p. 57. It was reported by Muh.ammad ibn Ka‘b al-Qurazī that three people were talking together between the Ka‘bah and its curtains. Two of them were Qurayshīs, and the other was a Thaqafī, or two Thaqafīs and one Qurayshī. One of them asked: "Do you think that Allah hears our conversation?" The other answered: "If you speak loudly He will hear it, but if you speak secretly He will not." But another one said: "If He hears you when you speak loudly He will also hear you when you speak secretly."

Then the above verse was revealed. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 25, p. 60; and alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 119. Al-Zamakhsharī simply makes the distinction between the two terms by saying that is something a person says to himself or to others in privacy ( , lit. "in a vacant place"), and is something people talk among themselves; see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1335.

473. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 241; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p.

173

hypocrisy by showing the contrast between what is said and what is truly believed by means of mentioning its respective place.

(2) “whereas he who cannot afford it shall fast for three days during the pilgrimage and for seven days after your return: that is, ten full [days]....” (Q. 2:196, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah, the expression “ten full” is for emphasis.474 However, according to al-Zajjāj and Abū al-Qāsim alBalkhī, it is to remove obscurity, since the particle wa (and) could also mean aw (or); in the above expression it becomes clear that it does not mean a fast of either three days on the pilgrimage or seven days after returning home, but both, ten days in all. The example in which means

is in the following verse:

“... then marry from among [other] women such as are lawful to you - [even] two, three, or four:...” (Q. 4:3, Asad).475 (3) The poet al-Shammākh said: When a banner was hoisted for a glorious cause ‘Arābah took it vigorously.

The words bi’l-yamīn literally mean “with the right hand”, and since the power is in the right hand, the words here mean “vigorously and enthusiastically”.476 b. Specific Pleonasm The fifteen additional words given by Ibn Qutaybah are as follows: (1) Additional . This lā (no, not) should be dropped in meaning, although added in the text due to the occurrence of rejection (ibā’) or negation (jah.d) in the statement. For example 57.

474. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 243; see also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, pp. 135-136.

475. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 291.

476. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 242. See also Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 6, p. 158; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 251, vol. 14, p. 147, vol. 15, p. 75, and vol. 18, p.

275.

174

“[And God] said: ‘What has kept thee from prostrating thyself when I commanded thee?’...” (Q. 7:12, Asad).

The expression means so that the verse means “What prevented you from prostrating thyself...?” where lā is not translated. However, as Iblis (Satan) did not prostrate himself the word lā is added in the verse.477 According to al-Farrā’, the verse means “What prevented you from prostrating,” and the word lā in allā is s.ilah. It is also possible that the second negation is used to emphasise the first, such as the following poem:

Verily, we have not seen like them, a group of black head two-humped camels and elephants.

Both mā and in in this verse mean “not”, but the second is meant for emphasis.478 Al-Qurt.ubī mentions three main views about lā in the above verse: (1) It is additional, according to Abū ‘Ubaydah479 and some grammarians of both of the Bas.ran and the Kūfan schools; (2) It is not additional, as the word mana‘a has the meaning of saying or appealing, so that the verse means “who appealed to you for not falling prostrate” or “who told you not to fall prostrate”; this is the view of al-Farrā’.480 Moreover, in al-Farrā’’s view, the significance of lā here is that it indicates the existence of rejection in the previous verse, namely, Iblis’s refusal to fall prostrate. (3) There is an ellipsis in the verse; it means “What hindered you from obeying and compelled you not to prostrate?”481 Al-Tabari’s view is similar to this when he said that the verse means “What hindered you from prostrating so that it compelled

477. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 244; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, p.

132.

478. For further details, see al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 374.

479. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 211.

480. See Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 216.

481. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 170.

175

you not to prostrate?”482 Al-Zamakhsharī’s interpretation is “What hindered you from carrying out the prostration and (from) forcing yourself to (do) it?”483 According to al-Sakkākī (d. 626/1229) this verse is a metaphor (majāz); the particle lā is neither additional nor s.ilah, but rather an indication (qarīnah) of the existence of metaphor. Therefore, the meaning of this verse according to him is “What called you up for not prostrating?”484 The example from poetry is Abū al-Najm’s poem as follows:

I do not blame the [women with] white [hair] for ridiculing when they saw the ugly [person with] white hair [mixed with baldness].

The word is translated as (or according to Abū ‘Ubaydah) with the omission of the additional lā. The word lā at the end of the verse is additional.485 An additional lā also occurs at the beginning of verses starting with oaths, the purpose of which, in Ibn qutaybah’s view, is to disprove the disbelievers. For example: “Nay! I call to witness the Day of Resurrection! But nay! I call to witness the accusing voice of man’s own conscience!” (Q. 75:1-2, Asad) and “Nay, I call to witness this land.”

(Q. 90:1, Asad). Therefore, such verses give a sort of expression similar to the following one: “Nay, by Allah, it is not as you say.”

Although it is possible to drop the “nay”, its presence in the statement makes it stronger. 486 The position of the additional lā preceding an oath like the verse lā uqsimu mentioned above is a widely controversial issue among Arabic grammarians. According to Ibn Jinnī, it is lām al-ibtidā’ (lām used for starting a sentence), so that lā uqsimu is originally la’anā uqsimu, then 482. Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 97.

483. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 439.

484. See al-Sakkākī, Miftāh. al-‘Ulūm, p. 367.

485. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 245-246; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 26 and 211.

486. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 246-247.

176

the personal pronoun anā is dropped, and finally it becomes la’uqsimu.487 Moreover, it is written (la without alif) in the ‘Uthmānic recension.488 According to al-Kisā’ī lā is additional, whereas according to al-Farrā’ it is not additional. Rather, it is necessary to indicate a reply to the disbelievers’ statements, belief, and rejection of faith, such as Paradise, Hell, and the Resurrection, as if it states that what they think is not right. This view is adopted by Ibn Qutaybah as mentioned above.489 (2) Additional . The word alā which means “verily,” “indeed,” is an intensifying interjection. It is introduced at the beginning of the sentence to alert the listener to what is about to be said. It should not be confused with alā consisting of two particles, a (intorregative) and lā (negative). The examples of the additional alā given by Ibn Qutaybah are as follows: (a) meaning “Oh, verily, [even] when they cover themselves with their garments [in order not to see or hear],...”

(Q. 11:5, Asad).490 (b) meaning “Oh, verily, on the Day when it befalls them there will be nothing to avert it from them;...” (Q. 11:8, Asad).491 © The poem of T.arafah: Verily, O my rebuker for my attending the battle (that I might be killed) and for enjoying my wealth (that I might become poor), are you my immortaliser?

487. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 394.

488. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1554. was also the reading of al-H.asan, al-A‘mash and Ibn Kathīr; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 59.

489. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 207; Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp.

215-216; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, pp. 91-2. See also al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb alQur’ān, pt. 1, p. 133; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 393-395; and alZamakshsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1554.

490. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 247; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p.

143.

491. Idem.

177

What the poet means is that since his rebuker cannot make him immortal, he is free to go to war and to spend his wealth. 492 (3) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah asserts that this additional bi, meaning “by”, “in”, should not be interpreted. Some examples of this additional bi are as follows: (a) “Read in the name of thy Sustainer, who has created.” (Q. 96:1, Asad), which means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-T.abarsī, “Read the name of thy Sustainer who has created."493 Al-Qurtubi mentions three views on this verse: (1) as mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah above; (2) “Read (the Qur’ān) by opening with the name of your Lord (Sustainer);” here the expression is in the accusative case as an adverb ( of your Sustainer,” (

), and (3) “Read (the Qur’ān) in the name ).494

(b) ) “A fountain from which the servants of Allah will refresh themselves and make it gush forth abundantly.” (Q. 76:6, Dawood), which means, according to Ibn Qutaybah and al-Farrā’, “a fountain which the servants of Allah will drink (from) ...”495 492. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 247-248 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

1, p. 149. For the location of the poem, see W. Ahlwardt (ed.), Kitāb al-‘Iqd alThamīn fī Dawāwīn al-Shu‘arā’ al-Jāhilīyīn (al-Nābighah, ‘Antarah, T.arafah, Zuhayr, ‘Alqamah, Imru’ al-Qays) (Greifswald, 1870. Reprint of the edition 1870; Osnabrück, Biblio Verlag, 1972), p. 57.

493. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 248; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 547; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 304; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 513; and alQayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 672.

494. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 119.

495. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wil, p. 248; idem, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 547-548; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 215; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 126; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 407. For further examples from the Qur’ān mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, see Ta’wīl, pp. 248 and 250, (Q. 23:20, 19:25, 68:6, 60:1, and 22:25). It is also possible that instead of omitting bi in the interpretation of the above verse, it is put in place of min, so that the verse means as translated by Dawood above. For further details, see below p. 298.

178

(4) Additional

. Ibn Qutaybah mentions one example only of the

additional min (“of”, “from”), as follows: meaning “...no sustenance do I ever demand of them...”

(Q. 51:57).496 (5) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah mentions example only where the additional li (“for”) occurs in the Qur’ān, as follows: meaning “... and in their inscription there was guidance and mercy for those who fear their Lord.” (Q. 7:154, Pickthall).497 Al-Qurt.ubī mentions three views on this li, as follows: (1) it is additional as mentioned above, which is the view of the grammarians of Kūfah; (2) it means “for the sake of” ( ), so that the verse means “for those who fear for the sake of their Lord”, and this is the view of al-Akhfash; (3) it is added to the noun that precedes its verb which becomes weak and intransitive; it is like the verse “if you are able to interpret dreams!” (Q. 12:43, Asad).498 (6) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah mentions one example only from the Qur’ān in which the additional ka (as, same) occurs, as follows: meaning “There is nothing like unto Him.” (Q. 42: 11, Asad).499 According to Tha‘lab instead of the addition of ka in the above verse, it is the addition of mithl that occurs, the purpose of which

496. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 250. Although al-Qurt.ubī gives the same interpretation, he says that the position of the particle min in this verse is ; see alJāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 56.

497. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 250; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p.

674.

498. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 293. The last view is mentioned by al-Zamakhsharī, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 480.

499. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 250; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 24; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān., pt. 2, p. 673.

179

is for emphasis. Therefore, the verse means

.500

(7) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah mentions one example from poetry, and none from the Qur’ān where the additional ‘alá occurs, as the following verse of H.umayd ibn Thawr: Allah rejected [any claim or statement] except that the Sarh.at tree of Mālik is superior to all kinds of thorny trees.501

(8) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah gives us one example only where the additional ‘an (“from”, “against”) occurs, as the following Qur’ānic verse: meaning “Let those who disobey His orders beware,...” (Q. 24:63, Dawood).502 This is the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah503 and al-Akhfash. However, according to al-Khalīl and Sībawayh, the preposition ‘an in the verse is not additional, as the verse means “disobey after [giving] His order”, namely “after He has given the order”.504 500. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 8.

501. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 250-1; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 549; the translation of the verse is based on Ibn al-Sayyid's commentary. Sarh.ah is the name of a kind of thorny tree, but is used here as a metaphor for a woman. Poets had promised ‘Umar ibn al-Khat.t.āb not to celebrate a woman in their poetry, and the poet here uses the name of a tree as a metaphor for his beloved. Here, the preposition is additional, as the verb

is a transitive verb which does not require a preposition. It

is said ُ (the thing pleases me), not . See Ibn al-Sayyid, alIqtid.āb, p. 458, quoted by al-Sayyid Ah. mad S.aqr in Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 250, n. 6.

Lane gives us some details of the Sarh.ah tree. He says that it is "a certain kind of trees, of great size, or seldom eaten by the camels, &c. [sic], but used for their shade: they grow in Nejd, in plain, or soft and in rugged ground, but not in sand nor upon a mountain; and have a yellow fruit; or any tree without thorns". See Lane, Lexicon, pt.

4, p. 1344 (s.v. ).

502. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 251. According to al-Zamakhsharī, the pronoun hi in amrihi belongs to Allah, as translated by Pickthall above, or to the Prophet, see alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 964.

503. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 69.

504. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Ijmā‘, vol. 12, p. 323.

180

(9) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah gives two examples from the Qur’ān and one from poetry in which the additional inna (“verily”) which is called “the heavy inna ( )” occurs, as follows: (a)

“[But,] behold, as for those who attain to faith and do righteous deeds verily, We do not fail to requite any who persevere in doing good.”

(Q. 18:30). The second inna is additional.505 Al-Zamakhsharī mentions three interpretations of the above verse which indicate that, contrary to Ibn Qutaybah’s view, inna in this verse is not additional, as follows: (1) The verse is an which is in modern technical terms called (a parenthetical clause), so that the meaning of the verse is completed with the khabar (predicate) in the succeding verse, namely, “theirs shall be gardens of perpetual bliss ...” (Q. 18:31, Asad); (2) Instead of being a parenthetical clause, it is also a khabar, the first khabar, whereas the preceding verse is the second. The connection (s.ilah) between the subject “those who attain to faith” and the first predicate is the expression (“who persevere in doing good”) which is identical to “those who attain to faith”. Therefore, the verse means “As for those who attain to faith... We do not fail to requite them, for theirs shall be the gardens of perpetual bliss;” (3) The preceeding verse is not a khabar, but an explanation of the term ajr (reward).506

(b) “Say: ‘Behold, the death from which you are fleeing is bound to overtake you...’” (Q. 62:8, Asad). Here, the second inna is also additional.507 Al-Zamakhsharī mentions two other variant readings: (1) without , which is of Ibn Mas‘ūd; this is the khabar of the subject, the death (

), in

505. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 251.

506. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 799. Al-T.abarsī gives slightly different interpretations, also indicating that inna is not additional in this verse; see Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 3, pp. 466-7.

507. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 251.

181

(without ), which is of Zayd ibn ‘Alī. This is a

the verse; (2)

new sentence, because is the khabar, so that the verse means: “Say, the death is the thing from which you are fleeing.Verily, it is bound to overtake you.”508 (c). The poet Jarīr said: The caliph has been covered by Allah with a garment of power with which seal-rings [of authority] are enforced. 509

According to al-Farrā’ it is not correct to say, for example, ("Verily, Zayd, verily his brother is departing"); however, it is correct in the Qur’ānic verses, such as Q. 22:17, because it contains recompense. The verse runs as follows: “Verily, as for those who have attained to faith [in this divine writ], and those who follow the Jewish faith, and the Sabians, and the Christians, and the Magians, [on the other hand,] and those who are bent on ascribing divinity to aught but God, [on the other,] verily, God will decide between them on Resurrection Day...” (Q. 22:17, Asad).

On the contrary, Abū Ish.āq allows it and says that it is possible for every mubtada’ to be emphasised with inna; therefore, according to him, we can say, for example, (Verily, Zayd, he is departing), then we emphasise huwa (he) and say mentioned above.510

, as in the poem

(10) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah gives us two examples of the occurrence of the additional in (“not”) which is called by Arabic grammarians “light in” ( ), one from the Qur’ān and the other from poetry, as follows: 508. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1482; see also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 288; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, p. 24.

509. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 251; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 23; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 164. According to Muh.ammad Ibrāhīm Jum‘ah, instead of , it reads

; see Jum‘ah, Jarīr (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1965), p. 68.

510. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 23.

182

a.

“And yet, We had established them securely in a manner in which We have never established you, [O people of later times].” (Q. 46:26, Asad).” Ibn Qutaybah mentions two interpretations on the above verse: (1) by considering in as nonadditional, meaning “never” as translated by Asad above, and (2) by considering it as additional, and therefore, the verse means: “And yet, We had established them securely in a manner in which We have established you,...”511 The first view belongs to al-Mubarrad, alFarrā512 as well as Ibn ‘Abbās and Qatādah; 513 the second, to alQutabī, namely, Ibn Qutaybah, according to al-Qurt.ubī.514 Al-Qurt.ubī mentions the third view, namely, is conditional ( ) with a hidden

apodosis ( , namely, a clause answering to an if-clause in syntax), so that the above verse means: “And yet, We had established them securely in a manner that which if We established you [too], your injustice would increase and your obstinacy would be intensified.”515 b. Durayd ibn al-S.immah said: I have neither seen nor heard like [what I have seen and heard] today: coating with henna she-camels infected with skin disease! 516 511. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 251-2; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1360.

512. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 56.

513. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 61.

514. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 208; see also below, p. 290. It seems to me that Ibn Qutaybah was not sure whether in in the above verse is additional or not. In his work Ta’wīl, he mentioned the above verse as an example of the occurrence of the additional , then said ("and some of them said") mentioning the first interpretation (that ‫ إن‬is additional in the above verse); then, he said again , mentioning the second interpretation (that ‫ إن‬is original); see Ta’wīl, pp. 251-252.

However, in his work Tafsīr, Ibn Qutaybah commented on the verse with ‫ إن‬as an original meaning ("not"), then said ("and it is also said") mentioning the view that ‫ إن‬in this verse is additional; see Tafsīr, p. 408.

515. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 208.

516. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 251; idem, al-Shi‘r wa ’l-Shu‘arā’, vol. 1, p. 197; al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 9, p. 11 and vol. 13, p. 136; and al-Jāh.iz., al-Bayān wa ’l-

183

Here, the particle in is additional and therefore is not translated.

(11) Additional . Ibn Qutaybah mentions three examples of the occurrence of the additional idh (“when”, “then”, and “since”), two from the Qur’ān, and one from poetry, as follows: (a) “And lo! Thy Sustainer 517 said unto the angels...” (Q. 2:30, Asad). The word idh (when) which is translated by Asad as the interjection “lo”, should be omitted in meaning, and the translation should be “And thy Sustainer said unto the angels...”518 This view of Ibn Qutaybah which is adopted from that of Abū ‘Ubaydah519 is rejected by many Qur’ānic commentators. Al-Nah.h.ās, for example, says that this view of Abū ‘Ubaydah is wrong, as this particle is an (a noun in the Arabic grammar), a (an adverb denoting time), and therefore cannot be additional. Another commentator, al-Zajjāj, says that this is a wrong-doing ( , an offence) from Abū ‘Ubaydah; as Allah mentions the creation of men and other creatures, the verse means “He began creating you when (idh) He said...”520 The more acceptable explanation on this issue is probably that of al-T.abarī. In rejecting Abū ‘Ubaydah’s view without mentioning him by name, al-T.abarī states that the verse in question is connected with the previous one where Allah reminds people of what He has done for them by bestowing them His bounty and blessings, and yet, they disbelieve Him. Then He reminds them of what He did to their forefather Adam "when He said to the angels ...” as mentioned in the Tabyīn, 3 vols. in one binding (Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Tijārīyah, 1926-7), vol. 1, p. 86 517. This is one of two interpretations given by al-Zamakhsharī; the other interpretation is with the ellipsis of (remember) preceeding ْ‫ ;إذ‬see al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, p. 67.

518. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 252 and idem, Tafsīr, p. 45.

519. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 36.

520. This is al-Qurt.ubī's version of al-Zajjāj's interpretation, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 262. Al-T.abarsī's version is "The beginning of your creation was when He said..."; see Jāmi‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 73.

184

above verse.521 However, another view is that the particle idh is connected with the hidden word udhkur (remember), so that the verse means “And remember when thy Lord said ...,”522; this is the view of ‘Alī ibn ‘Īsá towards which al-T.abarsī leans.523 (b)

“And, lo, Luqman spoke thus unto his son, ...” (Q. 31:13, Asad). Here again, idh which is translated by Asad as the interjection “lo”, according to Ibn Qutaybah, is additional.524 Some Qur’ānic commentators such as al-Qurt.ubī say that the particle idh is not additional, as the verse implies the existence of the word udhkur meaning “remember”, so that the verse means “And remember when Luqman...” as translated by Pickthall. Instead of the word udhkur, al-Zajjāj connects the particle idh with the preceding verse, namely, “And verily We gave Luqman wisdom ...” (Q. 31:12), and continues with “when he said” ( ). Al-Nah.h.ās rejects this view on the grounds that the conjunction (and) preceding makes the connection suggested by al-Zajjāj unlikely to occur.525

(c) Ibn Mayyādah said about digging and making a well: “He was still saying: ‘take [the bucket] away, take [the bucket] way.’”526 (12) Additional . Two Qur’ānic verses are given by Ibn Qutaybah as examples of the occurrence of the additional mā (“what,” “which”) as follows: (a)

“[And God] would say: ‘After a little

521. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, pp. 153-154; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p.

72.

522. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, pp. 261-262; and alQayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, p. 12.

523. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 73.

524. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 252.

525. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, pp. 62-63.

526. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 252.

185

while they will surely be smitten with remorse!’” (Q. 23:40, Asad).

According to Ibn Qutaybah and Abū ‘Ubaydah, mā is additional in this verse.527 (b)

“... by whichever name you invoke Him, [He is always the One - for] His are all the attributes of perfection...” (Q. 17:110, Asad).528

(13) Additional . The additional wa (“and”) which is called by the grammarians (conjunctive wa) in the Qur’ān makes the expression seem incomplete. Ibn Qutaybah provides five examples of the additional conjunctive wa from the Qur’ān, and two from poetry, among which are following: (a)

“... till, when they reach it, and its gates will have been opened, and its keepers will say unto them: ‘Peace be upon you!...’” (Q. 39:73, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah, the last wa is additional, and therefore, the expression “its keepers will say unto them...” makes the sentence complete.529 According to Abū ‘Ubaydah the khabar of the verse is not mentioned, since the Arabs used to omit the khabar of sentences.

This implies that wa is not additional here.

The grammarians have different views concerning the wa in which does not exist in the previous verse dealing with the companions of Hell (Q. 39:71). Al-Qurt.ubī mentions four views as follows: (1) The wa is in conjunction with the elliptical sentence (“they became happy”) according to al-Mubarrad, and (“they entered it”) according to al-Zajjāj. (2) It is additional according to the grammarians of Kūfah, but this view is rejected by those of Bas.rah. (3) It is the (the “and” of eight)

527. Ibid.; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 58; and al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 124. According to al-Farrā’, mā in this verse is , see Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 133.

528. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 252. It is also said that ‫ ما‬in this verse is further details, see Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 446.

529. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 253.

. For

186

according to Abū Bakr ibn ‘Iyāsh; it is the tradition of the Quraysh tribe when they count from one and reach seven they put wa before eight; they say: “one ... five, six, seven, and eight” ( ). Many examples for this wa are found in the Qur’ān, such as Q. 69:7, 66:5, 9:112, and 18:22. (4) It indicates that the gates of Paradise will have been opened before its companions come to it as translated by Asad above. It is unlike the gates of hell which will be open only when its companions come to it.530 This last view is mentioned by al-Zamakhsharī with a shāhid from the Qur’ān, as follows: “gardens of perpetual bliss, with gates wide-open to them”. (Q. 38:50, Asad).531 (b)

“And [He is aware, too, that] they who are bent on denying the truth speak [thus, as it were,] to those who have attained to faith: ‘Follow our way [of life], and we shall indeed take your sins upon ourselves!...’” (Q. 29:12, Asad). According to Ibn Qutaybah the particle wa is additional, so that the above verse means “follow our way so that we shall indeed take your sins upon ourselves”.532 This view is adopted from that of al-Farrā’ and alZajjāj who say that the above verse means “If you follow our way we shall take your sins upon ourselves.”533

(c) Imru’ al-Qays said:

Until your tribesmen increased (in number) and you saw 530. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 285. According to a h.adīth reported by Bukhārī and Muslim on the authority of Ibn Sa‘d al-Sa‘īdī, Paradise has eight gates and will be opened before its companions come to them. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 511.

531. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 68.

532. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 253.

533. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 330. The expression "our way" in this verse, according to al-T.abarsī, means "our religion", see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

275.

187

your sons growing up, you turned the shield to us [i.e., announced hostility]; verily, the wicked one is the weak swindler.534

Here in

is additional. However, according to al-Nah.h.ās,

this particle cannot be additional, because it belongs to the .535 We see how al-Nah.h.ās insists on rejecting the idea of the existence of the additional َ‫ و‬in particular, and the additional particles in general, in the verses of the Qur’ān.

(14) Additional . The additional wajh (“face,” “countenance”) occurs in the Qur’ān before the name “Allah” or the pronoun referred to Him is mentioned. The expression (“His countenance”) and (“the countenance of Allah”) respectively means “Him” and “Allah”, such as in the following examples given by Ibn Qutaybah: (a)

“Everything is bound to perish save His [eternal] Self” (Q. 28:88, Asad), meaning “Him”, Allah.536 This is the interpretation of Mujāhid,537Abū ‘Ubaydah,538 and al-Farrā’.539

534. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 254; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 568 (s.v. and al-T.abarī, Jami‘, vol. 4, p. 85.

‫;)قمل‬

535. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 104.

536. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 254, and al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 3, p. 49.

537. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 322.

538. See Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 112. However, Abū ‘Ubaydah was said to have been asked by al-Thawrī the meaning of in the above verse, and said that it meant (His glory, dignity, honour). It is like the expression , meaning "Such-and-such has an honour among people". See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

13, p. 322. In this case, I lean to what he himself wrote in his work Majāz al-Qur’ān rather than what is reported to be his statement to al-Thawrī.

539. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 314. This is also the interpretation given by al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī; see Qāmūs, p. 483; Wujūh, p. 304; and Nuzhah, p. 618 and idem, Qurrah, p. 235. Although Ibn al-Jawzī mentions ‫ الّذَات‬as the meaning of , after giving examples from the Qur’ānic verses, including the above verse, he mentions see Nuzhah, p. 618.

. What he means is that

means "Allah" Himself;

188

Al-Zamakhsharī’s interpretation of (b)

is

(“His Essence”).540

means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, “We feed you, for the sake of Allah alone...” (Q. 76:9).541

(15) Additional . According to Ibn Qutaybah the term ism (“name”) can be additional. He quotes the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah who states that the expression (“by the name of Allah”) means (“by Allah”).542 This view is rejected by al-T.abarī.543 Al-Akhfash says that the significance of mentioning ism here is to make it different from the oath .544 Ibn Qutaybah mentions one verse and one poem as examples of the additional ism, as follows: “Hallowed be thy Sustainer’s

(a)

name, full of majesty and glory!” (Q. 55: 78, Asad), meaning “Hallowed be thy Sustainer!”545 ‘Āmir among the qurrā’ read instead of , making it the s.ifah of the name (ism) in the verse in question. The name mentioned in the opening of the sūrah of this verse is alRah.mān (the Most Gracious). The sūrah itself speaks about the creation. This is to indicate that Allah creates everything by His grace.546 (b) Labīd said:

540. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1069.

541. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 254. This is also the view of al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī; see Qāmūs, p. 483; Wujūh, p. 304; Nuzhah, p. 618 and Qurrah, p.

235 .

542. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 255; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 16.

543. Al-T.abarī, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 40.

544. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 99.

545. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 255.

546. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 193.

189

Until next year, then, peace be upon both of you; and 547 whoever mourns for one year will be excused.

Here the word ism is additional and is not translated.

E. Kināyah (Metonymy) and Ta‘rīd. (Allusion) (metonymy) and

(allusion) are parts of the art of expressing

oneself clearly and eloquently called

(lit., "the science of clarity of

speech or expression"). It is one of the three branches of the

(the

rhetorical science, the art of good style), the other two being (lit., "the science of notions") which deals with various kinds of sentences and their proper use, and which deals with "the beautification of literary style", namely, "the embellishment of speech and figurative use of words".

In modern terminology both kināyah and ta‘rīd. deal with something other than what is expressed by the speaker. However, the difference lies in that in the kināyah something is mentioned by using a different term, such as "he opened his mouth" meaning "he spoke". In the ta‘rīd. something is mentioned which indicates something else unmentioned; for example, an employer asked his employee who was late "what is the time?" when he meant "you are late".

1. Kināyah (Metonymy) Al-Sakkākī gives the definition of kināyah as follows: It is abandoning the use of a clear statement of something by stating something else attached to it, so that [the speaker] shifts from what is mentioned to what is not mentioned; it is like saying "So-and-so has a long suspensory cord to his sword", so that [the speaker] alludes to something else attached to it, namely, the tall stature.548

Since a long suspensory cord to a sword fits only the tall person, the person 547. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 255; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, pp. 98-99.

Al-As.bahānī states that the above line of verse was recited by either Labīd, Ish.āq, or Ibrāhīm to his two daughters while he was dying; the two daughters wore their mourning dress and attended the court of Banī Ja‘far ibn Kilāb for one year of mourning for their father's death; see al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 14, pp. 101-102.

548. See al-Sakkākī, Miftah. Al-‘Ulūm, p. 402.

190

who has it would be tall. However, if the above statement is meant in its real meaning, then it is h.aqīqah ("real") rather than kināyah.

Since both kināyah and majāz indicate allegorical meanings, what then is the difference between the two? To this question, al-Sakkākī gives the following answer: (a) The statement in the kināyah could be real rather than metaphorical, whereas in the majāz it can only be metaphorical. The expression "So-and-so has a long suspensory cord to his sword" could be real without meaning "he is tall", whereas the statement "we have taken care of the rain" or "a lion is in the bath-room" cannot be taken for real; here the rain and the lion are metaphors for the plants and the brave man respectively; (b) Kināyah is based on the shift from the dominant trait of something to the thing itself ( ); in the above example, instead of saying "So-and-so is tall" it is said that he has a long suspensory cord to his sword, a dominant trait for a tall person, as a person who has a long sword belt is usually tall. On the contrary, majāz is based on the shift from the dominant trait of something to something else which shares this trait ( ); in the above example, the lion is mentioned, but its dominant trait, the bravery in a person, is meant, namely a brave man.549 Although Ibn Qutaybah does not mention any definition of metonymy, he states that metonymy is divided into many categories without giving any specification. However, he mentions two categories of metonymy which he deals with in his Ta’wīl, namely, the (agnomen, allusive name) and the substitution

(So-and-so or Such a one) for an unidentified person.

a. Kunyah Kunyah belongs to the category of kināyah, because by using it the real name of a person is not revealed. Kunyah is the name consisting of Abū (father of) or Umm (mother of) followed by a name - usually of a son or a daughter - or a word - describing some prominent characteristic of the bearer. This latter type of kunyah had been used earlier than the former.

A man or a woman does not necessarily have a son or a daughter in order to be named with a kunyah. If a son or a daughter was born later he or

549. Ibid., p. 403. Sometimes what is thought to be h.aqīqah is in fact kināyah. A friend said jokingly that in order to see a dentist a man had to go abroad, because in his homeland he was not able to open his mouth; he had to keep his mouth shut.

191

she does not have to adopt the name from the kunyah.550 This kunyah, according to Ibn Qutaybah, serves two purposes: to support the identity of a person which distinguishes him from other persons who have the same personal name, and to glorify him with this kunyah which indicates his old age, experience, and maturity.551 A question may arise: If the purpose of the kunyah is glorification, why did Allah mention Abū Lahab in the Qur’ān with his kunyah, not with his personal name, ‘Abd al-‘Uzzá 552 when he was the enemy of Prophet Muhammad? And Allah mentioned the Prophet whom He loved with his personal name, not with his kunyah, Abū al-Qāsim? Ibn Qutaybah's answer is that there are among the Arabs those who make the personal name of a person also his kunyah. For example, several people reported to Ibn Qutaybah on the authority of al-As.ma‘ī that Abū ‘Amr ibn al‘Alā’ and Abū Sufyān ibn al-‘Alā’ were personal names as well as kunyahs.553 Moreover, a man may have both a personal name and a kunyah, but his kunyah is so well-known that he becomes known by it, and his personal name becomes replaced by it. For example, the 550. The kunyah had become more commonly used since the second/eighth century. With some exceptions, such as Anas ibn Mālik, it became impolite to address someone directly with his name in this time, unless he was socially inferior to the speaker. The honoric title (laqab), such as Fakhr al-Dīn ("Glory of the Faith") and ‘Alā’ al-Dīn ("Loftiness of the Faith") was intrduced, and the nisbah (lit., "kinship", "affilication" or "affinity") developed. Besides the old tribal and genealogical nisbahs, such as al-Qurashī (from the Quraysh tribe), there appeared other types of nisbahs, such as the bearer's place of birth or residence (e.g., al-Rāzī, "from the town of Rayy"), of his religious rite (e.g., al-Mālikī, "the adherent of the Mālikī rite") and of his profession (e.g., al-Bāqillānī "the green-grocer"). The patronymic - namely, the name derived from that of a parent, consisting of Ibn ("son of") or Bint ("daughter of") followed by the name of one of the parents, usually the father, or ancestors - based on profession also developed, such as the name Ibn al-Khāt.ib ("son or descendant of the preacher"). An example of a complete name is ‘Imād al-Dīn (laqab) Abū al-Fidā' (kunyah), Ismā‘īl (name) Ibn al-Athīr (patronymic) is simply called Ibn al-Athīr. Since more than one well-known person bears this name, his laqab or kunyah is added to it and becomes ‘Imād al-Dīn Ibn al-Athīr and Abū al-Fidā’ Ibn al-Athīr. See A.F.L. Beeston, "Arabic Nomenclature," Arabic Literature, pp. 19-20. Al-Sakkākī includes the patronymic in the category of kunyah; see Miftah. al-‘Ulūm, p. 402.

551. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 256.

552. Ibid.; al-‘Uzzá is the name of an idol in pre-Islamic Arabia, see idem, alMa‘ārif, ed. Tharwat ‘Ukāshah (Egypt: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, [1969]), p. 75.

553. Idem, Ta’wīl, pp. 257-8; and idem, al-Ma‘ārif, p. 330.

192

personal name of Abū Sufyān, Abū T.ālib, Abū Dharr and Abū Hurayrah are respectively Sakhr ibn H.arb, ‘Abd Manāf, Jundub ibn al-Sakan, and ‘Abd Allāh ibn ‘Amr.554 With regard to the kunyah Abū Lahab (lit. "Father of the Flame") Ibn Qutaybah contends that if it is true that the personal name of Abū Lahab is ‘Abd al-‘Uzzá (lit. "the servant of al-‘Uzzá"), this name is not used by Allāh because it indicates idolatry and falsehood, as all people are His servants. Moreover, this kunyah has become the name with which he is well-known. It is true that he has no son called Lahab (the flame). But to be called with this kunyah it is not necessary for him to have a son bearing that name. Otherwise, it would also be incorrect to name a person with the name of an animal, such as Kalb (a dog), Qird (a monkey), Ghurāb (a crow) and Dhubāb (a fly).555 Besides the above-mentioned reason, Al-Zamakhsharī adds another reason for using Abū Lahab as a kunyah. Since he is among those who will be sent to the flaming hell, his condition is like his kunyah with which he deserves to be mentioned. Calling him Abū Lahab is like calling an evil person (sharīr) Abū al-Sharr (lit., "the Father of Evil").556 Another view states that Abū Lahab was popularly nicknamed with this kunyah, even before the advent of Islam, due to his beauty, particularly 554. See idem, al-Ma‘ārif, pp. 331, 70, 146. Abū Hurayrah's personal name could also be ‘Abd al-Rah.mān, ‘Abd ‘Amr, ‘Umayr ibn ‘Āmir and others, see ibid, p.

158. Ibn Qutaybah states further that the kunyah which consists of Abū and the name of the first son is sometimes considered a unit by the Arabs. They write, for example, ‘Alī ibn Abū T.ālib and Mu‘āwiyah ibn Abū Sufyān, rather than respectively ibn Abī T.ālib and ibn Abī Sufyān in genitive case, see idem, Ta’wīl, p. 257. See also alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1641.

555. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 260. We are told that it was the Arabs' tradition to name their children with the names of animals and things, such as the leopard, the wolf, the lion, and the stone. When a child was born he was named with something their parents saw or heard and with which they were optimistic, such as the stone which is the symbol of solidness, patience and eternity; see al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh alLughah, p. 248. At present we have Fahd (a cheetah, a panther, a lynx) who is the king of Saudi Arabia, and Asad (a lion) who is the president of Syria. In the West we have, for example, names such as: Leo (a lion), Deborah (a bee), Arthur (a bear) and Ursula (a she-bear).

556. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1641.

193

his glowing countenance. This, however, is rejected by al-Qurt.ubī for the reasons mentioned above. Moreover, al-Qurt.ubī contends, contrary to Ibn Qutaybah's view, the personal name is nobler than the kunyah, and Allah wanted to put down Abū Lahab by calling him with his kunyah which He never did with His prophets.557 b. Fulān The word (So-and-so, Such a one) is considered metonymy by Ibn Qutaybah, as it can be applied to any person as well as a particular one.

He gives an example from the Qur’ān as follows: "Oh, woe is me! Would that I had not taken So-and-so for a friend!" (Q. 25:28, Asad). Ibn Qutaybah says that a group of people whom he has not identified and who call themselves Muslims are said to insist that the word fulān indicates a particular person, and not kināyah for any person. They say that only hypocrites and people who are afraid of revealing the identity of that particular person insist on the use of kināyah for this word fulān.558 Another unidentified group of people who seem to be among the Bāt.inīs say that the name of the person in the verse was mentioned, namely, ‘Umar, but was replaced with fulān. They say that the preceding verse says: "And a Day on which the evildoer will bite his hands [in despair], exclaiming: 'Oh, would that I had followed the path shown to me by the apostle.'" (Q. 25:27, Asad), and the evildoer here, according to them, was Abū Bakr. He regretted taking fulān, meaning ‘Umar in their view, for a friend (Q. 25:28) instead of the Prophet, and that ‘Umar had led him astray from the Reminder when ‘Alī came to him as the Reminder. This is their interpretation of the verse succeeding the one in question, namely "Indeed, he led me astray from the remembrance [of God] after it had come unto me!..." (Q. 25:29, Asad).559 Ibn Qutaybah answers with the following questions: "How can ‘Alī be a reminder? Has anybody said that Abū Bakr did not become a Muslim, 557. See Asad, The Message, p. 983, n. 1; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, pp.

236-237.

558. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 260-261.

559. Ibid., p. 261.

194

and that he did not choose to follow the way together with the messenger of Allah?" Then he continues with the asbāb al-nuzūl of the above verse according to Ibn ‘Abbās, as follows: ‘Uqbah ibn Abī Mu‘ayt. invited the nobles of Makkah, including the Prophet, for a meal. The Prophet refused to eat until ‘Uqbah pronounced the testimony of truth ( ).

When he did, Ubayy ibn Khalaf came and asked him: "Have you become a Sabaean?" ‘Uqbah answered: "No, but a man among the Quraysh is with us, and I do not want him to leave without eating." Ubayy said: "I will not be pleased until you spit on his face." He did, and the above verses were revealed.560 Ibn Qutaybah insists on the generic application of the term fulān as well as the definite article al ("the") in al-z.ālim (the evildoer) in the verses mentioned above. He contends that each of these can be applied to a person or a group of people. Should the word al-z.ālim in the verse be specified with names, such as Korah, Hāmān and ‘Uqbah ibn Abī Mu‘ayt., who would later regret taking Pharaoh, Namrūd and Ubayy ibn Khalaf for friends, there would have been no room left for other evildoers who came later after the revelation of these verses. This is not the way the Arabs and other people express themselves.561 This is also the view of Mujāhid and Abū Rajā’ who said that the term al-z.ālim is general and applicable to any evildoer, whereas the term fulān is for Satan.562 Ibn Qutaybah cites the Arabic expression as evidence that fulān means a group of people, as follows: "Nobody comes to you except So-and-so son of So-and-so," meaning, according to Ibn Qutaybah, the well-known nobles. In poetry he cites the poem of Abū alNajm al-‘Ijlī (d. 130/747), as follows: "Restrain Soand-so from So-and-so in the commotion," meaning, while people were 560. Ibid., pp. 261-262. ‘Uqbah was killed by ‘Alī at the battle of Badr, and Ubayy ibn Khalaf was killed by the Prophet at the battle of Uh.ud, see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 166; al-Qurt.ubī and al-Suyūt.ī were not sure of the name of the person meant here, either Ummayyah ibn Khalaf or his brother Ubayy; see alJāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 25 and al-Itqān, vol. 4, p. 88.

561. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 262-3. See also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 974.

562. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 26.

195

the midst of evil and commotion, those who wanted to stop it told people to restrain each other. The word (an evildoer) in the Qur’ān is applied to a group of evildoers (

), and the word

unbeliever) is applied to a group of unbelievers ( following verse: will cry: 'Would that I were dust'" (Q. 78:40).563

(an

), such as the "... and the unbeliever

2. Ta‘rīd. (Allusion) Ta‘rīd., as stated by Lane, is the speaking obliquely, indirectly, obscurely, ambiguously, equivocally, ... as when thou asked a man, 'Hast thou seen such a one?' and he, having seen him, and disliking to lie, answers, 'Verily, such a one is seen'; or the making a phrase, or the like, to convey an allusion, or an indication not expressly mentioned therein; as when you say 'How foul is niggardliness!' alluding to such a one's being a niggard.564

Ibn Qutaybah states that the Arabs often use ta‘rīd. in their discourse to convey its meaning in a euphemistic way, namely in a gentler and better way than the obvious one. He shows us the significance of ta‘rīd. that asking for a woman's hand in marriage during her ‘iddah (the legally prescribed period of waiting during which a woman may not remarry after being widowed or divorced) is permissible if it is said through ta‘rīd. only, as it is forbidden through clear statements. Allah says in the Qur’ān as follows: "But you will incur no sin if you give a hint of [an intended] marriage-offer to [any of] these women, or if you conceive such an intention without making it obvious:..." (Q. 2:235, Asad). For example, a man says to a woman: "By Allah, verily, you are beautiful, may Allah bless you with a suitable husband; indeed women are among my needs."565 563. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 263.

564. See Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2004 (s.v.

).

565. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 263-264; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, p. 160. Ibn ‘Abbās provides the example of ta‘rīd. in the above case as follows: "I want to marry a woman who has such-and-such characteristics" by mentioning those

196

Ibn Qutaybah mentions seven Qur’ānic verses in which allusion occurs. Four of them are illustrated as follows: (a) “Said [Moses]: 'Take me not to task for my having forgotten [myself], ...'" (Q. 18:73, Asad). Ibn Qutaybah cites the report of al-Minhāl from Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr from Ibn ‘Abbās that Moses did not forget to keep his promise to keep silent, but he gave only an allusion that he forgot it. What is meant by Ibn ‘Abbās according to Ibn Qutaybah is that Moses did not forget to keep his promise. Therefore, he did not say "I forgot it," or he would have lied, but he said: "Take me not to task for my having forgotten [myself]" which instilled an allusion that he had forgotten it. To prove that Moses did not lie by using the allusion Ibn Qutaybah cites the well-known expression ("Verily, instilling allusions is an alternative to lying.")566 However, there is also another view stating that Moses did really forget and therefore he apologised, and the verse in question indicates that forgetting does not necessitate blame.567 (b)

"He answered: 'Nay, it was this one, the biggest of them, that did it: but ask them [yourselves] provided they can speak.'" (Q. 21:63, Asad). We notice a kind of circumspection in this statement. He did not confess openly but through insinuation.

According to Ibn Qutaybah, what Prophet Abraham meant is that if their idols could speak, then it was their chief that had destroyed them; so, he told people to ask them. He made speaking a condition for the action, namely, if they could speak then their chief could have done it, and since they could not, their chief could not have done it, and

that are obviously hers; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 338.

566. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 267; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

155. Ubayy ibn Ka‘b was said to have held the same view with that of Ibn ‘Abbās; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 484. The expression "instilling allusions is an alternative to lying" is also the saying of the Prophet. ‘Umar said that by using allusion the Muslims can avoid lying. In fact, the use of allusion as an alternative to lying is a proverb among the Arabs. See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 7, p. 183 567. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 20; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, p. 809.

197

therefore, Abraham was not lying.568 It is, as mentioned by al-T.abarsī, like saying "So-and-so is right if there is no sky above us."569 (c)

".... And behold, either we [who believe in Him] or you [who deny His oneness] are on the right path, or have clearly gone astray!" (Q. 34:24, Asad).

The above verse means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, that we (the Muslims) are on the right path or have clearly gone astray, and you (who

568. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 268; idem, Mukhtalif al-H.adīth, p. 35; and alFarrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 206-207. This statement of Prophet Abraham is, in fact, a confession on his part that it was he and not the chief idol who had destroyed the idols; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 300. This is one of the three lies he is alleged to have told. The other two are his statement after looking at the stars that he was sick (Q. 37:88-89) and his telling the Pharaoh that his wife Sarah was his sister because he feared for himself and his wife. A h.adīth mentioning these three lies was reported by al-Bukhārī, Muslim, al-Dārimī, al-Tirmidhī, Abū Dā’ūd and Ah.mad; see A.J. Wensinck and J.P. Mensing, cont. J. Bergman, Al-Mu‘jam al-Mufahras li-Alfāz. alH.adīth al-Nabawī (H.adīth Concordance), 8 vols. (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1936-88), vol. 7, p. 550 (s.v. ). It was also reported by al-Bayhaqī; see Abū Bakr Ah.mad alBayhaqī, Kitāb al-Sunan al-Kubrá, appended with al-Maridīnī ("Ibn al-Turkmānī")'s work al-Jawhar al-Naqī, and an index of h.adīths, ed. Dr. Yūsuf al-Mur‘ishlī, 10 vols.

(Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah, n.d.), vol. 7, p. 366. According to Ibn Qutaybah, these statements of Prophet Abraham are merely allusions. His statement ("verily, I am sick") means

("verily, I shall be sick"). It is similar to the verse

(lit. "verily you are dead") which means

("verily, you will die"), see Q.

39:30. His statement that his wife Sarah was his sister was not a lie, because human beings as children of Adam are brothers and sisters. Moreover, Allah said that the believers are brothers and sisters (Q. 49:10). Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 267-268; and idem, Mukhtalif al-H.adīth, p. 35.

569. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 54. Al-Zamakhsharī mentions four interpretations on the above verse, as follows: (1) It is like the answer of a calligrapher to an illiterate or semi-illiterate person who asks him "Did you write this?" with "You did it." (2) They should not deny the act of the big idol, since whoever is worshipped and called a god has the right to be able to do such an act and more. (3) It is reported that Prophet Abraham said: "The largest of them has done it, because he was angry at being worshipped together with the small ones." (4) The variant reading of Muh.ammad ibn al-Sumayfi’ , meaning ("perhaps the executor was the big one among them"). See al-KashsXhāf, vol. 2, p. 887.

198

deny His Oneness) are also on the right path or have clearly gone astray, but Allah knows that His messenger is on the right path, and those who disagree with him have clearly gone astray. It is like telling a person who disagrees with us: "One of us must be a liar," when we mean him, but we say it euphemistically. This is the view of al-Farrā’ quoted by Ibn Qutaybah.570 (d)

"If thou art in doubt of what We have revealed to thee, ask those who have read the divine writ [revealed] before thee...." (Q. 10:94).

Ibn Qutaybah provides us with two interpretations of the above verse as follows: (1) The address is to the Prophet, but it is intended for others among the doubters.The Arabs sometimes address a person with something when they mean somebody else. This is what later commentators call iltifāt (sudden transition, such as turning the address from one person or group of people to another). Such iltifāt occurs in many Qur’ānic verses, such as the following verse: "O Prophet! Remain conscious of God, and defer not to the deniers of the truth and the hypocrites: for God is truly all-knowing, wise." (Q. 33:1, Asad). The instruction and advice are directed to the Prophet but are intended for the believers. This is apparent as the verse continues with "And follow [but] that which comes unto thee through revelation from thy Sustainer: for God is truly aware of all that you do [O men]." (Q. 33:2, Asad). Similarly, the address in the above verse is to the Prophet but is intended for the believers. The evidence is the use of the plural form in ("of what ye do")

570. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 269; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

389. According to al-Farrā’ and Abū ‘Ubaydah the word aw (or) means wa (and), so that the verse means "We [who believe in Him] are on the right path, and you [who deny His oneness] have clearly gone astray." For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, pp. 298-9; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 22, p. 65; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 362.

199

instead of

("of what thou dost") in the singular form.571

(2) In the time of the Prophet there were people who believed, disbelieved, and in doubt. In the verse in question Allah was addressing these doubters, saying that If you O man are in doubt of the guidance We have revealed to you through Muhammad, upon whom be Allah's blessing and peace, ask leading personalities among the people of the Book and scholars before you, like ‘Abd Allāh ibn Sallām, Salmān al-Fārisī, Tamīm alDārī, and people like them. The stubborn persons among them would not resist and would bear witness of his [Muhammad's] truthfulness. They would inform you about his prophethood and 572 Allah's mentioning him in the [previous] Books.

The evidence that the word "thee" in the verse "...of what We revealed to thee" (Q. 10:94) above is intended for any person in general and any doubter in particular, is that in another verse it is mentioned that a divine writ has been revealed to men in general (through the Prophet), as follows: "[O men!] We have now bestowed upon you from on high a divine writ containing all that you ought to bear in mind: ..." (Q. 21:10, Asad). Sometimes the singular number is used for plural, such as the following verse: "[then,] O man - thou [that] hast, verily, been toiling towards thy Sustainer in painful toil - then shalt thou meet Him!" (Q. 84:6, Asad).573 The evidence from poetry in which a particular person is intended for people in general, is the following poem of an unidentified poet: 571. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 269-270. The use of generic "you" is common in English. While talking about Lake Tempe near my home town (Sengkang, South Sulawesi), Mrs. Messie Stock who taught me English at Cokroaminoto University (Solo, Indonesia), asked me: "Can you swim in that lake?" When I answered: "No, I can't," she said: "I mean, can people swim there?" Then I realised that "you" here meant "people in general".

572. Ibid., pp. 272-3.

573. Ibid., p. 273. This is the view of Qatādah. However, according to Muqātil the man referred to in the above verse is al-Aswad ibn ‘Abd al-Asad. Another view says that it was Ubayy ibn Khalaf. Yet, another view says that it refers to all disbelievers; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 271.

200

If you are taking a friend, never take a Dārimī young man for friend.

Here the poet is not addressing a particular person, but he means that whoever wants to take a friend should not take him from Dārim.574 Although Ibn Qutaybah considers the second interpretation possible and good, he prefers the first one. The reason is that the verse in question continues the discourse until verse 99 as follows "... dost thou, then, think that thou couldst compel people to believe," (Q. 10:99, Asad). This verse in his view is definitely directed to the Prophet - instead of the doubters - although it is intended for the believers.575 Al-Farrā’'s commentary on the verse in question is that Allah knew that the Prophet was not in doubt, and Allah did not ask him to question those who had read the divine writ before him. It is like saying to your servant who does not doubt your authority over him: "If you are my servant, listen and obey."576 Al-Tabarsi mentions four different views of the interpretation of the above verse, as follows: (1) Al-Zajjāj, al-H.asan and Ibn ‘Abbās: the verse is directed to the Prophet but intended for people in general; (2) alFarrā’ as mentioned above; (3) the verse is directed to other than the Prophet; it means "if you listeners are in doubt of what We sent to you through Our Messenger...", and (4) It is reported by al-Zajjāj that it is possible that the particle (if) means (not), so that the verse means "you are not in doubt of what We have sent to you, so ask those who read the divine writ before you, so that your faith will increase".577 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah's treatment of the kināyah and ta‘rīd. is rudimentary and brief. He confines himself to the types of kināyah called kunyah and fulān, as well as the generic application of the definite article al.

Moreover, he does not include Umm or Ibn among the kunyah. In the field 574. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 273.

575. Ibid., p. 274. This is also the view of al-T.abarī, see Jāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 115116.

576. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 479. For further details, see alT.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 115-116.

577. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 133.

201

of ta‘rīd. Ibn Qutaybah mainly discussed the euphemistic and circumspective expressions in the Qur’ānic verses.

F. The Disagreement of the Word with Its Literal Meaning Ibn Qutaybah mentions twenty-six categories of idiomatic expression which can be condensed into ten categories in the chapter entitled in his work Ta’wīl. They are as follows: imprecation, repetition of words indicating sanction, rhetorical questions, imperatives, specifications, number, iltifāt, juncture, tempora, and morphology. They will be discussed as follows: 1. Imprecation The imprecation referred to here by Ibn Qutaybah is something which is not meant to occur . He cites three examples from the Qur’ān, namely, conjecturers” (Q. 51:10),578

“Woe to the “Woe to man! What

hath made him reject God?" (Q. 80:17, Ali),579 and 578. The conjecturers meant in this verse according to al-Farrā’ and Ibn Zayd are those who made conjectures in belying the Prophet that he was a magician, a poet, a soothsayer, and a tale-teller; see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 83; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 26, p. 119.

579. According to Mujāhid the expression in the Qur’ān is meant to be the disbelievers among the people. The verse was revealed, as reported by al-D.ah.h.āk from Ibn ‘Abbās, in the case of ‘Utbah ibn Abī Lahab who became apostate after converting to Islam. The Prophet's imprecation against him took place when he was attacked by a lion on his business journey to Syria. His father mourned him, saying "Whatever Muh.ammad has ever said happens." See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, pp.

217-218. A third view is attributed to al-D.ah.h.āk, that the person referred to in the verse was Umayyah ibn Khalaf, see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 438. The verse has two interpretations: (a) it is ta‘ajjub (wonder) of man's unbelief (ungratefulness), as translated by Pickthall and Arberry respectively as "how ungrateful!" and "how unthankful he is!"; Ibn Jurayj says that it means "how strong is his disbelief"; this is also al-Zamakhshari's interpretation; (b) it is istifhām tawbīkh (now called istifhām tawbīkhī, a rhetorical question indicating reproach) as reported by Abū S.ālih from Ibn ‘Abbās, as translated by A. Yusuf Ali above. See al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 19, pp. 217-8; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 35; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān,

202

“God's curse be on them: how they are deluded away from the truth."(Q. 9:30, Ali). 580 The literal meanings of the above verses are respectively as follows: "May the conjecturers be killed!", "may man be killed!" and "may Allah fight them, how perverted they are!"581 The use of the past tense in Arabic may indicate imprecation as we have seen in the above verses and in the du‘ā’, such as the expression like ("may Allah reward you", used to express thanks to somebody), and ("may Allah bless him" used after mentioning the name of a deceased person).

However, Ibn Qutaybah's view that the imprecations in the above verses are not meant to occur is rejected by Ibn Fāris. He contends that nobody should suggest what Allah said as a du‘ā’ was not meant to occur.

On the contrary, these imprecations are intended by Allah to occur and they actually occurred. Whoever is cursed by Allah will never escape. Ibn Fāris mentions as an example in the case of Abū Lahab. He was cursed in the Qur’ān as follows: "Perish the hands of the 582 Father of Flame! Perish he!" (Q. 111:1, Ali).

Imprecation is also used to express wonder, and as such, according to Ibn Qutaybah, it is also not meant to occur. When someone is right in his reasoning, knowledge, or contention, it is said (lit., vol. 3, p. 237; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 438; and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1579.

580. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 275. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the expression meaning “God’s curse be on them” is the language of H.imyar, see Gharīb alQur’ān, p. 71.

581. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the word qutila as in the above verses is meant lu‘ina (curse be!). This is also the view of the majority of grammarians and commentators, such as al-Farrā’, al-Zamakhsharī and Ibn al-Anbārī who say that those who are cursed by Allah are similar to dead and perished people. See al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 33; al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1409; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 23 and vol. 5, p. 153.

582. Ibn Fāris, al- S.āh.ibī, p. 169. Abū Lahab did actually perish a week after the battle of Badr. The term

indicates the occurrence of the imprecation; see al-

Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1640. This is supported by Ibn Mas‘ūd's variant reading with the emphasis ; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 558.

203

"May Allah fight him, what a good thing he has said!"), (lit., May Allah disgrace him, how knowledgable he is!"), and (lit., "His achievement is due to Allah, what a good argument he has given!").583 2. Repetition Among the words which disagree with their literal meanings are the repeated ones which change their meanings to be jazā’ (recompense, reward, punishment) for the first (original) meaning, such as "The recompense of an injury is an injury equal thereto (in degree)..." (Q. 42:40, Ali).

"And they schemed and Allah schemed (against them): and Allah is the best of schemers." (Q. 3:54), in which Allah's scheme means His punishment by destroying them according to Abū ‘Ubaydah,584 or His requital for their scheme, according to al-T.abarsī,585 “And one who attacketh you, attack him in the like manner as he attacked you...." (Q. 2:194, Pickthall). Here the first attack is a hostile act and a wrongdoing, whereas the second one is not, but a retaliatory measure.586 3. Rhetorical Question The significance of rhetorical questions is divided by Ibn Qutaybah into three categories: (a) affirmation ( ), such as “Now, what is this in thy hand, O Moses?" (Q. 20:17, Asad); Allah already knew what was in Moses's hand when He asked him this question, but He wanted to remind him that what he had in his hand was only a staff

583. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 276. Even today the Arabs in Palestine and Lebanon still use the expression ("may Allah make him disgraceful") or ("may Allah make his face ugly") in praising a smart person or blaming a tricky one.

584. See Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 95.

585. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 448.

586. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 277; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

288.

204

which later turned into a serpent;587 (b) wonder (

), such as

"About what do they [most often] ask one another?

About the awesome tiding [of resurrection]," (Q. 78:1-2, Asad),588 and (c) reproach ( ), such as "Of all the creatures in the world, will ye approach males, and leave those whom God has created to be your mates?" (Q. 26:165-6, Ali).589 Al Zarkashī in his work al-Burhān gives us more information about the (asking a question) in the Qur’ān. He divides the into two types: one means

(lit., "news"), and the other means

"composition"). He divides the

meaning

(affirmation). He calls the former , negative question) and the latter

into

(lit.,

(negation) and

(in modern terminology, (in modern

terminology, , affirmative question) which has been dealt with briefly by Ibn Qutaybah above. Al-Zarkashī goes further and divides the latter into twelve divisions with examples from the Qur’ān.590 With regard to the meaning , al-Zarkashī divides it into eighteen divisions including wonder and reproach briefly dealt with by Ibn Qutaybah above.591 4. Imperative Ibn Qutaybah divides the significance of imperative into four categories: (a) threat ( ), such as "Do what 587. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 279; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

8. Al-Zarkashī places this type of question in the above verse into the category of (intimacy), whereas Ibn Fāris places it as (giving understanding), namely, that there was something important about Moses's staff which he did not know. See alZarkashī. al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 343.

588. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 279; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1569; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 421.

589. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 279-80.

590. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, pp. 328-38.

591. Ibid., pp. 338-44.

205

you will ..." (Q. 41:40, Asad); (b) admonition (

), such as

".... And let two persons of [known] probity from among your own community witness [what you have decided]; ..." (Q. 65:2, Asad), (c) exemption ( ), such as "And when the prayer is ended, then disperse freely on earth..." (Q. 62:10, Asad), and (d) religious duty ( ) such as "... and be constant in prayer, and spend in charity, ..." (Q. 2:43, Asad).592 5. Specification Ibn Qutaybah mentions eight Qur’ānic verses as examples of general statement meant to be particular ( ) in time and person, among which are as follows: a.

"..., and I am the first of those who surrender (unto Him)." (Q. 6:163, Pickthall), meaning that the Prophet was the first person who surrendered himself unto Allah in his time. b. ("..., and I am the first of (true) believers."

(Q. 7:143, Pickthall), meaning that Prophet Moses was the first believer in his time. c.

"Poets are followed by erring men" (Q.26:224), meaning some of them only;593

d.

"those who have been warned by other people, 'Behold, a host has gathered against you; so beware of them!'..." (Q. 3:173, Asad). According to one tradition Nu‘aym ibn Mas‘ūd al-Ashja‘ī said to the companions of the Prophet: "People have gathered against you," meaning Abū Sufyān, ‘Uyaynah ibn H.is.n and Mālik ibn ‘Awf. Therefore, the first (the people) is meant to be a particular person, Nu‘aym ibn Mas‘ūd, while the second is intended to be a group of people, namely, Abū

592. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 280-1. See also Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 197; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 15 and 288.

593. According to al-Farrā’ the verse was revealed about Ibn al-Ziba‘rá and poets like him who ridiculed the Prophet with their satiric poems; see Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 285.

206

Sufyān, ‘Uyaynah and Mālik mentioned above.594 e.

"I created the jinn and humankind only that they might worship Me." (Q. 51:56, Pickthall), meaning that only some of the jinn and human-kind, namely, the believers among them are created to worship Him. Others are created for Hell. To support his view, Ibn Qutaybah cites the following verse: "We have made for hell many of the jinn and humankind..." (Q. 7:179). He gives the basic meaning of , namely, "We create" in the above verse, so that it means “We created for hell...” 595 This is also the view of al-Qushayrī who said that children and insane people are excluded from the injunction of worshipping Allah as well as those who are created for Hell. Moreover, in the variant reading of ‘Abd Allāh ibn Ubayy it is written “I created the jinn and human-kind among the believers only that they might worship Me." This view is supported by al-Zajjāj who cites the verse: "... they were bidden to worship only One God." (Q. 9:31, Pickthall).596 However, according to Ibn ‘Abbās, the meaning of the verse in question is that the jinn and the humankind are created to confirm the bondage willingly or

594. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 247; and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, pp. 250-251. There are many interpretations on the above verse, among which are as follows: (a) The opinion of Mujāhid, Muqātil, ‘Ikrimah and alKalbī that the person who informed the s.ah.ābah was Nu‘aym ibn Mas‘ūd al-Ashja‘ī as mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah above; (b) The opinion of al-Suddī that when the Prophet and his companions were preparing to go out and fight Abū Sufyān and his allies, the hypocrites came to them to stop them; (c) Abū Ma‘shar said that they were a group of people from the Hudhayl tribe among the people of Tihāmah who came to Madinah and informed the Prophet's companions about Abū Sufyān and his followers. See alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, pp. 279-280.

595. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 281-282. Al-Farrā’'s commentary on this verse is that Allah did not create the people among the two groups, the jinn and the human beings, except to believe in the oneness of God; see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 89.

Al-Zamakhsharī's commentary is that Allah wants the people to worship Him based on their free will and not by force, because they are created with the ability to choose, and some of them choose not to worship Him; see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1414.

596. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 55.

207

unwillingly.597 6. Number In this category Ibn Qutaybah shows us the application of number (singular, dual, or plural) to nouns, adjectives and verbs in the verses of the Qur’ān, so that their literal (ostensible) meanings are in disagreement with their real meanings, as follows: a. Noun We can divide this section into two: 1) the plural noun meaning (a) singular, (b) dual, (c) dual and plural, and (d) singular, dual, and plural; and 2) the singular noun meaning plural. They will be discussed as follows: (1) The use of the plural which is meant: (a) singular, such as "Verily, [O Prophet,] as for those who call thee from without thy private apartments - most of them do not use their reason." (Q. 49:4, Asad), as there was only one person who called the Prophet from behind his private apartments, saying: "O Muh.ammad, my praise is good, and my abuse is disgracing" ( ); 598 That person, according to al-D.ah.h.āk, was al-Aqra‘ ibn H.ābis.599 There is also another view that there was another person who called the Prophet besides al-Aqra‘, namely, ‘Uyaynah ibn H.is.n.600 However, according to Mujāhid, the people who called the Prophet were the Banī Tamīm tribe who entered the mosque and wanted him to come out of his apartment.601 This view is supported

by Ibn Mas‘ūd's variant reading ("and the majority of them were Banū Tamīm, who did not use their reason.").602 It is 597. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 161.

598. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 283.

599. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 221.

600. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1387.

601. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 219; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 131. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, pp. 309-310 and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 70.

602. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 219. According to Ibn Abī

208

possible that one or two persons of the Tamīm tribe called the Prophet on their behalf. (b) dual, such as "[Say, O Prophet:] 'Would that you two turn unto God in repentance, for the hearts of both of you have swerved [from what is right]...'" (Q. 66:4, Asad). Here the expression is meant to be ("the two hearts of both of you").603 (c) dual and plural, such as "and if he has brothers and sisters, then his mother shall have one-sixth..."

(Q.4:11, Asad). The term (brothers) includes (two brothers).604 Dā’ūd al-Sijistānī this was the reading of Mujāhid, whereas Ubayy read , see Ibn Abī Dā’ūd al-Sijistānī Kitāb al-Mas.āh.if, pp. 304 and 106.

603. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 283; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p. 232; alTha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 219; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān., pt. 3, p. 787.

Al-T.abarsī mentions four views regarding the use of the plural instead of the dual in

in this verse, as follows: (1) The dual is plural in meaning, namely, more than

one, so that the plural form is used here for the dual; it is the same as the verse , ("... and We bore witnesses to their judgement" Q. 21:78, Asad) in which ‫( هِم‬their) is referring to two, namely, David and Solomon; (2) Most members of the human body consist of pairs, such as hands, legs and eyes; if the these pairs are mentioned in two persons (dual), such as their (dual) hands and their (dual) eyes, it is said respectively and in which hands and eyes are used in the plural instead of the dual. Although

(the heart) is not a pair in human body, it is

annexed to and grammatically treated like the pair, so that it is said

; (3) Since

is already in the dual, it is not necessary to put another dual before it; therefore is said in plural, because, the plural is simpler. Moreover, unlike the dual, the plural and the singular forms have a similar i‘rāb. However, the Arabs also say qalbāhumā, and even mix the dual and the plural, as in the following poem: ("Their two backs are like the backs of two shields"). Here is used in plural, although it is for the dual. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 312-3.

604. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 283; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p. 232; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 118; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, pp. 72-3; al-

209

(d) singular, dual, and plural, such as "And let a group of the believers witness their chastisement." (Q. 24:2, Asad). Here the term (a group, a band, a troop, a party) means one, two, and more persons.605 (2). The use of the singular intended for the plural, such as "Exclaimed [Lot]: 'Behold, these are my guests: so put me not to shame.'" (Q. 15:68, Asad). The term (my guest) is used to mean

(my guests). Another example is

"..., and then We bring you forth as infants ..."

(Q. 22:5, Asad). The term (an infant) is used instead of 606 (infants).

As an example from poetry Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 274; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p.

15. For more examples, see al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 3, pp. 787-90.

605. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 282. Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 212. The term according to Ibn ‘Abbās is for one to one thousand people according to one report, whereas according to another, from four to forty. However, there are different views concerning the minimum number of people for the term in the verse in question, as follows: (1) One person, according to Mujāhid and al-H.asan. It is because, according to Mujāhid, the term in "From within every group in their midst, some shall refrain from going forth to war, ... " (Q. 9:122, Asad) means one person. (Here is translated by Asad, Pickthall and Ali as "some", "a party" and "a contingent" respectively). Moreover, the term (two groups) in

"Hence, if two groups of

believers fall to fighting, ..." (Q. 49:9) means two fighting people, as the verse was revealed about them. (2) Two persons, according to ‘Ikrimah and ‘At.ā’. This is also the established view of Mālik who says that it is the same as that of bearing witness, where the minimum of two witnesses are required. (3) Three persons, according to al-Zuhrī, probably because it is the minimum number in Arabic plural. (4) Four persons, according to Ibn Zayd who says that the case is like that of adultery where four witnesses are required. This is also the view of Mālik in another report, al-Layth, alShāfi‘ī and Ibn Zayd. See al-Q urt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 166; al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 936; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 124.

606. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 284; idem, Tafsīr, p. 316; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-

210

of al-‘Abbās ibn Mirdās al-Sulamī, as follows: Then we said: 'Surrender, verily, we are your brothers; the hearts have been healed from the old feuds.'

The term brothers).607

(your brother) is intended to mean

(your

b. Adjective (quality, attribute) This section can be divided into two: (1) the adjective in the singular for a plural object, and (2) the adjective in the plural for a singular object, as follows: (1) The use of an adjective in the singular for a plural object, such as “.... And if you are in a state requiring total ablution, purify yourselves." (Q. 5:6, Asad). The term junub (unclean) is in the singular but is used for the plural "you".608 Another example is the verse “...; and furthermore the angels are Lughah, p. 220; al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 765; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 211. For more examples, see Q. 63:4 and 4:69; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p.

233.

607. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 285. See also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, p. 21; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz, vol. 1, p. 79 and 131, vol. 2, pp. 44 and 195; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘, vol. 1, p. 365. However, it is also possible that the expression

here

means "Verily, we are your brothers" (in plural) based on Sībawayh's view that the term (brother), like (father), can also be formed in plural with ( ) and

( ) beside their respective broken plural

and

. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘,

vol. 2, p. 138.

608. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 285. However, according to Abū ‘Ubaydah, the term junub is invariably used disregarding gender and number; therefore, ( , , or

) junub is used; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 155. See also al-Munjid fī ’l-

Lughah wa ’l-A‘lām (Beirut: Dār al-Mashriq, 1969), p. 103 (s.v.

Arabs also say and

(for the dual),

and

). However, some

(for the masculine plural),

(for the feminine plural); see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 279.

211

his helpers." (Q. 66:4, Pickthall). The term z.ahīr (lit. "a state of being helpful") is an adjective and in the singular, and the noun "angels" is in the plural. In poetry, Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of an unidentified poet, as follows: Verily, the reprovers are not consultant to me." The term amīr (lit., "a person who is consulted") here is in the singular.609 (2) The use of an adjective in the plural for a singular object, such as the poem of an unidentified poet, as follows: “The Winter has come and my dress is worn out." The term

the plural of

(shabby, threadbare, worn), but is intended for the singular, as it is describing a single object, namely, the dress.610

c. Verb We can divide this section into four, as follows: (1) a verb that refers to two different things and is intended for one of them only; (2) a verb that refers to one of two different things but is intended for both of them; (3) an imperative verb in dual but is intended for one, two, or more persons; and (4) a verb with a plural pronoun intended for one person indicating respect. They are as follows: (1) A verb that refers to two different things but is intended for one of them only, for example: "But when they reached the junction between the two [seas], they forgot all about their fish, ..." (Q. 18:61, Asad). It was Yūsha‘ ibn Nūn only who had forgotten the fish, for he said to Prophet Moses

609. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 285; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 34, al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 83; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 45 and 261.

For the meaning of amīr, see al-Munjid, p. 17 (s.v. ).

610. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 286; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 315; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 14, vol. 19, p. 47; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 427.

212

"..., I forgot about the fish..." (Q. 18:63, Asad).611 Another example is as follows: "O ye assembly of the jinn and humankind! Came there not unto you messengers of your own...?" (Q. 6:130, Pickthall). Here it means that messengers came from humankind only.612 (2) A verb that refers to one of two different things but is intended for both of them is the same as the one in the following verse: "... - the while it is God and His Apostle whose pleasure they should seek above all else,.." (Q. 9:62, Asad). Here the verb ("to please Him") is used for ("to please them both").613 Another example is as follows: 611. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 287; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 154 and 180; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 217 and 224. It is possible that both forgot the fish; Yusha‘ forgot to carry it, or to tell Moses that it had escaped, whereas Moses forgot to tell Yusha‘ to carry it. It is also possible that the term here means "both postponed"; in the du‘ā’ it is said , meaning "may Allah postpone your instant of death"; because both of them left the fish, both postponed it; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 12-3; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 480.

612. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 287. There are different views concerning messengers to the jinn, among which are as follows: (1) al-D.ah.h.āk: Allah sent messengers to the jinn just as He sent them to mankind; (2) al-Kalbi: The messengers are sent to mankind only, except Prophet Muhammad who was sent to mankind and the jinn; (3) Ibn ‘Abbās: Messengers among the jinn are those who convey the revelation they heard to their people; (4) Mujāhid: Messengers are from mankind, and warners are among the jinn; this is the explanation of Ibn ‘Abbās's view. See alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 86; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 367; and alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 426. Al-D.ah.h.āk’s view is isolated; other views complement each other and confirm Ibn Qutaybah's view. For another example, see Q. 55:20 where pearl and coral stones are said to come from both salt and fresh waters, when it is meant from salt water only. (However, it is said recently that pearls are being successfully cultivated in fresh water).

613. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 288; and al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 219.

According to al-Qayrawānī and al-T.abarsī the verse means ( ): ; al-T.abarsī explains further that the first

(

), brevity (

), predominance (

is dropped for easing

), and because it is indicated by the

213

"Yet, [it does happen that] when people become aware of [an occasion for] worldly gain or a passing delight, they rush headlong towards it..." (Q. 62:11, Asad). Here the verse means ("they rush headlong towards both of them").614 As an example from poetry Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of ‘Amr ibn Imru’ al-Qays al-Ans.ārī addressing Mālik ibn al-‘Ajlān, as follows: We are content with what we have and you with what you have, and the opinion is different.

Instead of

in the plural form, the term

used for both

(we) and

in the singular form is

(you).615

(3) An imperative verb in the dual but is intended for one, two, or more sentence itself. See al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 610; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 45 and vol. 1, pp. 89 and 100.

614. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 288; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 218; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 157; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān., pt. 2, p. 611.

According to Abū ‘Ubaydah the verse means: ("Yet, [it does happen that] when people become aware of [an occasion for] wordly gain, they rush headlong towards it, or a passing delight..."), see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 258.

Al-T.abarsī mentions two views regarding this verse: (1) The pronoun ‫ ها‬is used here exclusively for easing, brevity, and predominance, as the verse means: ("Yet, [it does happen that] when people become aware of [an occasion for] worldly gain, they rush headlong towards it, or a passing delight, they rush headlong towards it"), similiar to Abū ‘Ubaydah's view above; (2) The pronoun ‫ها‬ is used exclusively for the (worldly gain) because the is more important for them than the

(the passing delight), in this case, the beating of the drum, which only

indicates the presence of the

; this is the view of al-Farrā’ mentioned above. See

Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 289; vol. 1, pp. 89 and 100.

615. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 289; see also al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 611; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, pp. 89 and 100; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 434 and 445; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 127. Again, the verse means ("we ... are content, and you ... are content"), see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 45.

214

persons is the same as that in the following verse: "[Whereupon God will command:] 'Cast, cast into hell every [such] stubborn enemy of the truth.'" (Q. 50:24, Asad). Here the verb is in the dual form but it is intended for one person only, namely, Mālik, the angel who is in charge of Hell.616 It may also be intended for more persons, namely, the zabāniyah (the infernal attendants of Hell),617 or the two angels mentioned in the previous verse Q. 50:21, one is a driver ( ) who drives people to do what Allah has ordered them to, and the other is a witness ( ) who registers what people do; this is the view of Mujāhid, ‘Uthmān618 and al-Zajjāj.619 Abū ‘Uthmān al-Māzinī and al-Mubarrad, both of the grammarian school of Bas.rah, state that the verb is in the dual to indicate repetition, namely, as translated by Asad above.620 Ibn Qutaybah states that according to al-Farrā’ it is common among the Arabs to use imperative verbs in the dual when they are addressing one person or more, such as the expression "Woe unto you! Move her away and drive her away both of you."621 One of the examples from poetry given by Ibn Qutaybah is the poem of Suwayd ibn Karrā‘ al-‘Ukalī, as follows: If you drive me away O Ibn ‘Affān, I shall go away, but if you leave me alone, I shall protect my honour from those who hurt me.

616. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 239; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 5, p. 147; apparently, this is also the view of al-Khalīl and al-Akhfash when they say that alqiyā is the dual intended for the singular, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 16.

617. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 291. This is the view of al-Farrā’ according to alZarkashī, see al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 239.

618. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, pp. 14 and 16.

619. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 147.

620. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1403; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

17, p. 16; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 240.

621. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 291; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 78.

This is also the view of al-Khalīl and al-Akhfash, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p.

16; see also Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 218-219.

215

Here ("you both drive me away") and (“you both leave me alone”) are in the dual form when the poet meant Ibn ‘Affān only.622 Al-Farrā’ says that the number of people needed to form a company ( ) is three people.623 In this case, the conversation occurs between one of them and the other two by using verbs in the dual form. Poets use them most when they say ("O my two companions") and ("O my two friends").624 (4) A verb with a plural pronoun intended for one person indicating respect is like the king's statement when he said: "We did this" instead of "I did this". There are many examples in the Qur’ān, among which are as follows: “..., he prays: 'Oh my Sustainer! Let me return, let me return [to life].'" (Q. 23:99, Asad).

Here (namely, ) in the plural is used instead of (namely,

) in the singular to indicate respect.625 Another example

622. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 291; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol, 3, p. 78; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 218-219; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 241. According to alT.abarī, the verse was cited by Abū Tharwān; see Jāmi‘, vol. 26, p. 103.

623. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 292; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 78; and al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 26, p. 103. There is a tradition where the Prophet said: "A person travelling alone is a satan, two travellers are two satans, while three travellers make a travelling party." (Reported by Mālik, Abū Dā’ūd, al-Tirmidhī and Ah. mad ibn H.anbal); see Wensinck, al-Mu‘jam, vol. 3, pp. 125 and 130 (s.v.

).

624. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 292; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 26, pp. 103-104; alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 17, p. 16; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1403.

625. This is al-Farrā’'s interpretation, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 241-2.

Another interpretation, however, is that the expression is (an appeal for help) addressed to Allah, and

is addressed to the angels. There is, then, an ‫ إلتفات‬here, or

the expression is directed to both Allah and the angels; see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol.

2, p. 235. This is the view of Ibn Jurayj. The third interpretation is that irji‘ūn means the repetition of the word, namely, similar to meaning mentioned above, which is the view of al-Māzinī and al-Mubarrad. See al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 149. See also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 117. The term is originally

. The letter yā’ is dropped for the sake of the rhyme. Such

216

is

"We explain it to thee in the best

possible way, ..." (Q. 12:3, Asad) in which the expression explain") refers to Allah alone.626

("We

7. Sudden Transition (Iltifāt) Ibn Qutaybah deals with three categories of what is later called .

They are as follows: a. It is addressing a person who is present (namely, the second person), then suddenly the address is changed into the wording of a third person ( ); b. It is addressing the third person by using the wording of the second person ( ); and c. It is addressing a person with something, then suddenly the address is shifted to another person ( ); this includes: addressing two persons then suddenly the address is directed to one of them only, and addressing somebody, but the address is intended for somebody else.627 They are dealt with as follows: a. With regard to addressing a person who is present (the second person), then suddenly the address is changed into the wording of a third person, Ibn Qutaybah gives three examples from the Qur’ān, one of which is as follows: ".... And [behold what happens] when you go to sea in ships: [they go to sea in ships,] and they sailed on in them in a favourable wind, and they rejoiced thereat..." (Q. 10:22, Asad). Here the words ("they sail on in them") and

("they rejoiced thereat") is a sudden transition from

("you sail on in them") and ("you rejoiced thereat") respectively.628 We notice that in translating the above verse Asad says "they go to sea in ships" between brackets to indicate the occurrence of the omissions occur several times in the Qur’ān, such as the omission of

in

3:50, 26:108, 110, 126, 144, 163, and 179, 43:63 and 71:3, and the omission of

in Q. in

in Q. 21:25 and 94, and 29:56.

626. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 293. For other examples, see Q. 54:49, 10:83, 11:14, and 44:36.

627. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 290-1.

628. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 289; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 101; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 3, p. 923.

217

shift from the direct address and the second person plural "you" to the third person plural "they". The purpose of this shift, as he stated it, is "to bring out the allegorical character of the subsequent narrative and to turn it into a lesson of general validity".629 Ibn Qutaybah does not explain the purpose of the iltifāt in this verse, but al-Zarkashī mentions three views concerning its purpose, as follows: (1) it is to indicate wonder about people's deeds and disbeliefs; (2) it is to single out the rebellious among the people; before the iltifāt the address was to people in general, believers as well as non-believers; then the iltifāt is used to indicate that the reproof is exclusively for those who rebel wrongfully after being delivered from danger, as mentioned in the above verse and that which follows it (Q. 10:23); (3) it is to indicate the two conditions of people: when they were on board a ship they felt confined and feared perishing and changing wind; in this case they were addressed the way people who are present are addressed (in the second person); but when the danger passed with a favourable wind, they were happy, and their presence was no longer required in referring to them; therefore, the iltifāt is used, the address was given in the third person, and it was said "and they sailed on in them".630 b. With regard to addressing the third person by using the wording of the second, Ibn Qutaybah does not give us any example from the Qur’ān, but one from poetry by Abū ’l-Kabīr al-Hudhalī, as follows: O woe unto myself, the wealth of Khālid and the whiteness of his [lit. your] face are for the dust coloured soil [in which he is buried].

Here, after mentioning Khālid as a third person, the poet spoke to him in the second person, when he said "the whiteness of your face".631 Al-Zarkashī mentions many examples from the Qur’ān, one of which is as follows: “As it is, some assert, 'The Most Gracious has taken unto Himself a son'! Indeed, [by this assertion] you have brought forth something monstrous." (Q.19:88-89, 629. Asad, The Message, p. 293, n. 34.

630. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 3, p. 318. Al-Zarkashī mentions also the mubālaghah (hyperbole) as the objective of the iltifāt in the verse in question, see ibid., p. 329. The remaining examples from the Qur’ān given by Ibn Qutaybah are Q. 30:39 and 49:7, and the remaining ones given by al-Zarkashī are Q. 43:70-71, and 21:92-93.

631. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 290.

218

Asad). Instead of ("they brought forth") it is used ("you brought forth") to indicate that whoever makes a statement like theirs he is to be reproached and rejected. Here Allah is addressing them directly as if they were present.632 c. With regard to addressing a person with something, then suddenly the address is shifted to another person Ibn Qutaybah gives us two examples, as follows: "And if they do not respond to your call" which was addressed to the Prophet, and then suddenly shifted to unbelievers, as the verse continues with "then know that [this Qur’ān] has been bestowed from on high out of God's wisdom alone, and that there is no deity save Him." This is evident as the verse continues addressing the unbelievers thus "Will you, then, surrender yourselves unto Him?" (Q. 11:14, Asad).633 The other example is "Verily, [O Muhammad,] We have sent thee as a witness [to the truth], and as a herald of glad tidings and a warner." (Q. 48:8, Asad). This verse was addressed to the Prophet; then the address was suddenly shifted from him to people in the following verse: "so that you [O men] might believe in God and His Apostle, and might honour Him, and revere Him, and extol His limitless glory from morn to evening." Q. 48:9, Asad).634 632. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 3, pp. 322-323 and 330. According to alT.abarsī, there is an ellipsis of "say to them O Muh.ammad", then the verse continues with "Indeed, [by this assertion] you have brought forth something monstrous.", see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 531. For other examples of this category of iltifāt from the Qur’ān, see al-Burhān, vol. 3, pp. 323-325.

633. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 290. Al-Qurt.ubī mentions three interpretations of the pronouns in the words

and

, as follows: (1) both are for all the people; (2)

both are for the idolaters; (3) in it is for the Prophet and the believers, but in it is for the idolaters, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 13. Al-T.abarsī also mentions three interpretations as follows: (1) both are for the Muslims; (2) both are for the unbelievers; (3) in it is for the Prophet, whereas in here is no commentary; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 147. Al-Zamakhsharī has the same interpretation as alT.abarsī regarding the term above, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 606.

634. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 290. The above reading is that of the majority of

219

With regard to addressing two persons and suddenly the address is directed to one of them only, Ibn Qutaybah gives us two examples. They are: He replied: 'Who, now, is this Sustainer of you two, O Moses?'" (Q. 20:49, Asad). Here Pharaoh spoke at first to both Moses and Aaron, but later spoke to Moses alone, saying "O Moses".635 Another example is the following verse: “And thereupon We said: 'O Adam! Verily, this is a foe unto thee and thy wife: so let him not drive the two of you out of this garden and render thee unhappy.'" (Q. 20:117, Asad). We notice here that at the beginning the address was directed to Adam only, then to him and his wife, then again to him only.636 With regard to addressing somebody, but the address is intended for somebody else, Ibn Qutaybah mentions the following example: "... , and when He brings you into being out of dust." (Q. 53:32, Asad). Here Allah means Adam himself, not his descendants.637 Al-Zarkashī in his work al-Burhān examines the iltifāt in more detail. qurrā', except Ibn Kathīr, Ibn Muh.ays.in and Ibn ‘Amr who read it with yā’, namely, The first reading is chosen by Abū Hātim, the second

by Abū ‘Ubayd. According to al-D.ah.h.āk the pronoun "him" in honour him") and

("you might

("you might revere him") refers to the Prophet, whereas

("you might glorify Him") refers to Allah. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p.

266. The argument of those who read the above verse with ‫ ي‬is that at the end of the verse that follows, it reads "He will bestow on him" (Q. 48:10), instead of "on you", see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 112.

635. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 290. Al-T.abarsī mentions two views on the above verse: (1) It means

("Who, now, is this Sustainer of you and the

Sustainer of him, O Moses?"), and (2) It means ("Who, now, is this Sustainer of both of you, O Moses and Aaron?"). See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

13.

636. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 290.

637. Ibid., p. 291. However, there is also another interpretation that all human beings are referred to here, since they are all created from dust as they eat food which comes from it; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 180.

220

He mentions its definition, advantages, and divisions. He says that the iltifāt is the change from one style to another as a means to alert and attract the listener, to renew his energy, and to protect his mind from boredom and discontent caused by listening to an incessant single style .638 Al-Zarkashī divides the advantages of the iltifāt into general and particular. The general advantage is that it gives an opportunity to use various styles and to shift from one style to another which alert the listener and attract his interest, to broaden the flow of the speech, and to facilitate the use of poetic measure and rhyme . The particular advantages are: to honour the position of the person who is spoken to (the second person), to direct attention to the significance of the statement, to complete the meaning intended by the speaker and to indicate hyperbole, specification, significance and reproach.639 Al-Zarkashī divides the iltifāt into seven divisions: from the first person (the speaker) to the second (the person spoken to), from the first person to the third, from the second person to the first, from the second person to the third, from the third person to the first, from the third person to the second, and the formation of a verb for the object after the expression or the speech has been given by its subject .640 Al-Zarkashī also includes the shift of the speech from one subject to another in what he calls "close to the iltifāt" . The purpose of this shift is to stop the discussion of a particular subject with an ignorant and fanatical opponent, and to bring him to a new and different subject, so that he will keep his attention on the new subject and forget the previous one.

This is because the more we enter into the discussion with him on that particular subject; the more he will reject our view. Then the former subject is introduced slowly within the new subject. Al-Zarkashī includes in this category of expression close to the iltifāt: the shift from addressing one to two persons, from one to three persons, from two to one person, from two to 638. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 3, p. 314.

639. Ibid., pp. 325-30.

640. Ibid., pp. 315-25.

221

three persons, from three to one person, and from three to two persons. He also includes what are called tempora and morphology which will be dealt with later.641 Ibn Qutaybah's treatment of this subject, the iltifāt, is very brief and rudimentary. He does not even use the term iltifāt in his work Ta’wīl, since this technical term seems to have been unknown in his time. Commentators like al-T.abarī, al-Qurt.ubī, al-T.abarsī, and al-Zamakhsharī did not mention it, and often give different interpretations rather than using it.

8. Juncture Juncture is the joining of two different statements of two different persons, so that they appear to be the statement of one person or one group of persons. Among the examples given by Ibn Qutaybah are the following Qur’anīc verses: a.

"Said she: 'Verily, whenever kings enter a country they corrupt it, and turn the noblest of its people into the most abject.'" (Q. 27.34, Asad). This statement of Queen Bilqīs of Sheba is followed by Allah's statement "And this is the way they [always] behave." (Q. 27:34).642 This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās. However, another view says that the latter statement also belonged to Queen Bilqīs who had witnessed and heard the habits of kings in the past.643 b.

"They will say: 'Oh, woe unto us! Who has roused us from our sleep [of death]?'" which will be the statement of righteous Muslims when they are resurrected. The verse continues with the angels' following statement: "[Whereupon they will be told:] 'This is what the Most Gracious has promised! And His message bearers spoke the truth!.'" (Q. 36:52, Asad).644 This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and al-Farrā’ adopted by Ibn Qutaybah.

641. Ibid., pp. 333-7.

642. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 294; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 292; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 375.

643. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1036; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

13, p. 195; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, pp. 220-221.

644. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 294.

222

However, it is also possible that the statement of the angels is shared by the believers, or it is exclusively the statement of the muttaqīn according to alH.asan. Another view suggests that the statement refers to the unbelievers who, after asking each other who raised them from their sleep, will finally believe in the Resurrection Day, when this belief was now of no avail.645 9. Tempora Ibn Qutaybah mentions the use of a verb in the past-tense when it is meant for the present or the future. He cites seven examples, among which are as follows: a.

"You are indeed the best community that has ever been brought forth for [the good of] mankind: ..." (Q. 3:110, Asad). The word (lit. "you were") means "you are" and "you will be".

The use of the verb "to be" in the past-tense indicating the present and the future is found profusely in the Qur’ān, such as: "They exclaimed: 'How can we talk to one who [as yet] is [

, lit., "was" ] a little boy in the cradle?'" (Q. 19:29, Asad).646 There are several views concerning the use of the verb

(in this case

) in the above verse. Some say that it is used for emphasis. The other view is that kāna indicates the past, namely, the believers were the best community in the sight of Allah as mentioned in the Preserved Tablet ( ) which is the interpretation of al-Farrā’ and al-Zajāj; according to al-H.asan they were the best community mentioned in the previous Scriptures. Kāna is also interpreted as s.āra (has become) and wujida (to be found) or khuliqa (to be created), so that the verse in question means "You have become indeed the best community that has ever been brought forth for [the good of] mankind, because you enjoin...", and "you have been found (or created) to be the best community...".647 645. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1193; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol.

15, p. 42; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 582. For further examples, see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 294-295 and Q. 7:109-10 and 12:51-52.

646. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 295.

647. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 486 and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1193.

223

b.

"And lo! God said: 'O Jesus, son of Mary! Didst thou say unto men, Worship me and my mother as deities beside God"?'..." (Q. 5:116, Asad).

The verb is in the past tense but is meant in the future when Allah speaks to Jesus on the Last Day. The evidence that the occurrence of the dialogue will be in the future is the verse that which follows reads: "[And on Judgment Day] God will say: 'Today, their truthfulness shall benefit all who have been true to their word: theirs shall be gardens through which running waters flow,...'" (Q. 5:119, Asad). The day referred to in this verse is the Last Day, the Judgement Day.648 This is the view of Qatādah, Ibn Jurayj, and the majority of the commentators, and is supported by alQurt.ubī and al-T.abarsī. Another view is that the dialogue had taken place, namely, when Jesus ascended to Heaven, which is the view of al-Suddī and Qut.rub.649 c.

"God's judgment is [bound to] come: do not therefore, call for its speedy advent! ..." (Q. 16:1, Asad). The verb (lit. "it came") which is in the past-tense proclaims the future, namely, "it will come to pass", translated by Asad as "is bound to come" as mentioned above.650 Various interpretations of ("Allah's judgment") are given, among which are as follows: (1) the Judgment Day which is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās; (2) Allah's punishment to the idolaters which is the view of al-H.asan and Ibn Jurayj as stated by al-T.abarsī, whereas according to alQurt.ubī it is the view of al-Zajjāj; (3) Allah's injunctions and laws which is the view of al-D.ah.h.āk according to al-T.abarsī, whereas according to al-Qurt.ubī, it is also the view of al-H.asan and Ibn Jurayj.651

d.

648. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 295.

649. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, pp. 374-5; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 2, p. 268.

650. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 295; and idem, Tafsīr, p. 241.

651. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 348; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, pp. 65-6.

224

"And [remember:] it is God who sends forth the winds, so that they raise a cloud, whereupon We drive it towards dead land and thereby give life to the earth after it had been lifeless: even thus shall resurrection be!"

(Q. 35:9, Asad). We notice here that the verb ("He sent forth"), ("then We drove it") and ("thereby We gave life to it") are in the past-tense, but they mean the present and the future.652 Ibn Qutaybah does not mention the opposite of the above tempora, namely, the use of the present or the future-tense for the past-tense, such as: "And follow [instead] that which the evil ones used to practice during Solomon's reign..." (Q. 2:102, Asad), in which in the present or future is meant to be in the past.653 The other example is: "....

Say: 'Why, then, did you slay God's prophets aforetime, if you were [truly] believers?'" (Q. 2:91, Asad), in which the verb ("you slay") in the present or future-tense is meant to be above.654

("you slew") as translated

652. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 296.

653. The verb tatlū in this verse means "to relate" and "to follow" according to ‘At.ā' and Ibn ‘Abbās respectively. The commentators also have different interpretations of . It means "against the laws and prophethood of Solomon" according to Ibn al-‘Arabī; it means "during Solomon's reign" according to al-Zajjāj, as translated by Asad above; another view mentiond by al-Qurt.ubī says that it means "stories, characters and accounts of Solomon's reign". What the evil ones used to relate, to follow (or to practice, according to Asad) in this verse was sorcery. The above verse means "the evil ones (men or jinn) practiced sorcery during Solomon's reign", or "the evil ones related bad things about Solomon's reign, claiming that Solomon was not a prophet, and his magic power was merely the product of sorcery rather than a miracle from Allah". See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, pp. 41-3. The first interpretation was followed by Asad, the second by Pickthall and Ali. 654. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp. 60-1; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh alLughah, p. 221; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 3, pp. 373-4. Al-T.abarsī adds further comment on this verse. He says that (imperfect verb) is also used to indicate habit, such as saying of a criminal "he steals and kills" (which corresponds to the English present simple tense indicating habitual actions); it is also a reproach for the crimes he did in the past and not what he will commit in the future. However, the crime committed by their ancestors in the verse in question is ascribed to them, namely the

225

10. Morphology Ibn Qutaybah briefly mentions four categories of words which morphologically disagree with their literal meanings. They are as follows: a. A passive participle in the form of an active participle , such as: (1) “Said [Noah]: 'Today there is no protection [for anyone] from God's judgment, save [for] those who have earned [His] mercy!'...." (Q. 11:43, Asad). The word (lit. "protector") which is an active participle, means ("protected") in a passive participle in the above verse, namely, "nobody is protected from His judgment" ( ).655 This is one interpretation. The second interpretation is that means ("no protector"), so that the verse means "there is no protector from Allah's punishment except He [Allah] Who has mercy" since it is on that day of reckoning that the unbelievers deserve punishment.656 The third interpretation is mentioned by al-T.abarsī, namely, "there is no protector except to whom Allah has mercy," meaning that whom Allah has mercy for will be protected.657 (2) "He is created from a gushing fluid." (Q. 86:6, Pickthall). The verb (gushing) is an active participle meaning (gushed) in passive participle.658 (3) The following verse of Wa‘lat alJarmī: When I saw the horses following each other in groups, I realised that it was a hard impudent day.

The word

(lit., immoral actor) is an active participle meaning a

passive participle

(acted upon immorally), so that the verse means "a

killing of prophets, for one of the following reasons: their remaining and following the same ways and religion of their ancestors suggested their participation in the crime; or they were content with their ancestors' actions, and by so doing, they belong to them.

See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 161.

655. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 297; and al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 221.

656. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, pp. 39-40.

657. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 163.

658. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 297; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 221; and alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 4.

226

).659

hard day in which immorality was committed" ( b. The verb pattern

which means

(doer), such as: (1)

“The originator is He of the heavens and the earth:..." (Q. 2:117, Asad and 6:101). The word badī‘ means mubdi‘ ("originator", "creator");660 (2) "a painful punishment" (Q. 2:10, 104, and 178). 661 The word (painful) means (causes pain); (3) The verse of ‘Amr ibn Ma‘dīkarib who was longing for his sister Rayh.ānah who was taken captive by al-S.immah ibn Bakr as follows: Is it from [listening to] the inviter who makes us listen [to what he said] about Rayh.anah that makes me anxiously sleepless while my companions are peacefully sleeping?

Here the word

means

is an isolated meaning, since c. The verb pattern

(who makes people listen). However, this means "all-hearing".662

which means the active participle

(all-preserving),

(all-powerful),

(all-knowing),

(glorious), and

these are the (hearer),

(all-hearing),

(emphatic form) of (seer),

(knower),

, such as (all-seeing),

(originator of creation). All (preserving),

(powerful),

(possessor of glory), and

659. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 296-297; Ibn ‘Abd Rabbih, al-‘Iqd al-Farīd, vol.

5, p. 231; and Abū al-Faraj al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 15, p. 77. According to alMufad.d.al, the poem belongs to al-H.ārith ibn Wa‘lat al-Jarmī; see Lyall, ed., The Mufad.d.alīyāt, pp. 330-331.

660. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 297; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 86.

661. The expression

is found in over fifty places in the Qur’ān, such

as: Q. 3:77, 91, and 177; 5:36, 37, and 94; 6:70; and 7:73.

662. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 297; idem, al-Shi‘r wa ’l-Shu‘arā’, vol. 1, p. 332; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 8, p. 164 (s.v. ); Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

282; al-T.abarī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 95; Abū al-Faraj al-As.bahānī, al-Aghānī, vol. 14, p.

33; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, pp. 126-127.

227

(originator of creation) respectively.663 d. Active participle in the form of passive participle which is very rare, such as: "... Verily, His promise is ever sure of fulfilment..." (Q. 19:61, Asad) in which the word (lit., "is being brought") means (lit. "is coming").664 Ibn Qutaybah's material of disagreement of a word with its literal meaning is very brief. It lacks organisation and details. He divides it into twenty-six categories with examples, which I divide systematically into ten categories. More details are available in literature of later times, such as alBurhān of al-Zarkashī, Jāmi‘ of al-T.abarsī and al-Jāmi‘ of al-Qurt.ubī.

Moreover, he does not mention the other views which are contrary to his.

The lack of details and systematic division, as well as different views is apparent in Ibn Qutaybah's treatise of the phenomena of figurative language.

663. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 297-298 and idem, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 586-7.

Ibn Qutaybah does not cite any example from the Qur’ān due to the vast number of times it appears, such as: h.afīz. in Q. 6:104, 11:57, 86, 34:21 and 50:32; qadīr in Q.2:20, 106, 109, 148, 259, and 284; samī‘ and ‘alīm in Q. 2:181, 224, 227, 244, and 256; bas.īr in Q. 2:96, 110 233, 227, and 265; and majīd in Q. 11:73 and 85:21. With regard to bādi’u ’l-khalq we do not find it in the Qur’ān; what we find is bada’a ’lkhalq (Q. 29:20), yabda’u ’l-khalq (Q. 10:4, 34, 27:64, 30:11 and 27), and yubdi’u ... ’l-khalq (Q. 29:19).

664. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 298; and al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 222. The object in this verse is also the subject , because, al-T.abarsī states, in Arabic whatever you come to also comes to you, and vice versa. For example, it is said ("I have come to fifty years") can also be said ("Fifty years have come to me"). See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 521. The other example is "... a hidden barrier". (Q. 17:45). The word (hidden) means (hiding) of what is behind it. This is the first interpretation. See al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 222. The second interpretation, however, says that here is in its original meaning, namely, hidden from our eyes. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 271.

228

228

CHAPTER IV IBN QUTAYBAH'S TREATISE OF AMBIGUOUS LETTERS, WORDS, AND PARTICLES IN THE VERSES OF THE QUR’ĀN This chapter examines letters assumed to be absurd and stylistically spoiling, words which have many different meanings, meanings of particles, and the substitution of particles in the verses of the Qur’ān as follows: A. Letters Assumed to Be Absurd and Stylistically Spoiling The main concern of Ibn Qutaybah on this subject is the letters of the alphabet at the beginning of twenty-nine sūrahs in the Qur’ān, technically called by the exegetes al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah (the disconnected letters) and fawātih. al-suwar (the openings of the chapters). The term alphabet itself is derived from the first and the second letters of the Greek alphabet, namely, alpha(,),and beta (,),corresponding to letter A and B respectively in the Latin alphabet. The Arabic alphabet is called h.urūf almu‘jam (lit., "the letters of the dictionary"), al-h.urūf al-hijā’īyah (lit., "letters put in successive order"), and al-h.urūf al-abjadīyah (lit., "the letters put in the abjd order"), which is the classical Arabic alphabetical order.

They and their numerical values are as follows: (1) (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (70), (700),

(80),

(8),

(90),

(800),

(9),

(10), (20), (30), (40), (50),

(100), (200), (900), and

(300),

(400),

(500),

(60), (600),

(1000). They are combined together for

easy memorisation as follows: . This classical order is closer to the Greek alphabetical order than the modern one which is as follows: .

There are fourteen letters of the Arabic alphabet which occur in fourteen different combinations. These letters are: , , , , , , , , , , , , , and . They are always pronounced singly, such as: nūn for N, t.ā-hā for T.-H, and alif-lām-mīm, for A-L-M. Their combinations and the sūrahs in which they are located are as follows: (2, 3, 29, 30,

229

31, and 32); 44, 45, and 46); (26, and 28);

(10, 11, 12, 14, and 15); (42); (20), and

(19); (68);

(13); (50);

(7); (38),

(40, 41, 43, (27);

(36).

Ibn Qutaybah mentions four different views concerning these letters.

He states that each of these views has its own merit, which are as follows: These letters are the names of the sūrahs to which they belong; they are Allah's oaths; they are letters taken from Allah's attributes, and they are letters taken from the attributes of the Qur’ān. According to the first view, the letter or combined letters at the beginning of a certain sūrah is the name of that sūrah itself. Sūrat al-A‘rāf (sūrah 7), for example, is also called Sūrat . However, whenever the same letters occur at the beginning of more than one surah, the usual name of that surah is added to it, for example, (sūrah 2), (sūrah 3), and (sūrah 41).665 This is the view of Zayd ibn Aslam (d. 136/754).666 With regard to the second view, Ibn Qutaybah says that it means that Allah's oath includes all the letters of the alphabet by mentioning some of them. It is like someone saying that he has learned the ABC, meaning all the letters of the alphabet, or that he had read al-h.amdu lillāh, meaning the whole introductory sūrah of the Qur’ān.667 The reason for Allah's oaths with these letters is to indicate their nobility and merit ( ) "because they are the foundation of His Scriptures revealed in various languages, the bases of His beautiful names and exalted attributes, and the origins of the languages of nations by which they know each other, remember and believe in His Oneness..."668 The Qur’ānic verse , for example, according to this view, means "By the letters of the alphabet, it is the book where there is no doubt in it..." (Q. 2:1)669 With regard to the third view, the use of letters of the alphabet to indicate Allah's attributes is praised by Ibn Qutaybah as an art of

1. Ibn Qutaybah’s Ta’wīl, pp. 299-300 and al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, p. 228.

666. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 156.

667. Ibid.

668. Ibn Qutaybah., Ta’wīl, p. 301; and al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, p.

229.

669. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 301.

230

abbreviating words with letters commonly practised among the Arabs.670 One of the many examples given by him is the combined letters .

According to the interpretation attributed to Ibn ‘Abbās, each of these letters respectively stands for an attribute of Allah, namely, stands for (Efficient), and

for

(Guiding),

for

(Wise),

for

(All-knowing),

(truthful).671

for

Other examples given by Ibn Qutaybah are: stands respectively for (Allah's beauty), and

(Allah's sign), (Allah's glory);

,

,

, and

which

(Allah's magnificence), stands for

(Gentle)

(Exalted), two attributes of Allah.672 It is also reported that

and

according to Ibn ‘Abbās

is the abbreviation of “Allah, Jibril, and

Muhammad”. Another interpretation attributed to him is that the for

(I, Allah, know),

stands for

stands

(I, Allah, see), and

stands for (I, Allah, decide). This interpretation is chosen by alZajjāj who said that every letter should have a meaning.673 The fourth view is that of al-Kalbī who says that the combination of letters in means that the Qur’ān is an efficient, guiding, wise, knowing, ).674 . Instead of H.akīm, the letter y stands for ("His Hand is above their hands") is also attributed to al-Kalbī.675 However, al-Qurt.ubī states that according to alKalbī, these letters are of Allah's names by which He made His oath.676 Some exegetes whom Ibn Qutaybah does not identify say that , and truthful book (

, and letter

respectively means

("O man"),

("O human

670. Ibid., p. 302.

671. Ibid. For further details and other interpretations, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol.

16, pp. 32-35.

672 Ibid., p. 309.

673 Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 155.

Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 299.

Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 502 676 Al-Qurt.ubī al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 156.

674 675

231

being"), and

(the inkwell).677 According to Ibn ‘Abbās as reported by

‘Ikrimah, which is read t.āhā and means is the language of H.abashah (Abyssinia, Ethiopia), whereas in another report by Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, also from Ibn ‘Abbās, it is in the Nabatean language. Similarly, which is read yā-sīn meaning "O human being" is the language of T.ayy according to Ibn ‘Abbās (or H.abashah as reported by Ibn Mardawayh). The letter which is read nūn is a Persian word meaning ("I do 678 whatever I want") according to al-D.ah.h.āk as reported by al-Kirmānī.

Another group of scholars claim that the interpretation of al-h.urūf almuqat.t.a‘ah is known to Allah alone. ‘Āmir al-Sha‘bī, Sufyān al-Thawrī, and a group of traditionists are reported to have said that these letters "...are Allah's secret in the Qur’ān, and Allah has a secret in each of His Books.

They are included among ambiguous things ( ) known to Allah alone, which is not to be talked about, but to be believed and read as they are revealed".679 It is also reported that Abū Bakr and ‘Alī held the same view, and Abū ’l-Layth al-Samarqandī reports that ‘Umar, ‘Uthmān, and Ibn Mas‘ūd say that the al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah are among the hidden things upon which no commentary should be given. Abū H.ātim says that these letters are found in the opening of some sūrahs, but what Allah means by them is not for us to know. Another scholar, Abū Bakr al-Anbārī, says that there are letters in the Qur’ān the meaning of which are hidden from the whole world as a test from Allah; whoever believes in them will be rewarded and be pleased, and those who disbelieve and doubt them will become sinful and be far away (from Allah's guidance).680 According to the contemporary scholar Dr. Mus.t.afá Zayd, the most acceptable view on this subject is that these letters are a symbol of challenge; with them Allah challenged the Arab idolaters to produce a chapter similar to that of the Qur’ān by using the same letters of the alphabet used in the Qur’ān, if they kept rejecting the Qur’ān as a revelation from Him. These fourteen letters are half and representing the whole twenty-eight 677. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 309; Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 61.

678. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 114, 117 and 118, and Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 61.

679. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 154.

680. Ibid.

232

letters of the alphabet. They are found at the beginning of the sūrahs which speak about the Qur’ān, either at the beginning or in the middle of the respective sūrahs.681 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah does not mention the view of scholars who consider these al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah to be mysterious and inexplicable. This is most probably due to his conviction that the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt are known by the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm, as mentioned earlier in the second chapter of this study.

The Orientalists have many different theories about these mysterious letters. Noldeke's theory which he later abandoned is that they are the names of the owners of the sheets of the Qur’ān. He states that ‫ الر‬stands for alZubayr, stands for al-Mughīrah, stands for T.alh.ah ibn ‘Ubayd Allāh, and as well as letter stands for ‘Abd al-Rah.mān.682 Another Orientalist, Morris Seale, suggests that they are mnemonic devices as a guide to the contents of the sūrah. For example, in sūrat alShu‘arā’ (Poets, Q. 26) and sūrat al-Qas.as. (Story, Q. 28), the first verse in these two chapters is the combination of letters . These letters stand for T.ūr Sinā’ (Mount Sinai) and Mūsá (Moses), the two main subjects of these sūrahs. In sūrat Maryam (Mary, Q. 19) the first verse is the combination of letters . These five letters, as suggested by Seale, are introductory letters to the contents of this chapter: the priest Zacharia (Zakarīyā), the temple, the birth of John (Yah.yá), Jesus son of Mary (‘Īsá ibn Maryam) and Abraham as “a man of truth” ). Each letter stands for these five contents.

stands for

(a priest in the Hebrew sense rather than in Arabic

sense of a soothsayer), referring to Zakarīyā; although the word mih.rāb is used in this sūrah);

stands for stands for

(a temple, ;

stands

for ; and stands for who was Abraham. Seale admits that this 683 is only a conjecture.

James A. Bellamy had another theory. He proposed that these letters "were originally abbreviations of the basmalah, some of which became 681. For further details, see Dr. Mus.t.afá Zayd, Dirāsāt fī ’l-Tafsīr, pp. 49-50.

682. See Theodor Noldeke and Friedrich Schwally, Geschichte des Qorans i-ii (Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1961), vol. 2, p. 72.

683. See Morris Seale, Qur’ān and Bible (London: Croom Helm Ltd., 1978), pp 34-35.

233

corrupt early in the course of transmission". He assumes that since only the readers of Kūfah who regarded , , and as āyāt (Qur’ānic verses) with the exclusion of other groups of letters, whereas the non-Kūfan readers did not call any of them an āyah (a verse), but rather introductions to the sūrahs684, they are, like the basmalah, not part of the Qur’ān. Then to suit his theory, traditions mentioning these mysterious letters are rejected, and the occurrence of corruption in the Qur’ān is assumed.685 In my view, when the non-Kūfan readers did not call these letters āyāt, but fawātih. suwar, it is because they are not sufficient to make a word to constitute an āyah, as the minimum requirement for an āyah is one word.

The point of the discussion is whether the possibility of a word, let alone a letter, can constitute an āyah. Here Ibn al-Munayyar and Abū ‘Amr al-Dānī said that there is no word which is itself an āyah in the Qur’ān except (Q. 55:64), and that al-Zamakhsharī says that knowing the āyāt is based on tawqīf (revelation), and there is no room for qiyās (analogy) in it.686 Moreover, when al-Suyūt.ī said that they agreed on as an āyah, but disagreed on ,687 it does not mean that the latter is not a part of the Qur’ān, but rather it is not sufficient to be counted as one āyah.

Bellamy's theory is not plausible, either. He incorrectly developed the interpretation of Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr that these mysterious letters are Allah's names, such as , and , the combination of which makes (alRah.mān , one of the names of Allah and His attributes.688 Since only four out of the nineteen letters of the basmalah do not belong to Allah's names, he builds his theory that these mysterious letters were originally abbreviations of the basmalah, as mentioned earlier.

Montgomery Watt, after explaining and evaluating various theories of some Orientalists, such as Hirschfeld, Edward Goossens, Nöldeke and Alan Jones, admitted to the mysterious nature of these letters. He concluded: "We 684. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, pp. 268 and 171; and al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 1, p. 195.

685. James A. Bellamy, "The Mysterious Letters of the Koran: Old Abbreviations of the Basmalah", JAOS xciii (1973), pp. 277-278.

686. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, pp. 267-268.

687. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 1, p. 195.

688. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, pp. 32-33. This is also the interpretation of ‘Ikrimah, see Noldeke, Geschichte, vol. 2, p. 73.

234

end where we began; the letters are mysterious, and have so far baffled interpretation."689 B. Words which Have Many Different Meanings This subject is usually treated as one of the branches of the sciences of tafsīr called al-wujūh wa ’l-naz.ā’ir fī ’l-Qur’ān, usually translated as "homonyms and synonyms in the Qur’ān". Wujūh (sing. wajh, "face", "meaning", "aspect") are words which agree in wording but differ in meaning ( ); for example, the word s.alāh in the verse "and are constant in prayer" (Q. 2:3) has a different meaning from s.alāh in the following verse: "Said they: 'O Shu‘ayb! Does thy [habit of] praying compel thee to demand of us that we give up all that our forefathers were wont to worship,..." (Q. 11:87). In the first verse s.alāh means the established and obligatory prayer, whereas in the second, Shu‘ayb's s.alāh means his religion.690 Naz.ā’ir (sing. naz.īr, similar, equivalent, matching) are al-alfāz. almushtarikah, namely, words which indicate many different things equally, such as the word ‘ayn which equally means "eye", "spring" (the place where water comes out from the ground), "the sun itself", and "letter ". They also include al-alfāz. al-mutawat.i’ah (Latin: denoteta; sing. denotatum), namely, words that indicate many different things with one shared meaning, such as the word insān (man) which is applied to Zayd, ‘Umar, etc. Synonymous words (al-alfāz. al-mutarādifah) are also included in the naz.ā’ir, such as the words khamr, rāh., and ‘aqqār, which all mean one thing, the intoxicant 689. See W. Montgomery Watt, Bell's Introduction to the Qur’ān (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1970), pp. 61-65. For further studies on Western scholars' points of view on this subject, see A. Jeffery, "The Mystic Letters of the Koran", MW xiv (1924), pp. 247-260; Alan Jones, "The Mysterious Letters of the Qur’ān", SI 16 (1962), pp. 5-11; and R. Marston Speight, "The Opening Verses of the Chapters of the Qur’ān", MW 59/3-4 (1969), pp. 205-209. Among Muslim writers on this subject are al-Zarqānī, Manāhil al-‘Irfān, vol. 1, pp. 225-236; Dr. Hāshim Amir ‘Ali, "The Mysterious Letters of the Qur’ān", IC 36 (Jan. 1962), pp. iii-iv; and ‘Alī Nas.ūh. alT.āhir, "Abbreviations in the Holy Qur’ān", IR (Dec. 1950), pp. 8-12.

690. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 394-5; idem, Qurrah, p. 161; and Ibn Qutaybah, Ta‘wīl, p. 461.

235

made from raisins. Wujūh refers to a word with many different meanings, whereas naz.ā’ir refers to a word with the same concept but different wordings.691 This branch of science is very important in studying the Qur’ān. Abū ’l-Dardā’ and Muqātil ibn Sulaymān were reported to have said that a man would not become a true faqīh until he knew the wujūh in the Qur’ān.692 AlZarkashī ranked it number four among the forty-seven branches of Qur’ānic science in his work al-Burhān, whereas al-Suyūt.ī placed it at number thritynine of the eighty branches in his work al-Itqān.

Among the scholars of this branch of science were: Muh.ammad ibn al-Sā’ib al-Kalbī (d. 146/763), Muqātil ibn Sulaymān al-Balkhī (d. 150/767), Abū al-‘Abbās Muh.ammad ibn Yazīd ibn al-Mubarrad (d. 285/898), Abū Bakr Muh.ammad al-Naqqāsh (d. 351/962), Abū al-Fad.l Bakr ibn Muh.ammad al-Bukhārī (d. 514/1120-1121), Ah.mad ibn Fāris (d. 395/1005), Abū ‘Abd Allāh al-H.usayn al-Dāmaghānī (d. 478/1085-1086), Abū ’lH.asan ‘Alī al-Zaghwānī (d. 527/1133), Ibn al-Jawzī (d. 597/1201) and Abū ’l-Fad.l Hubaysh [al-]Tiflīsī (from Tiflis or Tbilisi, the capital of the present Republic of Georgia; d. 600/1204 or 629/1232).

Ibn Qutaybah mentions forty-four words which have many different meanings or wujūh in his Ta’wīl. These words and their meanings are as follows: 1.

(decree)

The basic or primary meaning of qad.ā’ is "finishing something entirely, either by word or by deed".693 Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of the verb qad.á which is derived from the mas.dar (verbal noun) qad.ā’, as follows: a.

(to decree, to ordain) which is the basic meaning of qad.á, as in "... thus, He withholds [from life] those upon whom He has decreed death,..." (Q. 39:42).694

691. For further details, see Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 46-48 (al-Rād.i's introduction) and pp. 83-84.

692. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 122.

693. See Lane, Lexicon, pt. 8, p. 2989 (supplement) 694. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 441; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 187.

236

b.

to order, to command), as in "For thy Sustainer has ordered that you shall worship none but Him." (Q. 17:23).695 This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās, al-H.asan, and Qatādah, according to al-T.abarsī.696 According to Yah.yá ibn Sallām, who mentions ten meanings of , this term in the above verse means (entrust, direct, recommend, charge, enjoin).697 This is also the view of the Mujāhid, based on the variant readings of Ubayy ibn Ka‘b, Ibn Mas‘ūd and al-D.ah.h.āk.698 c. (to inform), as in "And We made [this] known to the children of Israel through revelation: 'Twice, indeed, will you spread corruption on earth and will indeed become grossly overbearing.’" (Q. 17:4). This view of Ibn Qutaybah is also that of Abū ‘Ubaydah, al-Farrā’, al-T.abarsī, Ibn Kathīr, al-Suyūt.ī, and Yahyá ibn Sallām, who uses the term , the synonym of .699 Ibn Qutaybah and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī maintain that since Allah informed the children of Israel that they would commit corruption in the future, its occurrence was a decree from Him.700 d. (to make, to do), as in " And He [it is Who] 701 made them completely seven heavens." (Q. 41:12). Then the meaning 695. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 441; ibid., Tafsīr, p. 253; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 374; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 406; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 764; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 506.

696. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 409.

697. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf: Tafsīr al-Qur’ān mimā ’shtabahat Asmā’uh wa Tas.arrafat Ma‘ānīh, presented and edited by Hind Shalabī (Tunis: alSharikah al-Tūnīsiyyah lil-Tawzī‘ ,1979), p. 340.

698. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 37.

699. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 441; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

370; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 116; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 406; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 506; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 399; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 27; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 129; idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 173 and Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 340.

700. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 441 and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p.

406.

701. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 441; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 406; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 7. Yah.yá ibn Sallām and Ibn al-Jawzī use

237

eveloped and became "to accomplish, to complete, to fulfil". The dead person is called he has completed his appointed time", and “he has fulfilled (redeemed) his pledge (by death)." (Q. 33:23).702 2. a.

(guidance) Ibn Qutaybah mentions five meanings of hudá, as follows: (to guide), which is the basic meaning of hudá , as in

"... he said [to himself]: 'It may well be that my Sustainer will [thus] guide me onto the right path!'" (Q. 28:22),703 namely, the road to Madyan.704 b. (to guide by means of explanation), as in the term khalq (creation) for the meaning of qad.á in the above verse, see al-Tas.ārīf, p.

343 and Nuzhah, pp. 508-509. According to al-Farrā’, the term qad.á in the above verse means "He created and controlled them (khalaqahunna wa h.akamahunna), see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 13. As another example, Ibn Qutaybah cites Q. 41:12, and as a shāhid, he cites the poem of Abū Dhu’ayb where qad.á means "to make", as follows ‫" و‬With both of them two coats of mail made by David or [i.e., and] the perfect expert (blacksmith) Tubba‘." See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 441-442 and idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 2, pp. 17-18; see also [al-Mufad.d.al al-D.abbī], al-Mufad.d.alīyāt, p. 881. This poem is also cited by Ibn Fāris as a shāhid to indicate that the term qad.á in the verse in question means "He decided their creation" ( ); see Maqāyis vol. 5, p. 99. Tubba‘ was the title of the kings of Yemen, like the Pharaohs of Egypt, and the Caesars of the Roman empire. Tubba‘ did not make the coats of mail by himself, but by his blacksmiths who were experts in this profession. See also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 186; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 87. Al-Suyūt.ī cites Q. 80:23 as an example of qad.á meaning "to do", see alItqān, vol. 2, p. 129.

702. According to Ibn Qutaybah qad.á nah.bahu means qutila (he was killed), since the verse in question deals with martyrs; see Ta’wīl, p. 183; and idem, Tafsīr, p.

349. For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, pp. 158-160.

703. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 443; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 628; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 474; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 297; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 124.

According to Yah.yá ibn Sallām, this is the meaning given by Qatādah, see al-Tas.ārīf, p. 100.

704. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 304; ‘Ikrimah says that Moses was to choose one of four roads before him; when he made his choice and chose the correct one, he said the verse mentioned above; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 247.

238

"And as for [the tribe of] Thamūd, We offered them guidance [by means of explanation], but they chose blindness in preference to the guidance:..." (Q. 41:17).705 According to Qatādah fahadaynāhum means "We have explained to them the way to virtue as well as evil," whereas according to Ibn ‘Abbās, al-Suddī and Ibn Zayd it means "We have explained to them the truth."706 c. (to guide by means of calling), as in ".... Thou art a warner only; and for every folk a guide." (Q. 13:7, Pickthall).707 The guide meant in this verse is Allah according to Ibn ‘Abbās, Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, al-D.ah.h.āk and Mujāhid, whereas according to Qatādah, al-Zajjāj, Ibn Zayd and Ibn ‘Abbās in another report, it is a prophet sent to his people. Another view says that a guide here means any person who calls people to the truth.708 d. (to guide by means of inspiration), as in "He replied: Our Sustainer is He Who gives unto everything [that exists] its true nature and form, and thereupon guides it."

(Q. 20:50), namely, by means of inspiration.709 Muh.ammad Asad translates khalqahu as "its true nature and form", and Ibn Qutaybah, giving his commentary on it, said that it means "its form from the females (of its species)", namely, every creature is created and formed inside its mother's womb according to her species. The inspiration meant in this verse according to Ibn Qutaybah, Ibn ‘Abbās, al-Suddī and alFarrā’, is the sexual instinct among creatures towards their own species.710 However, Ibn Qutaybah also mentions another interpretation, namely, "the inspiration to look for pasture and to avoid danger ( 705. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 443; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 297; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 626; and idem, Qurrah, p. 241.

706. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 8-9.

707. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, 443; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 473; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 627; idem, Qurrah, p. 242; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 298; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, p. 103; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 123.

708. See Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 278.

709. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 444; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 475-476; Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 629; and idem, Qurrah, p. 244.

710. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 444; idem, Tafsīr, p. 279; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 13; and al-Farrā’, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 181.

239

)". This is similar to the view of Tiflīsī and al-Suyūt.ī when they said that hadá in the above verse means "the inspiration to look for food".711 The third interpretation is that of Mujāhid, ‘At.ā’, Muqātil, and Yah.yá ibn Sallām which is a combination of the two previous interpretations.712 In the following verse “and Who determines the nature [of all that exists], and thereupon guides it [towards its fulfilment]" (Q. 87:3) the guidance in this verse according to Ibn Qutaybah is the inspiration to approach the females, namely, the sexual instinct. This is also the view of Muqātil, Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Kalbī, al-Farrā’ and Tiflīsī.713 In my view, the meaning of hadá in this type of Qur’anīc verse is the natural instinct given to every creature to preserve its life and species in particular, and to fulfil its nature in general, because it includes both views mentioned above. e. (to guide by means of doing), as in “... and that Allah does not bless with His guidance the artful schemes of those who betray their trust." (Q. 12:52). It means that Allah will not make the artful schemes of the betrayers work. Another interpretation is that it means Allah will not make it proper for them.714 Ibn al-Jawzī mentions twenty-four meanings of hadá in his work Nuzhah, but mentions fourteen only in his work Qurrah. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Zarkashī, al-Suyūt.ī, and Tiflīsī mention seventeen meanings, whereas al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn Qutaybah mention respectively sixteen and four meanings. Ibn Qutaybah deals with this word very briefly: less than one-fifth of the total number of its meanings.715 711. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 299 and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 123.

712 . See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 13; and Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 103.

713. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 444; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 103; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 474; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 256; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 299; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 629.

714. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 444. This is also the view of al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī, Ibn al-Jawzī, al-Zarkashī, and al-Suyūt.ī; see Qāmūs, p. 475; Wujūh, p. 299; Nuzhah, p. 629; al-Burhān, vol. 1, p. 104; and al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 123.

715. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 625-30; idem, Qurrah, pp. 241-244; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, pp. 96-123; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 1, pp. 102-104; al-Suyūt.ī,

240

3. a.

(nation, people, community) Ibn Qutaybah gives us five meanings of ummah as follows: (a category of people, a community), which is the basic meaning of the term ummah, as in

"All mankind were once a single community; [then they began to differ] whereupon Allah raised up the prophets..." (Q.2:213).

According to Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn al-Jawzī, ummah here means millah (religion); al-T.abarsī says ummah wāh.idah means ‘alá millah wāh.idah (belonging to one religion), whereas al-Zamakhsharī does not interpret ummah, probably retaining its basic meaning as mentioned above. A question arises: what religion did people embrace in the above verse? It was the true religion (Islam), according to Ibn ‘Abbās in one report, Qatādah, Mujāhid, ‘Ikrmah and al-D.ah.h.āk; this is the interpretation chosen by Tiflīsī and Ibn Kathīr. This view is supported with ‘Abd Allāh ibn Mas‘ūd's - or, according to Ibn Kathīr, Ubayy ibn Ka‘b's - variant reading kāna ’l-nāsu ummatan wāh.idatan fa’khtalafū with the addition of fa’khtalafū ("then they disagreed"). The other interpretation is that the community in the above verse followed disbelief; this is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās in another report and also that of al-H.asan. This is also the view of Ibn Qutaybah and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī when they say that ummah wāh.idah means s.infan wāh.idan fī ’l-d.alāl ("a kind of people in error").716 b. (a period of time), as in "... and he [suddenly] remembered [Joseph] after a (long) period of time..." (Q. 12:45).717 This period was said to have been seven years.718 This is the interpretation of al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 122-124; idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, pp. 307-8; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp.

295-300; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 473-476; and Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 443-444.

716. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 72; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 143; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, pp. 306-307; al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 134; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 29; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 3, pp. 30-33; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 257; Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 445; and al-Rāghib alAs.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 23.

717. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 445; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, pp.

99 and 313; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 47; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 28; al-Zamakshsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 660; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 144.

718 Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, pp. 202 and 218.

241

Ibn ‘Abbās, al-H.asan, Mujāhid, and Qatādah.719 This period of time can mean "years", as in )٨ : “And if We defer their suffering until a reckoned period of time..." (Q. 11:8). It means reckoned years.720 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the term ummah meaning “years” in the above verse is the language of Azdshanū’ah, one of the four branches of Azd, an ancient Arab tribe living in Yemen.721 Tiflīsī shares Ibn Qutaybah's view on the two verses above.722 Ibn alJawzī, however, says that the word ummah in the above verses means "a period of time" which is contrary to the view of al-Dāmaghānī who says that it means in both verses "years."723 However, a variant reading attributed to Ibn ‘Abbās, ‘Ikrīmah and al-D.ah.h.āk is ba‘da amahin and ba‘da amhin, meaning "after forgetting" ( ).724 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the term ummah meaning nisyān (“forgetting”) in the above verse is the language of Tamīm and Qays (ibn) ‘Aylān.725 c. (leader, chief, head and commander), as in “Verily, Abraham was a leader, obedient to Allah,..." (Q. 16:120). This is the view of Ibn Qutaybah and Abū ‘Ubaydah as well as Qatādah according to Yah.yá ibn Sallām.726 This is also the language of the Quraysh, according to Ibn ‘Abbās.727 It means people followed his examples. Prophet Abraham was referred to as ummah because he and the people who followed him constituted a community, so that he was the 719. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, 238.

720. Ibn Qutaybh, Ta’wīl, p. 445.

721 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 49.

722 Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 29 723 Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 144; idem, Qurrah, p. 56; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 43.

724. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 201; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 313; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 660. See also Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 136; Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, p. 218; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, alMufradāt, p. 23; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 103..

725 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 51 726. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 445; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 30; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

144; idem, Qurrah, p. 56; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 43; and Yah.yá ibn Sallām, alTas.ārīf, p. 152. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the term ummah meaning imām in this verse is the language of the Quraysh, see Gharīb al Qur’ān, p. 53.

727 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al Qur’ān, p. 53.

242

founder of that ummah. It is also said that he was called an ummah because he possessed the good qualities of an ummah. He was an ummah himself, as he represented an ummah.728 He was the only believer when other people disbelieved; therefore he was an ummah, and this is the view of Mujāhid. Another view is that he was an ummah because he was an example and a teacher to the people.729 According to Ibn Mas‘ūd and Ibn ‘Umar the term ummah means respectively "the person who teaches good things" ( ) and "the person who teaches people their religion" (

).730

d. Despite the difference of interpretations, they all complement each other and serve to broaden the meaning of the verse. e. (a group of ‘ulamā’), as in "And that there might grow out of you a group of ‘ulamā’ who teach all that is good..." (Q. 3:104). They are, according to al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, a group of selected people with knowledge and good work who become examples for others.731 There are two different views concerning meaning of the particle min in this verse: (1) lil-tab‘īd. (a partition min), namely, "some", so that the verse means that some of the Muslims should establish a group of ‘ulamā’ to teach people virtuous deeds, as this duty is fard. kifāyah, a duty that should be carried out by a group of Muslims only, in this case, the ‘ulamā’. This is the view of Ibn Qutaybah and al-Qurt.ubī;732 (2) lil-tabyīn (an explanatory min), so that the verse means "an ummah inviting unto all that is good might grow out 728. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 445 and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p.

23. Here Ibn al-Jawzī is quoting Ibn Qutaybah, see Nuzhah, p. 144. Al-Qurt.ubī says that the ummah is the person who combines good things in himself (

), see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, p. 197.

729. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 445; idem, Tafsīr, p. 249; al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 755; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 391; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 114.

730 Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 612.

731. See al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 23.

732. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 446; idem, Tafsīr, p. 108; and al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 165. Al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī, and Tiflīsī mention neither this verse nor any other in which the word ummah means a group of ‘ulamā’.

243

of you". In other words, "be an ummah that invite unto all that is good".733 f. (the religion), as in "... Behold, we found our forefathers following one religion, and, verily, it is but in their footsteps that we follow!" (Q. 43:23).734 Abū ‘Ubaydah interprets as ("following one religion and 735 uprightness").

Al-Farrā‘ and al-Zamakhsharī give also the variant reading immah beside ummah. According to al-Farrā’, ummah is the reading of the qurrā’ except Mujāhid, as well as ‘Umar ibn ‘Abd al‘Azīz who read immah.736 Al-Zamakhsharī states that both ummah and immah come from the root amma ("to intend"). Ummah means "the intended way", while immah means "the condition of the person who has the intention". Al-Zamakhsharī also gives us another interpretation of the term ‘alá ummah, namely, ("in good living and good condition").737 The expression fulān lā ummata lahu means "So-and-so has no religion."738 As a shāhid from poetry Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of al-Nābighah in which ummah means religion, as follows: * “I have sworn so that I would not leave any doubt in your mind; will the person who has a religion verily commit a sin 739 while he [at the same time] is obeying [his religion]?”

According to Ibn Fāris, instead of ummah, it should be read immah to mean "a religion" in this poem, for ummah here means "a dominating tradition."740 A similar expression is wa hal yastawī dhū ummah wa kafūr, meaning "And are one who has religion and one who is an infidel equal?"741 Originally, ummah was said of a group of people belonging to one 733. Al-Zamakshsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 224; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 1, p. 483.

734. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 446; idem, Tafsīr, p. 397; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 136.

735 Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, 203 736 Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 30.

737 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1324.

738. Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 90.

739. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta‘wīl, p. 446 and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p.

23.

740 Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 28.

741 Lane, Lexicon, pt. p. 90.

244

religion, then later on was meant the religion itself, as in “And verily, this religion of yours is one religion ...” (Q. 23:52).742 This is also the interpretation of al-H.asan, Ibn Jurayj, Yah.yá ibn Sallām and Ibn Kathīr.743 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah mentions five meanings of ummah.

Ibn al-Jawzī also mentions five, while Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī mention nine, but they do not include "a group of ‘ulamā’" as one of its wujūh.

4.

(covenant)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions six meanings of ‘ahd, as follows: a. (assurance of security, safety, peace, protection) as in "...observe, then, your security with them until the end of the term agreed with them..." (Q. 9:4).744 According to Tiflīsī the meaning of ‘ahd in this verse is amānah (loyalty),745 whereas according to al-Suyūt.ī it means mīthāq (agreement, covenant).746 b.

(oath, promise) as in

"and fulfil your oath

with Allah when you make the oath," as the verse continues with "... and do not break [your] oaths after having [freely] confirmed them..." (Q. 16:91).747 c. (injunction, instruction, advice), as in "Did I not enjoin you, O you children of Adam, that you

742. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 446; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 43; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 143; idem, Qurrah, p. 56; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 129.

743. See Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 151; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4. 109. See also Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 257 and vol. 4, p. 136.

744. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 447; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 447; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 312.

745. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 209 746. Al-Suyūt.ī Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 628.

747. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 447; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 350; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 448; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 209; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp.

336-337. Ibn ‘Abbās says that the term ‘ahd includes a promise; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 382.

245

should not worship Satan..." (Q. 36:60).748 d. (protection of honour), as in the h.adīth "Verily, the protection of honour is a part of faith."749 e. (time) as in the expression ("That happened in the time of So-and-so").750 f. (agreement, covenant), as in "... He said: 'Behold, I shall make thee a leader of men.' Abraham asked: 'And [wilt Thou make leaders] of my offspring as well?' [Allah] answered: 'My covenant does not embrace the evildoers.'" (Q. 2:124). It means that wrong doers among his descendants will be excluded from Allah's covenant751 or, according to Mujāhid and Ibn al-Jawzī, will be excluded from the leadership and prophethood respectively.752 Ibn al-Jawzī mentions seven meanings of the term ‘ahd in his work Nuzhah, whereas Ibn Qutaybah, al-Dāmaghānī, and al-Tiflīsī mentions six meanings in their respective works. Two meanings given by Ibn Qutaybah, namely, al-h.ifāz. and al-zamān, both without any example from the Qur’ān, are not included by any of the writers mentioned above.

5. (pact, covenant; blood relationship, nearness with respect to kindred) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of ill, as follows: a. (ilāh, Allah), as in "They respect 748. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 447; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 350; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 447; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 209; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 15, p. 47. Al-T.abarsī's interpretation of the said verse is as follows: "Have I not commanded you (

) through the tongues of prophets and messengers in the

revealed books not to worship Satan...?"; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, 430.

749. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 337. No Qur’ānic verse was given as an example

by Ibn Qutaybah. For the h.adīth, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 312.

750. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 447. Again, no Qur’ānic verse was given by Ibn Qutaybah as an example here.

751. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 448 and al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 209.

752. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 201 and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 448. For further details on the meanings of of ‘ahd see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, pp.

2182-2183 (s.v. ).

246

neither Allah nor protective obligation with regard to a believer..." (Q. 9:10). Instead of "tie" and "pact" as translated respectively by Asad and Pickthall, the term ill here means Allah, according to Ibn Qutaybah, based on Mujāhid's interpretation. Ibn Qutaybah says that the word "ill" in "Jibrīl" - which can be read "Jibra Ill" - means "Allah".753 Al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, however, rejects the idea that ill or iyl is the name of Allah.754 Lane mentions "lordship" (rubūbīyah) as one of the meanings of the term ill.755 According to Ibn ‘Abbās the term ill in the above verse is qarābah (kinship, relationship) in the language of the Quraysh.756 Speaking of the term jabr as being among the ad.dād, al-Anbārī says that the term means a king (malik) as well as a servant (‘abd), and the word "Jabra’il" means "‘Abd Allāh" (the servant of Allah); jabr means "servant", and il or ill means al-rubūbiyyah (the lordship). He says that "Jibra Ill" is the reading of Ibn Ya‘mar. On the other hand, the term ill in the verse in question means Allah according to "some commentators". When the Muslims who were fighting Musaylimah read to Abū Bakr some verses of what Musaylimah claimed to be a revealed book, Abū Bakr said, "Verily, this is not a word which comes from God (Allah)" ( ).757 In other versions Abū Bakr said: "It is indeed a statement which does not come from lordship (God)" ( ),758 and "This would not have come from Allah" ( ).759 According to Ibn Jinnī the word Allāh in the Nabatean language is ill.760 b. (kinship, relationship), as in the poem of H.assān ibn Thābit, as follows: * "By thy life! Verily, 753. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 449; Sufyān al-Thawrī, Tafsīr al-Qur’ān alKarīm, ed. and annot. Imtiyāz ‘Alī ‘Arshī, 1st ed. (Rampur: Hindustan Printing Works, 1385/1965), p. 81; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 21.

754. See al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 20.

755

Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 75.

Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 47.

757 Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 394-395.

758 Ibn Qutaybah, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 2, p. 532 759 Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 21.

760 Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 109.

756

247

thy kinship with the Quraysh tribe is like the kinship of the young camel with the young of the ostrich." This meaning of the term ill is a good one (wajh h.asan) for that term in the above verse.761 Ibn al-Anbārī also mentions the other meanings of ill in the above verse, namely, kinship (qarābah), and treaty (h.ilf), whereas dhimmah in the above verse means covenant (‘ahd).762 c. (covenant, treaty, pact), as in the above verse which is the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah.763 Both Ibn Qutaybah and Ibn al-Anbārī mention the three meanings of the term ill in the Qur’ān in their respective works; the former in his dealing with the term ill itself, while the latter when dealing with the term jabr as having two opposite meanings. However, the latter gives us more details of it. Al-Zamakhsharī also dealt with the term. However, al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī, al-Tiflīsī and al-Qurtubī did not include this term in their works.764 6.

(obedience)

The basic meaning of qunūt is "obedience", then the meaning developed into "standing in prayer". The most common meaning of qunūt in Arabic language is the du‘ā’ (supplication) to Allah while standing.

However, the term is also applicable to any other act of obedience, even the nīyah (intention) of doing it.765 This is also the view of Ibn Qutaybah who confirms that the basic meaning of qunūt is "obedience to Allah"; other meanings, such as "prayer", "standing in prayer", and "supplication" are derived from it.766 According to al-Tabarsī, the term also means "the continuance of doing a particluar thing" ( ).767 Ibn Qutaybah mentions five meanings of qunūt, as follows: 761. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 449 and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 21.

762 Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 395.

763. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 450; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz, vol. 1, p. 253; and Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 395. Al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī mentions "pact" as well as "kinship" as the meaning of ill in the above Qur’ānic verse; see al-Mufradāt, p. 20.

764. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 530.

765. See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, pp. 73-74 766. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 452; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p. 171; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 31.

767. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 342.

248

a.

(standing). The prayer is called qunūt because it is performed while standing. When the Prophet was asked: "What is the most excellent characteristic of the act of prayer?", he answered: "the long continuance of the standing (in prayer)".768 The example from the Qur’ān is "Or [dost thou deem thyself equal to] one who stands [in prayer] throughout the night, prostrating himself or standing, ever-mindful of the life to come, and hoping for his Sustainer's grace?" (Q. 39:9).769 According to some commentators, this verse also indicates that the qunūt means not only standing in the prayer, but also the khushū‘ (submissiveness) in it.770 Ibn Qutaybah also cites a h.adīth stating that the similarity of the mujāhid (the person who strives in the path of Allah) is like a person who performs prayer while fasting (

).771 The h.adīth was reported by Muslim and Ah.mad on the authority of Abū Hurayrah. b. (supplication), since it is cited while one is standing in prayer before or after bowing (ruku’). No example from the Qur’ān is given. c. (restraint from talking while standing in prayer), except from reciting the verses of the Qur’ān. Zayd ibn Arqam was reported to have said: "We used to talk while we were [standing] in prayer until it was revealed ‘... and stand before Allah [in prayer] restraining from talking'." (Q. 2:238).772 This is also the view of 768. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 451; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 484; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 73; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2566. According to al-Rāghib alAs.bahānī the term qunūt in this h.adīth means "keeping oneself busy with worship and avoiding any other activity" ( ), see al-Mufradāt, p. 413. The h.adīth was reported by Muslim, al-Nasā’ī, Ibn Mājah, al-Tirmidhī and Ah.mad on the authority of Jābir ibn ‘Abd Allāh; see Wensinck, al-Mu‘jam, vol. 5, p. 473 (s.v.

); it

was also reported by al-Bayhaqī, see al-Sunan al-Kubrá, vol. 3, p. 8.

769. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 451; idem, Tafsīr, p. 382; and al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p.

241.

770. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 51.

771. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 451.

772. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 452; Abū al-H.usayn Sa‘īd Hibat Allāh alRāwandī, Fiqh al-Qur’ān, ed. al-Sayyid Ah.mad al-H.usaynī, 2 vols. (Qumm: al-

249

Mujāhid when he says that qānitīn in this verse means being at a standstill and refraining hands and sight from wandering.773 However, it is also possible that qānitīn in this verse means "obeying"; this is also the view of al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī.774 d. (the affirmation of one's serfdom), as in "For, unto Him belongs every being that is in the heavens and on earth; all things affirm their serfdom to Him." (Q. 30:26).775 e. (obedience), as in "... And the obedient men and the obedient women..." (Q. 33:35, Lane).776 Al-T.abarsī mentions two meanings of and in the said verse, i.e., "the men who keep on doing good deeds", and "the women who keep on doing good deeds," and "the men who supplicate" and "the women who supplicate."777 These five meanings of qunūt are also mentioned by alSuyūt.ī.778 7. a.

(recompense) Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of dīn, as follows: (recompense), as in "Lord of the Day of

Mat.ba‘ah al-‘Ilmiyyah, 1397 A.H.), vol. 1, p. 100; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 241; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 31; Lane translated the above verse as follows: "And stand ye unto God, in the divinely-appointed act of prayer, refraining from talking"; see Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2566.

773 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 163.

774 Al- Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 391; Ibn al-Jawzī , Nuzhah, p. 483; and alSuyūt.ī, Asbāb al-Nuzūl (Cairo: Dār al-Tah.rīr lil-T.ab‘ wa ’l-Nashr, 1382 A.H.), p. 33.

775. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 452; idem, Tafsīr, p. 340; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, alTas.ārīf, p. 147; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 391; and al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 241.

According to Ibn ‘Abbās and Abū ‘Ubaydah the term

in the said verse means

(obedient); see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 302; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 121.

776. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta‘wīl, p. 452; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 147. Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 484; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 242; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2566.

777. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 358.

778. Al-Suyūt.ī Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 173.

250

Recompense [and of Punishment (al-qas.as.)]. (Q. 1:4)779 The Arabs say meaning "you will be rewarded (compensated) according to your deed" or "people will do to you as you do to them".780 b. (supreme authority and power), as the Arabs say "I conquered the people, I subdue them, so they submitted."

Therefore, the verse and , respectively means "and the supreme authority belongs to Allah" (Q. 2:193), and "the whole supreme authority belongs to Allah" (Q. 8 39).781 Ibn Kathīr and al-Zamakhsharī, however, mention "the religion of Islam" as the meaning of dīn in the above verse, whereas al-T.abarsī gives "obedience".782 c. (obedience), as in "... and [they] do not follow the religion of truth" (Q. 9:29) which means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, Abū ‘Ubaydah, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī, "[they] do not obey [Allah] with true obedience" ( [ ] ) 783 d.

(reckoning), as in "... that is the right reckoning." (Q. 9:36) 784 It means that the four sacred months Muh.arram, Rajab, Dhū ’l-Qa‘dah and Dhū ’l-H.ijjah during which

779. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 453; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

23; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 9; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

24; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 101; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 298; and idem, Qurrah, p. 115 780. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 453; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 13, p. 169 (s.v. ).

781. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 453.

782. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 234; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p.

513 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 286.

783. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 453-454; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 255; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 101; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 298; and idem, Qurrah, p. 116. Al-Zamakhshsarī, however, mentions "the religion of Islam which is the truth" as the meaning of dīn al-h.aqq in the above verse, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 537.

784. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 454 and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 101. According to Ibn al-Jawzī, dīn here means "number" (‘adad); see Nuzhah, p. 298; and idem, Qurrah, p.

115. Both Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Dāmaghānī mention al-h.isāb as one of the meanings of the dīn, with different examples; the former with Q. 24:25, and the latter with Q. 83:11; see Nuzhah, p. 297; idem, Qurrah, p. 115; and Qāmūs, p. 178.

251

warfare was prohibited in pre-Islamic Arabia - in one year is the right reckoning. However, al-Zamakhsharī's interpretation of the term dīn is "religion", so the above verse means that the sacredness of the four months is the upright religion, the religion of Abraham and Ishmael.785 With regard to the term dāna in the following h.adīth, Lane mentions three various interpretations, as follows: "The intelligent is he who (1) abases, and enslaves himself, (2) who reckons himself, or (3) who overcomes himself, and works for that which shall be after death."786 Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of dīn, whereas al-Dāmaghānī as well as al-Suyūt.ī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī mention five, six and ten respectively. With the exception of Ibn Qutaybah, they mention the term dīn in the Qur’ān which means "religion" - (millah) according to alDāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī, dīn al-islām bi‘aynih (the religion of Islam itself) according to al-Tiflīsī - among which is as follows: "... and to establish worship and to pay the poor-due. That is the true religion." (Q. 98:5). 787 Ibn Qutaybah does not deal with dīn which means religion here probably because it is easy to identify, such as in the verse "Lo! religion with Allah (is) Islam" (Q. 3: 19).

8.

(master, client, kinsfolk)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions six meanings of mawlá as follows: a. (al-mu‘tiq, manumitter of slaves). No example is given by Ibn Qutaybah. b. (al-mu‘taq, client, freed slave). No example is given by Ibn Qutaybah, but Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī give us the following example: “....And if you know not who their fathers were, [call them] your brethren in faith and your 785. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 541.

786 See Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 943.

787. Beside millah, al-Dāmaghānī mentions also

as another meaning of

dīn; Qāmūs, pp. 178-179; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 298; idem, Qurrah, p. 116; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 102; al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 102; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, p. 1625; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 523. Al-Qurt.ubī mentions t.ā‘ah and millah as the meaning of dīn on the said verse, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 43.

252

clients." (Q. 33:5).788 c. ُ‫( عَصَبَة‬man's paternal relative, kinsman), as in "Now, behold, I am afraid of [what] my kinsfolk [will do] after I am gone,..." (Q.19:5, Asad).789 Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn al-Anbārī interpret mawālī in this verse as "paternal cousins" ( ), whereas alTiflīsī inteprets it as "inheritors" ( d.

).790

(guardian, patron, protector), whether a relative or not.The example of the relative mawlá is the Prophet's following statement: “Any woman who marries without the consent of her guardian her marriage is void." 791 The example of the non-relative mawlá is as follows “This, because God is the Protector of all who have attained to faith, whereas they who deny the truth have no protector." (Q. 47:11, Asad).792 According to al-Dāmaghānī and al-Dāmaghānī the term mawlá in this verse means rabb (Master, Lord).793 The example of the mawlá who is

788. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 455; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 278; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 498. Abū ‘Ubaydah's and al-Tabarsi's interpretation of mawālīkum in the said verse is "your paternal cousins" and "associate (allies)"; Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 134; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 337.

789. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 455; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 498; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 408. This is the meaning of mawālī in this verse in the language of the Quraysh, according to Ibn ‘Abbās, see Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 43; and Abū ‘Ubayd al-Qāsim ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il al-Wāridah fī ’l-Qur’ān alKarīm: Riwāyah ‘an al-S.ah.ābī ’l-Jalīl Ibn ‘Abbās Rad.iya ’llāh ‘anh. Edited, commented, and annotated by Dr. ‘Abd al-H.amīd al-Sayyid T.alab (Kuwayt: Mat.bū‘āt Jāmi‘at al-Kuwayt, 1985), p. 82.

790. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 1; Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p.

47; and al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 278.

791. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 455; and Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 46. The h.adīth was reported by al-Dārimī and Abū Dā’ūd, al-Tirmidhī, Ibn Mājah and Ah.mad ibn H.anbal; see Wensinck, al-Mu‘jam, vol. 1, p. 190 (s.v. ); it was also reported by al-Bayhaqī, see al-Sunan al-Kubrá, vol. 7, p. 138.

792. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 455; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

215; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1365; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 100.

793 Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 497; and al-Dāmaghānī, Wujūh, p. 278.

253

either a relative or not, is as follows: "The Day when no guardian shall be of the least avail to his friend,..." (Q. 44:41), namely, according to Ibn Qutaybah's interpretation, the day when the help of a guardian, whether he is a relative or not, is of no avail.794 e. (ally), as in the poem of al-Nābighah al-Ja‘dī when he said: "(They are) mawālī of alliance, not of kinship," namely, they are allies and not kinsfolk or, according to Ibn Manz.ūr, paternal cousins.795 f. (have a higher claim, more entitled to), as in "The Prophet has a higher claim on the believers than [they have on] their own selves,..." (Q. 33:6, Asad). It means that the Prophet is more entitled to be obeyed by the believers than they are by their own selves.796 According to al-Farrā’, the above verse was revealed to disprove the practice of Muslims in making brotherhood among themselves, so that they can inherit from each other, like natural brothers, instead of giving the inheritance to their relatives and families. Therefore, it was revealed that the Prophet is closer to them than themselves, and yet, they cannot inherit from him, let alone inherit from their adopted brothers.797 In another report it is said that when the Prophet ordered people to join him in the campaign of Tabūk, a group of people said that they would first ask their parents' permission; then the above verse was revealed.798 The term mawlá, as we have seen, belongs to the category of ad.dād. It means "the person who frees a slave" as well as "the freed slave". It has many other meanings in the Qur’ān. Ibn Qutaybah and Tiflīsī mention six meanings of mawlá, while Ibn al-Anbārī and alSuyūt.ī mentions nine and eight meanings respectively. Al-Dāmaghānī, in 794. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 455; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1343; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 67. However, according to al-Dāmaghānī and al-Tiflīsī, mawlá in this verse means "a relative among the disbelievers", see Qāmūs, p. 497, and Wujūh, p. 278.

795. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 456; Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 49; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 409.

796. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 455-456.

797 Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 335.

798 Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 338.

254

dealing with the term walī gives us five meanings of each walī and mawlá, while Ibn al-Jawzī does not mention this term in his works Nuzhah and Qurrah .799 9.

(straying) The basic meaning of d.alāl is "straying" which is the opposite of "guidance".800 Ibn Qutaybah cites three meanings of d.alāl, as follows:

a.

(confusion and abandoning the truth or losing or

straying from the right way),801 as in "And found thee lost on thy way, and guided thee?" (Q. 93:7, Asad).802 Ibn al-Jawzī mentions two different meanings of the term d.alāl in the above verse: "forgetting", which is the view of Tha‘lab, and "straying", upon which five interpretations are given: (a) the Prophet's straying from the characteristics of prophethood ), which is the view of al-H.asan and al-D.ah.h.āk; (b) his straying at the mountain paths of Makkah when he was a small boy, and Allah brought him back to his grand-father ‘Abd al-Mut.t.alib, which is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās; (c) his straying when the the halter (nose rope) of his camel which was carrying Khadījah's goods to Syria was taken one day by Iblis and led astray, then Jibrīl came to rescue and led it back to the caravan, which is the view of Sa‘īd ibn al-Musayyab; (d) his being among straying people, and Allah guided him, which is the view of Ibn al-Sā’ib, al-Farrā’, and al-Kisā’ī; and (e) his being undistinguished and unknown, and Allah guided people to him, so that they knew him well, and this is the view of ‘Abd al-‘Azīz ibn Yah.yá and Muh.ammad ibn ‘Alī al-Tirmidhī. 803 b. (forgetfulness), as in "And if two men are not 799. For further details of the term mawlá, see al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 278; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 496-498; Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 46-50; and al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 265.

800 Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 390.

801. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 457; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 409 and idem, Qurrah, p. 164.

802. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 457 and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 1796.

803 Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 409; and idem, Qurrah, pp. 196-197. See also alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1616; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p.

506.

255

available, then a man and two women from among such as are acceptable to you as witnesses, so that if one of them should forget, the other could remind her." (Q. 2:282). This interpretation is according to that of Ibn Qutaybah, Yah.yá ibn Sallām, Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Farrā’.804 c. (annihilation and voidness), as in "And they say: 'What! After we have been annihilated and become united with the earth, shall we indeed be [restored to life] in a new act of creation?'" (Q. 32:10).805 Similar interpretations are also given

by Abū ‘Ubaydah, al-Farrā’, Ibn Kathīr, al-Zamakhsharī and alT.abarsī.806 As we have seen Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings only of d.alāl.

Tiflīsī, al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī mention respectively seven, eight and ten meanings, among which are jahl (ignorance) and khusrān (loss).807 10. a.

(leader) Four meanings of imām are cited by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: (the person whose example you follow), which is the basic

meaning of imām, as in "He said: 'Behold, I shall make thee a leader of men.'" (Q. 2:124, Asad).808 804. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 457; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 347; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 82; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 184; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 182; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

398; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 393; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 293; al-Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 183; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 409; and idem, Qurrah, p. 166. See also Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 343; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 1797.

805. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 45; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 408. Ibn al-Jawzī mentions also Q. 18:104 as an example, while al-Dāmaghānī mentions Q. 47:1 and 8, and Q. 18:104; see Qurrah, p. 166; and Qāmūs, p. 293.

806. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 131; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 331; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 466; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1112; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 328; see also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 392.

807. The example of d.alāl meaning jahl but nisyān according to Ibn Qutaybah is Q. 26:20. The example of d.alāl meaning khusrān is Q. 36:24 and 40:25; see Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 181-182; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 407-409; idem, Qurrah, pp. 165-166; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 292.

808. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 459; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 102; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 201. See also Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 126,

256

b.

(the book recording the deeds of mankind in this world), as in

"On the day We shall summon all men with their record [namely, the book containing the records of their deeds], ..." (Q. 17:71, Pickthall).809 Al-T.abarsī mentions five interpretations of the term imām in the said verse: (1) of Ibn ‘Abbās according to one report, al-H.asan and Abū al-‘Āliyah, as mentioned above; (2) of Ibn Zayd and al-D.ah.h.āk, the revealed book, i.e., it will be called "O people of the Qur’ān, O people of the Torah..." (3) of Mujāhid and Qatādah, the prophet of people, i.e., it will be proclaimed "Bring forth the followers of Abraham, the followers of Moses, and of Muh.ammad;" they will come forward and will take their books in their right hands; then it will be summoned: "Bring forward the followers of Satan and misguiding leaders"; this is another interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās as reported by Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr; (4) of al-Jubbā’ī and Abū ‘Ubaydah, the ‘ulamā’ and leaders followed by people;810 and (5) of Muh.ammad ibn Ka‘b, who mistook imām for ummahāt ("mothers") as plural for umm ("a mother").811 c.

(The Preserved Tablet), as in "... for all things do We take account in a clear Preserved Tablet." (Q. 36:12).812 d. (the way), as in "... and behold, both these [sinful communities] are on a clear way" (Q. 15:79) which is the interpretation of Yah.yá ibn Sallām, Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, al-H.asan, Qatādah, al-Farrā’, Ibn Qutaybah and al-Zamakhsharī.813 However, the and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 91.

809. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 459 and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 126. According to Ibn Kathīr this is the view of Abū al-‘Āliyah, al-H.asan and al-D.ah.h.āk, see Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 574.

810. Abū ‘Ubaydah, however, also mentions another interpretation, namely "the book", as mentioned earlier; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 386. Lane also mentions the four interpretations above; see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 91.

811. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 430; see also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 778.

812. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 459; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 148; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 91. Al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī simply interpret imām as lawh. (tablet), whereas Abū ‘Ubaydah interprets it as kitāb (a book); see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1184; Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 418; and Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 158.

813. See Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 149; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān,

257

term imām in this verse also means kitāb (record) in the Quraysh language according to Ibn ‘Abbās.814 Abū ‘Ubaydah's interpretation of the term imām in this verse is that it is anything we follow and through which we are guided.815 11.

(prayer) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings for s.alāh, as follows:

a.

(supplication, prayer) as in "..., and pray for them: behold, thy prayer will be [a source of] comfort to them...." (Q. 9:103, Asad).816 b. (blessing and forgiveness), as in "Verily, Allah and His angels bless and forgive the Prophet [namely, the angels ask Allah blessings and forgiveness on him] ..." (Q. 33:56).817 Instead of al-maghfirah, al-Suyūt.ī mentions al-istighfār.818 .

Both al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī mention the meaning of s.alāh as al-maghfirah wa ’l-istighfār, namely, forgiveness from Allah, and asking forgiveness from His angels and men. 819 Al-Zamakhsharī

vol. 3, p. 343; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 91; Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 459; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr vol. 2, p. 576; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 724. See also al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 45; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 126 and idem, Qurrah, p.

50.

814 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 52; and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt alQabā’il, p. 158, n.1.

815 Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 354. For more details on the meanings of imām, see Ibn Manz.ūr, vol. 12, pp. 24-26; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 91.

816. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 460; idem, Tafsīr, p. 192; idem, Mukhtalif alH.adīth, p. 237; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p, 167; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 1, p. 268; Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 80; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 562; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 67; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 173; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 395; idem, Qurrah, pp. 160-161; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

125; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, pp. 464-465; and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, alMufradāt, p. 285. According to Yah.yá ibn Sallām, the meaning of verse is

in the above

(asking forgiveness), see al-Tas.ārīf, p. ١٦٦.

817. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 460; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, pp. 1720-1721.

818 Al- Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, 125 819 Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 28; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 394-395; and idem, Qurrah, p. 161.

258

mentions al-rah.mah wa ’l-ra’fah (mercy) as the meaning of al-s.alāh in the above verse.820 According to Tiflīsī, the expression means ("they greet him").821 S.alāh from Allah is His mercy to the Prophet, whereas from the angels is du‘ā’ and istighfār for him.822 c. (religion), as in ( : ) "Said they: O Shu‘ayb! Does thy religion compel thee to demand of us that we give up all that our forefathers were wont to worship,...?" (Q. 11:87).823 This is the interpretation of al-H.asan, ‘At.ā’ and Abū Muslim. However, s.alāh in the said verse can also mean the established prayer itself, and this is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās.824 Prophet Shu‘ayb was said to perform prayers very often. While praying, his people winked at each other and laughed. They asked him sarcastically whether his prayers were the motive for asking them to abandon their idols which had been worshipped by their ancestors.825 Ibn Qutaybah does not give us the other meanings of s.alāh, such as the five daily prayers (Q. 2:3), the congregational Friday prayer (Q. 62:9), the reading in the prayer (Q. 17:110), and the funeral prayer (Q. 9:84), probably because they are easily identified in their respective verses.

12.

(writing, the act of writing)

According to Ibn al-Jawzī, the basic meaning of kitāb is jam‘ (collecting), since the writer (al-kātib) collects letters when he writes.826 Ibn Qutaybah mentions us

five meanings of kitāb as follows: 820

Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1635.

Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 173.

822 Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, p. 465. For further details, see Lane, Lexicon, pt.

4, pp. 1720-1721. If s.alāh here means istighfār, in other verses of the Qur’ān, the term istighfār means s.alāh (prayer), as in Q. 3:17, 8:33, and 51:18, see Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 90; and idem, Qurrah, p. 30; see also al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 341.

823. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 461; idem, Tafsīr, p. 208; Tiflīsū, Wujūh, p. 173; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 395; idem, Qurrah, p. 161; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

125. Ibn Qutaybah mentions also the other meaning of s.alāh in the above verse, namely, "reading" which is the view of al-A‘mash; see Ta’wīl, p. 461; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 62; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, p. 87.

824. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 188.

821

825. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 626.

826 Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 525 and idem, Qurrah, p. 205.

259

a.

(what was written by Allah in the Preserved Tablet). This is, according to Ibn Qutaybah, the basic meaning of the term kitāb, but no example is given.827 The example of the term kitāb meaning al-Lawh. al-Mah.fūz. mentioned by Tiflīsī is as follows:

“The Prophet is clolser to the Believers than in their own“ selves, and his wives are their mothers. Blood relations among each other have closer personal tie , in the Decree of God [i.e., al-Lawh. al-Mah.fūz.], than (the brotherhood of) Believers and Muhajirs: nevertheless you do what is just to your closest friends: such is the writing in the decree (of God) [i.e., al-Lawh. al-Mah.fūz.].”

(A. 33:6, Ali)

Al-Dāmaghānī mentions other verses, namely,

“No misfortune can happen on earth in your souls but is recorded in a decree [i.e., al-Lawh. al-Mah.fūz.] before We bring it into ixistence: that is truly easy for God.” (Q. 57:22, Ali)

“We already know how much of therm the erth takes away; Wit Us a Recording guarding (the full account) [i.e., al-Lawh. al-Mah.fūz.].”

(Q. 50:4)828

b.

(divine decree), as in "Allah has divinely decreed: I verily shall prevail, I and My messengers!..." (Q. 58:21).829 Beside qad.ā’ al-T.abarsī also mentions the other meaning of

827. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 462.

Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 247; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 400.

829. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 462; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.255; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 514-515; and idem, Qurrah, p. 206.

828

260

kitāb, namely "what was written by Allah in the Preserved Tablet".830 AlZamakhsharī gives the last meaning only.831 c. (divine prescript) as in "O you who believe! Retribution is prescribed for you in cases of killing..."(Q. 2:178).832Al-T.abarsī also mentions the second interpretation, namely, "it has been prescribed in the Preserved Tablet as an injuction for you".833 d. (make), as in "[As for the true believers], it is they in whose hearts He has made faith ..." (Q. 58:22).834 Both al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī mention athbata and thabbata, both meaning "to affirm" for the meaning of kataba in the above verse.835 e. (command), as in "O my people! Enter the holy land which Allah has ordained for you..." (Q. 5:21). This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn Kathīr.836 Instead of "hath ordained for you" or "has promised you" as translated by Pickthall and Asad respectively, Ibn Qutaybah says that kataba’llāhu lakum means "Allah has ordered you to enter" 837

which is the interpretation of Qatādah and al-Suddī.838 Ibn Qutaybah also gives another meaning of kataba in this verse, namely, "make" so that the verse means "enter the land which has been made for the descendants of Abraham" 830. Al- T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 255.

831. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1462.

832. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 462; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 247; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 515; idem, Qurrah, p. 206; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 699. .

833. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 265.

834. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 462; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 352; Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 514; idem, Qurrah, p. 206; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 248. Other examples given by Ibn Qutaybah are Q. 3:53 and Q. 7:156 835.Al-Zamakhsharī, al- Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1462 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 5, p. 255.

836. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 178; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 160; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 38.

837. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 463; see also Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 514; idem, Qurrah, p. 206; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 248.

838. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 178.

261

.839 This interpretation is similar to that of Ibn ‘Abbās above.

The third interpretation, however, says that the term kataba in this verse means "it has been ordained in the Preserved Tablet that it is for you” .840 However, according to al-Rāghib alAs.banānī, the holy land was given to them on the condition that they entered therein.841 Ibn Qutaybah and Tiflīsī mention five, while Yah.yá ibn Sallām gives four meanings of the term kitāb. Ibn al-Jawzī cites eleven meanings, whereas al-Dāmaghānī lists ten meanings of this term. This great number is the result of their including the term kitāb to mean "what is written", so that it includes the Qur’ān, as well as the Torah and the Bible.

13. a.

(reason, motive, means) and

(rope)

Sabab, as mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, has four meanings as follows: (rope) which is its basic meaning.842

b.The connection or motive by which one achieves or reaches something, as in ("So-and-so is the motive for my coming to you") meaning "So-and-so has brought me to you”

, and the

expression ("There is no relationship between you and me, neither blood relationship nor spiritual one"). In other words, "there is nothing that can bring us together" (namely, "we have nothing to do with each other"). Originally, sabab signifies "a dry rope let down (or made to descend) from above", "a rope of which one end is attached to a roof or a ceiling or the like", or "a strong and long rope by means of which one ascends (such as palm trees) or descends (such as the access to water)".843 From this meaning, another meaning appears, as follows: c. (way, means), because by following it one will reach one's goal, as in "And so he chose the right means [in whatever he did]." (Q. 18:85, Asad).844 839. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wil, p. 463.

840. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 178.

841. See al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 424.

842. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 464; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 458.

843. See Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1825.

844. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 464; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 490;

262

d.

(the door, the gate), because through it one reaches a certain place, as in "And Pharaoh said: O Haman! Build me a lofty tower that I may reach the doors, the doors of the heavens, and that [thus] I may have a look at the God of Moses: for, behold, I am indeed certain that he is a liar." (Q. 40:36-37).845 However, Al-T.abarsī, cites three interpretations of the term asbāb in the said verse: "the roads from one heaven to another" according to alSuddī, "the doors of the roads of heavens" according to Qatādah, an AlT.abarsī, and "the stopping places in the heavens" , according to Ibn ‘Abbās.846 Lane gives usthe meanings of asbāb here as "the places of ascent", "the tracks", "the regions" and "the gates" of heavens.847 As a shāhid Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of Zuhayr as follows: * “Whoever fears the door of fate of death he will get it, even if he should get to the doors of heaven with a ladder. ”

It means that whoever fears death will meet it soon.848 Ibn Qutaybah, having in his mind of the basic meaning of h.abl as "a al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 813; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol.

1, p. 413. Al-Dāmaghānī suggests "the stopping places of the roads" , whereas Tiflīsī states that it is "the roads and the stopping places of the land" (

) for the meaning of sabab in the above verse; see Qāmūs, p. 225, and Wujūh, p. 126.

845. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 464; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 225; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 126; al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 247 ("places of ascent and roads" rather than "doors" in p. 113); "their roads and doors", according to al-Zamakhsharī, see alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1280; "their places of ascent" (marāqīhā) or "their regions" , see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 458.

Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 524.

847 Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1285.

848. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 464; instead of wa law nāla it is written wa in yurqá in Zuhayr's Dīwān, see Zuhayr ibn Abī Sulmá, Dīwān (Beirut: Dār Bayrūt lilT.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1406/1986), p. 87. For the meanings of sabab see al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 257.

846

263

means to reach an end", mentions two meanings of it, as follows: a.

(Allah's covenant and His Book), as in "And hold fast, all of you together, unto Allah's covenant and His Book [namely, the Qur’ān which is the link for the Muslims to reach Him and Paradise], and do not draw apart from one another...." (Q. 3:103).849 However, al-Zamakhsharī mentions "the covenant" only,850 whereas according to Ibn Mas‘ūd the term h.abl Allāh in the verse means "the Qur’ān"851 which is also the view of Mujāhid and Qatādah;852 it is said that it is also the view of al-Suddī, while according to Ibn ‘Abbās and Abū Zayd it means "the religion of Allah", namely, Islam.853 b. peace, security, safety, protection), as in ("Overshadowed by ignominy are they wherever they may be, save [when they bind themselves again] with protection from Allah and peace from men." (Q. 3:112).854 As a shāhid from poetry, Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of al-A‘shá as follows: * “And when the (assurance of) safety from a tribe permits them [namely, the camels or the caravan] to pass [the territory belonging to that tribe], they also took permission from other tribes [and brought it] to you [to pass their territories safely].”855

In the past, the caravan's route may have crossed the territories of several 849. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 464 and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 67.

850. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 223.

851. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 116.

852. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 159.

853. Al- T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 482.

854. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 464-465; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 67. H.abl min Allāh according to al-Dāmaghānī means "the religion of Islam", see Qāmūs, p. 116.

According Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, al-H.asan, Qatādah and Abū ‘Ubaydah h.abl in this verse means ‘ahd (covenant); see al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.ar, vol. 1, p. 311; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 488; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 101.

According to al-Zamakhsharī the term h.abl in the said verse means dhimmah (covenant of protection); see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 227.

855. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 465; al-A‘shá, Dīwān, p. 151; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 101; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 135; and al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 158.

264

tribes. It was necessary for them to obtain from each an assurance of safe conduct which often involved payment of money.856 14.

(wrongdoing) Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings for z.ulm as follows:

a.

(Putting something not in its proper place), namely, wrong doing. This is the basic meaning of z.ulm. The Arabic expression (lit., "a wronged piece of land") means "a piece of land dug in

the wrong place", and the expression means "keep on the track, and do not deviate from it".857 No example from the Qur’ān is given here by Ibn Qutaybah, either in his work Ta’wīl or in his work Tafsīr.858 b. (polytheism, idolatory), as in "Those who believe and who have not obscured their belief by polytheism, theirs is safety; and they are rightly guided."

(Q. 6:82).859 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Sa‘īd ibn alMusayyab, Qatādah, Mujāhid and the majority of commentators. When the above verse was revealed the Prophet's companions felt uneasy and asked the Prophet: "Which of us has never obscured his belief by wrongdoing?" The Prophet said: "It is not what you think it means. Have you ever heard of what the pious servant (meaning Luqman) said: ) 'O my dear son! Do not ascribe partners unto Allah. For, behold, to ascribe partners (unto Him) is a tremendous wrong doing.'" (Q. 31:13).860 Al-Zamakhsharī, however, insists on interpreting z.ulm in this verse as 856. See al-Murs.ifī, Raghbat al-Āmil ([Cairo]: al-Nahd.ah, 1348/[1929]), vol. 4, p. 52, with the commentary of Mah.mūd Muh.ammad Shākir, quoted by al-Sayyid A. S.aqr in Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 465, n. 2; see also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 135.

857. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 467; idem, Tafsīr, pp. 28-9; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 426; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 373.

858. Ibn al-Jawzī, however, gives many examples, among which are: Q. 2:35, 3:57, and 4:10; see Nuzhah, p. 427; and idem, Qurrah, p. 173.

859. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 467; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 215; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 308; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 195; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 427; idem, Qurrah, p. 173; and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 316.

860. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 327.

265

ma‘s.iyah (disobedience), and rejects kufr (disbelief), because of the keyword labs (obscurity); in his view, kufr cannot make faith obscure, but ma‘s.iyah can.861 c.

(reduction, loss, detriment, imperfection, blemish). The expression

means "I reduce your right." The example from the

Qur’ān is as follows: "Each of the two gardens yielded its produce, and made not aught thereof to suffer loss..." (Q. 18:33).862 d. (denial, disbelief), as in "whereas those whose weight is light in the balance - it is they who will have squandered their own selves by their wilful denial of Our messages." (Q. 7:9).863 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings for z.ulm.

Yah.yá ibn Sallām, Ibn al-Jawzī, Tiflīsī, and al-Dāmaghānī mention respectively five, six, seven, and nine meanings, among which is al-sariqah (stealing). This meaning was not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl.

One of the examples in the Qur’ān is the following: “[The brother] replied: 'Its requital? He in whose camel-pack [the cup] is found - he shall be [enslaved as] a requital thereof! Thus do we [ourselves] requite the thieves.'" (Q. 12:75).864 It had been among the laws of Prophet Abraham to hand over the thief to the victim of the theft, and that was the rule that Prophet Joseph wanted 861

Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 413 862. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 467-468; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 216; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 402; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 87; alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 800; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 468; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 309; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 316; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 1920 (s.v. ); Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 427; and idem, Qurrah, p.

174. Other examples given by Ibn Qutaybah are Q. 2:57, 19:60 and 36:54.

863. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 468; idem, Tafsīr, p. 165; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 196; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 428; idem, Qurrah, p. 174; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 399. Al-Zamakhsharī interprets yaz.limūn in this verse as ("they wrongly deny it"), see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 439.

864. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 310; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 196-197; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 428; and idem, Qurrah, p. 174.

266

to be applied.865 15. (test, trial, affliction) Ibn Qutaybah states that the basic meaning of balā’ is "a test", either for good or for bad things. It has two meanings: balā’ meaning a test and blessing. The root of the term meaning a test is balā yablū balwan (in Ibn Qutaybah's example, , and the noun is balā’). For good things it is said ablá yublī iblā’an balā’an

and for bad things it is said balā yablū

.866

According to al-Sharīf al-Murtad.á,however, as well as

(instead of

are used for good things, whereas for bad things

), ,

, and

(bilan) are commonly used. In other words, although is used for both good and bad things, it is more frequently used for good things, whereas for bad things (bilan) is more frequently used among the Arabs.867 The examples given by Ibn Qutaybah from the verses of the Qur’ān are as follows: a. (trial, test) as in “For, behold, all this way indeed a trial, clear in itself" (Q. 37:106), namely, the injunction to sacrifice his (Prophet Abraham's) son is a test for him.868 The test can be for either good or bad things. Allah says: “... and We try you with evil and with good for ordeal" (Q. 21:35, Pickthall), namely, We test you with evil to see your patience, and with good to see your gratitude.869 They are, according to Ibn ‘Abbās, poverty and richness, sorrow and happiness, and comfort and hardship; or, according to Ibn Zayd, what you like, dislike and fail to do, so that you 865

Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p.; 503.

866. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 469-470. This explanation of Ibn Qutaybah is quoted by Ibn al-Jawzī, see Nuzhah, p. 189 and idem, Qurrah, p. 71.

867 Al-Murtad.á, Amālī, vol. 4, p. 24.

868. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 469; idem, Tafsīr, p. 373; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 77; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 49.

869. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 469; Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 217; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 49. The above verse, however, is treated by Ibn Qutaybah as an example for the term balā’ meaning "a test", see Ta’wīl, p. 469. The other example given by Tiflīsī is Q. 7:168. Al-Suyūt.ī uses the term makrūh instead of al-sharr for the meaning of fitnah in the above verse, see Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 261.

267

will become patient of what you dislike and thankful of what you like . b. (blessing), as in “And [remember the time] when We saved you from Pharaoh's people, who afflicted you with cruel suffering, slaughtering your sons and sparing [only] your women: That was a tremendous blessing from your Sustainer." (Q. 2:49).870 Al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī interpret balā’ for both good and bad things: the good thing was that the children of Israel were delivered from Pharaoh's folk, and the bad thing was that the Pharaoh's folk afflicted them with dread torment as mentioned in the above verse.871 16. (punishment, a conduct that leads to punishment) and (dirt, filth) Al-rijz, according to Ibn Qutaybah, Tiflīsī, and Ibn al-Jawzī has three meanings in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (punishment), as in “.... If thou remove this punishment from us, we will truly believe in thee,..." (Q. 7:134).872 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word meaning (punishment) is the language of the Hudhayl (or T.ayy).873 b.

(the trick of Satan), since it leads to punishment, as in "... and free you from the trick of Satan..." (Q. 8:11).874 According to Ibn ‘Abbās,

in this verse means

870. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 370; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 217; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 69; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 77; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 49.

This meaning is also advanced by Al-Suyūt.ī on the authority of Ibn ‘Abbās in the above verse, see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 6 and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 620.

871 Al-Zamakhsharī , al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 75; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

1, pp. 105-106.

872. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 469; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 191; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 110; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 313; idem, Qurrah, p. 124; al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 137; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol.

5, p. 352.

873 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 38 and ibid., n. 1; see also Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il, p. 47 and ibid., n. 1.

874. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471; idem, Tafsīr, p. 177; al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak,

268

(the scare of Satan) in the language of the Quraysh .875 c.

(idols), since they also lead to Allah's punishment, as in

“And idols shun" (Q. 74:5).876 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, Qatādah, and al-Zuhrī. Al-H.asan's interpretation is "avoid disobedience", whereas al-Kisā’ī makes a distinction between alrijz meaning "punishment" and al-rujz meaning "idols".877 However, Ibn Qutaybah states that since the term rujz also means "punishment", the verse means "avoid idolatory because it leads to punishment". This interpretation is similar to that of al-Zamakhsharī.878 Al-rijs means al-natn (decay).879 This basic meaning developed into kufr (disbelief) and nifāq (hypocrisy), as in "But as for those in whose hearts is disease, each new message but adds another [element of] disbelief to the disbelief which they already harbour, and they die while [still] refusing to vol. 2, p. 173; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 314; and idem, Qurrah, p. 124; alZamakhsharī, al-T.abarsī and Tiflīsī give here (Satan's temptation) instead of

as the meaning of

, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 504, Majma‘ al-

Bayān, vol. 2, p. 526, and Wujūh, p. 110. Ibn Kathīr mentions "temptation" ( "evil idea" (

) and

) as the meaning of rijz in the verse in queston; see Tafsīr, vol. 2,

p. 304. Yah.yá ibn Sallām mentions

(pl. of

) only, see al-Tas.ārīf, p. 321.

Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 46; and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il, p. 112, n. 1.

876. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471, Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 321; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 110. Al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī use here the term al-s.anam (the idol, the image) instead of al-awthān, see Qāmūs, 191, Nuzhah, p. 314; and idem, Qurrah, p. 124; al-Suyūt.ī puts it in plural, namely al-as.nām (the idols), see Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 137, as well as in singular, see Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 563.

877. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, pp. 200-201. Another interpretation is that of al-Jubbā’ī, namely, "avoid bad deeds and blameworthy character", whereas an unidentified commentator who is probably of s.ūfī leaning says that the verse means "take out the love of the world from your heart because it is the head of every sin". See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 385.

878. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471; idem, Tafsīr, p. 495; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1546.

879. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 6, pp. 94-96.

875

269

acknowledge the truth." (Q. 9:125, Asad).880 17.

(test, trial, ordeal)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions eight meanings of the term fitnah, as follows: a. (test), as in the Arabic expression (I tested the gold in fire). The example in the Qur’ān is as follows: "Yea, indeed, We did test those who lived before them;..." (Q. 29:3, Asad).881 b. (persecution), as in “Now there is among men many a one who says [of himself and of others like him], 'We do believe in God' - but whenever he is made to suffer in Allah's cause, he thinks that persecution at the hands of man is as [much to be feared, or even more than] Allah's chastisement;.." (Q. 29:10, Asad).882 c. (persecution by fire), as in “Verily, as for those who persecute by fire believing men and believing women, and thereafter do not repent, hell's suffering awaits them: yea, suffering through fire awaits them!" (Q. 85:10).883 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Qatādah and al880. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 471; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 110; and al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 137. See also al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 84; and alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 572. According to Ibn Kathīr the meaning of rijs in the above verse is "doubt"; see Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 417.

881. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 472; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 13, p. 320; Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 478-479; idem, Qurrah, p. 193; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169. Yah.yá ibn Sallām and al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī call it al-ibtilā’ (trial) instead of al-ikhtibār, see al-Tas.ārīf, p. 180, Qāmūs, p. 348 and Wujūh, p. 216. Both al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī use the term al-imtih.ān (test) for the interpretation of the term fitnah in the above verse.

882. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 472; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 348; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 217; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 479; idem, Qurrah, p. 193; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169. Yah.yá ibn Sallām uses the term (punishment), whereas Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-T.abarsī use the term

(offense)

) as the meaning of fitnah in the above verse. See al-Tas.ārīf, p. 18, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 114 and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 274.

883. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 472; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1595; and

(pl. of

270

D.ah.h.āk.884 According to Ibn Kathīr, this is also the interpretation of Mujāhid.885 d. (turning someone away from the truth and making someone make an error), as in "... and beware of them, lest they tempt thee away from aught that God has bestowed from on high upon thee...." (Q. 5:49, Asad).886 Both Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī give the interpretation of in the above verse as (to deviate you from it and 887 make you commit error). e. (polytheism, idolatry), as in "… for polytheism is worse than slaughter." (Q. 2:191).888 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Qatādah, Mujāhid,889 as well as Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, ‘Ikrimah, al-H.asan, al-D.ah.h.āk and al-Rabī‘ ibn Anas.890 Abū ‘Ubaydah and Lane interpret fitnah here as kufr (disbelief).891 f. (disbelief and sin), as in al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, 348; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 479; idem, Qurrah, p. 193; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 217. Al-Suyūt.ī mentions a different example, namely, “(It is) the day when they will be tormented at the Fire, ..." (Q. 51:13, Pickthall); see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169. This example is also given by Yah.yá ibn Sallām, see al-Tas.ārīf, p. 181 884. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 468 and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2335.

885. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 529.

886. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 473; others mention al-s.add only, see Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 217; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 479; idem, Qurrah, p. 194; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 349; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 126; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169.

887. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 168; and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 363.

888. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 473; others use the term al-shirk rather than alishrāk; see Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 179; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 347348; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 216; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 478; idem, Qurrah, pp. 192-193; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 126; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169.

889. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 287.

890. See Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 233.

891. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 68; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p.

2336. For further details on this verse, see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 132.

271

".... so let those who would go against His bidding beware, lest disbelief and sin or painful punishment befall them."

(Q. 24:63).892 g. (sin), as in ".... Surely, it is into sin that they (thus) have fallen...." (Q. 9:49). This is also Abū ‘Ubaydah's interpretation.893 h. (warning, deterring example), as in ".... O our Sustainer, make us not a deterring example for evildoing folk."

(Q. 10:85).894 The verse means "do not make the wrongdoing folk believe that they are right and we the believers are wrong when they see us in misery and misfortune, while they are in happiness and prosperity."895 This is the view of Mujāhid who says that the verse means "do not destroy us with our enemies' hands, and do not punish us with Your punishment, or our enemies would say 'if they were on the right way,

892. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 473. Al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī respectively interpret fitnah here as mih.nah (severe trial, affliction) and "an affliction (balīyah) which appears in their hearts, such as hypocrisy"; however, T.abarsī gives also another interpretation, namely, "punishment in this world". See al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 964; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 158. According to Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī the term fitnah in this verse means ‘uqūbah (punishment), see Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 480 and idem, Qurrah, p. 195; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol.

3, p. 169. Al-Suyūt.ī does not include kufr as one of the fifteen meanings of fitnah in his al-Itqān. Al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī cite Q. 3:7 as the example from the Qur’ān in which fitnah means kufr, but according to al-Suyūt.īit means al-id.lāl (misleading), see al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 348; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 216; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 478; idem, Qurrah, p. 193; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 126.

893. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 473; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

261; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 216; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 480; idem, Qurrah, p. 194; alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127 (in idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169 it is written al-d.alālah which is a misprint and should be al-ithm); al-Dāmaghānī suggests kufr, whereas alT.abarsī suggests as the meaning of fitnah in this verse, see, Qāmūs, p.

348 and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 37.

894. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 473-474; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 218; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 480; idem, Qurrah, p. 194; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169. According to al-Dāmaghānī, the term fitnah in this verse means fitnah itself, namely, temptation.

895. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 474.

272

then why did we [who are on the wrong way] subjugate them'".896 A similar view is also given by al-Farrā’, al-Zamakhsharī, al-T.abarsī, and Ibn Manz.ūr.897

We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah mentions eight meanings only of fitnah, whereas Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī mention fifteen, Tiflīsī mention fourteen, and both Yah.yá ibn Sallām and al-Dāmaghānī mention eleven meanings. Many other meanings, such as (assassination) in Q. 4:101, (madness, insanity) in Q. 68:6, and (error) in Q. 5:41, are dealt with by all of them with the exception of Ibn Qutaybah. The term fitnah in the verse Q. 6:23 which means (excuse) according to Qatādah898 are dealt with by all of them. However, Ibn Qutaybah puts the verse into the category of verses with the term fitnah meaning . Nevertheless, he says that the term here means (the answer) to the question asked as a test mentioned in the preceding verse.899 18.

(duty, decree, order)

a.

(the injunction of doing something), as in "... [seeing that] We have already made known what We have enjoined upon them with regard to their wives..." (Q. 33:50).900 896

Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 370.

897 Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 150; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, p. 595; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 128; and Ibn Manz.ūr Lisān, vol. 13, p. 317.

898. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 402.

899. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 473; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, pp. 179-182; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 348-9; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 216-218; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 479-480; Qurrah, pp. 193-194; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 126-127; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 169.

900. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 475; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 188; alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1139; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 220; al-Dāmaghānī.

Qāmūs, p. 355. Ibn al-Jawzī uses the term al-ilzam (duty, obligation) as the meaning of al-fard. in the above verse, see Nuzhah, p. 468. Ibn Qutaybah includes in this category of meaning the following verse: “.... It is an injunction from Allah..." (Q. 4:11, Pickthall), whereas according to al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī, the term farīd.ah here means farīd.ah itself, namely, religious duty. See Ta’wīl, p. 475; Qāmūs, 356; and Wujūh, p. 221.

273

b.

(explanation), as in A sūrah [is this] which We have bestowed from on high, and which We have distinctly explained..." (Q. 24:1).901 This is the interpretation of Mujāhid and Qatādah according to Ibn Kathīr.902 However, according to Ibn Qutaybah, it is also possible that the term farad.a in this verse means "to enjoin" as translated by Pickthall.903 There are two variant readings in this verse: farad.nāhā and farrad.nāhā. The former means "We have enjoined the execution of what has been prescribed", and the latter means "We have distinctly explained in detail and define what has been prescribed in general, and what is h.alāl (permitted) and what is h.arām (prohibited)".904 c. (sending down, revelation), as in "Verily, He Who has sent down to thee the Qur’ān will surely bring thee home again..." (Q. 28:85).905 d. (permission), as in There is no reproach for the Prophet in that which Allah permits for him..." (Q. 33:38).906 901. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 475; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 188; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 355; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 220; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 468; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2373.

902 Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 271 903. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 475; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 12, p. 158; alFarrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 244; and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p.

376.

904. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 63; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 124; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 7, p. 302 and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, pp.

2373-2374.

905. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 475-476; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 189; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 112; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 356; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 221; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 468. The term farad.a in the verse could also mean the injunction to follow the contents of the Qur’ān, see Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 476; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1068; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 269; and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 376.

906. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 476; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 188; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 355; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 220; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 468.

Al-T.abarsī's interpretation on this verse is that Allah allowed or enjoined the Prophet to marry the divorced wife of his adopted son; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 361. A similar view is that of al-Zamakhsharī, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1133.

274

19.

(disloyalty, treachery, betrayal)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of khiyānah, as follows: a. entrusting a person with something, but he does not fulfil the trust . Ibn Qutaybah does not give us an example from the Qur’ān, but from poetry, the poem of al-Namir ibn Tawlab as follows: * “Verily, after (the loyalty and disloyalty of) Wahb tribe, Banī Rabī‘ah are like the house keeper; he was (entrusted) to keep it, then he betrayed it.”

Here Ibn Qutaybah makes a distinction between khā’in (a traitor) and sāriq (a thief); the former is a person who takes something which is entrusted to him, whereas the latter takes what is not entrusted to him.907 The example from the Qur’ān is given by Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī, as follows: ".... Hence, do no contend with those who are treacherous." (Q. 4:105).908 b. (violation of treaty), as in "And if thou fearest violation of treaty from people [with whom thou hast made a treaty], cast it back at them in an equitable manner..." (Q. 8:58).909 c. (disobedience of Muslims), as in "O you who believe! Do not disobey Allah and His messenger, nor knowingly betray your trusts..." (Q. 8:27).910 The disobedience meant in this verse is neglecting Allah's injunctions and the Prophet's practice (sunnah) and laws (sharā’i‘) according to Ibn ‘Abbās, or any religious matter according to al-H.asan.911 907. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 477; and idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 35.

908. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 94; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 166; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 282.

909. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 477-478; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 178; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 414; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p.

553; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 93-4; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 167; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 282.

910. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 478; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 177; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 93; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 166; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 281-282.

911 Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 536.

275

20.

(submission)

There are three meanings of islām mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. , entering into peace, (al-s.ulh., according to al-Dāmaghānī), as in “,... and do not say unto anyone who offers you peace: 'Thou art not a believer,...'" (Q. 4:94).912 Al-Zamakhsharī mentions a variant reading salama beside salāma; both have three meanings: istislām (surrender), islām (becoming Muslim), and taslīm (greeting with Islamic greeting). He also mentions the variant reading mu’manan (believed, saved) beside mu’minan (a believer). In a military detachment to Fadak, its inhabitants fled except Mirdās ibn Nāhik who had confidence with his being a Muslim and came down from the mountain, joined the takbīr with the invaders, pronounced the shahādah before them and greeted them with al-salāmu ‘alaykum. Usāmah ibn Zayd, not believing Mirdās's testament, killed him and seized his sheep. The Prophet who heard the incident was very upset and asked Usāmah: "Did you kill him because you wanted to take his property?" and read the above verse to him. When Usāmah asked him to ask Allah's forgiveness for him, he kept asking "How with lā ilāha illā ’llāh?", meaning "how should I ask forgiveness for you after you have killed a person who has pronounced the shahādah (became a Muslim)?" Upon hearing this, Usāmah wished he had become Muslim just at that moment, so that the sin he had just committed would be forgiven. Finally the Prophet prayed forgiveness for him and told him to free a slave.913After the incident and hearing the above verse, Usāmah promised not to kill a Muslim, and apologized to ‘Alī in his caliphate for not taking part in fighting against the dissenters.914 These reports indicate that salāma or salama includes its three meanings istislām, islām, and taslīm in the verse in question, although Ibn Qutaybah mentions one only as mentioned above. b. , following and submitting with the tongue only, not with the heart (al-iqrār bi ’l-lisān, according to al-Dāmaghānī), as in

912. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 479; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 245; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 136; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1414.

913 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 313.

914 Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 95.

276

"The Bedouin say: We have believed. Say (unto them O Muhammad): You have not [yet] believed, but rather say: We have [outwardly] surrendered, for the faith hath not yet entered your hearts..." (Q. 49:14).915 A group of people among the Banī Asad tribe who wanted to get charity came to the Prophet and claimed to have become Muslims. But Allah wanted them to know that the Prophet already knew that īmān had not yet entered into their hearts. So, the above verse was revealed to him.

This was reported by Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr and Ibn Zayd.916 c. , following and submission with the tongue and with the heart; (al-ikhlās., sincerity, according to al-Dāmaghānī), as “....He [namely, Abraham] said: I have surrendered [outwardly and inwardly] to the Sustainer of the Worlds." (Q. 2:131).917 21.

(belief, faith)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of īmān, as follows: a. , belief, confirmation, attestation, as in the statement of Prophet Jacob's children to him about the death of their brother Joseph, as follows: ".... But [we know that] thou wouldst not believe us even though we speak the truth." (Q. 12:17). This is also the interpretation given by Abū ‘Ubaydah, Ibn Kathīr, al-Zamakhsharī, and al-Tabarsī.918 This interpretation, as we shall see, deals with its general context, and not faith in religion. b. (believing with the tongue only, not with the heart), as in "That is because they believed [with their tongues] then disbelieved [with their hearts]..." (Q. 63:3).919 This is called hypocrisy, and this is one interpretation. The apostates claimed to 915. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 479; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 245.

Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 138. For further details, see Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, pp. 234-235.

917. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 479; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 244.

918. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 481; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

303; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 488; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 645; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 218. It is also the interpretation given by Tiflīsī, al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn Fāris, see Wujūh, p. 41; Qāmūs, p. 47; and Maqāyīs, vol.

1, p. 135.

919. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 481; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 108; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 41; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 47.

916

277

be believers when they were among believers, but among disbelievers they disbelieved. Another interpretation, however, says that the term āmanū means that they really believed, but later disbelieved and became apostates.920 c. (believing with the tongue and with the heart), as in "(And) lo! those who believe (outwwardly and inwardly) and do good works are the best of all creatures." (Q. 98:7).921 d. , believing some and disbelieving others , believing while ascribing partners to Allah, according to alDāmaghānī), as in "And most of them do not even believe in Allah without [also] ascribing partners (unto Him),..." (Q. 12:106). Ibn Qutaybah gives his commentary on this verse. He says that if we ask the idolators among the Arabs, "Who created you?," they would say "Allah.”922 This interpretation is that of Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, ‘ A t.ā’, ‘Ikrimah, al-Sha‘bī, Qatādah, al-D.ah.h.āk, and ‘Abd al-Rah.mān ibn Zayd ibn Aslam.923 22.

(damage, harm, hurt, injury, misfortune, loss, or diasdvantage) Ibn Qutaybah mentions six meanings of d.urr or d.arr, as follows:

a.

(the opposite of benefit), namely, harm, as in

"Said he: 'Do [you really think that] they hear you when you invoke them, or benefit you or do you harm?'"

(Q. 26:72-73, Asad).924 b. (misfortune and affliction), as in 920. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1486; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 291.

921. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 481; and Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, pp. 108109.

922. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 481-482, and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 47-48.

923 For further details, see Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, pp. 512-513; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 680; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 268.

924. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 338; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 290; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 180-1. Ibn al-Jawzī makes the distinction between d.urr and d.arr; the former is used for misfortune, the latter for the opposite of benefit as in the above example; see Nuzhah, p. 403.

278

"And if Allah should touch thee with misfortune, there is none who can remove it but He;..." (Q. 6:17, Asad).925 c. (want of rain, drought), as in "And if We cause mankind the taste of mercy [namely, rain] after some adversity [namely, drought] wich had afflicted them..." (Q. 10:21, Pickthall).926 d. (terror, fright, alarm, shock), as in "And whenever terror befalls you at sea, all those [powers] that you are wont to invoke forsake you, [and nothing remains for you] save Him:..." (Q. 17:67).927 e. (illness, disease) as in "And [remember] Job, when he cried unto his Sustainer, 'Affliction [namely, disease] has befallen me: but Thou art the most merciful of the merciful.'" (Q. 21:83, Asad).928 Here the term d.urr is interpreted by Ibn Qutaybah as "disease". f. (defect, blemish, decrease, loss damage; lack, shortage), as in "Those who reject God, hinder (men) from the path of God, and resist the apostle, after guidance has been clearly shown to them, will not injure [namely, defect, according to Ibn Qutaybah's interpretation] God in the least, ..." (Q. 47:32, Ali).929 925. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 289; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 179. It includes sickness according to al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī, see alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 397; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 281.

926. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483. Al-Dāmaghānī cites Q. 6:42 as an example, see Qāmūs, p. 289; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 404. Like in the previous verse, alT.abarsī and Ibn Kathīr interprets d.arrā’ in this verse as shiddah and balā’, including drought; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 101. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr. vol. 2, p.

427. Pickthall translates it as "adversity".

927. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 289; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 180; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 427; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 404.

928. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 289; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 180; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 404.

929. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 483; al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī mention Q. 3:144 and 4:113 as examples, see Qāmūs, p. 289; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 180; and Ibn al-Jawzī,

279

We notice that Tiflisi does not give (want of rain, drought) as one of the meanings of the term d.urr or d.arr, whereas Ibn Qutaybah does not mention (hunger, starvation) as the meaning of the term in the following verse: “And when they presented themselves before him, they said: 'O thou great one!

Hardship has visited us and our folk,...'" (Q. 12:88, Asad) which is starvation as mentioned by al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī.930 Al-Zamakhsharī and alT.abarsī also include "starvation" as the meaning of d.urr in this verse.931 23.

(narrowness, confinement; hardship, difficulty; restriction; oppression, distress, anguish, prohibition) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of h.araj, as follows: a. (narrowness, annoyance, hardship). This is the basic meaning of h.araj according to Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn al-Athīr,932 as in "... it is He who has elected you [to carry His message], and has laid no hardship on you in [anything that pertains to] religion,..." (Q.22:78, Asad).933 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word meaning is the language of Qays (ibn) ‘Aylān.934 b.

(doubt), as in "A divine writ has been bestowed from on high upon thee - and let there be no doubt about this in thy heart - ..." (Q. 7:2, Asad). This is also the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, Mujāhid, Qatādah, al-Suddī, and alFarrā’.935Ibn Kathīr mentions Mujāhid, Qatādah and al-Suddī who

Nuzhah, p. 405.

930. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 290; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 404-405.

931 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 674; and al-T.abarsī Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 3, p. 260.

932. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 69; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 233.

933. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 484; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 124; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 71; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 239.

934 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qurān, p. 57; and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt alQabā’il, p. 90.

935. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 484; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.2, p. 395; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 370; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 437; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 123; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 71; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 239.

280

interpret h.araj as shakk.936 According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word meaning is in th language of the Quraysh.937 Abū ‘Ubaydah, however, interprets h.araj in this verse as d.īq.938 c.

(sin, offence, misdeed, crime), as in offence attaches to the blind..." (Q. 24:61).939

24.

"No

(breath of life, soul; spirit) Ibn Qutaybah gives seven meanings of rūh. in the Qur’ān, as follows:

a.

(soul of the bodies) taken away by Allah at the moment of death.940 No example from the Qur’ān is given by Ibn Qutaybah; others mention the following verses: "And they will ask thee about [the nature of] soul..." (Q. 17:85).941 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās. But Ibn Qutaybah mentions the above verse as one of the examples of the term rūh. meaning a huge angel which is ‘Ali's interpretation. Other interpretations include: Gabriel, according to al-H.asan and Qatādah, Prophet Īsá (Jesus), and the Qur’ān.942 Asad’s interpretation of rūh. in the above verse is "divine inspiration". He contends that "the preceding as well as the subsequent verses relate explicitly to the Qur’ān and hence, to the phenomenon of divine revelation".943 b.

(Gabriel), as in "And lo! it is a revelation of the Lord of the Worlds, which the True Spirit [namely, Gabriel] hath brought down upon thy heart, ..." (Q. 26:192-193, 936

Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 209.

Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 45; and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt alQabā’il, pp. 98 and 101.

938 Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 210.

939. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 484; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 155; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 124; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 72; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 239.

940. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 485; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 462.

937

941. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 213; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 117; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 322; idem, Qurrah, p. 132; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 128.

942. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 486; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, pp.

782-783; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 437. See also Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 65.

943. See M. Asad, The Message, p. 432, n. 101.

281

Pickthall).944 c. (a huge angel), so huge that as he stands alone he makes one line by himself, while other angels make another, mentioned in the Qur’ān as follows: "On the day when the angels and the Spirit stand arrayed, they speak not, saving him who the Beneficent alloweth and who speaketh right."

(Q. 78:38). The Spirit here means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, the huge angel.945 Al-Qurt.ubī mentions eight interpretations of the term al-rūh. in the above verse, as follows: (1) a huge angel, who in the Hereafter will stand alone and make one line by himself, and another for the other angels; this is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and Ibn Mas‘ūd quoted by Ibn Qutaybah above (and of ‘At.ā, according to al-T.abarsī); (2) Gabriel, according to al-Sha‘bī, al-D.ah.h.āk, and Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr; (3) soldiers of Allah, neither human beings nor angels, but have human forms and eat food; this is the view of Abū S.ālih. and Mujāhid (as well as Qatādah according to alT.abarsī); (4) the nobles among angels, according to Muqātil ibn H.ayyān; (5) (guards of angels); (6) human beings, according to al-H.asan and Qatādah; they interpret al-rūh. as dhawū alrūh. (those who have spirits); according to al-T.abarsī, this is the view of al-H.asan only; al-T.abarī states that Qatādah said: ("This is among what has been concealed by Ibn ‘Abbās"), and this is the interpretation chosen by M. Asad; (7) the spirits (souls) of the children of Adam before they return to their bodies, according to ‘At.iyyah (or Ibn ‘Abbās, according to al-T.abarī), and (8) the Qur’ān according to Zayd ibn Aslam.946 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions (an 944. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 486; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 284; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 360; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 304; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 116; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 323; idem, Qurrah, p. 132; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, p. 454; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 128; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 1180; alDāmaghānī cites Q. 2:253 which is also mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, see Qāmūs, p.

212; and Ta’wīl, p. 486.

945. Ibn Qutaybah cites also Q. 17:85 as an example, see Ta’wīl, p. 486; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, pp. 496-497; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 116; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p.

212; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 323; and idem, Qurrah, p. 132.

946 Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, pp. 186-187; see also al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30,

282

army of angels) as the interpretation of rūh. in the above verse.947 d.

(blowing, breathing), as in the following poem of Dhū ’l-Rummah: * “And I said to him: 'Lift it [the fire] up to you to keep it alive with your gentle blowing...'”948

The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “And remember her who guarded her chastity, whereupon We breathed into her of Our blowing and caused her, together with her son, to become a symbol [of Our grace] unto all people." (Q. 21:91). Ibn Qutaybah states that the Messiah is called "the Spirit of Allah" because he was created through Gabriel by Allah's breath.

The Messiah is also so called because he existed by His word "be" and he existed.949 Another interpretation is that rūh. here means the spirit of ‘Īsá.950 e. (the word of Allah), namely, revelation, is also called rūh., because it gives life to the ignorant and infidels who are like dead people, as in "... By His Own will does He bestow His word upon whomever He wills of His servants,..." (Q. 40:15).951 The meaning of the term rūh. here according to al-Zamakhsharī, Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī is wahy (revelation).952 According to al-Farrā’, the rūh. here means (prophethood), whereas al-Tabarsī mentions three pp. 15-16; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 427; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1573; and M. Asad, The Message, p. 924.

947 Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 128.

948. See Carlile H. Macartney, ed., Dīwān Shi‘r Dhī ’l-Rummah (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1919), p. 176; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 460; and alRāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 205.

949. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 487; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 117; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 323; idem, Qurrah, p. 133.

950 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 892; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 62.

951. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 487.

952 Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1274, Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 116; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 212. Ibn al-Jawzī cites Q. 16:2 as the example of rūh. meaning wah.y; see Nuzhah, p. 323; and idem, Qurrah, p. 132.

283

meanings: the Qur’ān and all the revealed books sent to messengers, the revelation, and Jibrīl (Gabriel).953 f. (blessing), as in ... [As for the true believers,] it is they in whose hearts He has inscribed faith, and whom He has strengthened with blessing from Him, ..." (Q. 58:22).954 Al-Tabarsī mentions four meanings of rūh. in this verse: the light of faith, the light of reasoning, the Qur’ān, and Gabriel.955 g. (life and eternity where there will be no death), as in "Perpetual life [awaits him in the life to come], and inner fulfilment, and a garden of bliss." (Q. 56:89). This is the interpretation of Abu ‘Ubaydah and al-Farrā’ quoted by Ibn Qutaybah.956 This is one of the three interpretations given by al-Zamakhsharī, the other two being istirāh.ah (rest) and rah.mah (blessing).957 Al-T.abarsī mentions two different interpretations, the rest from the burden of life which is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās and Mujāhid, and the air (alhawā’).958 There are two more interpretations of rūh. which are not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah: firstly, (the command), as in "The Messiah, Jesus son of Mary, was only a messenger of Allah, and His word which He conveyed unto Mary, and a command from Him...." (Q. 4:171);959 Other interpretations are given by al-T.abarsī, among which are: Gabriel, a mercy from Allah, and a spirit created, fashioned, then sent by Allah to Mary which is the interpretation of

953. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 6; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 517.

954. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 487; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 212; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 116; Ibn al-Jawzī, Qurrah, p. 133; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 128.

955. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 255.

956. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 488; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

253; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 131; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 323-324; idem, Qurrah, p. 133; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 128.

957. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1337.

958. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 228.

959. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 323; idem, Qurrah, p. 133; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127; and idem, al-Mu‘tarak, vol.2, p. 122.

284

Ubayy ibn Ka‘b reported by Abū al-‘Āliyah;960 secondly, the Qur’ān, as in “And thus have We revealed to thee (Muh.ammad) the Qur’ān by Our command ..." (Q. 42:52).961 With regard to the second verse, rūh.an min amrinā is the Qur’ān itself according to al-D.ah.h.āk whose view is adopted by al-Suyūt.ī, whereas Ibn Qutaybah gives (the word of Allah) as its interpretation.962 However, there are many other interpretations, namely,

(prophethood) according to

Ibn ‘Abbās,

(blessing) according to al-H.asan and Qatādah, (revelation) according to al-Suddī, (scripture) according to al-Kalbī, and Jibrīl according to al-Rabī‘.963 25.

(inspiration, revelation)

Ibn Qutaybah interprets the basic meaning of wah.y, as follows: "everything suggested by means of speaking, writing, sign, or message ."964 Ibn Manz.ūr includes inspiration ( ), secret talk ( ) among the meanings of wah.y.965 However, according to al-Qurt.ubī, the term wah.y among the Arabs means "writing", "inscription" as in the following poem of Dhū al-Rummah: “Except the four black women who were similar to the remnant of inscription in the midst of leaves,”

and in the following poem of ‘Antarah: “[It is] similar to an inscription on leaves in the time of Kisra (Khosrau),

Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 145.

961. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 127.

960

962. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 487.

963. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p. 54. According to al-T.abarsī, Qatādah's and al-Suddī's interpretation of rūh. in this verse is respectively the Qur’ān and the Holy Spirit (Gabriel), see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 37.

964. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489; 965 Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 379.

285

so that he gave them as a gift to a non-eloquent a‘jamī (non-Arab).”966

Ibn Qutaybah mentions six meanings of this term in the Qur’ān, as folows: a. (sending a message), namely, revelation through Gabriel, as in "Behold, We have sent thee a message as We sent to Noah and the prophets after him,..." (Q. 4:163).967 b. (sign, gesture, signal), as in “Thereupon he came out of the sanctuary unto his people and signified to them [by gestures]: 'Extol His limitless glory by day and by night!'" (Q. 19:11, Asad).968 This is the view of Qatādah, al-Kalbī and Ibn Munabbih. The other view is that of Mujāhid and ‘Ikrimah, that the term awh.á in this verse means respectively, "wrote on the ground", and "wrote in a scroll."969 This latter view is rejected by Ibn Qutaybah. His argument is that in another verse mentioning the same story, the term ramz (sign, gesture) is given, as follows: “[Zachariah] prayed: 'O my Sustainer! Appoint a sign for me!' Said [the angel]: 'Thy sign shall be that for three days thou wilt not speak unto men other than by gestures...'" (Q. 3:41, Asad). The sign here means, Ibn Qutaybah contends, moving the two lips, eyebrows or eyes, and not writing.970 c. (inspiration) as in "And [remember the time] when I inspired the white-garbed ones: 'Believe in Me and in My Apostle! 'They answered: 966

Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 85-86.

967. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 621; and idem, Qurrah, p. 237.

968. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 119; Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 622; idem, Qurrah, p. 237; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p.

505; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 380; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 305-306. This is the view of Qatādah, al-Kalbī and Ibn Munabbih. The other view is that of Mujāhid and ‘Ikrimah, that the term awh.á in this verse means respectively, "wrote on the ground", and "wrote in a scroll", see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 85.

969 Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 11, p. 85.

970 Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489.

286

'We believe; and bear Thou witness that we have surrendered [unto Thee].'" (Q. 5:111, Asad).971 According to al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, wah.y in this verse means revelation to the white garbed ones through Prophet ‘Īsá (Jesus).972 Both Abū Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī intepret wah.y in this verse as amr (command).973 d. (information given during sleep), namely, true vision, as in “And it was not (vouchsafed) to any mortal that Allah should speak to him unless (it be) by true vision..." (Q. 42:51).974 e. (information through the whispering of the devil), as in "And, verily, the devils tempt their minions with wicked suggestions to dispute with you..." (Q. 6:121).975 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās.976 f. (order, command), as in "as they Sustainer will have ordered her to do." (Q. 99:5). This is the interpretation given by Mujāhid adopted by Ibn Qutaybah. 977 Here Ibn Qutaybah cites the poem of al-‘Ajjāj in which the term wah.y, means "order", as follows: “He ordered it (the earth) to settle, and so it settled."978 However, according to Ibn ‘Abbās's interpretation, awh.á lahā here means 971. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 325; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 119; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 263; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 306; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 622; and idem, Qurrah, p. 237.

972 Al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 516.

Abū Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 182; and al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p.

390.

974. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 489; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 26; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 306; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 622; and idem, Qurrah, p. 238.

975. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 490; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 423; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 306; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 515; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 622; and idem, Qurrah, p. 238.

976 Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 385.

973

977.Ibn Kathir, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 577.

978 Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 490; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 306; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

622; and idem, Qurrah, p. 238. It is noteworthy that Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīsī, give us respectively seven and ten meanings of the term wah.y.

287

"Allah gave permission to the earth to tell what had been done on it", and this intepretation is adopted by al-Farrā’.979 26.

(joy, gladness, happiness) There are three meanings of the term farah. in the Qur’ān given by Qutaybah, as follows: (joy, happiness, delight, pleasure), as in

Ibn a.

"... when ye are in the ships and they sail with them a fair breeze they are glad therein..." (Q. 10:22, Pickthall).980 b. (contentment, satisfaction), as in "Every sect is content with that [religion] which it has." (Q. 23:53 and 30:32, Lane).981 c. (exultation, wantonness, pride, arrogance, vanity, cockiness and liveliness, high spirits, exuberance, wildness, insolence, impertinence, excessive joy), as in "When [they perceived his arrogance,] his people said unto him: 'Exult not [in thy wealth], for, verily, God does not love those who exult [in things vain]!'" (Q. 28:76, Asad).982 This is, according to Ibn Kathīr, the interpretation of Mujāhid.983 Here Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention the three meanings of the term in conformity with those mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah.

27.

(opening, conquest, victory) Three meanings of fath. are mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a.

(opening something closed), as in

979. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 526; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 3, p. 283.

980. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 491; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 244; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 220; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 353.

981. Ibn Qutaybah Ta’wīl, p. 491; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 243; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 109; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 219-220; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 353; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2361.

982. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 491; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 410; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 266; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 219; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp.

352-353; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2361.

983 Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 410.

288

"... till, when they reach it, they shall find its gates wide-open;..."

(Q. 39:73, Asad).984 Al-Zamakhsharī mentions two interpretations regarding the position of wa in the above verse: (1) It means "when they came to Heaven they came to it with its doors (or gates) open” ( ); (2) It means “when they came to it its door had been opened”. “Unlike the doors of Hell which will be opened only when those who are to enter it arrive, the doors of Heaven will have been opened before the arrival of its companions, as mentioned in the Qur’ān "Gardens of Eden, whereof the gates are opened for them." (Q. 38:5 , Pickthall).985 b. (victory), as in "...thus, if victory 986 comes to you from Allah..." (Q. 4:141). c. (judgement) which is an opening to what is ambiguous, as in "Say: Our Sustainer will bring us all together, then He will judge between us with truth." (Q. 34:26).987 According to Abū ‘Ubaydah, Ibn Kathīr and al-T.abarsī, yaftah. in the above verse means yah.kum (decide), which is similar to yaqd.ī (judge).988 Another meaning which is not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah is al-irsāl (the sending down), as in "Whatever grace Allah sends down to man, none can withhold it;..." (Q. 984. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 492; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 250; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 580; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 215; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 462; and idem, Qurrah, p. 186.

985 Al-Zamakhsharī al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1268.

986. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 492; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 250; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 215; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 463; idem, Qurrah, p. 186; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 347. "Conquest and victory over the enemies ( ) " is the meaning of the above verse according to al-T.abarsī's interpretation, see Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 2, p. 127.

987. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 492; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 249; Tiflīsī, Wujūh. p. 215; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 347; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 462; and idem, Qurrah, p. 186.

988 Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 149; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p.

546; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 390.

289

35:2).989 28.

(noble; eminent; generous; beneficent; kind; honourable)

There are four meanings of karīm in the Qur’ān given by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. ُ‫( الّشَرِيْف‬distinguished, honoured, eminent) as in Asad),990

"... and shall cause you to enter an abode of glory." (Q. 4:31, "a good place", according to al-T.abarsī's interpretation.991

b.

(forgiving), as in "..., verily, my Sustainer is self-sufficient, forgiving." (Q. 27:40).992 Al-T.abarsī's interpretation of karīm in the above verse is "He is kind to His servants, grateful, ungrateful, disobedient as well as obedient among them."993 c. (bountiful), as in "... and a bountiful provision." (Q. 8:4 and 74; 22:50; 24:26; 34:4, Pickthall).994 d. (nice, fine, good) as in "... but speak to them a gracious word." (Q. 17:23, Pickthall).995 Another meaning of karīm mentioned by Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī is respectively (a person who makes himself noble) and (a person who thinks he is noble) as in Q. 44:49.996 29.

(likeness, similarity, example; lesson; similar case) Three meanings of mathal in the Qur’ān are mentioned by Ibn 989

Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 215; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 347.

990. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 494; Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention h.asan (good) as the translation of the term karīm in the above verse, see Wujūh, p. 250; and Qāmūs, p. 403.

991. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 38. This is also the interpretation rendered

by Ibn al-Jawzī, see Nuzhah, p. 522.

992. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 494, and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 522.

993 Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 224.

994. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 494 and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 250. Here Ibn al-Jawzī is quoting Ibn Qutaybah, see Nuzhah, p. 522; 995. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 495; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 37; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 522; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 250.

996 Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 250, and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 403.

290

Qutaybah, as follows: a. (similarity, likeness) as in "The likeness of those who choose other patrons than Allah is as the likeness of the spider when she takes unto herself a house, and lo! the frailest of all houses is the spider's house, if they but knew." (Q. 29:41, Pickthall).997 b. (example, lesson, advice) as in ("and so We made them a thing of the past, and an example to those who would come after them." (Q. 43:56, Asad).998 c. (image and description) as in "The image and the description of the Garden which those who keep their duty (to Allah) are promised: Therein are rivers of water unpolluted, ..." (Q. 47:15).999 Ibn Kathīr mentions which is the synonym of (description) as 1000 the meaning of mathal in the above verse.

Al-Farrā’ states that the variant reading of Ibn ‘Abbās and ‘Alī is , meaning .1001 30.

(beating, striking, hitting)1002

Three meanings of d.arb in the Qur’ān are mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. (beating with hands) as in "Now when you meet [in battle] those who disbelieve, smite their necks 997. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 496; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 284; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 610. Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīsī cite Q. 14:24 as the example of the term mathal meaning shabah. See Qurrah, p. 216; and Wujūh, p. 264.

998. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 496; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 254; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 52; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 612; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 428; Ibn al-Jawzī, Qurrah, p. 216; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 265.

This is the interpretation of Mujāhid; see Ibn Kathir, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 141.

999. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 496; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 296; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, p. 611; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 428-9; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Qurrah, p. 217.

1000. Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 189.

1001. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 60.

1002. According to Ibn al-Jawzī the basic meaning of d.arb is striking with something like a whip, see Qurrah, p. 163.

291

..." (Q. 47:4).1003 b. (travel), as in "... while others travel in the land..." (Q. 73:20, Pickthall).1004 c. (explanation and description), as in "Allah describes a parable..." (Q. 16:75 and 112).1005 According to Ibn al-Jawzī, Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī the term d.arb in the above verse means was.f only, whereas al-T.abarsī mentions tabyīn only. 1006 The fourth meaning of this term, according to al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī, is bayān, as in Q. 14:45 and Q. 25:39.1007 31. (one of a pair, a pair, a couple; mate, partner; husband, wife) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of zawj in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (a pair or one of the pair), as in "and that it is He who creates the two pairs [namely, spouses] - the male and the female". (Q. 53:45). Here zawj means one of the pair.1008 b. (kind, species, class), as in "Limitless in His glory is He who has created all species in whatever the earth produces..." (Q. 36:36).1009 c. (companion, mate, fellow), as in 1003. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 397; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 179; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 401-402; and idem, Qurrah, p. 164. Al-Dāmaghānī cites Q. 8:12 as an example see Qāmūs, p. 288; see also Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 1778.

1004. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 497; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p.

382; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 288; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 178; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 398; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 401; and idem, Qurrah, p. 163.

1005. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 497.

1006 Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 402; idem, Qurrah, p. 164; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 179; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 288; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 375.

1007

Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 288; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 179. For other meanings of d.arb, see al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 619.

1008. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 498 and 340; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 123.

According to Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Dāmaghānī the meaning of azwāj in Q. 4:12 and Q. 2:25 is "wives". See Qurrah, p. 140; and Qāmūs, p. 219.

1009. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 498; idem, Tafsīr, p. 365; idem, Mukhtalif alH.adīth, p. 16; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1190; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 424; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 123; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 337; idem, Qurrah, p. 140; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 219-220.

292

"[And God will thus command:] 'Assemble all those who were bent on evildoing, together with others of their ilk and [with] that they were wont to worship.'" (Q. 37:22, Asad). The meaning of azwāj here is "companions". Ibn Qutaybah does not explain what kind of companions they are, but al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī say that they are (their companions among the devils, namely, evil 1010 people).

According to Mujāhid, ‘Umar and al-Suddī, the term azwāj means "people like them who had committed similar sins", whereas according to Qatādah and Abū al-‘Āliyah, it means "the followers of people who had committed similar sins". However, these two slightly different interpretations are also given by Ibn ‘Abbās, and both mean the same thing, namely "people committing the same sin will be assembled together", so that the adulterers will be assembled together, and alcohol drinkers will also be assembled together, and so on.1011 Al-H.asan interprets the term in the above verse as "the wives of idolaters who are also unbelievers and idolaters"; they will be assembled together with their husbands.1012 According to Qut.rub, Ibn Qutaybah, al-T.abarī and al-Qurt.ubī, the term zawj is applicable to one pair as well as one of a pair. There is no disagreement in accepting that it is applicable to one of a pair. It is explicitly said in the Qur’ān "Eight pairs: Of the sheep twain, and of the goats twain.... And of the camels twain and of the oxen twain..." (Q. 6:143144, Pickthall). The expression "eight pairs" means "eight individuals of (four) pairs": sheep, goats, camels and oxen. In Arabic expression it is said meaning "So-and-so has two mates of pigeons, namely, a male and a female); means "I have two individuals of a pair of slippers". This is also the argument of Ibn al-Anbārī who rejects the opinion that the term zawj is also applicable to a pair instead of exclusively one of a pair. However, according to al-T.abarī and al-Qurt.ubī it is possible to say either ("both are two spouses") or 1010. For another example, see Q. 81:7. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 498; idem, Tafsīr, p. 370; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 220; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 123; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 336; and idem, Qurrah, pp. 139-140.

1011. See al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 23:31.

1012. Al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 441.

293

("both are a pair"). It is, al-Qurt.ubī contends, like saying

("both

are the same", in dual form) and ("both are the same", in singular form).1013 According to al-Zamakhsharī, one of a pair is called zawj on the condiutuion that it is accompanied with the other ionber of the pair. It is like calling zujājah (a glass) ka’s (a cup, as drinking glass) if it contains alcohol.1014 Like Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Sijistānī and Ibn al-Fāris also say thgat zawj means ”one of a pair” and not two.1015 In modern Arabic, zawj means one of a pair as well as a pair, a spouse (a husband or a wife) as well as a couple, a mate, a partner, while zawjah means a wife.

32.

(seeing, viewing)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of ru’yah in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (seeing with eyes), as in "And [so], on the Day of Resurrection thou wilt see all who invented lies about God [with] their faces darkened [by grief and ignominy]...." (Q. 39:60, Asad).1016 b. (knowledge), as in “Are, then, they who are bent on denying the truth not aware that the heavens and the earth were [once] one single entity, which We then parted asunder? ..." (Q. 21:30).1017 c. (notification, information), as in "Hast thou not been informed of those who have received the Scripture...?" (Q. 3:23 and 4:44 and 51).1018 1013. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 339-340; idem, Tafsīr, p. 162; idem, Adab alKātib, p. 641; Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 373 (no. 281); al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 48; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 113; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 2, p. 291.

1014. Al- Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 430.

1015. Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, pp. 1266-1267, and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, p.

35.

1016. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 499; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 108; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 319; idem, Qurrah, p. 128; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 188.

1017. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 499; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 45; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 320; idem, Qurrah, pp. 128-129; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 108; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 188.

1018. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 499; and idem, Tafsīr, p. 128.

294

According to Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī, the meaning of

is

(have not you seen what they have done), while according to alZamakhsharī and al-Zamakhsharī the expression means (has not it come to your knowledge about).1019 Ibn al-Jawzī, who cites six meanings of ru’yah, mentions the three other meanings, as follows: (1) (consideration), as in "Have, then, they [who deny the truth] never considered the birds, enabled [by God] to fly in mid-air, ..." (Q. 16:79, Asad); (2) (hearing), as in "Now, whenever thou hear such as indulge in [blasphemous] talk about Our messages, ..." (Q. 6:68); and (3) (wonder, astonishment, amazement, surprise), as in "Hast thou not been surprised at those who consider themselves pure?..." (Q. 4:49), and "Hast thou not been surprised at those who claim that they believe in that which is revealed unto thee..." (Q. 4:60).1020 The term ta‘ajjub is usually translated as "wonder", "astonishment" or "amazement". However, I have chosen “surprise" in translating this term in the above verses, since this word "can also suggest a certain amount of moral condemnation."1021 This "certain amount of condemnation" is also found in the above verses. The first verse was revealed in the cases of the Arabs in the early period of Islam, the Jews and the Christians: The Arabs liked to praise and flatter each other. They claimed to be pure and said that the sins they committed in the day time would be forgiven at night, and vice versa, and therefore were sinless like babies (alD.ah.h.āk's and al-Suddī's interpretation). The Jews considered themselves "God's chosen people" (see Q. 5:18) and therefore were 1019

Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 108; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 189, al-Zamakhsharī alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 293; and al-Zamakhsharī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 53. Among the examples of meaning "have not you been informed" given by al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī are Q. 2:258 and Q. 105:1, see al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 189; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 108-109; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 320-321; and idem, Qurrah, p.

130.

1020. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 320 and idem, Qurrah, p. 129.

1021 S.I. Hayakawa, Choose the Right Word: A Modern Guide to Synonyms (New York: Harper & Row, 1968), p. 610.

295

destined for His grace, whereas the Christians believed in "Jesus's vicarious atonement" for the sins of man. The second verse deals with those who reject the laws of God in general and the hypocrites in particular.1022 33.

(forgetfulness, oblivion)

Two meanings of nisyān in the Qur’ān are mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. (the opposite to remembering), as in "... behold, I forgot about the fish..." (Q. 18:63, Asad).1023 b. (omission, neglect, abandonment, leaving), as in "And verily We made a covenant of old with Adam, but he neglected it, and We found no firmness of purpose in him."

(Q. 20:115).1024 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās according to alT.abarsī. Ibn Zayd's interpretation is that Adam overlooked the covenant and unintentionally made the mistake by eating the prohibited fruit.1025 34.

(bolt of lightning, thunderbolt, thunder) and (strike of lightning, the act of stunning or being stunned, unconsciousness) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of s.ā‘iqah and s.a‘aq in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (death) as in "And [on that Day,] the trumpet [of judgment] will be sounded, and all [creatures] that are in the heavens and all that are on earth will die,..." (Q. 39:68).1026 1022

For further details, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 5, pp. 246-247 and 263-264; and al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.ar, vol. 1, pp. 402-403 and 408-409; see also Asad, The Message, p. 113, n. 66.

1023. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 500; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 285; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 455; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 580; and idem, Qurrah, p. 226.

1024. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 500; idem, Tafsīr, p. 283; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 193; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 285; al-Dāmaghānī. Qāmūs, pp. 454-455; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 379-380; idem, Qurrah, p. 226; and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, pp. 422-423. Al-Zamakhsharī also mentions "forget" as the other meaning of nasiya in this verse, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 868.

1025. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 32.

1026. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 501; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 69; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 281; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 508; Ibn al-

296

b.

(punishment), as in "But if they turn away, say: 'I warn you of [the coming of] a thunderbolt of punishment like the thunderbolt [that fell upon the tribes] of ‘Ād and Thamūd.'" (Q. 41:13, Asad).1027 c. (fire from the cloud), as in "...; and He [it is Who] lets loose the thunderbolts and strikes with them whom He wills." (Q. 13:13, Asad).1028 Another meaning of the term which is not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah is (unconsciousness), as in "...; 1029 and Moses fell down in a swoon...." (Q. 7:143).

This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, al-H.asan and Ibn Zayd. Moses was unconscious and later became conscious again, as the verse continues with "And when he 1030 came to himself..." (Q. 7:143).

Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 391; idem, Qurrah, p. 160; and Tiflisi, Wujūh, p. 169. AlDāmaghānī, mentions the meaning as (death at the appointed time without being punishment), see Qāmūs, p. 281, whereas Ibn Fāris renders the meaning of s.a‘iqa in the above verse as "death caused by lightning", see Maqāyīs, vol.

3, pp. 285-286. Lane mentions several meanings, namely, "shall die", "shall fall down dead" or "in a swoon", or "shall lose their reason"; see Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1690.

According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word meaning “death” is the language of Ghassān, see Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 38, and in the language of Oman, see Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il, P. 46.

1027. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 501; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 392; idem, Qurrah, p. 160; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 169; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 281; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 280. Al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī interpret s.ā‘iqah respectively as "a severe punishment like a thunderbolt" and "a punishment like that inflicted on ‘Ād and Thamūd", see al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1293, and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 7.

1028. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 501; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 392; idem, Qurrah, p. 160; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 170; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 281; and al-Rāghib alAs.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 281.

1029. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 392; idem, Qurrah, p. 160; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 475. Al-Dāmaghānī uses Q. 2:55-56 as the example of the term s.ā‘iqah meaning "death from punishment other than the appointed time, and the person concerned returns to the world", namely, "unconsciousness", see Qāmūs, p. 280.

1030. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 475.

297

35.

(taking, accepting, receiving, seizing)

According to Ibn Qutaybah, the basic meaning of akhdh from which other meanings are metaphorically derived is "to take with hand".1031 He does not include it as one of the meanings of the term in the Qur’ān, and therefore, he does not give us any example from it. However, Tiflīsī mentions an example from the Qur’ān in which the term akhdh means the taking itself, namely, "And whenever thy Sustainer takes their offspring from the loins of the children of Adam,..." (Q. 7:172).1032 Ibn Qutaybah mentions three metaphorical meanings of akhdh in the Qur’ān as follows: a. (acceptance), as in "If such-and-such teaching] is vouchsafed unto you, accept it;..." (Q. 5:41, Asad).1033 b. (arrest and taking a prisoner, detaining), as in "They said: 'O thou great one! Behold, he has a father, a very old man: detain, therefore, one of us in his stead...."

(Q. 12:7 , Asad).1034 c.

(act of punishment, torture), as in "And such is thy Sustainer’s punishing grasp [i.e., punishment] whenever He takes to task any community that is given to evildoing: verily, His punishing grasp [i.e., punishment] is grievous, severe!." (Q. 11:102, Asad).1035 Al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīsī mention one more meaning of akhdh in the Qur’ān, namely,

1031. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 502.

1032. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 12. Both al-Zamakhsharī and mention akhraja ("take out") as the meaning of akhadha in this verse, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 489; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 497.

1033. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 502; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 20; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 10; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 133.

1034. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 502 and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 28. According to al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīsī, the meaning of the term in this verse is "arrest" only, not "taking a prisoner", see Qāmūs, p. 21, Nuzhah, p. 133, and Wujūh, p.

11. Ibn Kathīr mentions the meaning of khudh in the above verse as baddil (exchange), see Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 504.

1035. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 503; al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī and Tiflīsī use the meaning ‘adhāb (punishment, torture) instead of ta‘dhīb for the term akhdh in the above verse, see Qāmūs, p. 21, Nuzhah, p. 134; and Wujūh, p. 11.

298

(killing), as in "... and each of those communities schemed to kill the messenger sent unto them,..." (Q. 40:5).1036 In the Arabic expression the term akhdh means "manners", "a way of life" or "disposition". Therefore, the above expression means "The sons of So-and-so and those who took to their way of life - and adopt their manners or disposition - went away."1037 36.

(strength, might, force, power, authority)

There are two meanings of sult.ān in the Qur’ān given by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. (power and force), as in ".... Yet I had no power at all over you: I but called you - and you responded unto me...." (Q. 14:22, Asad).1038 b. (argument, evident, proof), as in “And verily We sent Moses with Our revelations and a clear proof..."

(Q. 40:23).1039 37.

(might, strength and distress)

There are three meanings of ba’s and ba’sā’ mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. (misfortune, hardship, affliction), as in "And, indeed, We sent Our messages unto people before thy time, [O Prophet,] and visited them with misfortune and hardship..." (Q. 6:42, Asad).1040 1036. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 21; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 134; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 11. See also al-T.abarsī, Maj ma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 514 and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 77.

1037 Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 30.

1038. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 504; idem, Tafsīr, p. 33; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 345. Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention mulk only as the meaning of the term, see Wujūh, pp. 133-134 and Qāmūs, p. 243, 1039. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 504; idem, Tafsīr, p. 33; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol.

4, p. 83; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1276; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 519; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 133; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 242-243.; and Ibn alJawzī, Nuzhah, p. 345.

1040. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 505; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 185. Tiflīsī

299

b.

(severe punishment), as in "And, then, when they [clearly] beheld Our punishment, they said: ’We have come to believe in the One God, ..." (Q. 40:84, Asad).1041 c. (the strength in fighting), as in ".... Allah may well curb the strength in fighting of those who disbelieve ..." (Q. 4:84).1042 38.

(creation, making)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of khalq from the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (the act of measuring, determining the measure, proportion, or the like, of a thing) which is, according to Ibn Qutaybah, the basic meaning of khalq, is derived from the Arabic expression ("assessor of skin"), namely, the woman who assesses and measures a piece of leather before cutting it to be made into something such as a waterskin or a haversack. Ibn Qutaybah does not mention any example from the Qur’ān, but from Zuhayr's poem praising a person who carries out what he has determined to do as follows: * “And thou indeed cuttest [namely, execute] what thou hast measured [namely, planned]; but some of the people measure [namely, plan to do something] then will not cut [namely, execute it].”

suggests (drought and hardship) as the meaning of in the above verse. Al-Dāmaghānī mentions different verses, namely Q. 7:94 and 2:14, in which , according to him, means (poverty and hardship); see Qāmūs, 62.

1041. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 505; and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 184. Ibn Kathīr, Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention ‘adhāb as the meaning of the term in the above verse, see Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 97; Wujūh, p. 42 ; and Qāmūs, p. 62. Lane mentions both "punishment" and "severe punishment" as the meaning of the term ba’s; see Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 146.

1042. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 505; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 146. Ibn alJawzī mentions al-shiddah fī ’l-qitāl, whereas Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī simply suggest al-qitāl (the fighting) as the meaning of the term in the above verse; see Wujūh, p. 42; and Qāmūs, p. 62.

300

(Lane's translation).1043

b. (fabricating lies). The Arabic expression means "So-and-so related to us legends, fabricated lies."1044 Lane's translation and explanation of the above expression is as follows: "Such a one related to us fictitious tales or stories, such as are deemed pretty, or such as are told by night (for entertainment).”1045 The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “This is but a fable [namely, fabricated lies] of the men of old." (Q. 26:137).1046 This variant reading, khalq al-awwalīn ("the fables of the men of old"), was that of Ibn Kathīr, al-Kisā’ī, Abū Ja‘far and Abū ‘Amr ibn al-‘Alā’. Another variant reading, khuluq al-awwalīn ("the tradition and religion of the men of old"), was that of the qurrā’ of Madinah in general except Abū Ja‘far, and of Kūfah of later generations in general. Commenting on this reading Ibn ‘Abbās said that the people of ‘Ād told their prophet Hūd that they did what they did according to their ancestors' tradition and religion.1047 This reading was chosen by al-Farrā’ and Ibn Kathīr.1048 c. (shaping), as in "... and how thou didst shape of clay as it were the likeness of a bird by My permission...." (Q. 5:110, Pickthall).1049 1043. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 507; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, pp. 799-800; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, pp. 213-214; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 157; and Zuhayr, Dīwān, p. 29 in which it is written َ‫ فَلَأَنْت‬instead of َ‫وَلَأَنْت‬. What the poet means, according to Ibn Manz.ūr, is as follows: "If you consider doing something you execute and accomplish it, while others consider but they do not execute it, because they do not have a firm decision, while you are firm in your decision." See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10, p. 87.

1044. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 506 and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10. p. 88.

1045

Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 800.

1046. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 506; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p.

198; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10, p. 88; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 91; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

284; idem, Qurrah, p. 107; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 163.

1047. Al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 19. p. 60, and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, pp.

125-126. See also al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1004.

1048. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 281; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol.

3, p. 355.

1049. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 506; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 119; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 262; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 91; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 284; idem, Qurrah, p. 108; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 163.

301

d.

(creating and beginning something), as in

"It is He who has created you [all] out of one living entity, and out of it brought into being its mate, ..." (Q. 7:189, Asad).1050 e. (ordinance, decree, religion), as in ".... There is no altering Allah's ordinance ..." (Q. 30:30).1051 It means that Allah's decree pertaining to tawh.īd (the Oneness of Allah), justice, and sincerity in worship have to be observed firmly by people. This is the interpretation of al-D.ah.h.āk, Mujāhid, Qatādah, Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, Ibrāhīm al-Nakhā‘ī and Ibn Zayd.1052 However, ‘Ikrimah renders another interpretation on the authority of Ibn ‘Abbās and ‘Umar, that the verse means that there is no change in Allah's creation, and therefore, it is prohibited to castrate the livestock.1053 39. a.

(throwing or casting of stones, stoning) Ibn Qutaybah mentions five meanings of rajm as follows: (throwing), which is the basic meaning of rajm,1054 as in

“And indeed, We have adorned the skies nearest to the earth with lamps [namely, stars], and We have made them missiles for casting at the devils..." (Q. 67:5).1055 This is one interpretation. Another interpretation is that the stars are made as a means 1050. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 507; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10, p. 85. Ibn al-Jawzī uses the term al-ījād (making, bringing into being) here, see Nuzhah, p. 284; and Qurrah, p. 107. Quoting Q. 32:4 and 23:12, al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī give the example in the Qur’ān in which al-khalq means al-khalq fī ’l-dunyā (creation in the world); see Qāmūs, p. 164; and Wujūh, p. 90.

1051. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 507; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1094; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 10, p. 85; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 90; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

285; and idem, Qurrah, p. 108.

1052. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 31; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 303; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 801.

1053. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 14, p. 31. There are two h.adīths in which the Prophet prohibited castrating domestic animals: one on the authority of Ibn ‘Abbās, and the other, on the authority of Ibn ‘Umar. For further details, see ibid., vol. 5, pp.

390-1.

1054. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 227.

1055. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 111; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 318; idem, Qurrah, p. 127; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 197.

302

of guessing and "missiles thrown at the unseen" by the devils of mankind, namely, astrologers, using stars as guides to the unknown.1056 b. (killing), as in "Said [the others]: 'Truly, we augur evil from you. If you desist not, we will surely kill you...'" (Q. 36:18).1057 Ibn Qutaybah states that it is reported that Qābīl (Cain) killed his brother Hābīl (Abel) by throwing (rajm) stones at him. Since he was the first man killed, the act of killing is metaphorically called rajm, although without using stones.1058 This is the interpretation of Qatādah, while that of Mujāhid is ("I shall surely abuse you").1059 c. (abuse, scold, vilification), as in "He answered: 'Dost thou dislike my gods, O Abraham?

Indeed, if thou desist not, I shall surely abuse thee..." (Q. 19:46).1060 This is the interpretation of al-Suddī, Ibn Jurayj, and al-Farrā’, whereas "stoning" as the meaning of rajm here is the interpretation of al-H.asan and al-Jubbā’ī.1061 d. (guess, assumption), as in "[And in times to come] some will say, '[They were] three, the fourth of them being their dog,' while others will say, 'Five, with their dog as the sixth of them’ - idly guessing at something of which they can have no knowledge - ..." (Q. 18:22, Asad).1062 This is the 1056. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1508; and Lane, Lexicon, pt.

3, p. 1048.

1057. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 111; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 318; idem, Qurrah, p. 127; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 196.

1058 Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508.

1059. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 419; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 575.

1060. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 111; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 318; idem, Qurrah, p. 128; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 197; al-Rāghib alAs.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 190; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 227; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 1047. Both interpretations are also mentioned by Ibn Fāris, see Maqāyīs, vol.

2, p. 494.

1061. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 517; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 169; and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p. 130.

1062. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 508; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 796; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 227; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 112; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

303

interpretation of Qatādah and Abū ‘Ubaydah.1063 According ti Ibn ‘Abbās the term meaning is the language of Hudhayl.1064 e. (curse, banishment). Satan is called rajīm (outcast) because he is repelled with shooting stars (meteors) from ascending to heaven. No example from the Qur’ān is given by Ibn Qutaybah. Others give the following verse: "Now whenever thou happen to read this Qur’ān, seek refuge with Allah from Satan, the accursed [namely, cast at with curse]." (Q. 16:98, Asad).1065 40.

(quick movement, effort)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of sa‘y in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (walking quickly), or (running) as in "And [then and there] a man came running from the farthermost end of the city,..." (Q. 28:20, Asad).1066 b. (walking), as in "And when (his son) was old enough to walk with him, (Abraham) said: O my dear son, I have seen in a dream that I must sacrifice thee...."

(Q. 37:102, Pickthall).1067 He was at an age where he could assist his father Abraham in his daily affairs according to Mujāhid and Abū ‘Ubaydah, which is approximately thirteen years old. According to Ibn 319; idem, Qurrah, p. 128; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 197; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, alMufradāt, p. 190; al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 134 and vol. 13, p. 563; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 1048. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the term

meaning

is the

language of Hudhayl, see Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 54.

1063. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 460; and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 398.

1064 Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 54.

1065. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 111; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 318; idem, Qurrah, p. 128; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 197; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 190; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 3, p. 1049.

1066. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 509; idem, Tafsīr, p. 330; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 4, p. 246; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 349; idem, Qurrah, p. 143; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 130; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 238; and al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 228.

1067. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 509; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 309; Tiflīsī, Wujūh. p. 130; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 237; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1366.

304

Kathīr, this is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās, ‘Ikrimah, Sa‘īd ibn Jubayr, ‘At.ā’ and Zayd ibn Aslam. This interpretation is also mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah. Another interpretation is that it was the age where he worked for Allah and worshipped Him, according to al-H.asan, al-Kalbī, Ibn Zayd and Muqātil.1068 c. (action, work, effort), as in "Verily, your effort is dispersed (towards divergent ends)." (Q. 92:4).1069 d. (striving, labouring) as in “whereas for those who strive against Our messages, seeking to defeat their purpose, there is grievous suffering in store as an outcome of [their] vileness." (Q. 34:5, Asad).1070 Despite the difference of meanings, Ibn Qutaybah states that the basic meaning of the term sa‘y is walking quickly . This is also the view of Ibn al-Jawzī.1071 41.

(protected women) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of muh.s.anāt as follows:

a.

(married women), for they are protected by their husbands, as in "And [forbidden to you are] all married women other than those whom you rightfully possess

1068. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 452; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol.

4, pp. 16-17; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 171; and Ibn Qutaybah, Tafsīr, p. 373 1069. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 510; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 310; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 553; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 501; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 350; idem, Qurrah, p. 143; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 130; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 237.

1070. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 510, and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 4, p. 1366. Tiflīsī and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī use the word jahd (exertion, effort) instead of jidd for the meaning of sa‘y in the above verse, whereas al-T.abarsī uses both words; see Wujūh, p.

130, al-Mufradāt, p. 233; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 377. Yah.yá ibn Sallām and al-Dāmaghānī keep the meaning ‘amal for the term sa‘y in the above verse, while Abū ‘Ubaydah mentions "disbelieving", see al-Tas.ārīf, p. 310; Qāmūs, p. 237; and Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 142.

1071. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 510; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 349; and idem, Qurrah, p. 143.

305

[through wedlock]..." (Q. 4:24, Asad).1072 Al-Farrā’ and al-T.abarī mention both dhawāt al-azwāj and al-‘afā'if (chaste women) for the meaning of al-muh.s.anāt in this verse. 1073 This is also the view of Tha‘lab who says that every ‘afīfah (a chaste woman) is a muh.s.anah (a protected woman) and a muh.s.inah (a self-protecting woman), whereas every married woman is a muh.s.anah only.1074 b.

(free women, not slaves), although they are unmarried. Unlike slaves, free women can protect as well as be protected. The example in the Qur’ān is as follows:

"And as for those of you who, owing to circumstances, are not in a position to marry free believing women, [let them marry] believing maidens from among those whom you rightfully possess..." (Q. 4.25, Asad).1075 c. (chaste women), as in "And as for those who accuse chaste women [of adultery]..." (Q. 24:4, Asad).1076 42. a.

(possession, pleasure, object of delight) Ibn Qutaybah gives us four meanings of matā‘ as follows: (period of time, limited or appointed time, term), as in

“;... and on earth you shall have your abode and a period of time till the end (of the appointed time)." (Q. 2:36). Pickthall, Asad and Ali respectively translate matā‘ here as "provision", 1072. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 511; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 282; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 553-554; idem, Qurrah, p. 218; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 266.

For al-Dāmaghānī, the meaning of the term in the above verse is al-h.arā’ir (free women), see Qāmūs, p. 135.

1073. See Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 260; and Jāmi‘, vol. 5, pp. 2-7.

1074. See Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 2, p. 69.

1075. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 511; idem, Mukhtalif al-H.adīth, p. 193; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 1, p. 486; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 34; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 553; idem, Qurrah, p. 218; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 266; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 134-135.

1076. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 511; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 126; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 553; idem, Qurrah, p. 217; and al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p.

288. Instead of Q. 24:4 above, al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī cite the verse (chaste not debauched) in Q. 4:25, see Qāmūs, p. 135; and Wujūh, p. 266.

306

"livelihood" and "means of livelihood", while according to Ibn Qutaybah it means "a period of time".1077 However, Ibn Qutaybah interprets "enjoyment" (mut‘ah) as the meaning of matā‘ in his Tafsīr. He also interprets the meaning of in this verse as ("till the oppointed time") which is commonly understood as "till the time of death".1078 AlZamakhsharī interprets matā ‘as "enjoyment of life" , while that of al-T.abarsī is "enjoyment" , and h.īn as "the time of death", "the end of the appointed time", or "the day of Resurrection".1079 Ibn Qutaybah's understanding of the verse is that Allah gave Adam temporary life (or enjoyment) on this earth, which would end with death. This life is in contrast with life in Heaven which is permanent and will not end with death. b. (tools, utensils), as in "...and, likewise, from that [metal] which they smelt in the fire in order to make ornaments or utensils, [there rises] scum...." (Q. 13:17, Asad).1080 c. (benefit, avail), as in "[On the other hand] you will incur no sin if you [freely] enter houses not intended for living in but serving a purpose useful to you:..."

(Q. 24:29).1081 1077. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512. Al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī give albalāgh (reaching the end) as the meaning of matā‘ in this verse, although Ibn al-Jawzī also mentions Ibn Qutaybah's interpretation; see Qāmūs, p. 427, and Nuzhah, pp. 558559.

1078. See Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 46. This is also the meaning given by alQurt.ubī, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 321.

1079. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 70; Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 87; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 263.

1080. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, 553; al-Rāghib alAs.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 461; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 287. AlDāmaghānī and Tiflīsī specify the "useful substances", namely, minerals, such as gold, iron, and brass as the meaning of matā‘ in the above verse, see Qāmūs, p. 428 and Wujūh, p. 264.

1081. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 249; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 947; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 427; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 263; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 8, p. 332; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 293, and Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 559. Al-T.abarsī's inter-pretation of matā‘ here is istimtā‘

307

d.

(the benefit, provision or maintenance a divorced woman gets from her husband after divorce other than the dowry).1082 Ibn Qutaybah does not give us an example for this meaning. Others give us the following verse: "And the divorced women, too, shall have [a right to] maintenance in a goodly manner: this is a duty for all who are conscious of God." (Q. 2:241, Asad).1083

43.

(counting, reckoning, calculation)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of h.isāb in the Qur’ān, as follows: a. (plenty, abundance). The expression means "I gave him what is sufficient for him"

. The example from the

Qur’ān is as follows: “[All this will be] a reward from thy Sustainer, an abundant gift." (Q. 78:36).1084 b. (repayment, recompense, punishment), as in

(enjoyment), see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 136.

1082. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p.

345.

1083. See al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 428; al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p.

461; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 263; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 559; and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, pp. 163-164.

1084. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 72; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 128. Ibn Kathīr, Al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī and Ibn al-Jawzī interpret al-kāfī (sufficient) for the meaning of h.isāb in the above verse, see Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 496; alMufradāt, pp. 116-117; Nuzhah, p. 251; and Qurrah, p. 95. Ibn Manz.ūr interprets the meaning of as "an abundant and sufficient gift"; the expression means "something sufficient"; in the language of the Hudhayl tribe the expression ْ‫أَتَانِي‬ means "a large group ( ) of people came to me". See Lisān, vol.

1, p. 313, s.v. . Besides "sufficient" Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī mention another meaning of h.isāb in the above verse, namely, "recompense" and "based on the reckoning of their deeds" ( ) respectively; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 283; and al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1572. Qatādah's interpretation of h.isāb here is "abundant", whereas that of Mujāhid is "recompense", see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p.

14.

308

“Their recompense rests with none but my Sustainer: if you could but understand [this]!” (Q. 26:113Asad).1085 c. (reckoning, accounting), as in "He will in time be called to account with an easy accounting." (Q. 84:8, Asad).1086 44.

(order, command, decree, authority, affair)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions nine meanings of amr, as follows: a. (divine decree), as in "His verily is all creation and divine decree..." (Q. 7:54).1087 b. (religion) as in "But they (mankind) have broken their religion among them into sects, ..." (Q. 23:53, Pickthall).1088 c. (word, speech, remark, statement, report, account), as in ".... When (the people of the city) disputed their statements among themselves, ..." (Q. 18:21).1089 1085. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 512; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 72; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 128; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 251; and Qurrah, p. 94.

1086. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 513; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 251; and idem, Qurrah, p. 94. Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī give different meanings of h.isāban in the above verse, namely, (easy number) and (easy presentation) respectively, see Wujūh, p. 72; and Qāmūs, p. 129.

1087. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 514; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 233; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 31; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40. Al-Zamakhsharī and al-T.abarsī also give the similar meaning; see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 450; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 428.

1088. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 514; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 231; alZamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 926; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 109; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 30-31; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 173; idem, Qurrah, p. 62; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 38-39.

1089. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 514; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 231; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 33; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 173; idem, Qurrah, p. 62; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 39. They disputed among themselves concerning the resurrection, whether it will be the soul only or body and soul; another interpretation is that they disputed among themselves concerning the length of time the people of the cave had spent in their cave and what to do with them. See al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 794, and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 490.

309

d.

(punishment), as in "And when punishment will be decided, Satan will say..." (Q. 14:22).1090 e. (resurrection), as in "The commandment of Allah [namely, the resurrection] is [bound] to come: do not therefore, call for its speedy advent!..." (Q. 16:1). 1091 This is Ibn ‘Abbās's interpretation. Other interpretations are: Allah's punishment on disbelievers among the idolaters, according to al-H.asan and Ibn Jurayj, and Allah's laws and injunctions, according to al-D.ah.h.āk.1092 f. (resurrection or death), as in "... and you were hesitant, and you were doubtful; and your wishful thinking beguiled you until Allah's command [namely, resurrection or death] came to pass; ..." (Q. 57:14).1093 g. (inspiration, revelation), as in "Through all of them descends His inspiration,..." (Q. 65:12).1094 h. (offence, sin, crime, misdeed), as in "And thus they had to taste the evil outcome of their own

1090. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 514; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 232; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 31; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 173; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 39. According to Ibn ‘Abbās and al-H.asan qud.iya ’l-amr means "the matter has been decided and the companions of Heaven and Hell enter their respective place". See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 311.

1091. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 514; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 233; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 31; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40; and al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, al-Mufradāt, p. 25.

1092. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 348 and Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 4, p. 581.

1093. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 514-515; Ibn Kathīr, Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī give exclusively “death” for the meaning of amr in the above verse, see Tafsīr, vol. 4, p.

331; Wujūh, p. 31; Qurrah, p. 64; and Nuzhah, p. 174. Other interpretations of amr Allāh in this verse are: "the punishment of disbelievers in Hell", and "Allah's assisting His religion and Prophet" and "conquering the disbelievers"; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 237.

1094. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 515; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 233; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 31; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 64; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40.

310

offence, and the consequence of their offence was loss." (Q. 65:9).1095 i. ُ‫( كُل‬everything), as in "....Behold, all things tend towards Allah" (Q. 42:53).1096 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah mentions nine meanings of the term ‘amr. They are only about half of the meanings given by Yah.yá ibn Sallām, Tiflīsī, al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī who mention respectively thirteen, fourteen, sixteen, and nineteen meanings. This indicates Ibn Qutaybah's brief account in dealing with the term in particular, and al-wujūh wa ’l-naz.ā‘ir in the Qur’ān in general.

Among the meanings of ‘amr not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl, are the following: a. (the execution of the infidels of Makkah in the battle of Badr), as in "..., (it was) that Allah might conclude a thing [namely, the killing of the infidels of Makkah in the battle of Badr] that must be done..." (Q. 8:44).1097 b. (the conquest of Makkah), as in "... then wait till Allah makes manifest His will [namely, the conquest of Makkah]..." (Q. 9:24).1098 This is the interpretation of Ibn ‘Abbās and Mujāhid, whereas according to al-H.asan it is the punishment which will be inflicted upon disbelievers.1099 1095. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 515; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 234; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 31-32; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 175; idem, Qurrah, p. 64; and alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40. Al-T.abarsī mentions kufr as the meaning of amr in this verse, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 309.

1096. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 515; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 31. Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Dāmaghānī mention the meaning of amr as sha’n (affair, case), see Qurrah, p. 64, and Qāmūs, p. 41, whereas in Nuzhah Ibn al-Jawzī mentions (affair and condition), see Nuzhah, p. 175.

1097. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 232; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 39; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 32. It is said that the term amr in verse 42 indicates the victory of Muslims in the battle of Badr, whereas in verse 44 it indicates the continuation of victory; however, it is also said that the repetition of amr is for emphasis; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 547.

1098. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 232; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 32.

1099. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 534, and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 16.

311

c.

(the execution of Banī Qurayz.ah and the expulsion

of Banī al-Nad.īr tribes) as in "....

Forgive and be indulgent (toward them) until Allah manifests His will [namely, the execution of Banī Qurayz.ah and the expulsion of Banī alNad.īr]..." (Q. 2:109).1100 d. (victory), as in ".... They said: 'Have we any part in (achieving) victory?' Say (O Muhammad): 'The victory belongs wholly to Allah....'" (Q. 3:154).1101 e. (consultation, suggestion), as in "The great ones among Pharaoh's people said: 'Verily, this is indeed a sorcerer of great knowledge who wants to drive you out of your land!' [Said Pharaoh:] 'What, then, do you advise?'" (Q. 7:1 9-110, Asad).1102 f.

(caution, precaution), as in

".... and should misfortune befall thee, they will say [to themselves], 'We have already taken our precautions beforehand!'..." (Q. 9:50, Asad).1103 g. (drowning), as in "(Noah) said: Today there is no protection from Allah's commandment [namely, drowning]..."

(Q. 11:43).1104 1100. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, pp. 2322-2323; al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 97; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 174; idem, Qurrah, p. 63; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 39; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 32. This interpretation is that of Ibn ‘Abbās; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 185.

1101. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 242; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 1, p. 523; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 175; idem, Qurrah, p. 64; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 41; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 32.

1102. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 175; and idem, Qurrah, p. 65. The expression ‫فَمَاذَا‬ ‫ تَأْمُرُوْن‬could be expressed by the nobles among themselves, by them to the Pharaoh, or by him to them; see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 461.

439. Al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 546; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 37; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 175, and idem, Qurrah, p. 65.

1104. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 175; idem, Qurrah, p. 65; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 41. Al-T.abarsī does not interpret amr here as "drowning" but as "punishment"; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 164.

312

h.

(order, command), as in "Behold, Allah commands you to deliver all that you have been entrusted with unto those who are entitled thereto,..." (Q. 4:58).1105 i. (plenty, greatness in number), as in "And when We decide to destroy a community We increase the number of its people who have lost themselves entirely in the pursuit of pleasures,..." (Q.17:16)1106 There are four variant readings of amarnā. (1) amarnā which is the common reading; (2) āmarnā which is the reading of ‘Alī, Qatādah, and Abū al-‘Āliyah according to al-T.abarsī, and that of Ibn ‘Abbās according to al-Qurt.ubī; (3) amirnā which is the reading of al-H.asan and Yah.yá ibn Ya‘mar according to al-T.abarsī; and (4) ammarnā which is the reading of Ibn ‘Abbās, Abū ‘Uthmān al-Nahdī, and Abū Ja‘far Muh.ammad ibn ‘Alī according to al-T.abarsī, whereas according to al-Qurt.ubī it is that of Abū al-‘Āliyah, Mujāhid and alH.asan beside Abū ‘Uthmān al-Nahdī. The first three readings mean "we increased their number", the last means "we made them rulers".1107 We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah examined al-wujūh wa ’l-naz.ā’ir in the Qur’ān very briefly. We have also seen that scholars in later generations treated this field of study very extensively, so that sometimes they included the commentaries of the mufassirīn and gave the specific meanings rather than the wujūh of the terms they were dealing with. It is true that the interpretations of these early mufassirīn were compiled and became a science by itself. We also have seen that despite the differences and variety of interpretations of a certain verse or word, many of them are reconciliable and run together, and this contributes to further understanding of the Qur’ānic texts.

C. Meanings of Particles Ibn Qutaybah deals with thirty-three particles in his Ta’wīl in a chapter entitled ("The Interpretation of 1105. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 176; idem, Qurrah, p. 65; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 40.

1106. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 176; idem, Qurrah, p. 65; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 41.

1107. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 405; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 10, pp. 232-233.

313

Particles and Uninflected Verbs Similar to Them"). The term (lit. "letters of meanings") for the particles means meaningful letters, which are the opposite of the (alphabetical letters) which have no meaning.

These particles are as follows: 1.

(how many a) The particle ka’ayyin means kam (how many a), as in

“And how many a community has turned with disdain from the commandment of its Sustainer and His apostles..." (Q. 65:8, Asad). 1108 The term ka’ayyin can be read as kā’in which is more eloquent in Ibn Qutaybah's view. The example of the latter is in the following poem of Zuhayr: * “How many a silent person whom you admire; his [only] merit or demerit (lies) in [his] speaking.”1109

2.

(how)

Kayfa has two meanings: a. (in what condition), as in the expression (how are you) meaning "in what condition are you"? It is here an interrogative particle. b. (wonder, surprise), as in "How can you refuse to acknowledge God, seeing that you were lifeless and He gave you life,..." (Q. 2:28, Asad).1110 According to al1108. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 519; idem, Tafsīr, p. 471; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 117; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 309; Ibn Fāris, alS.āh.ibī, p. 161; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 223-224; and al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh alLughah, p. 243.

1109. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 519. Al-Qurt.ubī mentions four variant readings of ka’ayyin based on dialects: (1) which is the reading of Ibn Kathīr; it is originally with the transformation of letter yā’ into alif; (2) which is the drop of the alif in ‫ كائِن‬which is the reading of Ibn Muh.ays.in; (3) ٍ‫ كَـاء‬which is also the reading of Ibn Muh.ays.in; (4)

which is the original reading. Apart from these four variant

readings, al-Qurt.ubī also mentions another but unidentified reading, namely, .

See al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, pp. 228-229.

1110. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 520. This is also the view of al-Zarkashī, see alBurhān, vol. 4, pp. 331-332.

314

Zamakhsharī, it implies inkār (rejection, reproach) and ta‘ajjub, whereas according to al-Farrā’ it means ta‘ajjub and tawbīkh (reproof, reproach).1111 Ibn Fāris gives more details about kayfa. He mentions three meanings of it, two of which are mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah above. The other meaning is "in whatever condition", as in the expression meaning "I shall surely welcome you in whatever condition you have been ." However, he mentions three other meanings, as follows: a.

(negation), as in "How would God bestow His guidance upon people who have resolved to deny the truth after having attained to faith,..." (Q. 3:86, Asad). It means that Allah will never guide such people. b. (reproach), as in "And how could you deny the truth when it is unto you that God's messages are being conveyed, ..." (Q. 3:101, Asad). c. (emphasis), as in "How, then, [will the sinners fare on Judgment Day,] when We shall bring forward a witness from within every community,..." (Q. 4:41). The particle kayfa here emphasises the content of the previous verse, namely, "Verily, Allah does not wrong [anyone] by as much as an atom's weight;..." (Q. 4:40). It means, Allah would never wrong anybody, not even as much as the weight of an atom (dharrah) in this world, let alone in the Hereafter when He brings of every community a witness...."1112 Al-Zarkashī gives two more meanings of kayfa other than those mentioned above, namely: a. (to give warning), as in “Behold, then, what all their scheming came to in the end:…” (Q. 27:51, Asad). b. (to allert, to call attention) and (to give a lesson, a deterrent 1111. See al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 65; and Ma‘ānī al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 23.

According to al-Suyūt.ī, quoting al-Rāghib al-As.bahānī, the particle kayfa in the above verse means tawbīkh (reproach), see al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 224-225; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 2, p. 196. Al-T.abarsī mentions both tawbikh and ta‘ajjub with his explanation, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 70.

1112. Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 159-160.

315

example) as in “Behold how We bestow [on earth] more bounty on some of them than on others;” as the verse continues with “but [remember] the life to come will be far higher in degree and far greater in merit and bounty.” (Q. 17:21, Asad).1113 3.

,

and

(except, other than; equal, even)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions two meanings of the word sawá and siwá as follows: a. (other than), as in the following Dhū al-Rummah's poem: * “And water, [namely, a watering place] avoided by rain [namely, did not receive water from rain, but from a spring], so that there was nothing in it [namely, the watering place] other than green hatching doves.”1114

The poet was speaking about a dry watering place, as it received its water solely from a spring. The supply of water was so minimal that green doves were able to build their nests and hatch their young in it. b. (middle), as in “[Pharaoh said to Moses:] 'But we can surely produce magic to match thine! So make a tryst between us and thee, which we shall not fail to keep - neither we nor thou - in a central place, [namely, equally distant for both sides]." (Q. 20:58).1115 449. See al-Zarkashi, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 331.

1114. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 521. C. Macartney (ed.), Dīwān, p. 248. Ibn Qutaybah does not give an example from the Qur’ān, because, as stated by al-Suyūt.ī, there is no sawā’ in the Qur’ān meaning "except", see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 199.

1115. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 521; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

20; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 857; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

4, p. 14. This is one of the four interpretations of makānan suwan given by A.Y. Ali. The other three are: (1) "a place equaly convenient to both sides"; (2) "an open level plain, where the people can collect with ease"; and (3) "a place where both sides shall have even chances", namely, "a fair place" as Palmer translates it. Although he states that all these four interpretatiosns are possible meanings, he adopts the last which he considers more comprehensive and includes the others. See A.Y. Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 801, n. 2582. According to Ibn Fāris makānan suwan means "a place where people know how to reach it and get out of it "; see Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 112. Makānan suwan is the reading of Ibn ‘Āmir, ‘Āsim and H.amzah, whereas Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘, Abū ‘Amr and

316

4.

(when)

According to al-Farrā’ and Ibn Qutaybah the particle ayyān is a combination of two words, (which, what), and (time), so that the expression

means "at what time?” The first two letters in

, namely,

are dropped and the particle becomes , which in turn, combined with and finally becomes

. The example from the Qur’ān is as follows:

“They are dead, not living, and they do not [even] know when they will be raised from the dead!" (Q. 16:21, Asad).1116 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions several views about the origin of the term ayyān, as follows: (1) The same as above, namely, from and ; however, instead of dropping the first two letters of the second letter yā’ in together and become becomes

, the first letter alif of

are dropped; the two words are combined ; next, the letter

is changed into , so that it

; (2) It originates from the two words

originates from the word

and

in the pattern of

("which time"); (3) It

, namely,

.1117

Al-Suyūt.ī mentions further details about the use of the particle ayyān.

An unidentified grammarian says that it can be used for the past, whereas others, like Ibn Mālik and Abū H.ayyān, say that it is used exclusively for the future. It is used for questioning about a great event according to alSakkākī, while the common view among the Arabic grammarians is that, like the word matá, it can be used for any event.1118 5.

(now, at present)

According to al-Farrā’, quoted by Ibn Qutaybah, the origin of is .

The first letter (alif) was dropped, the second letter (wāw) was turned into al-Kisā’ī read it as makānan siwan; see Ibn Mujāhid, al-Sab‘ah, p. 418.

1116. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 522; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 9899; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 732; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

3, p. 355. See also al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 242; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p.

135.

1117. Al-Suyūt.ī, al -tqān, vol. 2, p. 182.

1118. Ibid, pp. 181-182 and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 619.

317

alif which was combined with the remaining alif, and the word became in accusative case, namely, (āna). The definite article was added to it, and it became

(al-āna). The example given by Ibn Qutaybah is as follows:

“[But God said:] ‘Now? [thou repent, when it is too late?] When ever before this thou hast been rebelling [against Us], and hast been among those who spread corruption?’" (Q. 10:91, Asad).1119 This was said by Allah to Pharaoh who was repenting while he was drowning.

Al-Suyūt.ī gives us more details about the meaning of al-ān. He says that although the term means the present, it can also be used metaphorically for other than the present. A group of philologists specify the meaning of this term to indicate the boundary between the past and the future, although it could also mean what is close to either of the two (past or future), namely, what has just happened (the present perfect tense) as well as what is going to happen. Jamāl al-Dīn ibn Mālik (d. 672/1274) the author of the poems on grammar known as the Alfīyah ("The One Thousand Liner") states that the term al-ān is to indicate the whole present time, such as the time of doing or saying something, or some of this present time. The example of the past with some present time is the following Qur’ānic verse: “Now hath Allah lightened your burden ...” (Q. 8:66, Pickthall); it is like saying

, meaning "I have eaten just now". The example of

the future with some present time is as follows: "... and anyone who now [or ever] tries to listen will [likewise] find a flame lying in wait for him!" (Q. 72:9, Asad). Moreover, the use of al-ān here is in general sense, not restricted to the present.1120 6.

(how, wherefrom) Ibn Qutaybah mentions two meanings of anná, as follows:

1119. Al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 468; and Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp.

523-524. Here Ibn Qutaybah is quoting al-Farrā’ extensively.

1120. Al-Suyūt.ī also says that there is a discrepancy on the function of the definite article al in the term al-ān; some say that it is to indicate the present, others say it is only additional. See al-Itqān vol. 2, p. 161. It is noteworthy that al-ān was originally a noun, according to the grammarians of Bas.rah, whereas according to those of Kūfah, it was originally a verb. See Muh.ammad al-T.antawī, Nash’at al-Nah.w, p.

163.

318

a.

(how) as in "He said: How could Allah bring this [township] back to life after its death?" (Q. 2:259).1121 b. (wherefrom, whence), as in "... where can He have a child from... " (Q. 6:101).1122 Three different interpretations were given by the commentators concerning the meaning of anná in the following verse: “... go, then, unto your tilth as you may desire, ..." (Q. 2:223). It means: Jawzī;1123

according to Mujāhid, al-Farrā’ Ibn Qutaybah, and Ibn alaccording to Qatādah and al-Rabī‘; and

("when")

according to al-Daāk which is rejected by the philologists, as stated by alT.abarsī, because the term anná never means "when".1124 7. a.

(alas, ah, wellady) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of wayka’anna, as follows: (do you not see), which is the opinion of al-Kisā’ī, as in "Do you not see how Allah enlarged the provision for whom He will.... Do you not see how the disbelievers never prosper?" (Q. 28:82).1125

1121. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 525; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 142; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 242; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 249; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 54; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 175; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 611. Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 198. Instead of "how", Ibn al-Jawzī suggests matá ("when") as the meaning of anná in the above verse, see Qurrah, p. 38.

1122. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 525; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 429.

As examples, Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Suyūt.ī use the verse Q. 3:37, while al-Dāmaghānī uses Q. 5:75; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 91; al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 175; and Qāmūs, p.

54. According to Ibn Fāris and al-T.abarsī, besides "wherefrom" and "whence", "how" is also the meaning of anná in the above verse, see al-S.āh.ibī, p. 142; and Majma‘ alBayān, vol. 2, p. 343.

1123. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 321; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 1, p. 144; Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 525; Ibn al-Jawzī, Qurrah, p. 39; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 175.

1124. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 321; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol.

2, p. 175; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 120.

1125. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 526, and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 112. An unidentified shaykh from Bas.rah said to al-Farrā’ that he had heard a woman

319

b.

(does he not know) which, according to Ibn Qutaybah, is the interpretation of Qatādah and a shāhid for al-Kisā’ī’s interpretation, so that the above-mentioned verse means, "Does he not know that Allah enlarged the provision for whom He will....? Does he not know that the disbelievers never prosper?"1126 c. (a mercy for you), which is, according to some unidentified linguists, the language of H.imyar. Ibn Qutaybah does not cite any example for this meaning.1127 Al-Suyūt.ī adds details about the term wayka’anna and its origin, and states four views: that of al-Kisā’ī, al-Akhfash, al-Khalīl, and Ibn alAnbārī. The term, according to al-Kisā’ī, is used for regret and wonder

. It is originally from

. The word

is a second person

pronoun in the genitive form. According to al-Akhfash, noun (ism fi‘l) meaning "I wonder", originally

is a verbal

is the second person pronoun;

is

with the ellipsis of li. Therefore, the verse mentioned above

means, according to al-Akhfash

"I wonder because Allah ..."

Al-Khalīl's view is that, simply stated,

stands alone, and

is a

separate word indicating investigation , not similarity , namely, it does not mean "as if" in this sense. Ibn al-Anbārī's view is that the term has three meanings: (“do you not see”), (“woe unto you”), and that

indicating wonder is joined with

similar to the joining of words in son of my mother").1128 asking her husband the following question: you?"), and her husband answered:

due to its frequent use; it is

which is derived from

("O

("Where is your son, woe unto meaning

("Don't you

see him behind the house?"), see al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 312.

1126. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 526. According to Qatādah, reported by alT.abarī, there are two meanings of wayka’anna, namely, and , as mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah above, see al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 77.

1127. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 527.

1128. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 258; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 449. For further details on the term wayka’anna see al-Farrā, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 312313; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, pp. 1067-8; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān,

320

8.

(as if, as though)

The particle ka‘anna is a combination of the particle ka ("as", "like") and anna ("that"). It is used for a simile, such as the expression ("He drank a drink like honey") is similar to ("He drank a drink as if it were honey"). It functions the same as ka if it were without tashdīd, and with the ellipsis of any pronoun attached to it, such as ka’annahu becomes ka’an in the following poem of Abū Muh.ammad ‘Abd Allāh ibn Barrī (d. 582/1187) to al-Mufad.d.al al-Nukrī, describing a horse: * “He is very strong; his tail is raised while galloping, and his neck is like a long palm stump.”1129

9.

(not)

The particle lāta, as stated by Sībawayh, to some extent, is similar to laysa ("not to exist", "not to be"). Unlike laysa, lāta is indeclinable, as in “..., and they called [unto Us] when it was no longer the time for escape." (Q. 38:3).1130 According to some unidentified grammarians of the Baghdādī school in is separated from (meaning "no"), and is connected with so that

was originally

. This

other words, such as , which becomes of Abū Wajzah, as follows:

is additional to

as well as to

. As a shāhid, they cite the poem

* “[They are] the compassionates when there is no compassionate, and the feeders in the time when there is no feeder.”1131 vol. 4, p. 268; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, pp. 318-319; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol.

15, pp. 418-419.

1129. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 528, and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 13, p. 33 (s.v. ‫)انن‬. Ibn Qutaybah does not mention examples from the Qur’ān which are Q. 27:42 and 10:12. For further details, see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 217-218; and Ibn Fāris, alS.āh.ibī, pp. 161-162.

1130. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 529; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

397. According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word َ‫ الَت‬meaning َ‫ لَيْس‬agrees with that in the Coptic language, see Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 63, or Nabatean language, see Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il, p. 240 and n. 3.

1131. Ibid., p. 530.

321

According to Ibn Qutaybah, lāta is the combination of lā with the additional h, so that lā becomes lāh, and later becomes lāta. It is like the word thumma) which becomes (thummah) and (thummata).

He cites the view of Ibn al-A‘rābī who says that mentioned above was originally

in the poem

with the additional h, then it was

started with . However, if we join the two words, the h becomes ta; instead of saying al-‘āt.ifūnah h.īna mā we say al-‘āt.ifūnata h.īna ma.1132 This view of Ibn Qutaybah, despite his belonging to the Baghdādī school, is in line with that of Abū ‘Ubaydah, as well as the Kūfī and the Bas.rī grammarians.1133 10.

(whatever, whatsoever) The particle mahmā functions as mā in recompense, such as

"And they said [unto Moses:] 'Whatever sign thou mayest produce before us in order to cast a spell upon us thereby, we shall not believe thee!'" (Q. 7:132).1134 Ibn Qutaybah states the view of al-Khalīl and Sībawayh on the particle mahmā as follows: According to al-Khalīl, the origin of mahmā is mā added with an ineffectual mā ; the alif of the first mā is replaced with h, so that

becomes

. He asserts that this ineffectual

mā can also be added to matá, such as the expression rendered

can also be

; it can also be added to ayy, such as "... by whichever name you invoke Him, [He is always

the One] His are the most beautiful names..." (Q. 17:110), meaning as ("unto whichever ye cry"). Sībawayh asserts that it is possible that mahmā was originally mah with an additional mā; it is the same as mā added to idh.1135 1132. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 531. The purpose of this additional tā’ is to balance the meter of the poem.

1133. Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 176; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 468, s.v. ‫ الت‬. For further details, see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1223; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 230-231.

1134. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 532.

1135. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 532; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 250. The term mah is an expression indicating reproach and prevention from talking or acting on

322

11.

(what) and

(who)

In this section Ibn Qutaybah examines mā and its meanings, including man. He does not treat man independently. He states that originally mā and man have the same meaning, then man was used for human beings, and mā for others. He cites three examples of the meanings of mā as follows: a. (who, whom) as in "And Him Who hath created male and female." (Q. 92:3, Pickthall). This is the opinion of Abū ‘Ubaydah.1136 b. (who, which), as in the above verse.1137 This interpretation of mā with al-ladhī in the above verse is from al-H.asan and al-Kalbī.1138 This interpretation is advocated by Abu ‘Amr ibn al-‘Alā’ who contends that the people of Makkah, when they heard thunder, used to say to it meaning "Glorified be Whom you have 1139 glorified"). c. turns its succeeding verb into mas.dar; it is what modern grammarians the part of the listener; see Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 174. For more details on mahmā see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, 470; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p.

467.

1136. Similarly, mā means man in Q. 91:5 and 6; see Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 2, pp. 30-31; Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 533; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 567; idem, Qurrah, p. 221; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 171.

1137. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 533; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 261. Instead of Q. 92:3 above, Ibn al-Jawzī mentions Q. 2:159 as an example; see Nuzhah, p. 567; and Qurrah, p. 221.

1138. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 5-11. Moreover, the reading of Ibn Mas‘ūd says al-ladhī instead of mā, see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1612.

1139. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 533; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 567; and alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 140. Al-Tha‘ālibī mentions a variant expression of the people of Makkah when they heard the thunder, namely, Subh.āna mā sabbah.at lahu ’lra‘d ("Glory to Whom the thunder has glorified"). Instead of al-ladhī, he interprets man as the meaning of mā in the above expression; see Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 244. On hearing the thunder the Prophet used to say Subh.āna man yusabbih.u al-ra‘du bih.amdih ("Glory to Whom the thunder is glorifying with its praising"), whereas ‘Alī and Ibn ‘Abbās said respectively Subh.āna man sabbah.ta lahu and Subh.āna ’l-ladhī sabbah.ta lahu which have the same meaning; see al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 686; and alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 283.

323

call mā mas.darīyah. This is the view of al-Farrā’, who interprets the above verse as "And His creation of male and female."1140 The meanings of mā were extensively discussed by grammarians in the past. Ibn al-Anbārī, for example, mentioned three meanings: (1) alladhī, such as the expression meaning ("‘Abd Allāh who stood up"); (2) lam (not), such as

meaning

("‘Abd Allāh did not stand up"); and (3) mazīdah (additional), such as (Q. 2:26) in which mā is additional.

Tiflīsī and Ibn al-Jawzī mentioned six and seven meanings respectively, whereas Ibn Fāris and al-Suyūt.ī both mentioned eight meanings.1142 Despite the discrepancy which occasionally occurred in the interpretation of the particle mā in the verses of the Qur’ān, these various interpretations are generally reconciliable, and even complement each other. For example, in the verse (Q. 80:17), 1141

1143 according to Tiflīsī's interpretation, mā means "what" ; this is the interpretation which is adopted by A.Y. Ali when he translates the above verse as follows: "Woe to man! What hath made him reject God?"1144 On the other hand, al-Zamakhsharī and al-Suyūt.ī asserts that mā in this verse indicates wonder;1145 this is the interpretation followed

1140. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 533; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p.

270. Al-T.abarī mentions the two meanings of mā in the above verse, namely, man and mā mas.darīyah, see Jāmi‘, vol. 30, p. 140. Pickthall follows the first, while A.Y. Ali follows the second in their respective translations. Asad follows the second, but says in the footnote that literally it means the first.

1141. Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 195-197. However, according to alZamakhsharī, the function of ma in the above verse is for emphasis, as it means h.aqqan ("truly") and al-bāttah ("definitely"), see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 61.

1142. For further details, see Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 195-197; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 260-262; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 565-567; idem, Qurrah, pp. 220-221; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 171-2; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 242-244.

1143. Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 261.

1144. A.Y. Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 1688.

1145. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1579; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 404; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 243.

324

by M.M. Pickthall when he translates the verse as follows: "Man is (self-) destroyed: how ungrateful!"1146 Both interpretations are mentioned by alFarrā’ and al-T.abarsī.1147 The third interpretation is that of Ibn al-Jawzī who maintains that mā indicates wonder in the interrogative form ,1148 namely, in modern terminology, a rhetorical question 12.

.

(almost, nearly, to be near to, to be on the point of)

The term kāda, like karaba and awshaka, belongs to the category of verbs called by the grammarians af‘āl al-muqārabah, namely, verbs which indicate being on the verge of doing something.1149 According to Ibn Qutaybah, the term kāda means "to be on the point of (doing something) but did not do it" . It is not followed by an; therefore, it is not right to say , but rather , as in ".... So they sacrificed her [namely, the cow], though almost they did not." (Q. 2:71, Pickthall).1150 However, kāda followed by an occurs in poetry,1151 as in the following poem of Ru’bah: "It had nearly come to 1152 nought from length of wear." (Lane's translation) Another view is that kāda indicates the occurrence of something , such as the following poem of Dhū al-Rummah: 1146. M.M. Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, p. 686.

1147. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 237; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 438.

1148. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 566; and idem, Qurrah, p. 221.

1149. See H. Moch. Anwar, Tarjamah Matan Alfiyah [Ibn Mālik] (N.p.: Pt. Alma‘arif, 1981), p. 94.

1150. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 534; and al-Murtad.á, al-Amālī, vol. 2, p. 11. Lane translates

in the above verse as "and they were not near to doing (it)"; see

Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2636.

1151. According to al-Qurt.ubī, kāda can be followed by an in Arabic language except in the Qur’ān, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 222.

1152. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 534; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 446; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 2636; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 342. According to al-Qurt.ubī, kāda without an in the above poem would be better, because an indicates the future, see alJāmi‘, vol. 1, p. 222. Ibn Mālik asserts that kāda should not be followed by an, although it does occur rarely, see Anwar, Matan Alfiyyah, pp. 94-95.

325

* “And if Luqman the sage happened to take a glance at Mayy unveiled, he would be surprised.”

Here kāda yabraqu ("he would be on the point of being surprised") means labariqa ("he would be surprised).1153 According to this view the term kāda here is, as stated by al-Murtad.á, additional and has no function, and therefore is not translated. Similarly, the verse (Q. 24:40) means ("he does not see it"). The term yakad here is not only additional, but is also said to function as emphasis. However, another view says that yakad in the above verse is not additional.1154 Al-Suyūt.ī gives us more details on kāda. He asserts that the term indicates that something nearly happened. If it is followed by a negation, then it negates that it nearly happened. On the other hand, the affirmation of itindicates the affirmation that it had nearly happened.1155 Al-Suyūt.ī notes that it is commonly said that kāda with negation indicates the occurrence of the action, whereas kāda with affirmation indicates the negation of such an occurrence. For example, (he almost did not do) means

(he did), as in Q. 2:71 mentioned above. This is

also Ibn Fāris's view.1156 The expression

(Zayd almost did) means

(he did not do), as in "And they almost beguile thee (Muhammad)..." (Q. 17:73).1157 Al-Suyūt.ī rejects the view that the present tense of kāda with negation indicates that the action does occur, as in "... he cannot

1153. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 534-535. See also Macartney, ed., Shi‘r Dhī ’lRummah, p. 392.

1154. See al-Murtad.á, al-Amālī, vol. 2, p. 11.

1155. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 215; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 382, s.v.

1156. See Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 145.

1157. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 779 and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 431. Al-Suyūt.ī quotes the view of Ibn ‘Abbās who says that every kāda, akādu, or yakādu in the Qur’ān means the action does not take place. See alItqān, vol. 2, pp. 215-216.

326

nearly see it" (Q. 24:40, Rodwell),1158 since he does not see anything. He contends that instead of "he almost does not see it" the meaning of the verse is "he does not almost see it (or, he is not near to seeing it)", namely, the negation of almost (or the nearness to) seeing it, let alone seeing it.1159 The same with Q. 2:71 above where the people of Moses slaughtered the cow; before that, they had not almost done it, namely, they had been far from slaughtering it.1160 Al-Suyūt.ī also states that kāda sometimes means arāda (to want), as in "... I want to keep it hidden..." (Q. 20:15). This view is also mentioned by al-Murtad.á and Ibn al-Anbārī.1161 On the other hand, arāda sometimes means kāda, as in “... a wall upon the 1162 point of falling into ruin..." (Q. 18:77).

13.

(nay, rather; even; but; however, yet)

Bal is a particle of digression and emendation; it denotes digression from that which precedes. Ibn Qutaybah mentions two ways of using bal, as follow: a. to correct a wrong statement, such as "I saw Zayd, nay, 1158. I am choosing Rodwell's translation of the verse in question, as it agrees with al-Suyūt.ī's interpretation; see J.M. Rodwell, The Koran (London: J.M. Dent & Son Ltd, 1976), p. 447. Asad and ‘Ali translate it as "he can hardly see it", whereas Dawood and Pickthall translate it as "he can scarcely see it" and "he scarce can see it" respectively.

1159. This is also the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī; see Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 67, and al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 955. Al-Farrā’ and al-T.abarsī mention two views: the first is similar to that of Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Zamakhsharī above; the second is that the verse in question means "he sees it tardily" according to al-Farrā’, and "with difficulty" according to al-T.abarsī; see al-Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 255, and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 146. It is like the expression “he hardly (scarcely, or tardily) rose" when one has risen after difficulty; see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2636.

1160. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 215.

1161. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 216; al-Murtad.á, al-Amālī, vol. 2, p. 12; and Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 97. See also Lane, Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2636.

1162. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 216. For further details on kāda, see alMurtad.á, al-Amālī, vol. 2, pp. 11-14; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 7, p. 2636; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, pp. 382-385 (s.v.

and

).

327

rather ‘Amr." b.to shift from one object of discourse to another, as in "Sād. Consider this Qur’ān, endowed with all that one ought to remember! But nay - they who are bent on denying the truth are lost in [false] pride, and [hence] deeply in the wrong." (Q. 38:1-2, Asad).1163 According to al-Tha‘ālibī the meaning of bal in the above verse is inna ("verily").1164 (an interrogative particle introducing direct and indirect questions) Ibn Qutaybah mentions the function and meanings of hal, as follows: a. It is used to ask questions,1165 as in

14.

"Say: 'Can any of those beings to whom you ascribe a share in God's divinity create [life] in the first instance, and then bring it forth anew?'"

(Q. 10:34, Asad).1166 Ibn Qutaybah states that there is (affirmation) and (reproach) in this verse. The taqrīr is the affirmation that none of the partners ascribed to Allah by infidels can produce creation and reproduce it, except Allah Himself. The tawbīkh is reproaching the infidels for believing and ascribing partners to Allah. b. (already) in some Qur’ānic verses, according to the Qur’ānic commentators, such as Abū ‘Ubaydah, al-Kisā’ī, Sībawayh, al-Farrā’, alZamakhsharī, al-T.abarsī and al-Zarkashī, as in “There has already been an immensely long span of time when man was not yet a thing to be thought of." (Q. 76:1).1167 1163. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 536. See also al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 185186.

1164. Al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 242. See also Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp.

145-146; and al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 637-638. For further details on bal see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, pp. 242-244.

1165. It is, as stated by Ibn al-Anbārī, a question of what is unknown to the questioner in order to know and remove doubt, for example, ‫"( هَلْ قَامَ عَبْدُ اهلل‬Did ‘Abd Allah stand up?" See al-Ad.dād, p. 191.

1166. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 538; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 302; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 623; idem, Qurrah, p. 239; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 477.

1167. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 538; idem, Tafsīr, p. 502; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 279; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, pp. 118-119; al-Farrā’,

328

c.

(not), according to the linguists, as in

“Wait they [namely, they did not wait], indeed for nothing [namely, anything] less than the angels should come to them..." (Q. 6:158).1168 Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī mention four meanings of hal, whereas Ibn al-Jawzī mentions seven meanings as above. The rest are as follows: a. (an expression indicating a polite offer, such as, "shall I...?", "would you like ...", etc), 1169 as in to you a bargain...” (Q. 61:10, Asad).1170 b. (negative question, such as "is it not", etc), as in

“Shall I point out

"Is not in all of this, to anyone endowed with reason, a solemn affirmation [of the existence and oneness of Allah]?." (Q. 89:5). c. (command), as in "[And] He adds: 'Would you like to look [and see him]?'" (Q. 37:54, Asad), meaning "look [at him]!" d. (request), as in "On the day when We will ask Hell: 'Art thou filled?' - and it will answer: '[Give

Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 213; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 4, p. 1558; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 406; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 433; Ibn alAnbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 191-192; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 301-302; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p.

624; idem, Qurrah, p. 239; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 476; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol.

2, p. 253.

1168. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 538-539; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 387; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 433; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 301; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, 624; idem, Qurrah, p. 240; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 476; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 254; and Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, p. 193.

1169. This is one of the meanings of alā. Its other meanings are: (1) interjection to emphasise the statement, such as "behold", "verily", as in “Behold, they are indeed the foolish..." (Q. 2:13); (2) interjection indicating alertness, such as "oh", as in ("Oh, you who are waking up, stand up!"); and (3) interjection indicating strong demand, as in

"Hey, will you repent

and stop doing transgression?", see al-Munjid, p. 15 (s.v. ).

1170. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah. p. 625; idem, Qurrah. p. 240; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 476; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 302.

329

me] more'" (Q. 50:30).1171 15.

and (if only, were it not that, were it not for; why not, why was there not) Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of law lā as follows: a. (why not). It is a word indicating incitement to do, or reproof for not doing something, if it is not followed by a main clause (jawāb), as in the Arabic expression (If only I did such-and-such), and in the Qur’ānic verse "If only, when Our disaster came on them, they had been humble!" (Q. 6:43, Pickthall).1172 Similarly, law mā sometimes also means hallā, as in "Why dost thou not bring before us angels ..." (Q. 15:7, Asad), meaning "If only you would bring angels before us..."1173 b. (if not, were it not that), indicating something has not taken place due to the occurrence of something else, if law lā is followed by a main clause, as in "And had he not been of those who glorify (Allah), he would have indeed remained in its belly till the Day all shall be raised from the dead." (Q. 37:143-1444).1174

1171. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 625; and idem, Qurrah, p. 241. Al-T.abarsī mentions three interpretations of the above verse, as follows: (1) It indicates the vastness of Hell, that if it were asked whether it is already full, if it could talk, it would answer that it is not yet full and is still vast enough for more people to enter; (2) Allah creates a means with which Hell will answer when it is asked by Allah; and (3) The question is addressed to the keepers of Hell; they answer that it is already full, to indicate Allah's promise to fill it. See Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, pp. 147-148.

1172. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 540; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 2, p. 301; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 243; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 163; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 141; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 532; and idem, Qurrah, p. 209. According to Ibn ‘Abbās, the word meaning is the language of the Quraysh, as in Q. 24:13, see Ibn ‘Abbās, Gharīb al-Qur’ān, p. 58, and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qabā’il, p. 206.

1173. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 541; idem, Tafsīr, p. 235; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 346; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 716; and Ibn Fāris, alS.āh.ibī, p. 163. According to al-Tha‘ālibī, mā in law mā is either additional or s.ilah, see Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 243.

1174. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 541; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 533; idem, Qurrah,

330

c.

(not), according to some commentators, as in "For, there has never yet been any community that has ever believed and profited by its belief except the people of Jonah" (Q. 10:98).1175

16.

(not, not yet; when, as; since, whereas)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions three meanings of lammā as follows: a. (not, not yet), as in “... Nay, they have not yet tasted the suffering which I do impose!" (Q. 38:8, Asad).1176 b. (but, except), as in ".... Yet, all this would have been nothing but a [brief] enjoyment of life in this world..." (Q. 43:35, Asad).1177 c. (when, at the time when, at the time of) if it is followed by a main clause, as in

“.... And when thy Sustainer's

p. 209; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 239-240. Ibn Fāris mentions two meanings of law lā in the above verse, hallā and lam, see al-S.āh.ibī, p. 164.

1175. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 541; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 533; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 164. The jumhūr of the commentators, however, do not agree with this interpretation. They say that law lā in the above verse indicates reproach for disbelieving before the coming of punishment. This is supported by Ubayy's variant reading fahallā instead of falaw lā in the above verse; see al-S.uyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

240. Al-Zamakhsharī mentions hallā as the interpretation of law lā, whereas al-T.abarsī mentions both lam and hallā; see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 598; and Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 134.

1176. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 542; al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1226; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 234. Instead of the above verse, Yah.yá ibn Sallām, Tiflīsī and al-Dāmaghānī give other examples, among which is Q. 62:3. AlTha‘ālibī and Ibn Fāris assert that lammā means lam only if it indicates the future, as in the above example; see Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 243; and al-S.āh.ibī, p. 164.

1177. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 542; al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 756; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 143; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 422; and al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 2, p. 235. Ibn Qutaybah mentions a variant reading of lammā, which is lamā.

The word lamā is the combination of la (which acts as emphasis) and mā which is s.ilah that can be dropped. The above verse, then, based on this reading means "Verily, all of them are a provision of the life of the world." We notice here that in is light inna (meaning "verily"). See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 542; see also Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 46; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1326.

331

judgment came to pass, ..." (Q. 11:101, Asad).1178 17.

(or)

Ibn Qutaybah mentions four meanings of aw as follows: a. (to indicate doubt), such as the expression ‘Abd Allah or Muh.ammad").1179 b.

("I saw

(to choose between two things), namely, or, as in

"...[he] shall redeem himself by fasting, or alms, or [any other] act of worship...." (Q. 2:196, Asad).1180 c. (the conjunction "and"), as in "and then giving forth a reminder, [promising] freedom from blame or [offering] a warning!" (Q. 77:5-6, Asad).1181 Al-Farrā’ rejects the 1178. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 542; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 143; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 422; and Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 257. Al-Tha‘ālibī and Ibn Fāris assert that lammā can mean h.īna only if it indicates the past, see Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 243 and al-S.āh.ibī, p. 165. Al-Suyūt.ī states that apart from the occurrence in the past, there should also be two clauses, the validity of one depends on the other, as in "... but when He brought you safe to land, ye turned away, ..."

(Q. 17:67), see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 234.

1179. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 543. Ibn Qutaybah does not mention any example from the Qur’ān, such as "They will answer: ‘We have spent there a day, or part of a day;..’" (Q. 23:113, Asad). See al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 612. Ibn Fāris explains the distinction between the expression ("Is Zayd with you or Bakr?"), and “Is Zayd with you or [rather] ‘Amr?". In the first expression the questioner is in doubt whether one of the two persons is with us; the answer will be yes or no. In the second expression the questioner knows that one of the two persons is with us, but he wonders whether it is Zayd or ‘Amr; the answer will be one of the two, Zayd or ‘Amr. See al-S.āh.ibī, p. 127.

1180. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 543; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 127; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 259; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 1209; idem, Qurrah, p. 41; alDāmaghānī cites Q. 5:89 as an example, see Qāmūs, p. 56.

1181. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 543; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 222; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 415; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 38-39; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 56; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 109-10; idem, Qurrah, p. 42; Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p. 258; and al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 241, citing Q. 76:24 as an example.

332

occurrence of aw meaning wa in Arabic language other than in the Qur’ān as in the above example. Giving the example of the verse “... And behold, either we [who believe in Him] or you [who deny His oneness] are on the right path, or have clearly gone astray!" (Q. 34:24, Asad), al-Farrā’ says that the commentators' interpretation of this verse is "we are on the right path, and you have clearly gone astray". In the expression ("if you like take one or two dirhams"), it never means "take one and two", namely, three. Therefore, the meaning of the above verse is "we are on the right path, or have clearly gone astray, and you, too, are on the right path, or have clearly gone astray", whereas Allah knows that His messenger is on the right path, and the others have clearly gone astray. It is the same as saying "one of us is a liar" when we accuse somebody of lying, but not openly.1182 d. ("nay, rather", "nay, but"), as in "And [then] We sent him [once again] a hundred thousand [souls], nay, rather more." (Q. 37:147).1183 This interpretation, however, is rejected by Ibn Qutaybah who claims that bal is used to correct a wrong statement.

He maintains that instead of bal, the particle aw in the above verse means wa. As evidence, he quotes Jarir's poem as follows: * “How did you make the [two] tribes Tha‘labah the knights 1182. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 362.

1183. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 543-544; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol.

2, p. 175; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 239;Yah.yá ibn Sallām, al-Tas.ārīf, p.

258; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 14, p. 54; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 241; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, vol. 2, p. 241; and al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 56; Ibn al-Jawzī cites the view of Abū Zakariyyā who says that the function of aw in this verse is to indicate obscurity ( ), see Nuzhah, p. 110. It means that the exact number is known by Allah, but He made it secret when He added aw yazīdūn (or more), see Qurrah, p. 42. Ibn Fāris mentions three interpretations of aw in the above verse: wa, bal, and ibāh.ah (permission), namely, if someone says that the number is one hundred thousand, he is right, and if the other says even more than that, he is also right, see al-S.āh.ibī, p. 127.

Al-T.abarsī mentions four meanings, namely, al-ibhām, al-takhyīr, wa, and bal. For further details, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 459. According to Ibn ‘Abbās the meaning of aw in the above verses is bal in the language of Kindah tribe, see Gharīb alQur’ān, p. 62 and Abū ‘Ubayd ibn Sallām, Lughāt al-Qaba’il, p. 238.

333

and Riyah. equal to T.uhayyah and Khishāb tribes?”1184

This is a clear evidence for those who claim that Ibn Qutaybah does not belong to either the grammarian school of Bas.rah or Kūfah, but of Baghdād, the mixture of the two schools. The former school says that aw cannot be interpreted as wa or bal, but the latter allows it, whereas Ibn Qutaybah says that it can be interpreted as wa, but not as bal.1185 The argument of the grammarians of Bas.rah is as follows: (1) If aw can be interpreted as bal in this poem, then this can also be applied to other poems or expressions. For example, the expression ("I beat Zayd or ‘Amr") can never mean ("I beat Zayd, nay, rather ‘Amr"); (2) Bal is used to correct a mistake or a forgotten thing. Allah never forgets or makes mistakes. When He uses it, it means to correct the previous statement which is not His, as in “And [yet] some say: 'The Most Gracious has taken unto Himself a son!' Limitless is He in His glory! Nay, [those whom they regard as God's 'offspring' are but His] honoured servants." (Q. 21:26, Asad).1186 Defending the school of Kūfah in general and al-Farrā’ in particular who holds this view, Ibn Fāris asserts that this view had been adopted by people before al-Farrā’. Moreover, it is wrong to assume that bal can only be used after a mistake or forgetting, as the Arabs cite the following poem of al-‘Ajjāj: ("Nay, but he did not agitate sorrows and distress which has appeared"). Here, bal neither corrects a mistake nor has the sense of aw. With regard to the verse "And yet, after all this, your hearts hardened and became like rocks, or even harder,..." (Q. 2:74, Asad), or “.... And so, the advent of the Last Hour will but manifest itself [in a single moment,] like the twinkling of an eye, or closer still..." (Q. 16:77, Asad), Ibn Fāris gives his commentary as follows: In these verses the Speaker, namely, Allah, 1184. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 543-544 and idem, Tafsīr, p. 375. It is also the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah, that the particle aw in this poem means wa, see Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 148.

1185. See Muh.ammad al-T.ant.āwī, Nash’at al-Nah.w, p. 163.

1186. See Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 128.

334

knows whether their hearts were hardened like rocks or harder, or whether the advent of the Last Hour will manifest itself in a twinkling of an eye or closer, but He wants to keep them secret, and therefore puts aw.

Another interpretation, however, is that in Q. 2:74 some of their hearts are as hard as rocks, and others are harder than rocks.1187 There are other meanings of ‫ أو‬which are not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah. For example, (unless) mentioned by Ibn Fāris, as in the expression ("I will surely force you, or [namely, unless] you give me my right").1188 Al-Tha‘ālibī mentions two other meanings, namely, (till, up to), and (until). The example of the former is in Imru’ al-Qays's following poem which he cited while he was coming to the Caesar for help against the Banī Asad tribe that had killed his father: * “So, I said to him: 'Do not let your eyes weep; verily, we are trying (to get our) right or [namely, until] we die; in that case, we shall be excused.'”1189

The example of the latter is the following poem: “with beating and stabbing or [namely, until] he dies the quickest (death)".1190 This poem was probably a description of a fight where a person kept attacking his enemy fiercely and did not stop fighting until he was killed.

18.

("or", introducing the second member of an alternative question)

Two meanings of am are mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, as follows: a. (or), as in "Can you ever feel secure that He Who is in heaven will not cause the earth to swallow you up when, lo and behold, it 1187. See ibid., pp. 128-129. For more details, see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol.

4, pp. 209-214.

1188. See ibid., pp. 127-128.

1189. According to Ibn Fāris, aw in this poem means illā an, so that it means "unless we die", instead of "till we die". See ibid., p. 128.

1190. See Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 241. For more details on aw, see al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 2, pp. 175-178; idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 612-614; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol.

54-55; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, pp. 122-123.

335

begins to quake? Or can you ever feel secure that He Who is in heaven will not let loose against you a deadly stormwind, ...?" (Q. 67:16-17, Asad).1191 b. (alif as an interrogative particle), as in "Do they, perchance, envy other people for what Allah has granted them out of his bounty?..." (Q. 4:54, Asad). This is also the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah.1192 Ibn Qutaybah maintains that there are many verses in the Qur’ān where the particle am serves as alif istifhām, especially when the am does not constitute an alternative question, as in "Alif Lam Mim. (This is) the revelation of the Book in which there is no doubt, from the Lord of the worlds. Or do they say, 'He has forged it'?" (Q. 32:13, Ali). Ibn Qutaybah asserts that since the particle am here is not preceded by another question, then it serves as alif istifhām. Otherwise, it means aw.1193 Ali translates am as an interrogative particle aw above.

There are other meanings of am which are not mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, among which are as follows: a. , as in "Nay, rather they say: '(he is), a poet' ..."

(Q. 52:30).1194 b. , as in "And they assert, '[Muh.ammad] has invented it."

1191. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 546; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 105; and idem, Qurrah, p. 37. Al-Dāmaghānī cites this verse saying that am in this verse means istifhām (question), see Qāmūs, p. 37.

1192. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 546; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

130; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 105-106; and idem, Qurrah, p. 38. This is the view of Sībawayh, according to al-Tha‘ālibī, citing Q. 2:108 as an example, see Fiqh alLughah, p.241. Al-T.abarsī inteprets am in this verse as bal, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol.

2, p. 61.

1193. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 546-547. According to Abū ‘Ubaydah, however, am in this verse is synonymous with the conjunctions wa and bal; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 130.

1194. Al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, pp. 240-241; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz alQur’ān, vol. 2, p. 233; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 167. Ibn Fāris refers to the view of al-Farrā’ who says that the Arabs put bal in the sense of am and vice versa if the sentence starts with a question, see Fiqh al-Lughah, pp. 125-126; alDāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī cites Q. 13:33 as an example, see Qāmūs, p. 37; Nuzhah, p. 106; and Qurrah, p. 38.

336

(Q. 10:38).1195 c. additional , as in I am surely better than this contemptible man who can hardly make his meaning clear." (Q. 43:52).1196 19. (not) Ibn Qutaybah mentions one meaning only of lā, namely lam, with one example from the Qur’ān, and two from poetry. The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: "… for [as long as he was alive] he did not accept the truth, nor did he pray [for enlightenment]." (Q. 75:31, Asad). One example from poetry is the poem of Abū Khirāsh alHudhalī as follows: If you forgive, Oh God, forgive generously; (for) is there any servant of Yours who does not commit sin?”1197

Ibn al-Jawzī mentions three meanings of lā, one of which is lam as mentioned above. The other two are lā indicating negation ( in modern terminology), and lā indicating prohibition (

in modern terminology).

Their respective examples are as follows: “And God will not speak to them on the Day of Resurrection, nor will He cleanse them [of their sins]; ..." (Q. 2:174, Asad), and "... and do not forget thine own [rightful] share in this world, ..."

(Q. 28:77).1198 Ibn al-Anbārī includes the term lā among the ad.dād (words which have opposite meanings). Beside negation, lā could also mean affirmation, if the sentence is affirmative, and lā in it is additional, such as in the verse: "Allah said: 'What has kept thee from 1195. This is the view of Abū ‘Ubydah, see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 278.

1196. This is the view of Abū Zayd, see Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 126, whereas according to Abū ‘Ubaydah, it means bal, see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 204. For further details on the particle am, see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 180-186; alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 163-165; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 598-603.

1197. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 548; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 243; and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 165.

1198. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 631-632; and idem, Qurrah, p. 245

337

prostrating [lit., 'from not prostrating'] thyself when I commanded thee?' ..."(Q. 7:12), meaning What prevented you from prostrating."

In this case, lā is s.ilah according to al-Farrā’ and al-Zamakhsharī,1199 whereas according to Abū ‘Ubaydah, Ibn al-Anbārī, Ibn Kathīr and alQayrawānī it is additional (zā’idah).1200 This is also the view of Qut.rub who says that like mā, lā occurs additionally in the Qur’ān.1201 There are also different views on the position of lā in the beginning of many verses of the Qur’ān, such as "Nay, I swear by the Day of Resurrection" (Q. 75:1, Pickthall). Al-Kisā’ī, for example, says that lā in this case is additional. This is also the view of Abū ‘Ubaydah. On the other hand, according to al-Farrā’, it is not additional, but a negation of the infidels' allegation that Allah has a son, a companion and a spouse.1202 Many Qur’ānic verses refer to the unbelievers' allegation that Allah has a son (Q. 2:116, 10:68, 18:4, 19: , 19:91 and 21:26). Two verses deny the allegation that Allah has a son and a consort (Q. 6:101 and 72:3).

20.

(nearer) Ibn Qutaybah gives us one meaning of awlá, namely, intimidation and

1199. See al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 374; and al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 1, p. 439.

1200. See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 211; Ibn al-Anbārī, alAd.dād, p. 211; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 2, p. 211; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt.

1, p. 132; see also al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 229; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p.

170.

1201. Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 166.

1202. Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 215-216; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 166; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 277; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 207; and al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb al-Qur’ān., pt. 1, p. 133. As a unit, the Qur’ān mentions the allegation of the infidels in one sūrah, and rejects the allegation in the other. For example, "And yet, they [who deny the truth] say: 'O thou unto whom this reminder has [allegedly] been bestowed from on high: verily, thou art mad!'" (Q. 15:6, Asad), is rejected with “Thou art not, by thy Sustainer's grace, a madman!" (Q. 68:2, Asad). See alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 229. However, al-Farrā’ states that it is also correct to read , see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 207. In this case, la is what is called by Ibn Jinnī

(lām used for starting a sentence), see al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān,

vol. 5, p. 394. For more details on َ‫ال‬, see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 351-361.

338

threats , as in “[And yet, O man, thine end comes hourly] nearer unto thee and nearer - and ever nearer unto thee and nearer." (Q. 75:34-5, Asad), meaning, "Threat be upon you again and again with your end."1203 The term awlá in the expression awlá lahu means, according to alAsma‘ī, "his ruin is approaching" . This is also the view of Tha‘lab and al-Nah.h.ās. Tha‘lab says that the Arabic expression awlá laka means that the ruin is near as if it is said to him ("You are approaching the ruin), as the origin of awlá is al-walyu, meaning "nearness". Al-Nah.h.ās says that awlá laka means ("you almost became ruined"), as if it is said, "the ruin is near to you".1204 21.

(surely, certainly, definitely, of course)

According to al-Farrā’ lā jarama meant the same as lā budda (definitely, inevitably) and lā mah.ālah (positively, absolutely, by all means); then, through its frequent expression, it meant an oath, and eventually it also meant h.aqqan (truly, certainly). The expression means "truly, I shall certainly come to you". The basic meaning of jarama, according to al-Farrā’, is kasaba (to earn, obtain, acquire, gain), as in the following poem of Abū Asmā’ ibn al-D.arībah or ‘Atīyah ibn ‘Afīf: * “And verily thou [Karz al-‘Uqaylī] didst thrust Abū ‘Uyaynah [of the Fazārah tribe] with a thrust [of thy spear] that caused Fazārah [tribe] after it, to be angry [against thee].”

(Lane's translation). 1205 1203. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 549; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 179; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 616. Abū ‘Ubaydah says that the meaning of awlā is ‫( تَوَعُد‬threat), see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 278.

1204. For further details, see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 179; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 616-617.

1205. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 550; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 2, p. 412. Instead of an yaghd.abū it is also written an taghd.abā, see idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 63. However, both are translated as al-ghad.ab, since it is the object (maf‘ūl) of the verb jaramat.

According to Sībawayh, Khalīl, Abū ‘Ubaydah and Ibn Fāris in his work al-S.āh.ibī, the term jaramat means ah.aqqat, so that the verse means "... it was right that the Fazārah tribe would be angry ...", while according to al-Farrā‘, Ibn Qutaybah and Ibn Fāris in his other work, Mayāqīs, it means kasabat, namely, the killing caused the Fazārah tribe to

339

The expression means ("their provider"). Sin, Ibn Qutaybah contends, is called jurm, because it is acquisition and perpetration.1206 There are five Qur’ānic verses with the expression lā jarama, but Ibn Qutaybah does not cite any of them. They are Q. 11:22, 16:23, 62 and 109, and 40:43. Al-Suyūt.ī gives four interpretations of the meaning of lā jarama as follows: (1) Lā is the negation of what is mentioned before, jarama means "true", so that the expression means "nay, it is true that..." (2) Lā is additional, jarama means kasaba, so that the expression mentioned above means “may their deed provide for them remorse" (3) Lā and jarama are two words combined to mean "truly"; and (4) Lā jarama means lā budda.1207 22.

(light "in")

Ibn Qutaybah cites three meanings of the light in, as follows: a. (not), as in "Nothing was [needed] but one single blast [of Our punishment] - and lo! they became as still and silent as ashes." (Q. 36:29, Asad).1208 be angry (

). See Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 358; Ibn Fāris,

al-S.āh.ibī, p. 150; idem, Maqāyīs, vol. 1, p. 446; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

9; and Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 550. However, both meanings are correct, according to Ibn al-Sayyid, although he leans to al-Farrā’s view, when he gives the meaning of the second part of the poem as , as translated above. Instead of t.a‘antu it should be read t.a‘anta (you have stabbed), as the poet in the preceding line addressed the assassin, yā Karzu ("O Kurz"). For further details, see Ibn al-Sayyid, alIqt.idāb (Beirut: N.p., 1901), p. 313, quoted in Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 550-551, nn. 3 and 4.

1206. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 551. Al-Farrā’ said that he heard the Arabs saying meaning “a provider for his family", and meaning “he went out to provide for them". See Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 299.

The word commonly used for "crime" is jarīmah.

1207. See al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 362-363, and al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 231.

1208. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 552; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 217; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 53; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 36; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 129-130; and idem, Qurrah, p. 52. Yah.yá ibn Sallām cites also many other examples, such as Q. 67: 9 and 20, see al-Tas.ārīf, pp. 195-196. See also al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 603604 with different examples.

340

b.

(verily), as in ".... Verily, our Sustainer's promise has been fulfilled." (Q.17:108, Asad).1209 c. (since, as, because), as in "..., and give up all outstanding gains from usury, since ye are truly believers." (Q. 2:278).1210 This meaning is based on the views of unspecified Qur’ānic commentators by Ibn Qutaybah. He asserts that philologists do not put idh as the meaning of in in the above or similar verses; therefore, the meaning of the above verse is "whoever becomes a true believer will stop practising usury."1211 There are three other meanings of in which are not treated by Ibn Qutaybah in this section, as follows: a. (the conditional "if"), as in "[And We said:] 'If you persevere in doing good, you will but be doing good to yourselves; and if you do evil, it will be [done] to yourselves....'"

(Q. 17:7, Asad), and “Say [O Muh.ammad, to mankind): 'If ye love Allah, follow me;...'" (Q. 3:31, Pickthall).1212 b. (in as additional), as in "And yet, We had established them securely in a manner in which We have never established you, [O people of later times;]..." (Q. 46:26, Asad).1213 1209. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 552; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 220; alDāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 53; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 36; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 130; and idem, Qurrah, p. 52. This is the view of Qut.rub, according to al-Suyūt.ī, citing Q. 87:9 as an example; see Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 605-606. According to al-Farrā’, in can mean qad if it is accompanied with the particle la or alā, as in the above example, and in the expressions such as and meaning , see Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Ad.dād, pp. 189-190. Al-T.abarsī's interpretation of in in the verse in question is innahu, see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 446.

1210. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 552; idem, Garīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, pp. 211-212; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 2, p. 219; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 52; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp.

35-36; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 130-131; and idem, Qurrah, p. 53. See also al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 605 with the example from Q. 3:139 and 48:27.

1211. See Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 332-333.

1212. See Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 36; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 129; idem, Qurrah, p.

52; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 167-168.

1213. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 169; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 605. The particle mā in this verse means "not". According to Ibn al-Anbārī it is not correct to

341

c.

("verily", "surely"), as in "... saying [to one another]: 'These two are surely sorcerers..." (Q. 20:63, Asad), based on the variant reading of H.afs. and Ibn Kathīr.1214

23.

(ha! hey! look! there!)

According to Ibn Qutaybah the particle hā is synonymous with the imperative khudh ("take!") and tanāwal ("take!", "accept!"), such as in the imperative expression "Take [it], man!"). The example in the Qur’ān is as follows: "... Take, read my book!" (Q. 69:19, Pickthall). The origin of hā’um is hākum where the letter kāf is substituted with the letter hamzah.1215 Another view, as stated by Ibn Manz.ūr, is that ha is h.arf tanbīh ("the letter of alertness"), namely, an interjection at the beginning of the sentence used to attract the listener's attention similar to the English "hey". For example, (lit., "Hey, this is your brother") and (lit., "Hey, indeed, this is your brother").1216 According to Ibn Zayd and Ibn ‘At.īyah hā means ta‘āl ("come!"), while according to Muqātil it means halumma ("come on!").1217 According to Ibn Qutaybah, the dual of hā’um is hā’umá.1218 This is also the view of Ibn al-Sikkīt and al-Kisā’ī who say that the Arabs say for the singular,

interpret

for the dual, and

as

for the plural; for

in which mā means al-ladhī (which),

and in means qad in the above verse, but rather as

and

in which mā means al-ladhī, and in means mā (not). For further details, see alAd.dād, pp. 189-190, and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 215-222. This is also the view of al-Farrā’, see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 56.

1214. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 169; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 604. For further details on in, see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, pp. 106-108.

1215. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 554.

1216. See Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 475.

1217. See al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 306; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 269.

1218. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 554.

342

the feminine gender, they say

,

. 1219

, and

24.

According to Ibn Qutaybah, hāti is synonymous with the imperative "give me", as in ".... Say: Give me your proof (of what you are claiming) if what you say is true!" (Q. 2:111). He quotes al-Farrā’ who said that he had never heard of , the dual number for

, but the singular and plural only, namely,

feminine), and meaning

and

(for singular

(for plural feminine). Negation is expressed by ("I shall not give you"), but the Arabs do not say it

for the past tense, such as imperative, such as 25.

and

("I have given"), nor in the negative

("do not give!").1220

(lit., "be elevated!", "come up!” come! )

The original meaning of ta‘āl, according to al-Farrā’, as quoted by Ibn Qutaybah, is ("come up to us!"), but through popular usage the term became synonymous with person on an elevated place

("come!"), so much so that it can be said to a ("come up!"), when we actually mean

"come down!". It can be used for the singular feminine gender (

), for the

dual ( ), the plural masculine ( ), and the plural feminine ( ).

Although it cannot be used for the negative imperative, it can be used in the past and the present tenses, such as ("I came"), and ("To what thing shall I come?"). The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: 1219. Al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 269. According to Ibn Manz.ūr, Ibn alSikkīt's view is hā’iyā and hā’unna instead of respectively hā’uma and hā’umna for the feminine dual and plural; see Lisān, vol. 15, p. 482. It is said that hā’um indicates activity and pleasure. When a Bedouin called the Prophet loudly, he answered with a long hā’um; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 18, p. 269. For further details on ha see alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 253 and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 482, s.v. . Ibn Fāris's dealing with hā is similar to that of Ibn Qutaybah, almost verbatim, see, al-S.āh.ibī, p.

175.

1220. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 555; however, according to Ibn Manz.ūr, it is also said hātiyā for the dual masculine as well as feminine of the term hāt, see Lisān, vol. 2, p. 107. Ibn Fāris's reliance on Ibn Qutaybah's Ta’wīl is also apparent in dealing with the term hāt, see al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 175-176.

343

"..., say: Come:! Let us summon our sons and your sons,..." (Q. 3:61, Asad).1221 26.

(come!, come on!, onward!, up!, get up!)

Halumma means (come!, come up!). The people of H.ijāz do not make it dual or plural, as it is invariably used for the singular, the dual, the plural, masculine and feminine. The Banū Tamīm people of Najd, however, make dual and plural of it, and say for singular feminine, for dual,

for plural masculine, and

followed by la, for example,

and

for plural feminine.

can be

.1222

There are two Qur’ānic verses mentioning this term, neither of which is given by Ibn Qutaybah as an example. They are "Say: 'Bring forward your witnesses...'"(Q. 6:150, Asad) and "..., as well as those who say to their brethren, 'come hither to us...'"(Q. 33:18, Asad). It is used here invariably, namely, in the language of H.ijāz, although it indicates plural in both verses.

Philologists have different views about the origin of halumma. AlKhalīl asserts that its origin is the combination of for calling attention (

), and

(imperative verb from

meaning "to collect", "to settle").

The alif of is dropped, and it becomes . Al-Farrā’, on the other hand, asserts that it is the combination of the words hal and ’umma. It is like allāhumma which is originally from ("O Allah, lead us well").1223 Ibn Fāris states that, according to some philologists whom he does not identify, this term is originally from meaning "shall I lead (the way)?"; 1221. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 556; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, pp. 147-148; alQurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 130; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, pp. 2143-2144 1222. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 557; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p.

208; al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 129 and vol. 14, p. 151; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, p. 617; al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 59; and al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 432 and vol. 2, p. 1124.

1223. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 557; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 254; Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 12, pp. 617-618; and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 7, p. 129.

According to al-Suyūt.ī, the well-known origin of allāhumma is yā Allāhu in which yā is dropped and replaced with mma (stressed mim) after Allāh, see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 163.

344

it was originally an expression given by a person who is going to bring the meal. This expression develops and later becomes an invitation to a meal.

However, in Ibn Fāris's view, the term is ambiguous.1224 27. (not at all!, on the contrary!, by no means! certainly not!, never!, no!)

The term kallā indicates prevention ( ) and rebuke ( ).1225 Ibn Qutaybah cites six Qur’ānic verses as examples, two of which are as follows: a. "thinking that his wealth will make him live for ever. Nay, but [in the life to come such as] he shall indeed be abandoned to crushing torment!" (Q. 104:3-4, Asad). Here, Ibn Qutaybah asserts, kallā means "his wealth will not make him live for ever". Therefore, it rejects the previous statement in the verse preceding it. b. "… and then, behold, it will be for Us to make its meaning clear. Nay, but [most of] you love this fleeting life." (Q. 75:19-20, Asad). Kallā here means "stop hurrying" . 1226 In other words, kallā in this verse reproves the earlier statement indicating that the Prophet moved his tongue in haste in repeating the revelation, namely, "Move not thy tongue in haste, [repeating the words of the revelation:]" (Q. 75:16, Asad).

1224. See Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 6, p. 60.

1225. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 558. This is the view of Sībawayh and others, such as al-Akhfash and al-Zajjāj, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 231 (s.v.. ).

According to them there is no other meaning of kallā in the Qur’ān, so that a group of them say that whenever kallā is mentioned in a sūrah in the Qur’ān, it indicates that it belongs to the Meccan sūrahs. This is because it signifies warning and threat, most of which were revealed in Mecca (Makkah) since wickedness mostly occurred in that city.

Sībawayh and the majority of the philologists also believe that kallā is a simple word, whereas according to Tha‘lab, it consists of ka (meaning "like") and lā (meaning "not"); the lā is doubled with tashdīd to emphasise the new meaning and to repel the assumption that the basic meanings of the two words still remain. See al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 2, p. 221.

1226. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 558; and Al-Zamakhsharī, Al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1556.

345

Ibn al-Jawzī cites two meanings of kallā, as follows: (a) (not) which is found in fourteen verses of the Qur’ān, among which is Q. 104:4 mentioned above; (b) (truly, verily) which is found in nineteen verses of the Qur’ān, among which is Q. 75:20 mentioned above.1227 28.

(slowly, gently, leisurely) The term ruwaydan means

(slowly, gently, leisurely). Ibn

Qutaybah cites only one example from the Qur’ān, namely “Let, then, the deniers of the truth have their will: let them have their will (amhilhum) for a little while." (Q. 86:17, Asad). However, he says that here ruwaydan means qalīlan (for a little while).1228 If the term is not preceded by amhilhum in the above verse, then it means mahlan. It is always in the diminutive form (tas.ghīr), and in imperative mood, except in the following poem where it is neither in diminutive form nor in imperative mood: "She is like a drunk walking slowly."1229 1227. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah pp. 511-513. Among those who interpreted kallā as synonymous to h.aqqan was al-Kisā’ī, whereas according to Abū H.ātim the term means alā ("know!"); see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 221-222; and al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 11, pp. 147-148. Al-Kisā’ī makes a distinction between lā and kallā, as follows: Lā indicates a simple negation, whereas kallā indicates negating something, but at the same time affirms something else. For example, somebody said to you, "You have eaten something," and you said, "Lā" (similar to the Indonesian "tidak"), it means you denied the occurrence of the action of eating anything. But if another person said to you, "You have eaten a date," and you said, "Kallā" (similar to the Indonesian "bukan"), because you denied eating a date, but affirmed eating something else, such as honey; see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p. 231, (s.v. ).

1228. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 559; al-Zamkahsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 2, p.

1596; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 472. This is the interpretation of ruwaydan in this verse according to Qatādah, whereas according to Ibn ‘Abbās it means qarīban (shortly); see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 20, p. 12.

1229. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 559. Ibn Qutaybah as well as Ibn Fāris misquoted the poem when they mentioned which is incorrect; see ibid. and Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 153 and Maqāyīs, vol. 2, p. 458. The correct word is as quoted

by Ibn Manz.ūr as well as al-Qurt.ubī, and as translated above. For further details on ruwaydan, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 189 (s.v. vol. 20, p. 12.

); see also al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘,

346

29.

(a particle indicating alertness)

The term alā is used and added to the sentence to indicate alertness.

The expression means "Understand (ifham) that people are going out." The example in the Qur’ān is as follows: "Oh, verily, on the Day when it befalls them there will be nothing to avert it from them; ..." (Q. 11:8, Asad).1230 Al-Suyūt.ī mentions three functions of alā, one of which is to alert the listener ( ), as mentioned above. The other two are to incite ( ), and to offer (

), as in the following respective examples: "Would you, perchance, fail to fight against people who have

broken their solemn pledges, ..." (Q. 9:13, Asad), and "... do you not desire that God should forgive you your sins,..?" (Q. 24:22, Asad).1231 30.

(affliction, distress, woe)

Al-wayl, as stated by Ibn Qutaybah, is a word that combines all bad things ( ). He quotes al-As.ma‘ī's view who says that the term indicates taqbīh (the act of denouncing something as ugly or disgraceful), such as “.... But woe unto you for all your [attempts at] defining [God]." (Q. 21:18, Asad). The expression means "woe and moaning to him". It is also used to express tah.assur (regret) and tafajju‘ (agony, affliction, grief), as in "And they could only cry: 'Oh, woe unto us! Verily, we were wrongdoers!'" (Q. 21:14, Asad).1232 There are many different views about the meaning of wayl, among which are the following: al-Khalīl: the severity of evil (shiddat al-sharr); alAs.ma‘ī: agony (tafajju‘); Abū Zayd: disaster; Sībawayh: a person who is in disaster; Ibn ‘Arafah: sadness; this view is similar to that of al-Farrā’ who 1230. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 560; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 76.

1231. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 159; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 75.

1232. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 561; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 258-259; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 449. Al-T.abarsī interprets al-wayl in both verses as "disaster"; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, pp. 41 and 42.

347

says that the origin of wayl is way, meaning sadness.1233 31.

(by your life)

The expression la‘amruk (by your life) and la‘amr Allāh (by the everlasting existence of Allah, by the Eternal God) are oaths.1234 Ibn Qutaybah does not mention the only example from the Qur’ān which is as follows: "Verily, by thy life (O Prophet), in their wild intoxication, they wander in distraction, to and fro." (Q. 15:72, Ali). Ibn ‘Abbās was reported to have said that Allah never swears with the life of a person except with that of Prophet Muh.ammad.1235 32.

(yes, yea)

According to Ibn Qutaybah iy means balá (yes, indeed, certainly, surely). It is used before an oath1236, as in "And some people ask thee, 'Is all this true?' Say: 'Yea, by my Sustainer! It is most certainly true, ...'" (Q. 10:53, Asad).1237 Sometimes we 1233. For further details, see Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 11, pp. 737-740 (s.v. and al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 8.

);

1234. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 5621; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 4, pp. 601-602 (s.v.

).

1235. See al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 3, p. 342. Al-Zamakhsharī cites two interpretations: the first is as mentioned above, and the second is that the expression la‘amruk in the above verse was said by the angels to Prophet Lot; see al-Kashshāf, vol.

1, pp. 723-724. The angels' expression was most probably a du‘ā’, meaning "may Allah prolong your life span", since it is inconceivable that they would swear other than by Allah. Asad, using the second interpretation given by al-Zamakhsharī, translates the verse in question as follows: "[But the angels spoke thus:] 'As thou livest, [O Prophet Lot, they will not listen to thee:] behold, in their delirium [of lust] they are but blindly stumbling to and fro!'"; see M. Asad, The Message, p. 390.

1236. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 562. According to Ibn al-H.ājib, the term should also be preceded by a question, since iy means "yes"; see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

180; see also idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 3, p. 449.

1237. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 562. Instead of balá, as asserted by Ibn Qutaybah, according to Ibn Fāris, al-Qurt.ubī, and al-Suyūt.ī, the meaning of iy is na‘am (yes). See al-S.āh.ibī, p. 129; al-Jāmi‘, vol. 8, p. 351; and al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 180. Although both mean "yes", they are used differently. Balá is used in two places: (a) to reject a negative statement, as in “They who are bent on denying the truth claim that they will never be raised from the dead! Say: 'Yea, by

348

hear people join "yes".1238 33.

with the

that follows it and say

meaning

(on, at, upon, from) Ladun means ‘inda (on, at, upon, from), as in "...[for by] now thou hast heard enough excuses from me." (Q. 18:76,

Asad). The letter in can be dropped, as in the following poem of Ghaylān ibn H.ārith al-Rub‘ī in describing the camel he was driving: * “It takes two elbows long upon its rope from its two jaws to its upper chest [namely, it has a long neck].”1239

Ibn Qutaybah also mentions ladá which is similar to ladun, meaning my Sustainer! Most surely will you be raised from the dead, ...'" (Q. 64:7, Asad); (b) to invalidate the negation in the interrogative sentence; the question is either real (h.aqīqī), reproach (tawbīkh), or establishment (taqrīr). It is like doch in German and si in French.

Their respective examples are as follows: "Is not Zayd standing? Yes, he is"; "Does man think that We cannot [resurrect him and] bring his bones together again? Yea, indeed, ..." (Q. 75:3-4, Asad); and ".... 'Am I not your Sustainer?' - to which they answer: 'Yea, indeed, ...'" (Q. 7:172, Asad). Should they say na‘am instead of balá in the last example, they would have become disbelievers, because na‘am in this case would mean "Yes, You are not our Sustainer." This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and others. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 186-187. Since Q. 10:53 quoted above is the only verse in which iy is used, and since this verse does not belong to any of the above categories, the word iy in the above verse, in its strict sense, in my view, should mean na‘am instead of balá. Why, then, did not Ibn Qutaybah mention na‘am as the only meaning of iy instead of balá, or at least, include it? Probably because, as we have seen, na‘am is also used to confirm a negative statement so that it means "no", whereas balá always means "yes", whether in confirming an affirmative statement or in negating a negative statement. Moreover, iy meaning balá is mentioned before an oath only as a ilah of it to emphasise the truth of the statement, in this case, that Allah would punish the idolaters in the Hereafter for their wrong-doings as mentioned in the previous verse (Q. 10:52). This may indicate Ibn Qutaybah's deep understanding of the subject, and this is one of his contributions in the Qur’ānic exegesis.

1238. See al-Zamakhsharī, al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 588.

1239. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 563; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 169; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 13, p. 383. According to al-Zamakhsharī, ladunnī can also be read ladunī and ladnī, see al-Kashshāf, vol. 1, p. 810.

349

‘inda, as in the door." (Q. 12:25, Asad).1240

"... - and [lo!] they met her lord at

So far, we have seen how Ibn Qutaybah dealt with the thirty-three particles and uninflected verbs in his work Ta’wīl. Most of them were mentioned very briefly. For example, the term la‘amruk, was covered in less than two lines, iy in two, kayfa and ayyāna in four, awlá and alā in five, lā, al-wayl and hā in six lines. We have also seen that other scholars, such as Ibn al-Jawzī, Ibn al-Anbārī, al-Qurt.ubī and al-Suyūt.ī gave much more details regarding these terms than Ibn Qutaybah. However, despite his brevity, we note that some of his contributions highlight his deep understanding of this subject. Ibn al-Jawzī in his work Nuzhah, for example, mentions Ibn Qutaybah by name and quotes his interpretations of several terms and particles more than forty times.

D. The Substitution of Particles in the Verses of the Qur’ān According to Ibn Qutaybah there are particles in the verses of the Qur’ān that substitute each other. Besides Ta’wīl, this topic is also discussed by him in his work Adab al-Kātib, although in some cases he does not give examples from the Qur’ān in it. However, I shall also include in this study some examples which have not been quoted by him but have been quoted by other scholars.

These particles were not treated by later scholars as substituting or being in the sense of (synonymous with) each other, but as having many wujūh.

These particles are: and . They are dealt with as follows: 1.

(to; toward; up to; as far as; till, until)

a. Ilá in the sense of ma‘a (with),1241 as in 1240. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 563. For further details on ladun, ladā and ‘inda, see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 206-207.

1241. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 571; see also al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p.

233. Instead of , Ibn Qutaybah in his Adab al-Kātib uses , see Adab al-Kātib, p. 544. Apparently, there is no difference between the two expressions, although the latter is used by later writers. However, out of fifteen cases in his Ta’wīl, Ibn Qutaybah only once used , whereas in his Adab al-Kātib he used both fifteen times.

350

"And when Jesus became aware of their refusal to acknowledge the truth, he asked: 'Who will be my helpers in God's cause?'..." (Q. 3:52, Asad). The verse means, according to Ibn Qutaybah, "... who will be my helpers with Allah ( ).1242 The example from the Arabs' expression is the proverb which means "a small group of camels (from three to nine heads) with another small group makes a larger group of camels (ibil).1243 b. Ilá in the sense of fī, as in the expression meaning .1244 The example given by al-Suyūt.ī is the following verse: “.... [God] … will surely gather you all together on the Day of Resurrection..." (Q. 4:87, Asad).1245 There are two more particles substituted by mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah in his work Adab al-Kātib but without any example from the Qur’ān, as follows: (a) Ilá in the sense of min, as in the following poem of 1242. Asad and Pickthall translate respectively as "in God's cause" and "in the cause of Allah"; see Asad, The Message, p. 75 and Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, p. 55. These translations are probably based on the interpretation of al-H.asan al-Bas.rrī who says that

means

; see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 4, p. 97. Ibn Qutaybah's interpretation is based on what he thinks is Abū ‘Ubaydah's interpretation; see Adab al-Kātib, p. 544. But Abū ‘Ubaydah states that means , so that, instead of ma‘a, the term ilá here means fī; see Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 94. It is possible that Ibn Qutaybah means al-Farrā’ rather than Abū ‘Ubaydah, as alFarrā’ accepts the interpretation of ilá as ma‘a in the above verse as a good one (

); see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 218. Moreover, this is also the interpretation of the grammarians of Kūfah to which al-Farrā’ is said to belong or to lean; see al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 162. In addition, this interpretation has been adopted by al-Tha‘ālibī, al-Qayrawānī, al-Dāmaghānī, Tiflīsī, Ibn al-Jawzī and Ibn Fāris; see Fiqh al-Lughah, p.

241; I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 1, p. 806; Qāmūs, pp. 36-37; Wujūh, pp. 26-27; Nuzhah, p.

103; Qurrah, p. 40; and al-S.āh.ibī, p. 132.

1243. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 571; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 544; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 218; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 3, p. 169 (s.v. ‫)ذود‬.

1244. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 536-537.

1245. Al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 162. According to Tiflīsī, al-Dāmaghānī, and Ibn al-Jawzī, the particle ilá here means li (for); see Wujūh, p. 27; Qāmūs, p. 37; Nuzhah, p. 103; and Qurrah, p. 40.

351

Hanī‘ ibn Ah.mar al-Kinānī: “He was given drink, so there is no drink from me, Ibn Ah.mar." (b) Ilá in the semse of ‘inda, as in the expression ("it is more delicious to me than such and such") in which ilayya ("to me") is in the sense of ‘indī ("for me").1246 2.

(in, at, on; with; through, by means of)

a. Bi in the sense of ‘an, as in ".... Ask, then, about Him, [the] One who is [truly] aware." (Q. 25:59, Asad). Here bihi is in the sense of ‘anhu.1247 The example from poetry is the following poem of ‘Alqamah ibn ‘Abadah: * “And if ye ask me regarding [the diseases of] women, verily, I ppossess knowledge of the diseases of women, [I am] a physician.”

Here bi ’l-nisā’ is in the sense of ‘an al-nisā'.1248 b. Bi in the sense of li (for), as in “We created them not save with truth [namely, for the truth]." (Q. 44:39, Pickthall).1249 The creation of the heavens and the earth bi’l-h.aqq (lit. "with truth") is mentioned in Q. 6:73, 14:19, 16:3, 29:44, 39:5, 45:22 and 64:3. In other verses it is stated that Allah did not create the heavens, the earth and all that is between them, namely, the entire universe, except bi’l-h.aqq (Q. 15:85, 30:8 and 46:3). On the other hand, Allah says that He has not created heaven and earth and all that is between them bāt.ilan (lit. "in 1246. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 540.

1247. Idem, Ta’wīl, p. 568; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 538; al-Qayrawānī, I‘rāb alQur’ān, pt. 2, p. 142; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 210; idem, Qurrah, p. 176; and alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 183. According to al-Qurt.ubī, this is the view of al-Zajjāj and an unidentified group of grammarians. See al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 63.

1248. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 568; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 538; Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 3, p. 407; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 208-209; and [al-Mufad.d.al alD.abbī], al-Mufd.d.alīyāt, p. 392. Instead of bas.īr in the poem, al-Qurt.ubī uses khabīr (an expert), see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 63.

1249. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 578; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 42; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 209-210; and idem, Qurrah, p. 82. This is the interpretation of al-Kalbī and al-H.asan adopted by Ibn Qutaybah. Another interpretation, however, is that of Muqātil, who says that 147.

means

. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 16, p.

352

vain") (Q. 38:27). Moreover, those who are endowed with insight and keep remembering Allah will say after reflecting the creation of the heavens and the earth: "Our Lord! Thou createdst not this in vain (bāt.ilan)." (Q. 3:191, Pickthall). Here the term bāt.ilan, meaning "without meaning and purpose" (as translated by Asad) is the opposite of bi’l-h.aqq, which means, "with a definite purpose and meaning". Bi’l-h.aqq also means lil-h.aqq, "for a definite purpose and meaning" if we assume that bi is in the sense of li in the above verses as stated by Ibn Qutaybah. c. Bi in the sense of min, as in “A fountain from which the servants of God shall drink." (Q. 76:6, Lane). According to Ibn Qutaybah, the expression yashrabu bihā in this verse is in the sense of yashrabu minhā. It is similar to the expression which means

("I drank such and such water").1250 From

1250. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 575; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 543; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 1, p. 143; here al-Qurt.ubī is quoting Ibn Qutaybah with the expression qālahu ’l-Qutabī, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 126; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 209; idem, Qurrah, p. 82; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 184. Besides Ibn Qutaybah's interpretation, al-Qurt.ubī and al-T.abarsī also mention the view of al-Farrā’ who says that the expression yashrabu bihā and yashrabuhā have the same meaning; it is like the expression ("Verily he speaks with a good speech") and ("he speaks a good speech"). It is said that bi in this verse is additional; see alJāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 126; Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 407; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’lQur’ān, vol. 3, p. 215. This view is also mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah, see Gharīb alH.adīth, vol. 2, pp. 105-106. See also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 487. In rejecting the above views Ibn Taymiyyah contends that if bi is additional in this verse, the verse would mean that the drinker may drink the drink without quenching his thirst. On the other hand, if it is said that bi is in the sense of min, there would not be any indication that the drinker is quenching his thirst. Therefore, according to Ibn Taymiyyah, it is said that the bi in yashrabu bihā indicates that the quenching of the drinker's thirst occurs with this special drink. See Ibn Taymiyyah, Majmū‘ Fatāwā ibn Taymiyyah, ed. ‘Abd al-Rah. mān ibn Muh.ammad al-H.anbalī (Riyadh: N.p., 1382 A.H.), 1st ed., vol. 20, p.

474. This is also the view of the effective investigators (al-muh.aqqiqūn) according to al-Zarkashī. He states that the meaning of the preposition bi in the verse in question is to indicate inclusion (tad.mīn) of the meaning of yarwī (he quenches the thirst) in the verb yashrabu (he drinks). As the verb yashrabu is itself a transitive verb, it does not need the preposition bi except for a purpose. This purpose is to include the quenching of the thirst in its meaning. Therefore, the verb yashrabu bi includes both literal and

353

poetry he quotes the poem of Abū Dhu’ayb al-Hudhalī describing the clouds as follows: * They [namely, the clouds] drank from the water of the sea, then rose up from the green depth of the sea passing quickly and noisily.”1251

d. Bi meaning fi, as in the following poem of al-A‘shá: meaning "what is (the benefit of) the old man's crying over the ruins" in which bi’l-at.lāl means fī ’l-at.lāl.1252 The examples given by Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī respectively are as follows: ".... In Thy hand is all good...." (Q. 3:26, Asad), and "for indeed God did succour you at Badr,..." (Q. 3:123, Asad).1253 e. Bi meaning ‘alá, as in the poem of ‘Amr ibn Qami’ah when he says ("On your affection to my people..."), in which bi means ‘alā, and mā is additional.1254 The examples from the Qur’ān given by Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī respectively are as follows: metaphorical meanings; see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 3, p. 338. Besides the above interpretations al-Qayrawānī also mentions another interpretation, namely, the preposition bi indicates the location of the fountain, and the term ‘aynan means mā’ ‘ayn (water of a fountain), so that the verse in question means "Water of a fountain where the servants of God shall drink"; see I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 2, p. 672.

1251. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 575; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 543; and al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 5, p. 407; see also Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 1, p. 487. Ibn alSayyid says that there are two views concerning the meaning of the word matá in this poem, min (from) and wasat. (amidst), see al-Iqtid.āb. p. 447, quoted by A. S.aqr in Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 575, n. 3. Nūrah Shamlān, in her work on the life and poems of Abū Dhu’ayb, chooses the first view, whereas Ibn Fāris chooses the second; see Shamlān, Abū Dhu’ayb al-Hudhalī: H.ayātuh wa Shi‘ruh (Riyadh: ‘Imādah Shu’ūn alMaktabāt, Riyadh University, 1400/1980), p. 104 and Ibn Fāris, Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 296.

It is said, however, that matá in the language of the al-Hudhayl tribe means fī (in, at); see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 19, p. 126, n. 1; and al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p.

215, n. 3.

1252. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 543. It is written ilá bima‘ná fī which is a misprint, and should be bi instead of ilá as has been corrected here.

1253. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 210; idem, Qurrah, p. 82; and al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 2, p. 183.

1254. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 547.

354

"On that day those who disbelieved and disobeyed the messenger will wish that the ground would become levelled on them" (Q. 4:42) and "... who, if thou trust him with a treasure,..." (Q. 3:75) in which biqint.ār means ‘alá qint.ār.1255 f. Bi meaning min ajl (for the sake of, because of), as in the poem of Labīd when he said: "acts of conquering were scattering for the sake of blood revenge."1256 The examples from the Qur’ān given by Ibn al-Jawzī and al-Suyūt.ī are respectively as follows: "..., and those who, because of him (Satan) become polytheists." (Q. 16:100) in which bihi means min ajlihi; and “Each one of them We seized for his crime: ..." Q. 29:40, Ali), in which bidhanbihi means min ajli dhanbihi.1257 3.

(on, upon, at, by, in; to, toward, for)

a. ‘Alá in the sense of (meaning) min (from), as in "Who, when they take by measure from men, take fully" (Q. 83:2, Lane), in which ‘alá ’l-nās means min al-nās.1258 The example from poetry is the poem of S.akhr al-Ghayy, as follows: * “[I am going to tell you about an essay (maqālah) you cannot deny], whenever you deny it you will know that blood will spill from its sides [namely, an essay that will kindle war and spill blood].”1259

1255. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 210; idem, Qurrah, p. 83; and al-Suyūt.ī, alItqān, vol. 2, p. 183.

1256. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 547.

1257. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 211; idem, Qurrah, p. 83; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 183. For further details on bi and its meanings, see al-Suyūt.ī, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, pp. 634-637.

1258. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 573; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 545; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2145; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 3, p. 246; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 283; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 442; and idem, Qurrah, p. 178. According to Ibn Manz.ūr the particle ‘alá in the above verse means min as well as ‘an; see Lisān, vol.

15, p. 89. Al-Dāmaghānī gives Q. 16:9 as an example: it reads

“It is

from Allah the direction of the right path."; see Qāmūs, p. 332.

1259. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, pp. 573 and 380, and idem, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 545-

355

b.‘Alá meaning ‘inda (at, near, by, with, on; upon), as in “And (further), they have a charge of crime against me, so that I fear they may slay me." (Q. 26:14, Ali), in which ‘alayya dhanb means ‘indī dhanb.1260 c. ‘Alá meaning fī, as in the expression ("It was so in the time of So-and-so"), in which ‘alá ‘ahd means fī ‘ahd, and in “And they followed what the devils related (or recited) in the time of (or during) the reigh of Solomon..." (Q. 2:102, Lane). Here ‘alá mulki means fī mulki.1261 d.‘Alá meaning bi, as in the expression meaning ("Mount thou in the name of God." Lane).1262 Al-Dāmaghānī cites the following verse as an example: "....So put your trust (in Allah) if ye are indeed believers." (Q.5 :23, Pickthall), in which ‘alá Allāh means bi Allāh.1263 546. Al-Qurt.ubī also cites this poem, but he says that than

means

, rather

, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, p. 359.

1260. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 578, and Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 83. The criminal charge meant in this verse is the accidental killing of an Egyptian by Prophet Moses. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, p. 92.

1261. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 542; idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 3, pp.

703-704 (with an example from poetry); al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 187; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 442-443; and idem, Qurrah, p. 178. Al-Suyūtī goes further and says that the interpretation ("in the kingdom of Solomon") means

, namely, "in the time of his reign" as translated by Asad above; see al-Itqān, vol. 2, pp. 201-202. This meaning agrees with that given by al-Zajjāj who says that means ("at the time of Solomon's reign"); see al-Qurt.ubī, alJāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 42. Al-T.abarsī mentions two interpretations: "against the kingdom of Solomon" as translated by Pickthall, and "in the time of Solomon's reign" mentioned above; see Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 1, p. 174.

1262. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 544; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2145.

1263. See al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 333. Al-Suyūt.ī cites a different example, namely,

"Hence, place thy trust in the Living

One who dies not,..." (Q. 25:58, Asad), and calls the substituted particle particle bi used for seeking help); see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 202.

‫بَاءُ اْإلسْتِعَانَة‬

(the

356

e. ‘Alá meaning ma‘a, as in the poem of al-Shammākh as follows: “And two special kinds of garments and seventy dirhams; with that, a goat's skin thong tanned with pods of acacia nilotica (a species of sant tree).”1264

Al-Suyūt.ī cites the following example "...; and giveth his wealth, (accompanied) with his love, ..." (Q. 2:177), in which ‘alá h.ubbihi means ma‘a h.ubbihi as translated above. 1265 Al-Qurt.ubī suggests two meanings for h.ubbihi in the above verse: "his love for his wealth", and "his love for the persons mentioned later: his kinsfolk, orphans, etc".1266 Pickthall and Ali, however, translate ‘alá h.ubbihi respectively as "for love of Him" and "out of love for Him", namely, Allah.1267 Ibn Qutaybah mentions two more examples of substitutions of particles with ‘alá in his work Adab al-Kātib, without giving any example from the Qur’ān, as follows: (a). ‘Alā in the sense of ‘an, as in the expression meaning ("I have been pleased with you"), and meaning “I shot [the arrow] from the bow").1268 (b) ‘Alá in the sense of li, as in the poem of al-Rā‘ī (‘Ubayd ibn al-H.usayn alNumayrī), ("She took care of him for months and he devoted himself to her"), in which khalá ‘alayhā means khalá lahā.1269 4.

(off, away, from; out of, about; for)

a. ‘An in the sense of bi (in, at, on, with), as in the expression

1264. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 545.

1265. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 201; see also al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol.

4, p. 285.

1266. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 2, p. 242.

1267. Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, p. 27; and Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 69 1268. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 537; and Ibn Manz.ūr, Lisān, vol. 15, p.

88. Lane translates the expression as ("I shot with the bow") rather than

("from the bow"); see Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2145.

1269. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 540. For further details on ‘alá see Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, pp. 2144-2145.

357

meaning

("I shot with the bow"),1270 and as in “And neither does he speak out of his own desire.” (Q. 53:3,

Asad). b. ‘An in the sense of min, as in the expression

meaning

(“have taken this from you”), and in “And it is He who accepteth the repentance from His servants..." (Q. 42:25, Asad).1271 c. ‘An in the sense of ‘alá, as in the following poem of Dhū al-Is.ba‘ al‘Adwānī: * “To God be attributed the excellence of the son of thy paternal uncle, thou hast not become possessed of superiority, on grounds of pretension to respect (or honour), above me [ ], nor art thou my governor that thou shouldst rule me.”

(Lane's translation).1272

The only example from the Qur’ān given by Ibn al-Jawzī and Al-Suyūt.ī is the following verse: ".... And yet, he who acts niggardly [in God's cause] is but niggardly towards his own self..." (Q. 47:38, Asad).1273 Here ‘an nafsih means ‘alá nafsih. d. ‘An in the sense of ba‘da (after), as in the expression meaning

("I shall do that after a while").1274 An

1270. However, according to Ibn Manz.ūr, it is correctt to say not

, but

; see Lisān, vol. 15, p. 88.

1271. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 577; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 287; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 439; idem, Qurrah, p. 176; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 183; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2164.

1272. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 541; C.J. Lyall, ed., The Mufad.d.aliyyāt, p. 160; and Ibn Fāris, Mayāqīs, vol. 2, p. 179. According to Ibn Fāris, the word lāh is the name of Allah; with the addition of the definite article al, it makes the word Allāh; see Maqāyīs, vol. 5, p. 227. Lane translated lāh as lillāhi darru, as translated above; see Lexicon, pt. 5, p. 2164.

1273. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 439; idem, Qurrah, p. 176; al-Zarkashī, alBurhān, vol. 4, p. 287; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 203; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 5, p.

2164.

1274. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 542.

358

example from the Qur’ān is given by al-Zarkashī and al-Suyūt.ī as follows: “.... distorting the meaning of the [revealed] words after [knowing] their context..." (Q. 5:13). This interpretation is apparent if we compare it with another similar verse using min ba‘di mawād.i‘ihi instead of ‘an mawād.i‘ihi, namely, Q. 5:41.1275 Al-Qurt.ubī's commentary on this second verse is that the Jews distorted the meaning of the context of the Torah dealing with the stoning of the adulterer after the Prophet had explained to them what Allah meant by this penal law and after they had understood it. Through their interpretation they wanted to change the ruling of stoning for forty lashes.1276 Asad and Pickthall render the same translation of ‘an mawād.i‘ihi and min ba‘di mawād.i‘ihi in the above verses respectively as "out of their context" and "from their context". Ali translates the former as "from their (right) places" and the latter as "from their (right) time".1277 Ibn Qutaybah mentions other substitutions of particles with ‘an, but without any example from the Qur’ān, as follows: (a) ‘an in the sense of min ajl (for the sake of, because of), as in the following poem of Labīd: “for a watering place because of which the fields become diminished."1278 (b)‘an meaning fawqa (above, on), as in the following poem: * “If you threwest colocynths upon our helmets they would roll along from what is gilded thereof, they being near together.

(Lane’s translation).”1279

5.

(in; at; on; near; by; within; during)

a. Fī in the sense of ‘alá as in the expression

meaning

("The signet-ring cannnot be inserted into [namely, fit 1275. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 287; and al-Suyūt.ī al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

203.

1276. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 6, pp. 181-182.

1277. See Asad, The Message, pp. 144 and 151; Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, pp. 103 and 107; and Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, pp. 245 and 254.

1278. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 542-543.

1279. Idem, Gharīb al-H.adīth, vol. 1, p. 358; and Lane Lexicon, pt 4, p.475 (s.v. ‫)سوم‬.

359

on] my finger"), and in "And I will assuredly crucify you upon the trunks of palm-trees" (Q. 20:71, Lane) in which fī judhū‘ al-nakhl means ‘alá judhū‘ al-nakhl.1280 b. Fī in the sense of ilá , as in “And they put their hands to their mouths" (Q. 14:9) in which fī afwāhihim means ‘alá afwāhihim.1281 c. Fī in the sense of bi, as in the following poem of al-A‘shá: “And if he is requested [to give] the parchments [namely, the books of the prophets] he will respond." Here fī ’l-mahāriq means bi’lmahāriq. 1282 The example from the Qur’ān cited by al-Dāmaghānī and Ibn al-Jawzī is as follows: “Are they waiting until Allah comes to them with the shadows of the clouds...?" (Q. 2:210) in which fī z.ulal means bi-z.ulal.1283 This is one 1280. Idem, Ta’wīl, p. 567; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 536; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 1, p. 14 and vol. 2, p. 23; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 303; alT.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 21; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 476; idem, Qurrah, pp. 190-191; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 367; al-Tha‘ālibī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 244; alSuyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 211; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 230; and Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2467.

Ibn Fāris mentions the reason for the use of fī in the above verse. He says it is because the trunks for the crucified persons are like graves for the buried ones; see al-S.āh.ibī, p.

158. According to al-Farrā’ means that the crucifixion is done by putting the persons to be crucified on lengthwise on the tree trunks, whereas means that they are lifted and put on the trunks; see Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p.

186. Another view is that of al-Mubarrad and al-Qayrawānī that the particle fī is used to indicate that the trunks surrounded (contained) him; see al-Mubarrad, al-Kāmil, vol. 2, p. 823; and I‘rāb al-Qur’ān, pt. 3, p. 806.

1281. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 539; Lane, Lexicon, pt. 6, p. 2467; alZarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 303; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 476; idem, Qurrah, p. 191; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 212. Al-Dāmaghānī and Tiflīsī cite Q. 4:97 as an example, see Qāmūs, p. 367; and Wujūh, p. 230. This idiomatic phrase, according to Asad, indicates "one's inability to refute a reasonable proposition by cogent, logical counter arguments". For further details, see Asad, The Message, p. 372, n. 10.

1282. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 539-540 in which tunūshida is written is probably nūshida as cited above. See also al-A‘shá, Dīwān al-A‘shá, p. 55 in which yunāshadu is written rather than tunūshida or nūshida.

1283. Al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 368; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 477; and idem, Qurrah, pp. 191-192.

360

interpretation. The other interpretation is that there is no substitution of particles in this verse, so that the verse means: "Are they waiting until Allah reveals Himself unto them in the shadows of the clouds?" This is the interpretation adopted by Asad, Pickthall and Ali,1284 which appears to be the more appropriate one. d. Fī meaning min, as in the following poem of Imru’ al-Qays: “Can anyone [i.e., the former inhabitant of the consumed (effaced) ruins] be happy whose most recent time [in happiness] was thirty months in [i.e., from] the last three years [i.e., the impossibility of happiness after seperation]?”

Here fī thalāthati ah.wāl means min thalāthati ah.wāl.1285 The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: "One day We shall raise from all peoples a witness against them from amongst themselves..." (Q. 16:89, Ali)1286 in which fī kulli ummah means min kulli ummah. e. Fī meaning ma‘a, as in the expression meaning ("So-and-so is intelligent as well as gentle").1287 The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: ".... [And thou shalt go] with nine [of My] messages unto Pharaoh and his people..." (Q. 27:12, Asad).1288 Asad's interpretation of āyāt as "messages" is based on 1284. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 3, pp. 25-26; Asad, The Message, p. 45; Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, p. 31; and Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 82.

1285. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 546. Translation rendered by Tengku Jusoh, Tengku Ghani. A Critical Examination of five Poems by Imru al-Qays (Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Pustaka Antara, 1990), pp. 15 and 62. This is also the view of alAs.ma‘ī according to al-Qurt.ubī, see al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, pp. 162-163. However, according to Muh.ammad Abū al-Fad.l Ibrāhīm, fī is in the sense of ma‘a in this poem, so that the verse means "thirty months apart from three years"; see M.A. Ibrāhīm, ed., Dīwān Umru’ al-Qays, 2nd ed. (Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1384/1964), p. 27.

1286. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 476; idem, Qurrah, p. 191; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 367; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, pp. 230-231; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 3093, and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 212.

1287. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 546.

1288. Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 476; idem, Qurrah, p. 190; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, pp. 366-367; al-T.abarsī, Majma‘ al-Bayān, vol. 4, p. 213; al-Zarkashī, alBurhān, vol. 4, p. 302, and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 211. Tiflīsī does not quote this verse, but quotes many others, see Wujūh, p. 230.

361

the opinion of some unidentified commentators who "see in it a reference to nine specific commandments or ethical principles...".1289 Others render āyāt as "signs", the miracles performed by Prophet Moses. Therefore, the verse means, according to this view, that the radiant hand, as mentioned in the previous verse, is one in addition to nine other miracles. However, according to other commentators fī means min ("among") rather than ma‘a in this verse, so that the two miracles mentioned earlier, namely, the radiant hand and the staff, are included in the nine miracles. This is the view of al-Nah.h.ās, al-Mahdāwī, al-Qushayrī, and Ibn Kathīr, and on which Pickthall and Ali render their translations.1290 Al-Zarkashī mentions other meanings of fī, among which are as follows: a. (at, with), as in “Pharaoh said: ‘Did we not bring thee up among us when thou wert a child? And didst thou not spend among us years of thy [later] life?’” (Q. 26:18, Asad). Here means . (after), as in “… and his weaning is after two years” (Q. 31:14), namely, the baby stops his total dependance on his mother’s milk after two years. Here fī ‘āmayn means ba‘da ‘āmayn. c. ( about, from), as in “Amd whoever is blind in these [namely, Allah’s blessings in this mentioned mentioned earlier], he will also become blind about [His blessings in] the Hereafter, [because of his disbelief in them]...” (Q. 17:72).1291 However, translators like Ali and Pickthall, translate in the b.

1289. For further details, see Asad, The Message, p. 434, n. 119.

1290. See al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 13, pp. 162-3; Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr, vol. 3, p.

370; Pickthall, The Glorious Qur’ān, p. 393; and Ali, The Holy Qur’ān, p. 980. With regard to those nine signs or miracles, they are, according to Ibn ‘Abbās in one of his interpretations and Mujāhid, as follows: the rod (Q. 7:107), the radiant hand (Q. 7:108), the years of drought or shortage of water (Q. 7:130), shortage of crops (Q. 7:130), epidemics among men and beasts, locusts, lice, frogs, and the water turning to blood (Q. 7:133). Another interpretation attributed to Ibn ‘Abbās, is that he includes the split of the sea as substitute for shortage of crops which is probably included by him in the category of drought and shortage of water, as done by al-H.asan al-Bas.rī; see al-S.ābūnī, Mukhtas.ar, vol. 2, p. 403. The first interpretation was adopted by Ali, see The Holy Qur’ān, p. 378, n. 1091.

1291 For further details, see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 302-304.

362

above verse in its original sense in their respective translations, as follows: “But those who are blind in this world, will be blind in the Hereafter…”, and “for whoever is blind [of heart] in this [world] will be blind in the life to come [as well]…”1292 6.

(for)

a. Li in the sense of ‘alá, as in the expression

meaning

("So-and-so fell upon his mouth"), and in "... and neither speak loudly to him, as you would speak loudly to one another, ..." (Q. 49:2, Asad) in which lahu means ‘alayh.1293 b. Li in the sense of ilá , as in the expression ("I guided him to it").1294 The example from the Qur’ān is as follows: “as thy Sustainer will have inspired her to do." (Q. 99:5, Asad) in which awh.á lahā means awh.á ilayhā.1295 c. Li meaning min ajli, as in the expression meaning

("I did that for you")

("I did that for your sake").1296 Ibn al-Jawzī

mentions lām al-sabab in the following verse: “(Saying): We feed you, for the sake of Allah only." (Q. 76:9, Pickthall) which is probably one example from the Qur’ān.1297 Another probable example from the Qur’ān is as follows: 1292

See Ali, The Holy Qur’an, p. 715; and Asad, The Message, p. 430 1293. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 569; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 540; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 537-8; and idem, Qurrah, p. 211. Al-Suyūt.ī cites Q. 13:25 as an example from the Qur’ān, see al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 225.

1294. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 544; here it is written misprinted, and should be

which is

. Cf. idem, Ta’wīl, p. 522 in which it is written

.

1295. Idem, Ta’wīl, p. 572; idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 540; al-Zamakhsharī, alKashshāf, vol. 2, p. 1616; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 538; idem, Qurrah, p. 212; alZarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 341; al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 225; and idem, Mu‘tarak, vol. 1, p. 552. Another example cited by Ibn Qutaybah is Q. 7:43 in which ‫ا‬ means ; see Adab al-Kātib, p. 544.

1296. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, p. 547.

1297. See Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 539; and idem, Qurrah, pp. 212-213.

363

"He will say: Ah, would that I had provided beforehand for my life [to come]." (Q. 89:24, Asad) in which lih.ayātī means min ajli h.ayātī fī ’lākhirah ("for the sake of my life in the Hereafter") according to one interpretation; however, according to another, such as that of al-Zarkashī, it means fī h.ayātī ("in my life").1298 There are two more substitutions mentioned by Ibn Qutaybah solely in his work Adab al-Kātib and without any example from the Qur’ān, most probably because they occur only in Arabic literature and poetry, as follows: (a) Li meaning ma‘a, as in the following poem of Mutammim ibn Nuwayrah al-Yarbū‘ī: “When we separated it was as if Mālik and I did not stay the night together in spite of the length of the meeting.”

(b) Li meaning ba‘da (after), as in the poem of al-Rā‘ī, as follows: “Until they [namely, the sheep], after completing five distant [pastures], reached a frontier seized with severe wind successively.”

Here litimmi khimsin means ba‘da tamāmi khimsin. 1299 The example from the Qur’an is given by al-Zarkashī as follows: “Establish [your] prayer after the sun’s decline …”

(Q. 17:78).1300 7.

(from)

a. Min in the sense of ‘alá, as in “And [We] delivered him from the people who denied Our revelations..."

(Q.21:77, Pickthall) in which min al-qawm means ‘alá ’l-qawm.1301 b. Min in the sense of ‘an, as in the expression meaning 1298. See al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 225; and al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 341.

1299. Ibn Qutaybah, Adab al-Kātib, pp. 546-547.

1300. See al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 342. In fact, there are many other meanings of li mentioned by al-Zarkashī. For further details, see ibid., pp. 339-350.

1301. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 577; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, p. 577; idem, Qurrah, p. 224; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p. 443; al-Tha‘ālībī, Fiqh al-Lughah, p. 244; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 276; Ibn Fāris, al-S.āh.ibī, p. 172; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 248.

364

("So and so related to me from so and so").1302 Although no example is given by Ibn Qutaybah from the Qur’ān, al-Zakrkashī and alSuyūt.ī cite the following verse as an example: ".... We were indeed heedless of this [promise of resurrection]!..." (Q. 21:97, Asad) in which min hādhā means ‘an hādhā .1303 c. Min in the sense of bi, as in “For him are angels ranged before him and behind him, who guard him by Allah's command" (Q. 13:11, Pickthall) in which min amr Allāh means bi-amr Allāh.1304 There are four views concerning the person who is guarded in this verse: every human being, the Prophet, and every prophet. They are all protected till Allah's decree is imposed on them. The other view is that the protectors in the verse are not guardian angels, and the protected person is every ruler who is surrounded by his bodyguards but cannot protect him from Allah's decree. This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and ‘Ikrimah as quoted by al-Qurt.ubī.1305 d. Min in the sense of fī, as in ".... Show me what it is that they have created on earth..." (Q. 35:40, Asad) in which min al-ard. means fī ’l-ard..1306 We have seen that in this section Ibn Qutaybah discussed the substitution of particles with others very briefly and incompletely. For example, in his work Ta‘wīl he mentions only one particle that is substituted by fī, namely, ‘alá whereas in his Adab al-Kātib he mentioned five particles that are substituted by fī, including ‘alá and ilá. However, he does not give 1302. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 578 and idem, Adab al-Kātib, p. 538.

1303. Al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 420; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p.

248. Ibn al-Jawzī cites Q. 12:87 and 50:19; see Nuzhah, p. 577; and Qurrah, p. 225.

1304. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 574; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 60; Abū ‘Ubaydah, Majāz al-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 324; al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, p. 420; Ibn al-Jawzī, Nuzhah, pp. 576-577; idem, Qurrah, p. 224; al-Dāmaghānī, Qāmūs, p.

442; Tiflīsī, Wujūh, p. 275; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 248, citing Q. 42:45 as an example.

1305. For further details on this verse, see al-Qurt.ubī, al-Jāmi‘, vol. 9, pp. 291293. See also Asad, The Message, p. 60, n. 25.

1306. Ibn Qutaybah, Ta’wīl, p. 577; al-Farrā’, Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān, vol. 2, p. 370; Ibn al-Jawzī, Qurrah, p. 224; and al-Suyūt.ī, al-Itqān, vol. 2, p. 248, citing Q. 62:9 as an example. For more details on the meanings of min, see al-Zarkashī, al-Burhān, vol. 4, pp. 415-426.

365

any example from the Qur’ān for the other three particles, as others did in their works. This number is still small compared to that of al-Dāmaghānī, who mentions eight, and Ibn al-Jawzī as well as al-Suyūt.ī who mentioned ten particles in their works.

366

CONCLUSION The Sunnī scholar Ibn Qutaybah received his knowledge of various Islamic sciences from scholars known for their attachment to the Sunnah.

He learned Sunnī theology from Ish.āq ibn Rāhawayh, Sunnī tradition from Abū H.ātim al-Sijistānī and philology from al-‘Abbās ibn al-Faraj alRiyāshī who had transmitted the works of Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-As.ma‘ī who were teachers of Ibn Qutaybah of the second degree in philology.

When al-Mutawakkil was appointed as a caliph in 232/846 and changed the ideology of the state from that of the Mu‘tazilah to the Sunnī orthodoxy, Ibn Qutaybah found himself favoured by the new government.

He was made qād.ī of Dīnawar by the newly appointed vizier ‘Abd Allāh ibn Yah.yá ibn Khāqān in 236/851.

Ibn Qutaybah was undisputedly the greatest man of letters in the Arabic language chronologically after al-Jāh.iz., and his contribution in the field of Qur’ānic exegesis cannot be underestimated. In the introduction of his work Ta’wīl he stated that the book was a collection of interpretations of difficult passages of the Qur’ān with explanations based on Arabic expression. Yet this statement does not necessarily imply that he merely acted a transmitter of the sciences of the Qur’ān from the previous generation to his generation without giving his own interpretation. Some interpretations were taken from scholars whom he mentioned by name; others were adopted by him without attributing any source. Yet, we can trace these interpretations back to some of his teachers, such Abū ‘Ubaydah and al-Farrā’. However, there were many other philological interpretations which seemed to be purely his own, and were cited by many authors of later generations, such as Ibn al-Jawzī, al-Qurt.ubī and others.

One of the interpretations attributed to Ibn Qutaybah alone was his view on the seven ah.ruf. According to Ibn Qutaybah, these seven letters were seven aspects of variant readings, as follows: (1) The variant i‘rāb of a word or the vowelisation of its letters without changing its s.ūrah, such as the variant reading yujāzā and al-kafūru for respectively nujāzī and alkafūra in the verse wa hal nujāzī illā ’l-kafūra (Q. 34:17); the first reading belonged to Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘ Abū ‘Amr and Ibn ‘Āmir, whereas the second belonged to H.amzah, al-Kisā’ī and H.afs.; (2) The variant i‘rāb of a word and the vowelisation of its letters which changed its meaning only and not its s.ūrah, such as rabbunā bā‘ada for rabbanā bā‘id (Q. 34: 19);

367

the latter was the reading of Nāfi‘, ‘Ās.im, Ibn ‘Āmir, H.amzah and alKisā’ī; (3) The variant letters of a word which does not change its i‘rāb, but changes its meaning without changing its rasm, such as nunshiruhā for nunshizuhā (Q. 2:259); the former reading belonged to Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘ and Abū ‘Amr, whereas the latter belonged to ‘Ās.im, Ibn ‘Āmir, H.amzah and al-Kisā’ī; (4) the variant words which change the s.ūrah but not the meaning, such as Ibn Mas‘ūd’s reading zuqyah for s.ayh.ah (Q. 36:29); (5) the variant words which change the s.ūrah and meaning, such as ‘Alī’s reading wa t.al‘in for wa t.alh.in (Q. 56:29); (6) The variant reading by means of inversion, such as Abū Bakr’s reading wa jā’at sakrat al-h.aqq bi-al-mawt for wa jā’at sakrat al-mawt bi-al-h.aqq; and finally, (7) The variant reading based on addition and omission, such as the reading of H.amzah and al-Kisā’ī ‘amilat for ‘amilathu which was the reading of Ibn Kathīr, Nāfi‘, Abū Bakr, ‘Umar, Ibn ‘Āmir and H.afs.. This view of Ibn Qutaybah on the seven ah.ruf was quoted by many authors, among them alZarqānī in his work Manāhil al-‘Irfān. Al-Zarqānī also quoted the statement of Ibn H.ajar that the view of al-Rāzī on the seven ah.ruf was adopted from that of Ibn Qutaybah after revising it.

Ibn Qutaybah believes that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān. He contends that difficult expressions which cannot be easily understood similar to the mutashābihāt in the Qur’ān are also found in the H.adīth, the saying of s.ah.ābah, poetry as well as Arabic expression. He cites an example from the Prophet’s statement concerning women “who dress and at the same time are naked”, meaning that they wear thin or skimpy clothing which reveal the outlines of their bodies. Ibn Qutaybah contends further that Allah would not mention something in the Qur’ān except for the benefit of mankind, and that Allah would let them know what He meant by it. The argument for and against those who hold views similar or different from that of Ibn Qutaybah brought a third and a conciliatory view: some mutashābihāt are known by al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm, others by Allah alone, such as the beast which will appears as one of the signs of Doomsday (Q. 27:82).

The term majāz as the opposite of h.aqīqah was unknown in the first/seventh and the second/eight century. It appeared in the third/ninth century or probably at the end of the second/eight century. The term majāz in Abū ‘Ubaydah’s work Majāz al-Qur’ān was still used in its basic meaning: “the way of expression.” The term majāz as opposite of h.aqīqah

368

appeared in al-Jāh.iz.’s statements in his work al-Bayān wa ’l-Tabyīn, and later was used more obviously in Ibn Qutaybah’s work Ta’wīl. Ibn Qutaybah stated that the use of majāz was common, not only in the Qur’ān, but also in poetry and common expression. As an example, he cited the word “mother.” The Qur’ānic verse fa’ummuhu hāwiyah (“his mother will be an abyss”) (Q. 10:19) means that the unbeliever will be sent to Hell like a baby to his mother. Similarly, the Prophet’s wives, described as “mothers of the believers” (Q. 33:6), means that they are like their mothers in the reverence accorded them. In poetry Ibn Qutaybah cited the following poem of Umayyah ibn Abī al-S.alt: “And the land is our refuge and was our mother. In it our grave will be, and in it we shall be buried.”

Ibn Qutaybah was extremely cautious with the use of majāz. When he warned people against excessive use of it in the Qur’ān which might lead to misinterpreting its verses he might have had the Mu‘tazilīs in mind.

He also might have been influenced by his teacher of the second degree, Ah.mad ibn H.anbal, who refused to interpret many Qur’ānic verses dealing with Allah as majāz, such as His throne (‘Arsh) which was interpreted by the Mu‘tazilīs as a metaphor for “His sovereignty.” Ibn Qutaybah made a distinction between “saying” and “speaking” and said that the former could be majāz but not the latter, unless there was a strong indication of being majāz, such as an animate being giving advice or moral lessons. He gave two conditions for a word to become majāz: it shall not be accompanied with its mas.dar, and it shall not be emphasized with takrār (repetition). For example, we can say “the wall will fall down,” but we do not say “the wall will fall down with strong willingness,” because it is majāz. The verse wa kallama Allāhu Mūsá taklīman (Q. 4:164) and innamā qawlunā li-shay‘in idhā aradnāhu an naqūla lahu kun fayakūn (Q. 16:40) are not majāz, but h.aqīqah, as the term kallama is accompanied with its mas.dar, namely, taklīman in the former verse, and the term qawl is emphasized with the repetition of it with the word naqūlu in the latter.

Ibn Qutaybah’s treatment of isti‘ārah was rudimentary. He included not only metaphor, but also majāz mursal, wujūh (homonyms) and hyperbole ( ) in the category of isti‘ārah. In the verse wa af’idatuhum hawā’ “and their hearts (as) air” (Q. 14:43), the word hawā’ (air) is a metaphor for emptiness of their hearts. In the verse: “But as for those with faces shining, they shall be within God’s grace, therein to abide” (Q. 3:107, Asad), Allah’s grace which is a h.āl (a condition) is a majāz mursal for a place, Paradise. As Ibn Qutaybah also mentioned other

369

meanings of rah.mah in the Qur’ān, such as rain in Q. 7:57 and sustenance in Q. 35:2, this term was later dealt with as having many wujūh by later writers, such as al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī and [al-]Tiflīsī in their respective works Qāmūs, Nuzhah and Wujūh. These works dealt with alwujūh wa ’l-naz.ā’ir (homonyms and synonyms) in the Qur’ān. The verse yakādu layuzliqūnaka bi’abs.ārihim (Q. 68:51) meaning “they would all but kill thee” (Asad), “would fain disconcert thee” (Ali), or “would almost trip thee up” (Pickthall) indicates hyperbole, that the disbelievers looked at the Prophet with such hostility and sternness that they almost made him slip and fall down.

It is commonly known that the Arabic language is called the language of opposite meanings (lughat al-ad.dād). For this, Ibn Qutaybah includes a special chapter in his Ta’wīl entitled al-Maqlūb (lit., “the inverted one”), translated in this study as “inversion”. Inversion occurs by ascribing something with its opposite quality, such as calling a foolish person a bright one with an intention either to encourage him or to insult him. Ibn Qutaybah also examines in this chapter thirteen words which have contradictory meanings, one of which is usually more prevalent than the other, although they are derived from one basic meaning. The word warā’ for example, its basic meaning is “something absent from our sight”, whether before or behind us, but the more prevalent meaning is “behind”; however, it can also mean “before”, such as in the verse: “… because [I know that] behind them was a king who is wont to seize every boat by brute force” (Q. 18:79); the term warā’ here, according to Ibn Qutaybah, means amām (before). The later author Ibn al-Anbārī included all these terms except ya’isa in his work Kitāb al-Ad.dād. Other authors, such as al-Dāmaghānī, Ibn al-Jawzī, Tiflīsī, and Ibn Fāris, included some of these terms in their works.

Some Qur’ānic verses seem to be unclear because of the ellipsis (h.adhf) of some words and the brevity (ikhtis.ār) of the Qur’ānic verses.

Ibn Qutaybah deals with ellipsis and brevity of expression systematically in his Ta’wīl to clarify the meanings of these verses. Some verses utilize the ellipsis of one or two words, a noun, a verb, a preposition, the particle lā (no, not), the main clause of an oath, of a conditional or incomplete sentence. They are examined with examples from the Qur’ān and some lines of poetry are included as shawāhid to support his view.

Takrār (repetition) and ziyādah (pleonasm) are also among the characteristics of the Arabic language dealt with by Ibn Qutaybah in his

370

Ta’wīl. They are used to emphasize something. Takrār can be in meaning, either (a) by mentioning its synonyms, such as “Or do they, perchance, think that We do not hear their hidden thoughts (sirr) and their secret confabulations (najwāhum),” (Q. 43:80) (b) by mentioning its kind, such as “In both of them will be [all kinds of] fruit, and date palms and pomegranates.” (Q. 55:68, Asad), or (c) by negating its opposite, such as the expression “I order you to fulfill your promise and I forbid you from betraying it.”

Ibn Qutaybah divides ziyādah into two types: (a) general pleonasm, namely the addition of unspecified words, such as the expression “with their mouths” I the verse “uttering with their mouths something which is not in their hearts” (Q. 3:167, Asad), and (b) specific pleonasm, namely the addition of specified words, such as nouns, particles and prepositions.

They are fifteen in number. Not knowing them could make it difficult for us to understand the meanings of the verses of the Qur’ān, such as the verse: “Everything is bound to perish save His [eternal] Self” (Q. 28:88, Asad), in which the term wajh (face, countenance) in wajhahu (lit., His Countenance”) is additional according to Mujāhid, Abū ‘Ubaydah dan alFarrā’, and translated as “Self” and “Essence” by Asad as cited above and al-Zamakhsharī respectively.

In the field of ta‘rīd. Ibn Qutaybah mainly deals with the euphemistic and circumspective expressions in the Qur’ān. For example, “…and behold, either we [who believe in Him] or you [who deny His Oneness] are one the right path, or have clearly gone astray!” (Q. 34:24, Asad). This is a euphemistic and polite way of saying “we are on the right path, and you have clearly gone astray”. For the circumspective statement Ibn Qutaybah gives the following example: “He [Abraham] answered: ‘Nay, it was this one, the biggest of them, that did it: but ask them [yourselves] – provided they can speak.’” (Q. 21:63, Asad). Here Prophet Abraham confessed to destroying the idols through insinuation.

Apart from majāz and mutashābihāt Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl also deals with various types of idiomatic expressions entitlted Mukhālafat z.āhir al-lafz. Ma‘nāh (lit., “the disagreement of the literal meaning of the word with its [intended] meaning”). It includes, to mention a few, (a) the imperative mood intended to threaten (tah.dīd), such as: “Do what you will…” (Q. 41:40, Asad) and exemption (ibāh.ah), such as: “And when the prayer is ended, then disperse freely on earth…” (Q. 62:10), Asad; (b) specification in which a general statement is intended to be particular in time and person, such as: “…and I am the first of those who surrender to

371

Him” (Q. 6:163, Pickthall), meaning the Prophet in his time; (c) number, such as a noun put in a singular number but is meant to be in the plural, as in the verse: “…and then We bring you forth as infants” (Q. 22:5, Asad), in which the word t.iflan (lit., an infant) is meant to be at.fālan (infants); (d) what is called by later philologists iltifāt (sudden transition), such as Allah addressing the Prophet with “and if they do not respond to your call”, suddenly the address is shifted to unbelievers, with “then know that [this Qur’ān] has been bestowed from on high out of God’s wisdom alone, …Will you, then surrender yourselves unto Him?” (Q. 11:14, Asad); (e) juncture, namely, the joining of two different statements of two different persons (or groups of persons), such as the verse: “They will say: ‘Oh, woe unto us! Who has roused us from our sleep [of death]?’” which was the statement of righteous Muslims when they were resurrected. This statement was joined with that of the angels, “[Whereupon they will be told:] ‘This is what the Most Gracious has promised! And His message bearers spoke the truth!’” (Q. 36:52, Asad). This is the view of Ibn ‘Abbās and al-Farrā’ adopted by Ibn Qutaybah; and (f) tempora, such as the use of a verb in the past tense when they are meant for the present or the future, for example, “God’s judgment is [bound to] come…” (Q. 16:1, Asad), in which the verb atá (lit., “it came”) is meant to be “it will come.”

As we know Ibn Qutaybah believes that the al-rāsikhūn fī ’l-‘ilm know the ta’wīl of the mutashābihāt. Therefore, he does not belong to those who believe that the al-ah.ruf al-muqat.t.a‘ah (the disconnected letters) at the beginning of twenty-nine sūrahs in the Qur’ān to be mysterious and inexplicable. He mentions four interpretations of them: They are: (a) the names of the sūrahs to which they belong; (b) Allah’s oaths; (c) letters taken from Allah’s attributes; and (d) letters taken from the attributes of the Qur’ān.

One of the important branches of the sciences of exegesis dealt by Ibn Qutaybah is the homonyms and synonyms in the Qur’ān (al-wujūh wa ’l-naz.ā’ir fī ’l-Qur’ān) which he calls “words which agree in wording but differ in meaning” ( ). For example, the term fitnah which basically means “a test,” means shirk (polytheism, idolatry) in the verse: “…for polytheism is worse than slaughter.” (Q. 2:191), whereas it means ithm (sin) in the following verse: “…Surely, it is into sin that they (thus) have fallen….” (Q. 9:49). With this branch of science many Qur’ānic verses become clear, as the textual meaning is given rather than the literal

372

meaning. This branch of science is so important that al-Zarkashī put it in number four of the forty-seven branches of the Qur’ānic science in his work al-Burhān, whereas al-Suyūt.ī put it number thirty–nine of the eighty branches in his book al-Itqān. It was in this branch of science that Ibn alJawzī in his work Nuzhah quoted Ibn Qutaybah by name about fifty times, mainly from his Ta’wīl in which he dealt with forty-four words and their meanings.

As a philologist Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl also deals with thirtythree particles with their various meanings with examples from the Qur’ān and occasionally from poetry as shawāhid. For example, the particle anná has two meanings: (a) kayfa (how), as in “He said: How could Allah brings this [township] back to life after its death?” (Q. 2:259); (b) min ayna (wherefrom), as in “…where can He have a child from…” (Q. 6:101).

One of the problems in understanding a language is the use of prepositions. Different prepositions make different meanings, such as the word “look” added with prepositions and it becomes “look for,” “look at,” and “look on.” The substitution of these prepositions would change its meaning and could confuse people. Such substitution was dealt with by Ibn Qutaybah in his Ta’wīl as well as his Adab al-Kātib. He mentions seven particles substituted with other particles without any change of meaning with examples from the Qur’ān. They are: ilá (to; toward; up to; as far as; till, until), bi (in, at, on; with; through, by means of), ‘alá (on, upon, at, by, in; to, toward, for), ‘an (off, away, from; out of, about; for), fī. (in; at; on; near; by; within; during), li (for), and min (from). One example cited by Ibn Qutaybah is the verse “He will surely gather you all together on the Day of Resurrection” (Q. 4:87) in which the prepositions ilá substitutes the preposition fī. Therefore, the expression ilá yawm al-qiyāmah in the above verse means “on the Day of Resurrection” rather than “till the Day of Resurrection.”

We have seen that Ibn Qutaybah in his works in general and his work Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān in particular has rendered an enormous contribution to Qur’ānic exegesis. This contribution was either by transmitting the knowledge of his teachers in this field of study or by his being an a‘jamī (non-Arab), he has proved in effect his profound knowledge of Arabic philology which is of inestimable value in the study of Qur’ānic exegesis.

373

BIBLIOGRAPHY A. Arabic Sources ‘Abd al-Bāqī, Muh.ammad. Al-Mu‘jam al-Mufahras li-Alfāz. al-Qur’ān alKarīm. [Cairo]: Dār wa Mat.ābi‘ al-Sha‘b, n.d.

Abū ’l-‘Atāhiyah. Dīwān Abī ’l-‘Atāhiyah. Beirut: Dār S.ādir - Dār Bayrūt, 1384/1964.

Abū Dā’ūd, Sulaymān ibn al-Ash‘ath al-Sijistānī, Sunan Abī Dā’ūd.

Annotated by Shaykh Ah.mad Sa‘d ‘Alī. 1st edition, 2 vols.

Egypt: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1371/1952.

Abū ’l-Faraj al-As.bahānī. Kitāb al-Aghānī. Edited by Rudolph E. Brunnow.

20 vols. Leyden: E.J. Brill, 1888.

Abū ‘Ubaydah, Ma‘mar ibn al-Muthanná. Majāz al-Qur’ān. Edited by Dr. M.F. Sezgin. Egypt: Muh.ammad Sāmī Amīn al-Khānjī, n.d.

Ahlwardt, W., ed. Kitāb al-‘Iqd al-Thamīn fī Dawāwīn al-Shu‘arā’ alJāhiliyyīn: al-Nābighah, ‘Antarah, T.arafah, Zuhayr, ‘Alqamah and Imru’ al-Qays (The Divans of the Six Ancient Poets: Ennabigha, Antara, Tharafa, Zuhair, Alqama and Imruulqais).

Greifswald, 1870. Reprint of the edition 1870 by Biblio Verlag, Osnabrück, 1972.

Amīn, Ah.mad. Fajr al-Islām. Cairo: Maktabat al-Nahd.ah al-Mis.riyyah, 1978.

Anonymous. Al-Anwār al-Zahiyyah fī Dīwān Abī ’l-‘Atāhiyah. Beirut: Mat.ba‘at al-Ābā’ al-Yasū‘īyīn, [1304-5/1887].

A‘shá, Maymūn ibn Qays al-. Dīwān al-A‘shá. Beirut: Dār S.ādir, 1966.

‘Askarī, Abū Hilāl al-H.asan ibn ‘Abd Allāh al-. Kitāb al-S.ina‘atayn: alKitābah wa ’l-Shi‘r. Edited by ‘Alī M. al-Bījāwī and Muh.ammad Abū ’l-Fad.l Ibrāhīm. N.p.: ‘Isá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī & Co., n.d..

Bayhaqī, Abū Bakr Ah.mad ibn al-H.usayn al-. Kitāb al-Sunan al-Kubrá.

Supplemented with ‘Alā’ al-Dīn ‘Alī ibn ‘Uthmān al-Mardīnī ("Ibn al-Turkmānī"), al-Jawhar al-Naqī; with index by Dr.Yūsuf al-Mur‘ishlī, 10 vols. Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah, n.d.

Brockelmann, Carl. Ta’rikh al-Adab al-‘Arabī. Translated by Dr. ‘Abd alH.alīm al-Najjār. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1961.

374

Bukhari, Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad ibn Ismā‘īl al-. S.ah.īh. al-Bukhārī. 8 vols in 4 bindings. N.p.: Dār al-Fikr, n.d.

Bustānī, But.rus al-. Udaba’ al-‘Arab fī ’l-A‘s.ur al-‘Abbāsiyyah. Beirut: Maktabat S.ādir, 1958.

Dāmaghānī, al-H.usayn ibn Muh.ammad al-. Is.lāh. al-Wujūh wa ’l-Naz.ā’ir fī ’l-Qur’ān al-Karīm. Edited by A. Sayyid li-Ahlih. Beirut: Dār al‘Ilm lil-Malāyīn, 1970.

D.ayf, Shawqī. Al-‘As.r al-‘Abbāsī ’l-Thānī. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1977.

Dhahabī, Abū ‘Abd Allāh Shams al-Dīn al-. Tadhkirat al-H.uffāz.. 4 vols. with continuous pagination. Hyderabad-Dn: Dā’irat al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 1376/1956.

Dhahabī, Dr. Muh.ammad H.usayn al-. Al-Tafsīr wa ’l-Mufassirūn. 3 vols.

Cairo: Dār al-Kutub al-H.adīthah, 1396/1976.

Dumyarī, Kamāl al-Dīn al-. H.ayāt al-H.ayawān al-Kubrá. Egypt: alMat.ba‘ah al-Sharqiyyah, ca. 1300/ [1882-1883].

Farrā’, Abū Zakarīya Yah.yá ibn Ziyad al-. Ma‘ānī ’l-Qur’ān. Edited by A.Y. Najātī and M.A. al-Najjār. 3 vols. Egypt: al-Hay’at alMis.riyyah al-‘Ammah lil-Kuttāb, 1972-1980.

Fīrūzābādī, Majd al-Dīn Muh.ammad ibn Ya‘qūb al-. Qāmūs al-Muh.īt.. 2nd ed., 4 vols. in 2 bindings. Cairo: Mat.ba‘at Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’lH.alabī, 1371/1952.

Ghazālī, Abū H.āmid al-. Mishkāt al-Anwār. Edited by Dr. Abū al-‘Alā’ ‘Afīfī. Cairo: Dār al-Qawmiyyah lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1383/1964.

Goldziher, Ignaz. Madhāhib al-Tafsīr al-Islāmī. Translated into Arabic and annotated by Dr. ‘Abd al-H.alīm al-Najjār. Cairo: Mat.ba‘at alSunnah al-Muh.ammadiyyah, 1374/1955.

H.ājī Khalīfah, Mus.t.afá ibn ‘Abd Allāh. Kashf al-Z.unūn ‘an Asāmī ’lKutub wa ’l-Funūn (Lexicon). Edited by Gustavus Flügel. 7 vols.

Leipzig and London: Published for the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland, 1835-1856.

H.usayn, T.āhā. Fī ’l-Adab al-Jāhilī. Fourth edition. Egypt: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1947.

Ibn ‘Abd Rabbih, Ah.mad ibn Muh.ammad. Al-‘Iqd Farīd. Edited by Ah.mad Amīn et al. Cairo: Mat.ba‘at al-Istiqāmah, 1372/1953.

375

Ibn ‘Abbās, ‘Abd Allāh. Kitāb Gharīb al-Qur’ān. Verified and presented by Dr. Ah.mad Bulūt.. Cairo: Maktabat al-Zahrā’, 1993.

Ibn Abī Dā’ūd, Abū Bakr ‘Abd Allāh al-Sijistānī. Kitāb al-Mas.āh.if. Edited

by Arthur Jeffery. Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Rah.mānīyah, 1355/ 1936.

Ibn Abī ’l-S.alt, Umayyah. Dīwān. Beirut: al-Wat.anīyah, 1352 A.H. Ibn al-Anbārī, Abū ’l-Barakāt. Nuzhat al-Alibbā’ fī T.abaqāt al-Udabā’.

Edited by Dr. ‘At.iyyah ‘Āmir. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell, [1962].

Ibn al-Anbārī, Muh.ammad ibn Qāsim. Kitāb al-Ad.dād. Edited from a unique transcript by M.A. Ibrāhīm. Kuwayt: Dār al-Turāth al‘Arabī, 1960.

Ibn al-Athīr, ‘Izz al-Dīn al-Jazarī. Al-Kāmil fī ’l-Ta’rīkh. N.p.: Idārat alT.ibā‘ah al-Munīriyyah, 1353 A.H. Ibn Fāris, Abū ’l-H.usayn Ah.mad. Mu‘jam Maqāyīs al-Lughah. Edited and verified by ‘Abd al-Salām Muh.ammad Hārūn. 6 vols. Cairo: ‘Īsá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī & Co., 1366-71/[1946-1951]. ________. Al-S.āh.ibī fī Fiqh al-Lughah wa Sunan al-‘Arab fī Kalāmihā.

Edited by Mus.t.afá ’l-Shuwaymī. Beirut: A. Badrān & Co., 1383/1963.

Ibn H.ajar al-‘Asqalānī, Shihāb al-Dīn Abū al-Fad.l Ah.mad ibn ‘Alī. AlIs.ābah fī Tamyīz al-S.ah.ābah. 4 vols. Baghdād: Dār al-‘Ulūm al-H.adīthah, n.d.

Ibn H.azm, Abū Muh.ammad ‘Alī. Al-Ih.kām fī Us.ūl al-Ah.kām. Edited by Ah.mad Shākir. 8 vols. In 2 bindings. Cairo: Mat.ba‘at al‘Ās.imah, n.d.

Ibn al-Jawzī, Jamāl al-Dīn Abū ’l-Faraj ‘Abd al-Rah.mān. Muntakhab Qurrat al-‘Uyūn al-Nawāz.ir. (Summary of Nuzhat al-‘Uyūn).

Edited and annotated by M.S. al-S.aft.awī and Dr. F.A. Mun‘īm Ah.mad. Alexandria: Munsha’at al-Ma‘ārif, [1979]. ________. Al-Muntaz.am fī Ta’rīkh al-Mulūk wa ’l-Umam. Hyderabad Deccan: Mat.ba‘at Dā’irat al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 13571359 A.H. ________. Nuzhat al-A‘yun al-Nawā z.ir fī ‘Ilm al-Wujūh wa ’l-Naz.ā’ir.

376

Edited and annotated by M.A. Kāz.im al-Rād.ī. 2nd edition.

Beirut: Mu’assasat al-Risālah, 1405/1985. ________. Kitāb S.ifat al-S.afwah. 4 vols. 2nd ed. Hyderabad-Deccan: Mat.ba‘at Majlis Dā’irat al-Ma‘ārif al-‘Uthmāniyyah, 1389/1969.

Ibn al-Jazarī, Abū ’l-Khayr Muh.ammad ibn Muh.ammad. Al-Nashr fī ’lQirā’āt al-‘Ashr. Edited by Muh.ammad ‘Alī al-D.abbā’. Egypt: al-Maktabah al-Tijāriyyah al-Kubrá, n.d.

Ibn Kathīr, Abū ’l-Fidā’ Ismā‘īl. Tafsīr al-Qur’ān al-‘Az.īm. Edited by ‘Abd al-Rah.mān al-Mur‘ishlī. 4 vols. Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah, 1407/ 1987.

Ibn Khālawayh, Abū ‘Abd Allāh al-H.usayn ibn Ah.mad. Al-H.ujjah fī’lQirā’āt al-Sab‘. Edited and annotated by Dr. ‘Abd al-‘Āl Sālim al-Mukarram. Beirut and Cairo: Dār al-Shurūq, 1399/1979.

Ibn Khaldun, ‘Abd al-Rah.mān. Muqaddimah. Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah alAzhariyyah, 1348/1930.

Ibn Khallikān, Abū ’l-‘Abbās. Wafayāt al-A‘yān wa Anbā’ Abnā’ al-Zamān.

Edited by Dr. Ih.san ‘Abbās. Beirut: Dār al-Thaqāfah, [1970]. ________. Wafayāt al-A‘yān wa Anbā’ Abnā’ al-Zamān. Edited and annotated by Muh.ammad Muh.y al-Dīn ‘Abd al-H.amīd. 6 vols.

Cairo: al-Maktabah al-Nahd.ah al-Mis.riyyah, 1384/1961.

Ibn Mājah, al-H.āfiz. Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad. Sunan. Edited and annotated by Muh.ammad Fu’ād ‘Abd al-Bāqī. [Cairo]: ‘Isá ’lBābī ’-H.alabī & Co., n.d.

Ibn Manz.ūr, Abū ’l-Fad.l Jamāl al-Dīn Muh.ammad (also known as Ibn Mukarram). Lisān al-‘Arab. 15 vol. Beirut: Dār S.ādir lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1955-1956.

Ibn Mujāhid, Abū Bakr. Kitāb al-Sab‘ah fī ’l-Qirā’āt. Verified by Dr. Shawqī D.ayf. 2nd ed. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1400 A.H. Ibn al-Nadīm. Al-Fihrist. Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Istiāqamah, 1929.

Ibn Qutaybah, Abū Muh.ammad ‘Abd Allāh. Adab al-Kātib. Edited by von Max Grünert. Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1900. ________. Gharīb al-H.adīth. Edited by Dr. ‘Abd Allāh al-Jubūrī. Baghdad: Mat.ba‘at al-‘Ānī, 1397/1977. ________. Al-Ma‘ārif. Edited by Tharwat ‘Ukāshah. Egypt: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, [1969].

377

________. Mushkil al-Qur’ān wa Gharībuh. Compiled under the title alQurt.ayn by Ibn Mut.arrif al-Kinānī. Egypt: Mat.ba‘at al-Khānjī, [1355/1936] ________. Al-Shi‘r wa ’l-Shu‘arā’. Edited by Ah.mad Shākir. 2 vols. Cairo: Dār Ih.yā’ al-Kutub al-‘Arabiyyah, 1364 A.H. ________. Tafsīr Gharīb al-Qur’ān. Edited by al-Sayyid A. S.aqr. Beirut: Dār al-Kutub al-‘Ilmīyah, 1398/1978. ________. Ta’wīl Mukhtalif al-H.adīh. Edited by M.Z. al-Najjār. Beirut: Dār al-Jayl, 1393/1973. ________. Ta’wīl Mushkil al-Qur’ān. Edited and annotated by S.A. S.aqr.

Cairo: Dār al-Turāth, 1939/1973. ________. ‘Uyūn al-Akhbār. 4 vols. Cairo: Dār al-Kitāb, 1324 A.H. Ibn Sallām, Abū ‘Ubayd al-Qāsim. Lughat al-Qabā’il al-Wāridah fī ’lQur’ān al-Karīm: Riwāyah ‘an al-S.ah.ābī ’l-Jalīl Ibn ‘Abbās Rad.iya Allāh ‘anh. Edited, commented, and annotated by Dr. ‘Abd al-H.amīd al-Sayyid T.alab. Kuwayt: Mat.bū‘āt Jāmi‘at alKuwayt, 1985.

Ibn Sallām, Yah.yá. Al-Tas.ārīf: Tafsīr al-Qur’ān mimmā ’shtabahat Asmā’uh wa Tas.arrafat Ma‘ānīh. Presented and edited by Hind Shalabī. Tunis: al-Sharikah al-Tūnisiyyah lil-Tawzī‘, 1979.

Ibn Taymiyyah, Taqy al-Dīn Ah.mad. Majmū‘ Fatāwá Shaykh al-Islām Ah.mad ibn Taymiyyah. Collected and arranged by ‘Abd alRah.mān Muh.ammad ibn Qāsim al-‘Ās.imī al-Najdī. 37 vols.

Makkah: Maktabat al-Nahd.ah al-H.adīthah, 1404 A.H. ________. Tafsīr Sūrat al-Ikhlās.. Edited by Dr. Muh.ammad ‘Abd alMun‘im Khafājī. Cairo: Dār al-T.iba‘ah al-Muh.ammadiyyah bi ’l-Azhar, n.d Ibrāhīm, Muh.ammad A.F., ed. Dīwān Imru’ al-Qays. 3rd ed. Cairo: Dār alMa‘ārif, [1389/1969].

Jāh.iz., Abū ‘Uthmān ‘Amru ibn Bah.r al-. Al-Bayān wa ’l-Tabyīn. 3 vols. in one binding. Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Tijāriyyah, 1926-1927. ________. Kitāb al-H.ayawan. 7 vols. Cairo: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1366/1947.

Jum‘ah, Muh.ammad Ibrāhīm. Jarīr. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1965.

378

Jundī, Dr.‘Abd al-H.amīd al-. Ibn Qutaybah: al-‘Ālim al-Nāqid al-Adīb.

[Cairo:] Mat.ba‘at Mis.r, (1963) Jurjānī, ‘Abd al-Qāhir al-. Asrār al-Balāghah fī ‘Ilm al-Bayān. Edited by Helmut Ritter. Istanbul: Mat.ba‘at Wizārat al-Ma‘ārif, 1954.

Kah.h.ālah, ‘Umar Rid.á. Mu‘jam al-Mu’allifīn: Tarajim Mus.annifī ’l-Kutub al-‘Arabiyyah. Beirut: Maktabat al-Muthanná, Dār Ih.yā’ alTurāth al-‘Arabī, ca. 1376/1957.

Kātib, Sayf al-Dīn al- et al.; eds. and comment. Sharh. Dīwān Umayyah ibn Abī ’l-S.alt. Beirut: Manshūrāt Dār Maktabat al-H.ayāh, 1980.

Khat.īb al-Baghdādī, al-. Ta’rīkh Baghdād aw Madīnat al-Salām, 14 vols.

Egypt: Maktabat al-Khānjī, 1931.

Kirmānī, Mah.mūd ibn H.amzah ibn Nasr al-. Asrār al-Takrār fī ’l-Qur’ān.

Edited by ‘Abd al-Qādir ‘At.ā. Cairo: Dār al-I‘tis.ām, 1398/1978.

Lyall, Charles James, M.A., ed. The Mufad.d.aliyyāt: An Anthology of Ancient Arabian Odes. Compiled by al-Mufad.d.al son of Muh.ammad [al-D.abbī] according to recension and with the commentary of Abū Muh.ammad al-Qāsim Muh.ammad alAnbārī. 1st ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1921.

Macartney, Carlile Heenry H., ed. Dīwān Shi‘r Dhī ’l-Rummah (The Dīwān of Ghailan ibn ‘Uqbah known as Dhu’r Rummah). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1919.

Mahrān, Dr. Muh.ammad B. Dirāsāt Ta’rīkhiyyah min al-Qur’ān al-Karīm.

N.p.: Imām Muh.ammad ibn Su‘ūd Islamic University, 1400/1980.

Majma‘ al-Buh.ūth al-Islāmiyyah. Buh.uth Qur’āniyyah. The sixth conference. Cairo: Mat.ābi‘ al-Sharikah al-Mis.riyyah lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, al-Muh.arram, 1391/March, 1971.

Mālik ibn Anas. Al-Muwat.t.a’. Edited by M.F. ‘Abd al- Bāqī. 2 vols.

[Cairo]: ‘Isá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī & Co., 1370/1951.

Mubarrad, Abū ’l-‘Abbās al-. Al-Kāmil fī ’l-Lughah wa ’l-Adab wa ’l-Nah.w wa ’l-Tas.rīf. Edited by Dr. Zakī Mubārak. 3 vols. 1st ed. [Cairo]: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1355/1936.

[Mufad.d.al al-D.abbī, al-, comp.]. Al-Mufad.d.aliyyāt. Edited and annotated

by Ah.mad M. Shākir and ‘Abd al-Salām M. Hārūn. 3rd ed.

379

Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, [1383/1963].

Al-Munjid fī ’l-Lughah wa ’l-A‘lām. Beirut: Dār al-Mashriq, 1969.

Murtad.á, al-Sharīf Abū al-Qāsim ‘Alī al-Sayyid al-. Amālī ’l-Sayyid alMurtad.á fī ’l-Tafsīr wa ’l-H.adīth wa ’l-Adab. Edited, verified and annotated by al-Sayyid Muh.ammad Badr al-Dīn al-Na‘sānī ’l-H.alabī. Qumm: Manshūrāt Maktabat Āyāt Allāh al-‘Uzmá ’lMur‘ishī ’l-Najafī, 1325/1907.

Mus.h.af al-Jamāhiriyyah: bi-Riwāyat al-Imām Qālūn [‘an al-Imām Nāfi‘] wa ’l-Rasm al-‘Uthmānī ‘alá mā ’khtārahu ’l-H.āfiz. Abū ‘Amr al-Dānī. 1st. ed. Tripoli: Jam‘iyyat al-Da‘wah al-Islāmiyyah al‘Ālamiyyah, 1395/1986.

Nawawī, Muh.yī ’l-Dīn ibn Sharaf al-. Tahdhīb al-Asmā’ wa ’l-Lughāt. 3 vols. Cairo: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Munīriyyah, 1927.

Niz.ām al-Dīn al-Nīsābūrī, al-H.asan ibn Muh.ammad ibn H.usayn al-Qummī, Tafsīr Gharā’ib al-Qur’ān wa Raghā’ib al-Furqān (on the margin of al-T.abarī, Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr al-Qur’ān) 30 vols.

Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘ rifah lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 14061407/1986-1987.

Péllat, Charles. Ibn Qutaybah wa ’l-Thaqāfah al-‘Arabiyyah. In the T.aha H.usayn Memorial Volume. Cairo: N.p., 1962.

Qat.t.ān, Mannā‘. Mabāh.ith fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān. 19th edition. Beirut: Mu’assasat al-Risālah, 1406/1983.

Qawzī, ‘Iwad. H.amad al-. Al-Mus.t.alah. al-Nah.wī: Nash’atuh wa Tat.awwuruh h.attá Awākhir al-Qarn al-Thālith al-Hijrī. Riyadh: ‘Imādah Shu‘ūn al-Maktabāt, Riyadh University, 1401/1981.

Qayrawānī, Makkī ibn Abī T.ālib al-. I‘rāb al-Qur’ān ([mistakenly] attributed to al-Zajjāj). 3 vols. with continuous pagination.

Beirut: Dār al-Kitāb al-Lubnānī, 1406/1987.

Qift.ī, ‘Alī ibn Yūsuf al-. Inbāh al-Ruwāt ‘alá Anbāh al-Nuh.āh. Edited by Muh.ammad Abū al-Fad.l Ibrāhīm, 3 vols. (Cairo: Dār al-Kutub al-Mis.riyyah, 1369-74/1950-1955) Qurt.ubī, Abū ‘Abd Allāh Muh.ammad ibn Ah.mad al-Ans.ārī al-. Al-Jāmi‘ li-Ah.kām al-Qur’ān. 20 vols in 10 bindings. Beirut: Dār Ih.yā’ alTurāth al-‘Arabī, 1967.

Rāghib al-As.bahānī, Abū ’l-Qāsim al-H.usayn ibn Muh.ammad -al. Al-

380

Mufradāt fī Gharīb al-Qur’ān. Edited and verified by Muh.ammad Sayyid Kīlānī. [Cairo]: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1381/1961.

Rawandī, Qut.b al-Dīn Abū ’l-H.usayn Sa‘īd ibn Jār Allāh. 1st ed., 2 vols.

Qumm: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-‘Ilmiyyah, 1397 A.H. S.ābūnī, Muh.ammad ‘Alī al-, ed. Mukhtas.ar Tafsīr Ibn Kathīr. 3 vols.

Beirut: Dār al-Qur’ān al-Karīm, 1402/1981. ________. S.afwat al-Tafāsīr. Beirut: Dār al-Qur’ān al-Karīm, 1402/1981. ________. Al-Tibyān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān. Damascus: Maktabat al-Ghazālī, 1401/1981.

Sa‘īd, Dr. Labīb al-. Difā‘ ‘an al-Qirā’āt al-Mutawātirah fī Muwājahat alT.abarī al-Mufassir. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, [1398]/1978.

Sakkākī, Abū Ya‘qūb Yūsuf ibn Abī Bakr al-. Miftāh. al-‘Ulūm. Edited and annotated by Na‘īm Zarzūr. 2nd edition. Beirut: Dār al-Kutub al‘Ilmiyyah, 1407/1987.

S.ālih., Dr. S.ubh.ī al-. ‘Ulūm al-H.adīth wa Mus.t.alah.uh. Beirut: Dār al-‘Ilm lil-Malāyīn, n.d.

Sallām, Dr. Muh.ammad Zaghlūl. Athar al-Qur’ān fī Tat.awwur al-Naqd al‘Adabī. Edited by M. Khalaf Allāh. Cairo: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, n.d. ________. Ibn Qutaybah. [Cairo]: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, 1957.

Sam‘ānī, Abū Sa‘īd ‘Abd al-Karīm bin Muh.ammad al-. Al-Ansāb.

Reproduced in facsimile from the manuscript in the British Museum add 23,355 with an introduction by D.S. Margoliouth, D. Litt. Leyden: E.J. Brill, Imprimerie Orientale; London: Luzac & Co., 1912. Repr. Baghdad: Maktabat al-Muthanná, 1970.

Shamlān, Nūrah [Nora] al-. Abū Dhu’ayb al-Hudhalī: H.ayātuh wa Shi‘ruh.

Riyadh: ‘Imādah Shu’ūn al-Maktabāt, Jāmi‘at al-Riyād., 1400/1980.

Suyūt.ī, Jalāl al-Dīn Muh.ammad al-. Asbāb al-Nuzūl. Cairo: Dār al-Tah.rīr lil-T.ab‘ wa ’l-Nashr, 1382 A.H. ________. Al-Itqān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān. Edited by Muh.ammad Abū ’l-Fad.l Ibrāhīm. 1st ed., 4 vols in two bindings. Cairo: Maktabat wa Mat.ba‘at al-Mashhad al-H.usaynī, 1378/1967. ________. Mu‘tarak al-Aqrān fī I‘jāz al-Qur’ān.

Edited by ‘Alī Muh.ammad al-Bījāwī. 3 vols. N.p.: Dār al-Fikr al-‘Arabī, n.d.

381

T.abarī, Abū Ja‘far Muh.ammad ibn Jarīr al-. Jāmi‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr alQur’ān. 30 vols. Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1406-1407/1986-1987.

T.abarsī, Abū ’l-Fad.l ibn al-H.asan al-. Majma‘ al-Bayān fī Tafsīr alQur’ān. 10 vols. in 5 bindings. S.ayda: Mat.ba‘at al-‘Irfān, 1333 A.H. T.antāwī, Muh.ammad al-. Nash’at al-Nah.w wa Ta’rīkh Ashhar al-Nuh.āh..

Egypt: Dār al-Ma‘ārif, n.d.

Tha‘ālibī, Abū Mans.ūr ‘Abd al-Malik al-. Fiqh al-Lughah wa Asrār al‘Arabiyyah. Egypt: al-Mat.ba‘ah al-Adabiyyah, 1318 A.H. Thawrī, Abū ‘Abd Allāh Sufyān ibn Sa‘īd al-. Tafsīr al-Qur’ān al-Karīm.

Edited and annotated by Imtiyāz ‘Alī. Rampur: Hindustan Printing Works, 1385/1965.

Tiflīsī, Abū ’l-Fad.l Hubaysh ibn Ibrāhīm [al-]. Wujuh Qur’ān (Vujūh-i Qur’ān). In Persian and Arabic. 4th ed. Tehran: Inqulāb Rōbarū Dānshekah, 1360 A.H. Tirmidhī, Abū ‘Isá Muh.ammad ibn ‘Isá al-. Al-Jāmi‘ al-S.ah.īh.: wa Huwa Sunan al-Tirmidī. Edited and annotated by Ibrāhīm ‘Atwah ‘Iwad.. 5 vols. 1st ed. [Cairo]: Mus.t.afá ’l-Bābī ’l-H.alabī, 1382/1962.

Wāh.idī, Abū ’l-H.asan ‘Alī ibn Ah.mad al-. Asbāb al-Nuzūl. Beirut: Dār alKutub al-‘Ilmīyah, n.d.

Wensinck, A.J., and Mensing, J.P.; cont. Brugman, J. Al-Mu‘jam alMufahras li-Alfaz. al-H.adīth al-Nabawī. 8 vols. Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1936-1938.

Yah.yá ibn Sallam, al-Tas.ārīf: Tafsīr al-Qur’ān mimā ’shtabahat Asmā’uh wa Tas.arrafat Ma‘ānīh, presented and edited by Hind Shalabī (Tunis: al-Sharikah al-Tunīsiyyah lil-Tawzī‘, 1979), Yāqūt al-Rūmī, Irshād al-Arīb ilá Ma‘rifat al-Adīb also known as Mu‘jam al-Udabā’. Edited by D.S. Margoliouth. Egypt: Mat.ba‘at alHindiyyah, 1925.

Zabīdī, Muh.ammad Murtad.á al-H.usaynī al-. Tāj al-‘Arūs min Jawāhir alQāmūs. 10 vols. Beirut: Manshūrāt Maktabat al-H.ayāh, n.d.

Zamakhsharī, Abū al-Qāsim Mah.mūd ibn ‘Umar al-. Asās al-Balāghah.

Beirut: Dār S.ādir - Dār Bayrūt, 1965.

382

Al-Kashhāf ‘an H.aqā’iq al-Tanzīl. 2 vols. with continuous pagination. Edited by W. Nassau Lees et al. Calcutta: Mat.ba‘at al-Līsī. 1856.

Zarkashī, Badr al-Dīn al-. Al-Burhān fī ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān. Edited by M.A. Ibrāhīm. 4 vols. Beirut: Dār al-Ma‘rifah, n.d.

Zarqānī, Muh.ammad ‘Abd al-‘Az.īm al-. Manāhil al-‘Irfān fī ‘Ulūm alQur’ān. 2 vols. Beirut: Dār al-Fikr, 1408/1988.

Zayd, Dr. Mus.t.afá. Dirāsāt fī ’l-Tafsīr. [Cairo]: Dār al-Fikr al-‘Arabī, [ca.

1970].

Zubaydī, Abū Bakr Muh.ammad al-. T.abaqāt al-Nah.wiyyīn wa ’lLughawiyyīn. Edited by M.A. Ibrāhīm. Egypt: Muh.ammad Sāmī ’l-Khānjī, 1373/1954.

Zuhayr ibn Abī Sulmá. Dīwān. Beirut: Dār Bayrūt lil-T.ibā‘ah wa ’l-Nashr, 1406/1986. ______

B. English and Other Language Sources Abbott, Nabia. Qur’anic commentary and Tradition. Studies in Arabic Literary Papyri II. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1967.

Ali, A. Yusuf , trans. The Holy Qur’ān. Doha: Qatar National Printing Press, n.d.

Anwar, H. Moch, transl. Tarjamah Matan Alfiyah [Ibn Malik]. N.p.: Pt. Alma’arif, 1981.

Arberry, Arthur, trans. The Koran Interpreted. Oxford: Oxford University Press, n.d.

Asad, Muhammad. The Message of the Qur’ān. Translated and Explained.

Gibraltar: Dar al-Andalus, 1984.

Beeston, A.F.L.; Johnstone, T.M.; Serjeant, R.B.; and Smith, G.R., eds.

Arabic Literature to the End of the Umayyad Period. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983.

Cooper, John. The Commentary of the Qur’an by Abu Ja‘far Muh.ammad b.

Jarir al-T.abari, Being an Abridged Translation of Jāmi‘ al-Bayān ‘an Ta’wīl Āy al-Qur’ān, with introduction and notes. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987, vol.1 Dawood, N.J., trans. The Quran. Checked and revised by Mahmud Y. Zayid.

Beirut: Dar al-Choura, 1980.

383

Denffer, Ahmad von. ‘Ulūm al-Qur’ān: An Introduction to the Sciences of the Qur’ān. Leicester: The Islamic Foundation, 1403/1983.

Gaidner, W.H.T. Al-Ghazzali’s Mishkat al-Anwar ("The Niche for Lights").

A translation with introduction. Lahore: Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, 1952.

Hayakawa, Samuel I. Choose the Right Words: A Modern Guide to Synonyms. New York: Harper & Row, 1968.

Ibn Khaldun. The Muqaddimah: An Introduction to History. Translated from the Arabic by Franz Rosenthal. 3 vols. New York: Pantheon Books Inc., 1958.

Jeffery, Arthur. Materials for the History of the Text of the Qur’an: The Old Codices. Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1937.

Lane, Edward William. Arabic-English Lexicon. Book I, 8 pts. with continuos pagination. New York: Frederick Ungar Publishing Co., 1956.

Lecomte, Gérard. Ibn Qutayba (Mort en 276/889): l’homme, son oevre, ses idées. Damascus: Catholic Printing Press, 1965.

Muir, Sir William. The Caliphate: Its Rise, Decline, and Fall. N.p.: Religious, Tract Society, 1891.

Nicholson, Reynold A. A Literary History of the Arabs. Cambridge: the University Press, 1956.

Noldeke, Theodor, and Schwally, Friedrich. Geschichte des Qoran i-ii.

Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1961.

Pickthall, Muhammad Marmaduke, transl. The Glorious Qur’an. New York: Muslim World League, 1977.

Rodwell, J.M., trans. The Koran. London: J.M. Dent & Sons Ltd., 1978.

Seale, Morris. Qur’an and Bible. London: Croom Helm ِLtd., 1978.

Tengku Jusof, Tengku Ghani. A Critical Examination of five Poems by Imru al-Qays. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbitan Pustaka Antara, 1990.

Wansbrough, John. Quranic Studies. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1977.

Watt, W. Montgomery. Bell’s Introduction to the Qur’an. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1990.

Williams, John Alden. Islam. New York: George Braziller, 1961.

Young , M.J.L .et al., eds. The Cambridge History of Arabic Literature: Religion, learning and science in the Abbasid period. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990.

384

C. Articles

Abdul, Musa O.A. "The Historical Development of Tafsīr." IC 50 (1976), vol. 1 no. 1, 141-153.

Ali, Dr. Hashim Amir. "The Mysterious Letters of the Qur’ān." IC 36 (Jan. 1962), iii-iv.

Bellamy, J.A. "The Mysterious Letters of the Koran: Old Abbreviations of the Basmalah." JAOS xciii (1973), 267-285.

Blachère, R. "Al Farrā’." EI2, II, 806-808 Gibb, H.A.R. "Abu ‘Ubayda Ma ‘mar b. al-Muthannā." EI2, I, 158.

Goldfeld, Isaiah, "Muqātil Ibn Sulaymān", Arabic and Islamic Studies, ed.

Jacob Mansour, vol. 2. Rumat-Gan: Bar-Ilan University Press, 1978, 1-18.

Jeffery, Arthur. "The Mystic Letters of the Qur’ān." MW xiv (1924), 247260.

Jones, A. "The Mystical Letters of the Qur’ān." SI xvi (1962), 5-11.

Jullandri, R. "Qur’ānic Exegesis and Classical Tafsīr." IQ xii (1968), 71109.

Lecomte, G. "Ibn Ķutayba." EI2, 844-949.

Speight, M. "The Opening Verses of the Chapters of the Qur’ān."MW 59/3-4 (1969).

Vaux, B. Carra de. "Al-S.ābi’a." SEI, 477-478.

Wansbrough, John. "Majāz al-Qur’ān: Periphrastic Exegesis." BSOAS xxxiii/2 (1970), 247-266.

Weir, T.H. "Ibn ‘Arabī." SEI, 146-147.

Welch, A.T. and Pearson, J.D. "Al-Kur’an." EI2 5 (1981), 400-432.

385

APPENDICES 1. AUTHORITIES AND TRANSMITTERS OF THE QUR’AN Place Authority Transmitters --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Madīnah

Nāfi‘ (d. 169/785-786)

Warsh (d. 197/813) Qālūn (d. 220/835)

Makkah (Mecca)

Ibn Kathīr (d. 120/738)

al-Bazzī (d. 250/864) Qunbul (d. 291/904)

Damascus

Ibn ‘Āmir (d. 118/736)

Hishām (d. 242/856-857) Ibn Dhakwān (d. 245/859)

Bas.rah

Abū ‘Amr (d. 154/771)

al-D.ūrī (d. 246/860) al-Sūsī (d. 261/875)

Kūfah

‘Ās.im (d. 128/746)

H.afs. (d. 190/806) Ibn ‘Ayyāsh (d. 194/810)

Kūfah

H.amzah (d. 158/775)

Khalaf (d. 229/844) Khallād (d. 220/835)

Kūfah

al-Kisā’ī

al-D.ūrī (d. 240/854-5) Abu’l-Harith (d. 46/860)

[d. ca. 189/805]

Adopted from: A. Jones, "The Qur’an - II," Arabic Literature to the End of the Umayyad Period, eds. A.F.L. Beeston, T.M. Johnstone et al. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983), p. 244.

386

2. GLOSSARY āh ād, a h.adīth reported by one chain of transmitters alif al-istifhām, alif as an interrogative particle. alif al-was.l, (lit., alif of connection), the letter alif which can be omitted, either in pronunciation, spelling, or both, such as ūlī ’l-amr read ulil amr, in modern terminology it is called hamzat al-was.l, conjuctive hamzah. amr, command, commanding, imperative amthāl (sing. mathal), parables ‘arūd., prosody asbāb al-nuzūl, the reasons for revelation; the occasions and circumstances which led to the revelation of the verses of the Qur’ān as.h.āb al-kalām, the adherents of scholastic theology as.h.āb al-ra’y, the adherents of personal opinion as.l, basic meaning, the primary signification ‘a t.f, conjunction bāt.in, inward meaning bayān, explanation dalālah, an indicant, a hint, sense, meaning d.amīr, pronoun d.amīr al-sha’n, a pronoun indicating circumstances, e.g., “It is late” dīwān, collection of poetical work, collection of poetry by a single author or from a single tribe. fad.ā’il, particular virtue, "excellences" farā’id. (sing., farīd.ah), religious obligations fas.āh.ah,. eloquence fatwá (pl. fatawá). legal opinion fiqh, Islamic jurisprudence fuqahā’ (sing., faqīh), Muslim jurists gharīb, rare, uncommon word or expression h.adhf, ellipsis h.adīth, news, a story, and finally a technical term for the tradition of what the Prophet said, did or approved

387

h.alāl, lawful, permissible h.arām, unlawful, prohibited h.udūd (sing., h.add), penal law al-h.urūf al-muqat.t.a‘ah, ambiguous letters found in the opening of some sūrahs of the Qur’ān ibāh.ah, examption ‘ibrah (pl., ‘ibar), deterrent example ibtidā’ (of) inception, e.g., lām al-ibtidā’ (letter l of inception) ‘iddah, the legally prescribed period of waiting during which a woman may not remarry after being divorced or widowed idghām, contraction, such as contracting letter n with letter m in min ba‘d and read mim ba‘d id.mār, making implicit ih.tijāj, protest ijtihād, independent judgment, especially in a legal question based upon the interpretation of the Qur’ān and the Sunnah ijtihād bi ’l-ra’y, speculative thinking ikhtis.ār, brevity ‘ilm al-tas.rīf, etymology iltifāt, apostrophe, shifting from one object or pronoun to another, turning the address from one person or group of people to another imālah, inclining closed vowels to open, such as pronouncing hāk as hék imām, leader, particularly at prayers. inshā’, composition ‘iqāb, punishment i‘rāb, adding vowels, the inflectional terminations of nouns and verbs; desinential (grammatical) inflection ishmām, ‘giving the flavour’ of one sound to another such as the pronunciation of the vowel u with a trace of i and vice versa, similar to the German ü; e.g., reading rudda as rüdda and h.imār as h.ümār; in the Australian accent "a nice day" is pronounced almost like "a noise die". isnād, chains of authorities on which a h.adīth (a tradition or a historical writing) is based; chains of transmitters through whom a h.adīth has been handed down

388

isrā’iliyyāt legends from Jewish people; Jewish traditions used to amplify Qur’ānic allusions isti‘ārah, metaphor istifhām, asking a question istifhām inkārī, a negative question istifhām taqrīrī, an affirmative question is t.ilāh., conventional term, technical term (terminology) istit.rād, digression i‘tirād., parenthesis ‘ilm al-‘arūd., Arabic prosody ‘ilm al-tas.rīf,- etymology ‘iz.ah, sermon, advice iz.hār, pronouncing clearly jadal, dialectic jawāb al-shart., a clause answering to an if-clause in syntax jazm, apocopating kāfir, unbeliever kalām, theology, especially the scholastic one khabar, predicate; news of the past khalaf, successors; (esp. Muslim scholars of) later generations (approx. after the third/ninth century) khālafa lafz.uhā rasmahā, irregular orthography kināyah, metonymy kunyah, "allusive" name consisting of Abū ("father of") or Umm ("mother of") followed either by a name or describing some prominent characteristic of its bearer kuttāb, Qur’ānic school lah.n, solecism, ungrammatical expression laqab, (earlier) name alluding to a personal characteristic; (later) honorific title lughat al-‘Arab, the Arabs’ way of expression mabnī, indeclinable madhhab (pl., madhāhib), a school of law among Sunnī Muslims mād.ī, preterite maghāzī, military expedition, accounts of early battles of Islam, early

389

Muslim expeditions in which the Prophet took part majāz a way, road, or path; figurative (literary) expression majāz mursal, a loose trope (e.g,. "hand" used as meaning "a benefit" or "a favour"). malāh.im, apocalyptic h.adīths; tales of eschatological nature related by storytellers mansūkh, abrogated marfū‘, in the nominative case mas.dar, verbal noun ma‘s.ūm, immune from error, infallible mawā‘iz. (sing., maw‘iz.ah), exhortations, advice mathal (pl. amthāl), parable mawlá (pl., mawālī),- protector; client, freed slave; non-Arab Muslim maws.ūl, relative pronoun mubtada’, inchoative, subject mud.āf, annexed mud.āf ilayh, what is annexed to, complements of a prefixed noun mud.āri‘, imperfect verb mufassir, commentator, interpreter, Qur’ānic exegete muh.aqqiq, an effective investigator (researcher) muh.kam, parts of the Qur’ān which had a clear meaning mujtahid, a legist who exercises ijtihād mulh.idīn, (sing. mulh.id) heretics, unbelievers mus.h.af, Qur’ānic codex Mus.h.af al-Imām: the Master Copy, the standard copy of the Qur’ān, namely, the copy of ‘Uthmān mut.ābaqah, antithesis mutakallim, scholastic theologian mutashābih (pl., mutashābihāt), ambiguous obscure; ambiguous verse in the Qur’ān mutawātir, a tradition narrated by many reliable authorities that the possibilities of its being fabricated by collusion is out of question.

This is the reliable tradition among Muslims.

Mu‘tazilah, theological school which created the speculative dogmatics of

390

Islam nah.w, grammar, syntax nafy, negation nāsikh, abrogating nas.rāniyyāt, legends from Christians naz.ar, insight, reason nisbah, derivative form (ending in -i) of a name or other noun Qadarīs, a group of teachers of the ‘Abbāsī period who championed free will against the theory of predestination; they later merged with the Mu‘tazilīs qād.ī, a judge, a judge of a court qād.ī ’l-qud.āt, (lit., judge of judges), chief judge qāri’ (pl., qurrā’), reader, reciter of the Qur’ān qas.as., narrative, tale, story qas.s.ās., storytellers, relaters of qis.as. qirā’ah, recitation of the Qur’ān; variant reading of the Qur’ān qirā’ah munkarah, a rejected reading, a reading which was temporarily permitted in the early period of Islam only to people who were not able to memorize or articulate the Qur’ān properly qis.s.ah (pl., qis.as.) story, narrative tale, in particular; in plural, the narrative of the Qur’ān qurrā’ (sing., qāri’), readers, reciters of the Qur’ān rāsikh (pl., rasikhūn) fī ’l-‘ilm, a person who is conversant with knowledge, firmly grounded in knowledge (A.Y. Ali), deeply rooted in knowledge (M. Asad) or of sound instruction (M. Pickthall) ra’y, personal opinion rithā’, lamentation, elegiac poetry s.ah.ābah (sing., s.ah.ābī), companions of the Prophet saj‘, rhymed prose salaf, (lit. predecessors), the first three generations of the s.ah.abah, tābi‘īn, and tābi‘ī ’l-tābi‘īn s.alāh., prayer sanad, (see isnād) shakl, consonantal outline, consonantal skeleton, such as for (bashar), (nasr) and (yusr).

391

sharī‘ah, Islamic law shawāhid (sing., shāhid), quotations serving as textual evidence shifā’, healing s.ilah, a syndetic relative clause; the connection of a verb with the object complement, whether immediate or by means of a preposition; the complement of a maws.ūl (conjunct) s.uh.uf (sing., s.ah.īfah), leaves; pages; sheets, scrolls, particularly those of the Qur’ān sunnah, way, path; customary practice, particularly that of the Prophet; usage sanctioned by tradition; the sayings and doings of the Prophet which have been established as legally binding Sunnī, Muslim who believes that the sunnah cannot be over-ridden by any human authority sūrah, chapter of the Qur’ān s.ūrah, form, representation, picture tābi‘īn (sing., tābi‘ī), people succeeding the generation of the s.ah.ābah tābi‘ī ’l-tābi‘īn, (lit., "followers of the followers"), the generation after that of the tābi‘īn tadabbur, reflection tad.mīn, insertion tafkhīm, emphatic pronunciation of a consonant, such as the English pronunciation of c, p and t in "capital", "people" and "time" (rather than in "logic", "open" and "meter". tafsīr, commentary, interpretation; Qur’ānic exegesis takhfīf, the easing in reading by dropping a vowel, such as reading bushran for bushuran; in English it is like pronouncing "transptation" for "transportation". takrār, repetition tamthīl, analogy, comparison, likening tanwīn, nunation, making clear the an, in or un ending of a word, e.g., rajul with tanwīn becomes rajulan, rajulin, and rajulun taqrīr, affirmation targhīb, encouragement of good tarhīb, discouragement of evil ta‘rī d., allusion tarqīq, softening the pronunciation of a word (opposite of tafkhīm), e.g.,

392

letter t in "better" tashbīh, simile; the error of asserting that Allah resembles created things in any way, anthropomorphism tas.rīf, the conjugation of a verb tawātur, (see mutāwatir) tawbīkh, reproach, reprimand, rebuke tawqīf, the subject of divine revelation thawāb, reward tubba‘ (pl., tabābi‘ah), the title of the pre-Islamic Himyarite kings of the Yemen ‘ulamā’ (sing., ‘ālim), scholars, men of learning, savants, the theologians and teachers of Islam wa‘d, promise wa‘īd, threat wāw al-qasam, adjurative particle wud.ū’, ablution wujūh al-qirā’ah, variant readings; variae lectiones zabāniyah, infernal attendants of Hell zajr, prohibition z.ālim, transgressor zawj, a pair or one of a pair zindīq, a heretic, a dualist, particularly a Manichee.